All information contained in these materials, including products and product specifications,
represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by
Renesas Electronics Corp. without notice. Please review the latest information published by
Renesas Electronics Corp. through various means, including the Renesas Electronics Corp.
website (http: //www.renesas.co m).
RL78
/
G1E
Users Manual: Hardw are
Rev.2.00 Ma
r
2014
16-Bit Microcontrollers with Smart Analog IC
www.renesas.com
16
Notice
1. Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of
semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software,
and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you
or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information.
2. Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics
does not warrant that such information is error free. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages
incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein.
3. Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights of
thir d parties by or ari s ing from t he use of Renesas Electro nics products or technical information described in this document. No
license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of
Renesas Electronics or others.
4. You should not alter, modify, copy, or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part.
Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from such alteration,
modification, copy or otherwise misappropriation of Renesas Electronics product.
5. Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following two quality grades: “Standard” and “High Quality”. The
recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product’s quality grade, as indicated below.
“Standard”: Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual
equipment; home electronic appliances; machine tools; personal electronic equipment; and industrial robots etc.
“High Quality”: Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anti-
crime systems; and safety equipment etc.
Renesas Electronics products are neither intended nor authorized for use in products or systems that may pose a direct threat to
human life or bodily injury (artificial life support devices or systems, surgical implantations etc.), or may cause serious property
damages (nuclear reactor control systems, military equipment etc.). You must check the quality grade of each Renesas
Electronics product before using it in a particular application. You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any
application for which it is not intended. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred
by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for which the product is not intended by Renesas
Electronics.
6. You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics,
especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation
characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or
damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges.
7. Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, semiconductor products have
specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Further,
Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design. Please be sure to implement safety measures to
guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas
Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and
malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Becaus e the evaluation
of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or systems manufactured by
you.
8. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility
of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and
regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances, including without limitation, the EU RoHS Directive.
Renesas Electronics assume s no liability for damages or losse s occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws
and regulations.
9. Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose
manufacture, use, or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations. You should not use
Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use
by the military, including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction. When exporting the Renesas
Electronics products or technology described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control laws and
regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations.
10. It is the responsibility of the buyer or distributor of Renesas Electronics products, who distributes, disposes of, or otherwise
places the product with a third party, to notify such third party in advance of the contents and conditions set forth in this
document, Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties as a result of
unauthorized use of Renesas Electronics products.
11. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas
Electronics.
12. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document
or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries.
(Note 1) “Renesas Electronics” as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority-
owned subsidiaries.
(Note 2) “Renesas Electronics product(s)” means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics.
(2012.4)
NOTES FOR CMOS DEVICES
(1) VOLTAGE APPLICATION WAVEFORM AT INPUT PIN: Waveform distortion due to input noise or a
reflected wave may cause malfunction. If the input of the CMOS device stays in the area between VIL
(MAX) and VIH (MIN) due to noise, etc., the device may malfunction. Take care to prevent chattering noise
from entering the device when the input level is fixed, and also in the transition period when the input level
passes through the area between VIL (MAX) and VIH (MIN).
(2) HANDLING OF UNUSED INPUT PINS: Unconnected CMOS device inputs can be cause of malfunction. If
an input pin is unconnected, it is possible that an internal input level may be generated due to noise, etc.,
causing malfunction. CMOS devices behave differently than Bipolar or NMOS devices. Input levels of
CMOS devices must be fixed high or low by using pull-up or pull-down circuitry. Each unused pin should be
connected to VDD or GND via a resistor if there is a possibility that it will be an output pin. All handling
related to unused pins must be judged separately for each device and according to related specifications
governing the device.
(3) PRECAUTION AGAINST ESD: A strong electric field, when exposed to a MOS device, can cause
destruction of the gate oxide and ultimately degrade the device operation. Steps must be taken to stop
generation of static electricity as much as possible, and quickly dissipate it when it has occurred.
Environmental control must be adequate. When it is dry, a humidifier should be used. It is recommended
to avoid using insulators that easily build up static electricity. Semiconductor devices must be stored and
transported in an anti-static container, static shielding bag or conductive material. All test and measurement
tools including work benches and floors should be grounded. The operator should be grounded using a wrist
strap. Semiconductor devices must not be touched with bare hands. Similar precautions need to be taken
for PW boards with mounted semiconductor devices.
(4) STATUS BEFORE INITIALIZATION: Power-on does not necessarily define the initial status of a MOS
device. Immediately after the power source is turned ON, devices with reset functions have not yet been
initialized. Hence, power-on does not guarantee output pin levels, I/O settings or contents of registers. A
device is not initialized until the reset signal is received. A reset operation must be executed immediately
after power-on for devices with reset functions.
(5) POWER ON/OFF SEQUENCE: In the case of a device that uses different power supplies for the internal
operation and external interface, as a rule, switch on the external power supply after switching on the internal
power supply. W hen switching the power supply off, as a rule, switch off the external power supply and then
the internal power supply. Use of the reverse power on/off sequences may result in the application of an
overvoltage to the internal elements of the device, causing malfunction and degradation of internal elements
due to the passage of an abnormal current. The correct power on/off sequence must be judged separately
for each device and according to related specifications governing the device.
(6) INPUT OF SIGNAL DURING POWER OFF STATE : Do not input signals or an I/O pull-up power supply
while the device is not powered. The current injection that results from input of such a signal or I/O pull-up
power supply may cause malfunction and the abnormal current that passes in the device at this time may
cause degradation of internal elements. Input of signals during the power off state must be judged
separately for each device and according to related specifications governing the device.
How to Use This Manual
Readers This manual is intended for user engineers who wish to understand the functions of the
RL78/G1E and design and develop application systems and programs for these devices.
The target products are as follows.
64-pin: R5F10FLx (x = C, D, E)
80-pin: R5F10FMx (x = C, D, E)
Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions described in the
Organization below.
Organization The RL78/G1E manual is separated into three parts: this manual, RL78/G1A user’s manual,
and the RL78 family software user’s manual.
RL78/G1E
User’s Manual
(This Manual)
RL78/G1A
Hardware
User’s Manual
RL78 family
Software
User’s Manual
Pin functions
Internal block functions
On-chip peripheral
functions
Electrical specifications
Pin functions
Internal block functions
Interrupts
Other on-chip peripheral
functions
Electrical specifications
CPU functions
Instruction set
Explanation of each
instruction
How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical
engineer ing, log ic cir cui ts, and microc ontro llers.
To gain a general understanding of functions:
Read this manual in the order of the CONTENTS. The mark “<R>” shows major
revised points. The revised points can be easily searched by copying an “<R>” in the
PDF file and specifying it in the “Find what:” field.
How to interpret the register format:
For a bit number enclosed in angle brackets, the bit name is defined as a reserved
word in the assembler, and is defined as an sfr variable using the #pragma sfr
directive in the compiler.
To know details of the microcontroller block:
Refer to the separate docume nt RL78 /G1 A Hardw a re Us er ’s M anua l ( R01U H0305E).
To know details of the RL78 microcontroller instructions:
Refer to the separate document RL78 family User’s Manual Software
(R01US0015E).
Conventions Data significance: Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right
Active low representations: ××× (overscore over pin and signal name)
Note: Footnote for item marked with Note in the text
Caution: Information requiring particular attention
Remark: Supplementary information
Numerical representations: Binary
...
×××× or ××××B
Decimal
...
××××
Hexadecimal
...
××××H
Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions.
However, preliminary versions are not marked as such.
Documents Related to Devices
Document Name Document No.
RL78/G1E User’s Manual Hardware This manual
RL78/G1A User’s Manual Hardware R01UH0305E
RL78 family User’s Manual S oft ware R01US0015E
Documents Related to Flash Memory Programming
Document Name Document No.
PG-FP5 Flash Memory Programmer User’s Manual R02UT0008E
Other Documents
Document Name Docum ent No.
Renesas MPUs & MCUs RL78 Family R01CS0003E
Semiconducto r P ackage Mount Manual Note
Quality Grades on NEC Semiconduc tor Devices C11531E
Guide to Prevent Damage for Semic onductor Devices by Electrost atic Disc harge (E SD) C11892E
NEC Semiconductor Device Reliability/Quality Control System R51ZZ0001E
Note See the “Semiconductor Device Mount Manual” website
(http://www.renesas.com/products/package/manual/index.jsp).
Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice. Be sure to use the latest
version of each document when designing.
All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
EEPROM is a trademark of Renesas Electronics Corporation.
SuperFlash is a registered trademark of Silicon Storage Technology, Inc. in several countries including the
United States and Japan.
Caution: This product uses SuperFlash® technology licensed from Silicon Storage Technology, Inc.
Index-1
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE............................................................................................................................... 1
1. 1 Features .......................................................................................................................................... 1
1. 1. 1 Microcontroller block ........................................................................................................................ 1
1. 1. 2 Analog block ..................................................................................................................................... 3
1. 2 List of Part Numbers ..................................................................................................................... 4
1. 3 Pin Configuration (Top View) ....................................................................................................... 5
1. 3. 1 64-pin products ................................................................................................................................. 5
1. 3. 2 80-pin products ................................................................................................................................. 6
1. 4 Pin Identification ............................................................................................................................ 7
1. 5 Block Diagram ............................................................................................................................... 9
1. 5. 1 64-pin products ................................................................................................................................. 9
1. 5. 2 80-pin products ............................................................................................................................... 12
1. 6 Outline of Functions.................................................................................................................... 15
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................... 18
2. 1 Pin Functions in Microcontroller Block .................................................................................... 18
2. 1. 1 Port functions ................................................................................................................................. 22
2. 1. 1. 1 64-pin products ...................................................................................................................... 23
2. 1. 1. 2 80-pin products ...................................................................................................................... 25
2. 1. 2 Functions other than port functions ................................................................................................ 27
2. 1. 2. 1 Functions available for each product ...................................................................................... 27
2. 1. 2. 2 Description of each function ................................................................................................... 30
2. 2 Pin Functions in Analog Block .................................................................................................. 32
2. 2. 1 64-pin products ............................................................................................................................... 32
2. 2. 2 80-pin products ............................................................................................................................... 33
2. 3 Connection of Unused Pins ....................................................................................................... 34
2. 4 Block Diagrams of Pins .............................................................................................................. 36
2. 5 Instruction of Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 48
2. 5. 1 Port 0 (P00 to P04) ......................................................................................................................... 48
2. 5. 2 Port 1 (P10 to P15) ......................................................................................................................... 50
2. 5. 3 Port 2 (P20 to P24) ......................................................................................................................... 51
2. 5. 4 Port 4 (P40 to P42) ......................................................................................................................... 52
2. 5. 5 Port 5 (P50, P51) ............................................................................................................................ 53
2. 5. 6 Port 7 (P70 to P73) ......................................................................................................................... 54
2. 5. 7 Port 12 (P121, P122) ...................................................................................................................... 55
2. 5. 8 Port 13 (P130, P137) ...................................................................................................................... 56
2. 5. 9 Port 14 (P140) ................................................................................................................................ 57
2. 5. 10 AVDD, AVSS, VDD, VSS .................................................................................................................... 58
Index-2
2. 5. 11 RESET ......................................................................................................................................... 58
2. 5. 12 REGC ........................................................................................................................................... 58
2. 5. 13 AVDD3 ............................................................................................................................................ 59
2. 5. 14 SC_IN ........................................................................................................................................... 59
2. 5. 15 CLK_SYNCH ................................................................................................................................ 59
2. 5. 16 SYNCH_OUT ............................................................................................................................... 59
2. 5. 17 AGND2 ......................................................................................................................................... 59
2. 5. 18 GAINAMP_OUT ........................................................................................................................... 59
2. 5. 19 GAINAMP_IN ............................................................................................................................... 59
2. 5. 20 MPXIN10, MPXIN11, MPXIN20, MPXIN21, MPXIN30, MPXIN31, MPXIN40, MPXIN41,
MPXIN50, MPXIN51, MPXIN60, MPXIN61 ................................................................................... 59
2. 5. 21 AMP1_OUT, AMP2_OUT, AMP3_OUT........................................................................................ 59
2. 5. 22 DAC1_OUT, DAC2_OUT, DAC3_OUT, DAC4_OUT ................................................................... 59
2. 5. 23 VREFIN1, VREFIN2, VREFIN3, VREFIN4 ................................................................................... 59
2. 5. 24 AGND1 ......................................................................................................................................... 60
2. 5. 25 AVDD1 ............................................................................................................................................ 60
2. 5. 26 AGND3 ......................................................................................................................................... 60
2. 5. 27 BGR_OUT .................................................................................................................................... 60
2. 5. 28 AVDD2 ............................................................................................................................................ 60
2. 5. 29 LDO_OUT .................................................................................................................................... 60
2. 5. 30 TEMP_OUT .................................................................................................................................. 60
2. 5. 31 ARESET ....................................................................................................................................... 60
2. 5. 32 DVDD ............................................................................................................................................. 60
2. 5. 33 SCLK ............................................................................................................................................ 60
2. 5. 34 SDO.............................................................................................................................................. 60
2. 5. 35 SDI ............................................................................................................................................... 61
2. 5. 36 CS ................................................................................................................................................ 61
2. 5. 37 DGND ........................................................................................................................................... 61
2. 5. 38 HPF_OUT ..................................................................................................................................... 61
2. 5. 39 CLK_HPF ..................................................................................................................................... 61
2. 5. 40 CLK_LPF ...................................................................................................................................... 61
2. 5. 41 AGND4 ......................................................................................................................................... 61
2. 5. 42 LPF_OUT ..................................................................................................................................... 61
2. 5. 43 I.C ................................................................................................................................................. 61
CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK ........................................................................................ 62
3. 1 Outline of This Chapter ............................................................................................................... 62
3. 2 Comparison of Each Function with RL78/G1A (64-pin products) .......................................... 63
3. 3 CPU Architecture ......................................................................................................................... 67
3. 3. 1 Memory space ................................................................................................................................ 67
3. 3. 2 Processor registers ........................................................................................................................ 67
Index-3
3. 3. 2. 1 Control registers...................................................................................................................... 67
3. 3. 2. 2 General-purpose registers ...................................................................................................... 67
3. 3. 2. 3 ES and CS registers ............................................................................................................... 67
3. 3. 2. 4 Special function registers (SFRs)............................................................................................ 68
3. 3. 2. 5 Expanded special function registers (2nd SFRs) ................................................................... 76
3. 3. 3 Instruction address addressing ....................................................................................................... 88
3. 3. 4 Addressing for processing data addresses..................................................................................... 88
3. 4 Port Functions ............................................................................................................................. 89
3. 4. 1 Port functions ................................................................................................................................. 89
3. 4. 2 Port configuration ........................................................................................................................... 89
3. 4. 2. 1 Port 0 ..................................................................................................................................... 90
3. 4. 2. 2 Port 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 90
3. 4. 2. 3 Port 2 ..................................................................................................................................... 90
3. 4. 2. 4 Port 3 ..................................................................................................................................... 91
3. 4. 2. 5 Port 4 ..................................................................................................................................... 91
3. 4. 2. 6 Port 5 ..................................................................................................................................... 91
3. 4. 2. 7 Port 6 ..................................................................................................................................... 91
3. 4. 2. 8 Port 7 ..................................................................................................................................... 91
3. 4. 2. 9 Port 12 ................................................................................................................................... 92
3. 4. 2. 10 Port 13 ................................................................................................................................. 92
3. 4. 2. 11 Port 14 ................................................................................................................................. 92
3. 4. 2. 12 Port 15 ................................................................................................................................. 92
3. 4. 3 Registers controlling port function .................................................................................................. 93
3. 4. 3. 1 Port mode register (PMxx) ..................................................................................................... 95
3. 4. 3. 2 Port register (Pxx) .................................................................................................................. 96
3. 4. 3. 3 Pull-up resistor option register (PUxx) ................................................................................... 97
3. 4. 3. 4 Port input mode register (PIMxx) ............................................................................................ 97
3. 4. 3. 5 Port output mode register (POMxx) ........................................................................................ 98
3. 4. 3. 6 Port mode control register (PMCxx) ....................................................................................... 98
3. 4. 3. 7 A/D port configuration register (ADPC) .................................................................................. 99
3. 4. 3. 8 Peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR) ............................................................................ 101
3. 4. 3. 9 Global digital input disable register (GDIDIS) ....................................................................... 101
3. 4. 3. 10 Global analog input disable register (GAIDIS) .................................................................... 101
3. 4. 4 Port function operation ................................................................................................................. 102
3. 4. 4. 1 W riting to I/O port ................................................................................................................. 102
3. 4. 4. 2 Reading from I/O port ........................................................................................................... 102
3. 4. 4. 3 Operation on I/O port ........................................................................................................... 102
3. 4. 4. 4 Handling different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V) by using EVDD VDD ................................. 102
3. 4. 4. 5 Handling different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3V) by using I/O buffers ................................... 103
3. 4. 5 Register settings when using alternate function ........................................................................... 105
3. 4. 6 Cautions when using port function ............................................................................................... 105
Index-4
3. 5 Clock Generator ......................................................................................................................... 106
3. 5. 1 Functions of clock gen erator ....................................................................................................... 106
3. 5. 2 Configuration of clock generator ................................................................................................... 108
3. 5. 3 Registers controlling clock generator ................................................................................ ........... 111
3. 5. 3. 1 Clock operation mode control register (CMC) ....................................................................... 111
3. 5. 3. 2 System clock control register (CKC) ..................................................................................... 112
3. 5. 3. 3 Clock operation status control register (CSC) ....................................................................... 113
3. 5. 3. 4 Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OST C) ................................................ 114
3. 5. 3. 5 Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) ............................................................. 114
3. 5. 3. 6 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) ..................................................................................... 115
3. 5. 3. 7 Subsystem clock supply mode control register (OSMC) ....................................................... 116
3. 5. 3. 8 High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV) .................................... 116
3. 5. 3. 9 High-speed on-chip oscillator trimming register (HIOTRM) .................................................. 116
3. 5. 4 System clock oscillator ................................................................................................................. 117
3. 5. 5 Clock generator operation ............................................................................................................ 117
3. 5. 6 Controlling clock ........................................................................................................................... 117
3. 5. 7 Resonator and oscillator co nstants ................................................................................... ........... 118
3. 6 Timer Array Unit ........................................................................................................................ 122
3. 6. 1 Functions of timer array unit ......................................................................................................... 124
3. 6. 1. 1 Independent channel operation function ............................................................................... 124
3. 6. 1. 2 Simultaneous channel operation function ............................................................................. 126
3. 6. 1. 3 8-bit timer operation funct ion (ch anne ls 1 and 3 only) .......................................................... 127
3. 6. 1. 4 LIN-bus supporting function (channel 7 of unit 0 only) .......................................................... 128
3. 6. 2 Configuration of timer array unit ................................................................................................... 129
3. 6. 2. 1 Timer count register mn (TCRmn) ........................................................................................ 133
3. 6. 2. 2 Timer data register mn (TDRmn) .......................................................................................... 133
3. 6. 3 Registers controlling timer array unit ............................................................................................ 134
3. 6. 3. 1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) ..................................................................................... 134
3. 6. 3. 2 Timer clock select register m (TPSm) ................................................................................... 134
3. 6. 3. 3 Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) ........................................................................................ 135
3. 6. 3. 4 Timer status register mn (TSRmn) ........................................................................................ 140
3. 6. 3. 5 Timer channel enable status register m (TEm) ..................................................................... 140
3. 6. 3. 6 Timer channel start register m (TSm) ................................................................................... 140
3. 6. 3. 7 Timer channel stop register m (TTm) .................................................................................... 140
3. 6. 3. 8 Timer input select register 0 (TIS0) ....................................................................................... 140
3. 6. 3. 9 Timer output ena ble register m (TO Em) ............................................................................... 141
3. 6. 3. 10 Timer output register m (TOm) ........................................................................................... 141
3. 6. 3. 11 Timer output level register m (TOLm) ................................................................................. 142
3. 6. 3. 12 Timer output mode register m (TOMm) .............................................................................. 142
3. 6. 3. 13 Input switch control register (ISC) ....................................................................................... 143
3. 6. 3. 14 Noise filter enable register 1 (NFEN1) ................................................................................ 143
Index-5
3. 6. 3. 15 Registers controlling port functions of pins to be used for timer I/O ................................... 144
3. 6. 4 Basic rules of timer array unit ....................................................................................................... 145
3. 6. 5 Operation of counter ..................................................................................................................... 145
3. 6. 6 Channel output (TOmn pin) control .............................................................................................. 145
3. 6. 7 Timer input (TImn) control ............................................................................................................ 145
3. 6. 8 Independent channel operation function of timer array unit .......................................................... 145
3. 6. 9 Simultaneous channel operation function of timer array unit ........................................................ 145
3. 6. 10 Cautions when u sing timer array unit ......................................................................................... 145
3. 7 Real-Time Clock ........................................................................................................................ 146
3. 8 12-bit Interval Timer .................................................................................................................. 147
3. 8. 1 Functions of 12-bit interval timer .................................................................................................. 147
3. 8. 2 Configuration of 12-b it interval tim er ............................................................................................. 147
3. 8. 3 Registers controlling 12-bit interval timer...................................................................................... 148
3. 8. 3. 1 Peripheral enable register0 (PER0) ...................................................................................... 148
3. 8. 3. 2 Subsystem clock supply mode control register (OSMC) ....................................................... 148
3. 8. 3. 3 Interval timer control register (ITMC) .................................................................................... 149
3. 8. 4 12- bit interval timer operation ...................................................................................................... 149
3. 9 Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller .................................................................................. 150
3. 9. 1 Functions of clock output/buzzer output controller ....................................................................... 150
3. 9. 2 Configuration of clock output /buzz er output con trol ler .................................................................. 151
3. 9. 3 Registers controlling clock output/buzz er output controller .......................................................... 151
3. 9. 3. 1 Clock output select register 0 (CKS0) ................................................................................... 152
3. 9. 3. 2 Registers controlling port functions of pins to be used for clock or buzzer output................. 153
3. 9. 4 Operations of clock output/buzzer output controller ..................................................................... 153
3. 9. 5 Cautions of clock output/buzzer output controller ......................................................................... 153
3. 10 Watchdog Timer ...................................................................................................................... 154
3. 11 A/D Converter .......................................................................................................................... 155
3. 11. 1 Function of A/D converter ........................................................................................................... 155
3. 11. 2 Configuration of A/D converter ................................................................................................... 158
3. 11. 3 Registers used in A/D converter ................................................................................................. 160
3. 11. 3. 1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) ................................................................................... 160
3. 11. 3. 2 A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) ............................................................................... 160
3. 11. 3. 3 A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1) ............................................................................... 161
3. 11. 3. 4 A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) ............................................................................... 162
3. 11. 3. 5 12-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR) ..................................................................... 162
3. 11. 3. 6 8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH) ..................................................................... 162
3. 11. 3. 7 Analog input channel specification register (ADS) .............................................................. 163
3. 11. 3. 8 Conversion result comparison upper limit setting register (ADUL) ...................................... 167
3. 11. 3. 9 Conversion result comparison lower limit setting register (ADLL) ....................................... 167
3. 11. 3. 10 A/D test register (ADTES) ................................................................................................. 167
3. 11. 3. 11 Registers controlling port function of analog input pins ..................................................... 167
Index-6
3. 11. 4 A/D converter conversion operations ......................................................................................... 168
3. 11. 5 Input voltage and conversion results .......................................................................................... 168
3. 11. 6 A/D converter operation modes .................................................................................................. 168
3. 11. 7 A/D converter setup flowchart .................................................................................................... 168
3. 11. 8 SNOOZE mode function ............................................................................................................. 168
3. 11. 9 How to read A/D converter characteristics table ......................................................................... 168
3. 11. 10 Cautions for A/D converter ....................................................................................................... 168
3. 12 Serial Array Unit ...................................................................................................................... 169
3. 12. 1 Functions of serial array unit ...................................................................................................... 170
3. 12. 1. 1 3-wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI10, CSI20, CSI21) .................................................................. 170
3. 12. 1. 2 UART (UART0 to UART2) .................................................................................................. 171
3. 12. 1. 3 Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC10, IIC20) ..................................................................................... 172
3. 12. 2 Configuration of serial array unit ................................................................................................. 173
3. 12. 2. 1 Shift register ....................................................................................................................... 177
3. 12. 2. 2 Lower 8/9 bits of the serial data register mn (SDRmn) ....................................................... 177
3. 12. 3 Registers controlling serial array unit ......................................................................................... 179
3. 12. 3. 1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) ................................................................................... 179
3. 12. 3. 2 Serial clock select register m (SPSm) ................................................................................ 179
3. 12. 3. 3 Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) ..................................................................................... 180
3. 12. 3. 4 Serial communication operati on sett ing regi ster m n (SCRmn) ........................................... 182
3. 12. 3. 5 Higher 7 bits of the serial data register mn (SDRmn) ......................................................... 186
3. 12. 3. 6 Serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn) ...................................................................... 186
3. 12. 3. 7 Serial status register mn (SSRmn) ..................................................................................... 186
3. 12. 3. 8 Serial channel start register m (SSm) ................................................................................. 186
3. 12. 3. 9 Serial channel stop register m (STm) ................................................................................. 186
3. 12. 3. 10 Serial channel enable status r egi ster m (SEm) ................................................................ 186
3. 12. 3. 11 Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ........................................................................... 186
3. 12. 3. 12 Serial output register m (SOm) ......................................................................................... 186
3. 12. 3. 13 Serial output level register m (SOLm) ............................................................................... 187
3. 12. 3. 14 Serial standby control register 0 (SSC0) .......................................................................... 187
3. 12. 3. 15 Input switch control register (ISC)..................................................................................... 187
3. 12. 3. 16 Noise filter enable register 0 (NFEN0) .............................................................................. 187
3. 12. 3. 17 Registers controlling port functions of serial input/output pins .......................................... 188
3. 12. 4 Operation stop mode .................................................................................................................. 189
3. 12. 5 Operation of 3-Wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI10, CSI20, CSI21) communication ........................... 189
3. 12. 6 Operation of UART (UART0 to UART2) communication ............................................................ 189
3. 12. 7 LIN communicat ion o perati on ..................................................................................................... 189
3. 12. 8 Operation of simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC10, IIC20) communication ................................................ 189
3. 13 Serial Interface IICA................................................................................................................. 190
3. 14 Multiplier and Divider/Multiply-Accumulator ........................................................................ 191
3. 15 DMA Controller ........................................................................................................................ 192
Index-7
3. 16 Interrupt Functions.................................................................................................................. 193
3. 16. 1 Interrupt function types ............................................................................................................... 193
3. 16. 2 Interrupt sources and conf iguration ............................................................................................ 193
3. 16. 3 Registers controlling interrupt functions...................................................................................... 199
3. 16. 3. 1 Interrupt request flag register (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H, IF2L, IF2H) ................................... 204
3. 16. 3. 2 Interrupt mask flag register (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H, MK2L, MK2H) .......................... 206
3. 16. 3. 3 Priority specification flag registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR10L, PR10H,
PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, PR02L, PR02H) ............................................................. 208
3. 16. 3. 4 External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP0), External interrupt falling edge
enable register (EGN0) ...................................................................................................... 212
3. 16. 3. 5 Program status word (PSW) ............................................................................................... 213
3. 16. 4 Interrupt servicing operations ..................................................................................................... 213
3. 17 Key Interrupt Function ............................................................................................................ 214
3. 17. 1 Functions of key interrupt ........................................................................................................... 214
3. 17. 2 Configuration of key interrupt ..................................................................................................... 215
3. 17. 3 Register controlling key interrupt ................................................................................................ 217
3. 17. 3. 1 Key return control register (KRCTL) ................................................................................... 217
3. 17. 3. 2 Key return mode register 0 (KRM0) ................................................................................... 217
3. 17. 3. 3 Key return flag register (KRF) ............................................................................................ 217
3. 17. 3. 4 Port mode registers 0 to 2, 7 (PM0 to PM2, PM7) .............................................................. 218
3. 17. 3. 5 Peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR) ......................................................................... 219
3. 17. 4 Key interrupt operation ............................................................................................................... 219
3. 18 Standby Function .................................................................................................................... 220
3. 19 Reset Function ......................................................................................................................... 221
3. 20 Power-On-Reset Circuit .......................................................................................................... 222
3. 21 Voltage Detector ...................................................................................................................... 223
3. 21. 1 Functions of voltage detector ..................................................................................................... 223
3. 21. 2 Configuration of voltage detector ................................................................................................ 224
3. 21. 3 Registers controlling voltage dete ctor ........................................................................................ 225
3. 21. 3. 1 Voltage detection register (LVIM) ....................................................................................... 225
3. 21. 3. 2 Voltage detection level register (LVIS) ............................................................................... 225
3. 21. 4 Operation of voltage detector ..................................................................................................... 228
3. 21. 5 Cautions for voltage detector ...................................................................................................... 228
3. 22 Safety Functions ...................................................................................................................... 229
3. 22. 1 Overview of safety functions ....................................................................................................... 229
3. 22. 2 Registers used by safety functions ............................................................................................. 230
3. 22. 3 Operation of safety functi ons ...................................................................................................... 230
3. 22. 3. 1 Flash memory CRC operation function (high-speed CRC) ................................................ 230
3. 22. 3. 2 CRC operation function (general-purpose CRC) ................................................................ 230
3. 22. 3. 3 RAM parity error detection function .................................................................................... 230
3. 22. 3. 4 RAM guard function ........................................................................................................... 230
Index-8
3. 22. 3. 5 SFR guard function ............................................................................................................ 230
3. 22. 3. 6 Invalid memory access detection function .......................................................................... 230
3. 22. 3. 7 Frequency detection function ............................................................................................. 231
3. 22. 3. 8 A/D test function ................................................................................................................. 231
3. 23 Regulator .................................................................................................................................. 232
3. 24 Option Byte .............................................................................................................................. 233
3. 24. 1 Functions of option bytes............................................................................................................ 233
3. 24. 1. 1 User option byte (000C0H to 000C2H/010C0H to 010C2H ) .............................................. 233
3. 24. 1. 2 On-chip debug option byte (000C3H/010C3H) ................................................................... 234
3. 24. 2 Format of user option byte.......................................................................................................... 235
3. 24. 3 Format of on-chip debug option byte .......................................................................................... 238
3. 24. 4 Setting of option byte .................................................................................................................. 238
3. 25 Flash Memory .......................................................................................................................... 239
3. 25. 1 Serial Programming Using Flash Memory Programmer ............................................................. 239
3. 25. 1. 1 Programming environment ................................................................................................. 240
3. 25. 1. 2 Communication mode ........................................................................................................ 240
3. 25. 2 Serial programming using external device (that Incorporates UART) ......................................... 241
3. 25. 3 Connection of pins on board ....................................................................................................... 241
3. 25. 4 Serial programmin g meth od ....................................................................................................... 241
3. 25. 5 Processing time for each command when PG-FP5 Is in use (Reference value) ........................ 241
3. 25. 6 Self-programming ....................................................................................................................... 241
3. 25. 7 Security Settings ........................................................................................................................ 241
3. 25. 8 Data flash ................................................................................................................................... 241
3. 26 On-chip Debug Function ........................................................................................................ 242
3. 26. 1 Connecting E1 on-chip debugging emulator to RL78/G1E ......................................................... 242
3. 26. 2 On-chip debug se curi ty ID .......................................................................................................... 243
3. 26. 3 Securing of user resources ......................................................................................................... 243
3. 27 BCD Correction Circuit ........................................................................................................... 244
3. 28 Instruction Set ......................................................................................................................... 245
CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK ............................................................................................................. 246
4. 1 Configurable Amplifier .............................................................................................................. 246
4. 1. 1 Overview of configurable amplifier features .................................................................................. 246
4. 1. 2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 247
4. 1. 3 Registers controlling the configurable amplifiers .......................................................................... 250
4. 1. 4 Procedure for operating the config urabl e ampl ifi ers ..................................................................... 268
4. 2 Gain Adjustment Am plifier ....................................................................................................... 282
4. 2. 1 Overview of gain adjustment amplifier features ............................................................................ 282
4. 2. 2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 282
4. 2. 3 Registers controlling the gain adjustment amplifier ...................................................................... 284
Index-9
4. 2. 4 Procedure for operating the gain adjus tment amplifier ................................................................. 287
4. 3 D/A Converter ............................................................................................................................ 288
4. 3. 1 Overview of D/A converter features .............................................................................................. 288
4. 3. 2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 288
4. 3. 3 Registers controlling the D/A converters ...................................................................................... 289
4. 3. 4 Procedure for operating the D/A converters ................................................................................. 291
4. 3. 5 Notes on using D/A converters ..................................................................................................... 292
4. 4 Low-Pass Filter .......................................................................................................................... 293
4. 4. 1 Overview of low-pass filter features .............................................................................................. 293
4. 4. 2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 294
4. 4. 3 Registers controlling the low-pass filter ........................................................................................ 295
4. 4. 4 Procedure for operating the low-pass filter ................................................................................... 297
4. 5 High-Pass Filter ......................................................................................................................... 298
4. 5. 1 Overview of high-pas s filter features ............................................................................................ 298
4. 5. 2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 299
4. 5. 3 Registers controlling the high-pass filter ....................................................................................... 300
4. 5. 4 Procedure for operating the high-pass filter .................................................................................. 302
4 .6 Temperature Sensor.................................................................................................................. 303
4. 6. 1 Overview of temperature sensor features..................................................................................... 303
4. 6. 2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 303
4. 6. 3 Registers controlling the temperature sensor ............................................................................... 304
4. 6. 4 Procedure for operating the temperature sensor .......................................................................... 305
4. 7 Variable Output Voltage Regulator ......................................................................................... 306
4. 7. 1 Overview of variable output voltage regulator features ................................................................ 306
4. 7. 2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 306
4. 7. 3 Registers controlling the variable output voltage regulator ........................................................... 307
4. 7. 4 Procedure for operating the variable output voltage regulator ...................................................... 309
4. 8 Reference Voltage Generator ................................................................................................... 310
4. 8. 1 Overview of reference voltage generator features ........................................................................ 310
4. 8. 2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 310
4. 8. 3 Registers controlling the reference voltage generator .................................................................. 311
4. 8. 4 Procedure for operating the reference voltage generator ............................................................. 311
4. 8. 5 Notes on using the reference voltage generator ........................................................................... 311
4. 9 SPI ............................................................................................................................................... 312
4. 9. 1 Overview of SPI features .............................................................................................................. 312
4. 9. 2 SPI communication ...................................................................................................................... 313
4. 10 Analog Reset ............................................................................................................................ 315
4. 10. 1 Overview of analog reset feature ................................................................................................ 315
4. 10. 2 Registers controlling the analog reset ........................................................................................ 318
Index-10
CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................... 319
5. 1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ..................................................................................................... 320
5. 1. 1 Absolute maximum ratings of micr oco ntrol ler blo ck ..................................................................... 320
5. 1. 2 Absolute maximum ratings of analog block .................................................................................. 322
5. 1. 3 Absolute maximum ratings (common to mi cro contr oll er block and analog block) ........................ 323
5. 2 Electrical Specifications of Microcontroller Block ................................................................ 324
5. 2. 1 Oscillator characteristics............................................................................................................... 324
5. 2. 1. 1 X1 oscillator chara ct erist ic s .................................................................................................. 324
5. 2. 1. 2 On-chip oscill ator ch aracteristics .......................................................................................... 325
5. 2. 2 DC characteristics ....................................................................................................................... 326
5. 2. 2. 1 Pin characteristics ............................................................................................................... 326
5. 2. 2. 2 Supply current characteristics .............................................................................................. 332
5. 2. 3 AC characteristics ........................................................................................................................ 337
5. 2. 4 Peripheral function s ch aracteristics .............................................................................................. 342
5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit .................................................................................................................... 342
5. 2. 5 Analog block characteristics ......................................................................................................... 372
5. 2. 5. 1 A/D converter characteristics ................................................................................................ 372
5. 2. 5. 2 Temperature sensor, internal reference voltage output characteristics ................................ 378
5. 2. 5. 3 POR circuit characteristics ................................................................................................... 378
5. 2. 5. 4 LVD circuit characteristics .................................................................................................... 379
5. 2. 5. 5 Supply voltage rise slope characteristics .............................................................................. 380
5. 2. 6 Data memory STOP mode low supply voltage data retention char act eri sti cs ............................. 381
5. 2. 7 Flash memory progra mming characteristics ................................................................................ 381
5. 2. 8 Dedicated flash memory programmer communi cati on (UART ) .................................................... 382
5. 2. 9 Timing specs for switching flash memory programming modes .................................................... 383
5. 3 Electrical Specifications of Analog Block .............................................................................. 384
5. 3. 1 Operating conditions of analog block ........................................................................................... 384
5. 3. 2 Supply current charact erist ics ....................................................................................... ............... 385
5. 3. 3 Electrical specifications of each bloc k ......................................................................................... 387
5. 3. 3. 1 Configurable amplif i er characteri sti cs .................................................................................. 387
5. 3. 3. 2 Gain adjustment amplifier character ist ic s ............................................................................. 397
5. 3. 3. 3 D/A converter characteristics ................................................................................................ 399
5. 3. 3. 4 Low-pass filter characteristic s ................................................................................... ........... 400
5. 3. 3. 5 High-pass filter cha r acteristics .............................................................................................. 401
5. 3. 3. 6 Temperature sensor charact eristics ..................................................................................... 402
5. 3. 3. 7 Variable output voltage regulator characteristics .................................................................. 402
5. 3. 3. 8 Reference voltage generator characteristics ........................................................................ 402
5. 3. 3. 9 SPI characteristics ................................................................................................................ 403
Index-11
CHAPTER 6 PACKAGE DRAWINGS .................................................................................................. 405
APPENDIX A CHARACTERISTICS CURVE (TA = 25°C, TYP.) (REFERENCE VALUE) ............. 407
APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY ...................................................................................................... 414
B. 1 Major Revisions in This Edition .............................................................................................. 414
B. 2 Revision History of Preceding Editions ................................................................................. 418
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 1
Mar 31, 2014
R01UH0353EJ0200
Rev.2.00
Mar 31, 2014
RL78/G1E
RENESAS MCU
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
1. 1 Features
The RL78/G1E is a multi-chip package (MCP) device that integrates a chip of an analog block and a chip of 16-bit
microcontroller block in a single package. The chip of analog block features a range of front-end analog circuits for
small sensor signal processing such as a configurable gain amplifier, gain adjustment amplifier, filter circuit, D/A
converter, and temperature sensor. The chip of 16-bit microcontroller block corresponds to the RL78/G1A (64-pin
products).
1. 1. 1 Microcontroller block
Low power consumption technology by standby function
HALT mode
STOP mode
SNOOZE mode
RL78 CPU core
CISC architecture with 3-stage pipeline
Minimum instruction execution time: Can be changed from 0.03125 μs (32 MHz operation with high-speed on-chip
oscillator) to 0.05 μs (20 MHz operation with high-speed system clock)
Address space: 1 MB
General-purpose registers: (8-bit register × 8) × 4 banks
On-chip RAM: 2 to 4 KB
Code flash memory
Code flash memory: 32 to 64 KB
Block size: 1 KB
Prohibition of block erase and rewriting (security function)
On-chip debug function
Self-programming (with boot swap function/flash shield window function)
Data flash memory
Data flash memory: 4 KB
Back ground operation (BGO): Instructions can be executed from the program memory while rewriting the data
flash memory.
Number of rewrites: 1,000,000 times (TYP.)
Voltage of rewrites: VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 2
Mar 31, 2014
High-speed on-chip oscillator
Select from 32 MHz, 24 MHz, 16 MHz, 12 MHz, 8 MHz, 6 MHz, 4 MHz, 3 MHz, 2 MHz, and 1 MHz
High accuracy ±1.0 % (VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V, TA = -20 to +85°C)
Operating ambient temperature
T
A = -40 to +85°C (A: Consumer applications, D: Industrial applications)
Power supply voltage
VDD (Power supply for microcontroller block) = 1.6 to 5.5 V
AVDD (Power supply for A/D converter in microcontroller block) = 1.6 to 3.6 V
AVDDn (Power supply for analog block) = 3.0 to 5.5 V
DVDD (Power supply for SPI in analog block) = 3.0 to 5.5 V
Power management and reset function
On-chip power-on-reset (POR) circuit
On-chip voltage detector (LVD) (Select interrupt and reset from 3 levels)
DMA (Direct Memory Access) controller
2 channels
Number of clocks during transfer between 8/16-bit SFR and internal RAM: 2 clocks
Multiplier and divider/multiply-accumulator
16 bits × 16 bits = 32 bits (Unsigned or signed)
32 bits ÷ 32 bits = 32 bits (Unsigned)
16 bits × 16 bits + 32 bits = 32 bits (Unsigned or signed)
Serial interface
CSI : 2 channels (64-pin products), 6 channels (80-pin products)
UART / UART (LIN-bus supported) : 2 channels / 1channel
I2C/Simplified I2C communication : 1 channel (64-pin products), 3 channels (80-pin products)
Timer
16-bit timer : 8 channels
12-bit interval timer : 1 channel
Watchdog timer : 1 channel (operable with the dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator)
A/D converter
8/12-bit resolution A/D converter
Analog input: 13 channels (64-pin products), 17 channels (80-pin products)
Internal reference voltage (1.45 V) and temperature sensorNote
Note Can be selected only in HS (high-speed main) mode
Remarks 1. n = 1 to 3
2. The functions mounted depend on the product. See 1.6 Outline of Functions.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 3
Mar 31, 2014
I/O port
I/O port : 24 (64-pin products), 30 (80-pin products)
Can be set to N-ch open drain, TTL input buffer, and on-chip pull-up resistor
Different potential interface: Can connect to a 1.8/2.5/3 V device
On-chip key interrupt function
On-chip clock output/buzzer output controller
Others
On-chip BCD (binary-coded decimal) correction circuit
ROM, RAM capacities
Flash ROM Data Flash RAM RL78/G1E
64 pins 80 pins
32 KB 4 KB 2 K B R5F10FLC R5F10FMC
48 KB 4 KB 3 K B R5F10FLD R5F10FMD
64 KB 4 KB 4 K B R5F10FLE R5F10FME
Remark The functions mounted depend on the product. See 1.6 Outline of Functions.
1. 1. 2 Analog block
Configurable amplifier: 3 channels
Gain adjustment amplifier: 1 channel
High-pass filter: 1 channel Note
Low-pass filter: 1 channel
D/A converter: 4 channels
Variable output voltage regulator: 1 channel
Reference voltage generator : 1 channel
Temperature sensor: 1 channel
SPI (for analog block): 1 channel
Note 80-pin products only.
Remark The functions mounted depend on the product. See 1.6 Outline of Functions.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 4
Mar 31, 2014
1. 2 List of Part Numbers
Renesas MCU
Renesas semiconductor product
Pin count:
Fields of application:
ROM number (Omitted with blank products)
Packaging specification:
#U0
#V0
#W0
#X0
: T ray (HWQFN)
: T ray (LFQFP)
: Embossed Tape (HWQFN)
: Embossed Tape (LFQFP)
Package type:
FB : LFQFP, 0.5 mm pitch
NA : HWQFN, 0.5 mm pitch
A : Consumer applications
D : Industrial applications
ROM capacity:
C
: 32 KB
D
: 48 KB
E
: 64 KB
L : 64-pin
M : 80-pin
RL78/G1E group
Memory type:
F : Flash memory
Part No. R 5 F 1 0 F M E A x x x F B # v 0
Pin count Package Data Flash Part Number
64 pins 64-pin plastic HWQFN
(fine pitch) (9 × 9)
Mounted R5F10FLCANA#U0, R5F10FLCANA#W0,
R5F10FLDANA#U0, R5F10FLDANA#W0,
R5F10FLEANA#U0, R5F10FLEANA#W0,
R5F10FLCDNA#U0, R5F10FLCDNA#W0,
R5F10FLDDNA#U0, R5F10FLDDNA#W0,
R5F10FLEDNA#U0, R5F10FLEDNA#W0
80 pins 80-pin plastic LFQFP
(12 × 12)
Mounted R5F10FMCAFB#V0, R5F10FMCAFB#X0,
R5F10FMDAFB#V0, R5F10FMDAFB#X0,
R5F10FMEAFB#V0, R5F10FMEAFB#X0,
R5F10FMCDFB#V0 , R5F10FMCDFB#X0,
R5F10FMDDFB#V0 , R5F10FMDDFB#X0,
R5F10FMEDFB#V0, R5F10FMEDFB#X0
Caution The part number above is valid as of when this manual was issued. For the latest part number,
see the web page of the target product on the Renesas Electronics website.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 5
Mar 31, 2014
1. 3 Pin Configuration (Top View)
1. 3. 1 64-pin products
64-pin plastic WQFN (fine pitch) (9 × 9)
P11/ANI20/SI00/SDA00/RxD0/TOOLRxD/(KR1)
P12/ANI21/SO00/TxD0/TOOLTxD/(KR2)
P13/ANI22/TxD2/(KR3)
P14/ANI23/RxD2/(KR4)
P72/SO21/KR2/SDI
DVDD
P71/SI21/KR1/SDO
TEMP_OUT
LDO_OUT
AVDD2
BGR_OUT
AGND3
MPXIN10
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
P10/ANI18/SCK00/SCL00/(KR0)
48
MPXIN20
AVDD
47
MPXIN11
AVSS
46
MPXIN21
P23/ANI3/(KR6)
45
MPXIN30
P03/ANI16/RxD1/(KR3)
44
MPXIN40
P02/ANI17/TxD1/(KR2)
43
MPXIN31
P22/ANI2/(KR5)
42
MPXIN41
P21/ANI1/AVREFM
41
DAC1_OUT/VREFIN1
P20/ANI0/AVREFP
40
DAC2_OUT/VREFIN2
P130
39
AVDD1
P01/TO00/(KR1)
38
AGND1P00/TI00/(KR0)
37
DAC3_OUT/VREFIN3
P42/TI04/TO04
36
AMP1_OUT
P41/ANI30/TI07/TO07
35
AMP3_OUT
P40/TOOL0
34
AMP2_OUT
RESET
33
DGND
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
P137/INTP0
P122/X2/EXCLK
P121/X1
REGC
VSS
VDD
DGND
LPF_OUT
AVDD3
CLK_LPF
AGND4
I.C
DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4
AGND2
MPXIN60
MPXIN50
6731 2 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 1614
ARESET
P70/ANI28/SCK21/KR0/SCLK
P73/KR3/CS
Cautions 1. Connect the REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1
μ
F).
2. Make the potential of VDD, AVDD1, AVDD2, AVDD3, and DVDD the same.
3. Make the potential of VSS, AGND1, AGND2, AGND3, AGND4, and DGND the same.
4. Leave I.C open.
5. Connect the LDO_OUT pin to AGND3 via a capacitor (4.7
μ
F: recommended).
6. Connect the BGR_OUT pin to AGND3 via a capacitor (0.1
μ
F: recommended).
7. When using Low-pass filter or High-pass filter,
connect the DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4 pin to AGND1 via a capacitor (470 pF: recommended).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 6
Mar 31, 2014
1. 3. 2 80-pin products
80-pin plastic LQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12)
DGND
1
60
MPXIN51
20
41
DGND
2
59
3
58
DGND
4
57
MPXIN11
MPXIN21
5
56
MPXIN30
6
55
MPXIN40
7
54
MPXIN31
8
53
9
52
MPXIN41
DAC1_OUT/VREFIN1
10
51
11
50
DAC2_OUT/VREFIN2
AVDD1
12
49
13
48
AMP1_OUT
AGND1
14
47
P140/PCLBUZ0/INTP6 AMP2_OUT
15
46
P42/TI04/TO04
16
45
DAC3_OUT/VREFIN3
AMP3_OUT
17
44
MPXIN50
18
43
MPXIN60
19
42
P11/ANI20/SI00/SDA00/RxD0/TOOLRxD/(KR1) 21
80
MPXIN61
MPXIN20 40
61
P12/ANI21/SO00/TxD0/TOOLTxD/(KR2) 22
79
P13/ANI22/SO20/TxD2/(KR3) 23
78
P14/ANI23/SI20/SDA20/RxD2/(KR4) 24
77 25
76
P51/ANI25/INTP2 26
75
P50/ANI26/INTP1 27
74
DVDD 28
73 29
72 30
71TEMP_OUT
P73/KR3/CS 31
70
P72/SO21/KR2/SDI 32
69 CLK_LPF
P71/SI21/KR1/SDO 33
68 34
67 35
66LDO_OUT 36
65AVDD2
BGR_OUT 37
64 GAINAMP_OUT
AGND3 38
63
MPXIN10 39
62
P10/ANI18/SCK00/SCL00/(KR0)
AVDD
AVSS
P24/ANI4/(KR7)
P23/ANI3/(KR6)
P22/ANI2/(KR5)
P21/ANI1/AVREFM
P20/ANI0/AVREFP
P130
P04/SCK10/SCL10/(KR4)
P03/ANI16/SI10/RxD1/SDA10/(KR3)
P02/ANI17/SO10/TxD1/(KR2)
P01/TO00/(KR1)
P00/TI00/(KR0)
P41/ANI30/TI07/TO07
P40/TOOL0
RESET
P137/INTP0
P122/X2/EXCLK
P121/X1
REGC
VSS
VDD
DGND
LPF_OUT
HPF_OUT
AVDD3
CLK_HPF
SCIN
CLK_SYNCH
AGND4
SYNCH_OUT
DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4
AGND2
GAINAMP_IN
P15/ANI24/SCK20/SCL20/(KR5)
ARESET
P70/ANI28/SCK21/KR0/SCLK
Cautions 1. Connect the REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1
μ
F).
2. Make the potential of VDD, AVDD1, AVDD2, AVDD3, and DVDD the same.
3. Make the potential of VSS, AGND1, AGND2, AGND3, AGND4, and DGND the same.
4. Connect the LDO_OUT pin to AGND3 via a capacitor (4.7
μ
F: recommended).
5. Connect the BGR_OUT pin to AGND3 via a capacitor (0.1
μ
F: recommended).
6. When using Low-pass filter or High-pass filter,
connect the DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4 pin to AGND1 via a capacitor (470 pF: recommended).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 7
Mar 31, 2014
1. 4 Pin Identification
Microcontroller Block
ANI0-ANI4, Analog Input
ANI16-ANI18,
ANI20-ANI26,
ANI28, ANI30
AVREFM Analog Reference Voltage
Minus
AVREFP Analog Reference Voltage
Plus
EXCLK External Clock Input
(Main System Clock)
INTP0-INTP2 External Interrupt Input
INTP6
KR0-KR7 Key Return
P00-P04 Port 0
P10-P15 Port 1
P20-P24 Port 2
P40-P42 Port 4
P50, P51 Port 5
P70-P73 Port 7
P121, P122 Port 12
P130, P137 Port 13
P140 Port 14
PCLBUZ0 Programmable Clock Output/
Buzzer Output
REGC Regulator Capacitance
RESET Reset
RxD0-RxD2 Receive Data
SCK00, SCK10, Serial Clock Input/Output
SCK20, SCK21
SCL00, SCL10, Serial Clock Input/Output
SCL20
SDA00, SDA10, Serial Data Input/Output
SDA20
SI00, SI10, Serial Data Input
SI20, SI21
SO00, SO10 Serial Data Output
SO20, SO21
TI00, TI04, Timer Input
TI07
TO00, TO04, Timer Output
TO07
TOOL0 Data Input/Output for Tool
TOOLRxD, Data Input/Output for External
Device
TOOLTxD
TxD0-TxD2 Transmit Data
VDD Power Supply
VSS Ground
X1, X2 Crystal O scilla tor
(Main System Clock)
AVDD Analog Power Supply
AVSS Analog Ground
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 8
Mar 31, 2014
Analog Block
AVDD1 Power supply for configurable
amplifiers
AVDD2 Power supply for variable output
voltage regulator and reference
voltage generator
AVDD3 Power supply for low-pass filter and
high-pass filter
AGND1 Ground for configurable amplifiers
AGND2 Ground for gain adjustment amplifier
AGND3 Ground for variable output voltage
regulator and reference voltage
generator
AGND4 Ground for low-pass filter and
high-pass filter
MPXIN10, Multiplexer input
MPXIN11,
MPXIN20,
MPXIN21,
MPXIN30,
MPXIN31,
MPXIN40,
MPXIN41,
MPXIN50,
MPXIN51,
MPXIN60,
MPXIN61
SC_IN Input for filter signal processing
CLK_SYNC H Synchronous dete ctor control clo ck
input
SYNCH_OUT Synchronous detector output
GAINAMP_IN Gain adjustment amplifier input
GAINAMP_OUT Gain adjustment amplifier output
AMP1_OUT, Configurable amplifier output
AMP2_OUT,
AMP3_OUT
DAC1_OUT, D/A converter output
DAC2_OUT,
DAC3_OUT,
DAC4_OUT
VREFIN1,
VREFIN2,
VREFIN3 Reference voltage input for
configurable amplifier
VREFIN4 Reference voltage input for
Gain adjustment amplifier,
low-pass filter, and high-pass filter
SCLK Serial clock input
SDO Serial data output
SDI Serial data input
CS Chip select input
TEMP_OUT Temperature sensor output
ARESET Reset for analog block
DVDD Power supply for SPI
DGND Ground for SPI
HPF_OUT High-pass filter output
CLK_HPF Pin for inputting high-pass filter
control clock
CLK_LPF Pin for inputting low-pass filter
control clock
LPF_OUT Low-pass filter output
BGR_OUT Reference voltage generator output
LDO_OUT Variable output voltage regulator
I.C Internal connect
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 9
Mar 31, 2014
1. 5 Block Diagram
1. 5. 1 64-pin products
P10/ANI18/SCK00/SCL00/(KR0)
AVDD
AVSS
P23/ANI3/(KR6)
P22/ANI2/(KR5)
P21/ANI1/AVREFM
P20/ANI0/AVREFP
P130
P03/ANI16/RxD1/(KR3)
P02/ANI17/TxD1/(KR2)
P01/TO00/(KR1)
P00/TI00/(KR0)
P42/TI04/TO04
P41/ANI30/TI07/TO07
P40/TOOL0
RESET
P11/ANI20/SI00/SDA00/RxD0/TOOLRxD/(KR1)
P12/ANI21/SO00/TxD0/TOOLTxD/(KR2)
P13/ANI22/SO20/TxD2/(KR3)
P14/ANI23/SI20/SDA20/RxD2/(KR4)
16-bit Micro.
(RL78/G1A 64-pin)
P73/SO01/KR3
P72/SO21/KR2
P71/SI21/SDA21/KR1
P70/ANI28/SCK21/SCL21/KR0
V
DD
V
SS
REGC
P121/X1
P122/X2/EXCLK
P137/INTP0
Analog chip
LDO_OUT
AV
DD2
BGR_OUT
AGND3
MPXIN10
P70/ANI28/SCK21/KR0/SCLK
P71/SI21/KR1/SDO
P72/SO21/KR2/SDI
P73/KR3/CS
TEMP_OUT
ARESET
DV
DD
CS
SDI
SDO
SCLK
MPXIN20
MPXIN11
MPXIN21
MPXIN30
MPXIN40
MPXIN31
MPXIN41
DAC1_OUT/VREFIN1
DAC2_OUT/VREFIN2
AVDD1
AMP1_OUT
AGND1
AMP2_OUT
DAC3_OUT/VREFIN3
AMP3_OUT
DGND
LPF_OUT
AV
DD3
CLK_LPF
AGND4
MPXIN50
MPXIN60
AGND2
DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4
I.C
Remark The RL78/G1E (64-pin products) is a multi-chip package (MCP) device that integrates a chip of an analog
block and a chip of 16-bit microcontroller block in a single package.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 10
Mar 31, 2014
(1) Block diagram in microcontroller block (64-pin products)
INTERVAL
TIMER
MULTIPLIER&
DIVIDER,
MULITIPLY-
ACCUMULATOR
DIRECT MEMORY
ACCESS CONTROL
BCD
ADJUSTMENT
VDD VSS TOOLRxD/P11,
TOOLTxD/P12
PORT0 P00 to P034
5
PORT1 P10 to P14
4
PORT2 P20 to P23
3
PORT4 P40 to P42
RAM
RL78
CPU
CORE
CODE FLASH MEMORY
DATA FLASH MEMORY
2PORT12 P121, P122
4(6)
KEY RETURN
KR0/P70 to KR3/P73
(KR0/P00 to KR3/P03,
KR5/P22, KR6/23)
(KR0/P10 to KR4/P14)
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR REGC
A/D
CONVERTER
4ANI0/P20 to ANI3/P23
9ANI16/P03, ANI17/P02, ANI8/P10,
ANI20/P11 to ANI23/P14,
ANI28/P70, ANI30/P41
AVREFP/P20
AVREFM/P21
RESET
CONTROL
POR/LVD
CONTROL
POWER ON RESET
/VOLTAGE DETECTOR
4
PORT7 P70 to P72
P73Note To SPI
TOOL0/P40
ON-CHIP
DEBUG
INTERRUPT
CONTROL RxD2/P14
INTP0/P137
SYSTEM
CONTROL
HIGH-SPEED
ON-CHIP
OSCILLATOR
RESET
X1/P121
X2/EXCLK/P122
PORT13 P130
P137
SERIAL ARRAY
UNIT1 (2ch)
RxD2/P14
To SPI
TxD2/P13 UART2
LINSEL
SERIAL ARRAY
UNIT0 (4ch)
RxD0/P11
TxD0/P12 UART0
RxD1/P03
TxD1/P02 UART1
SCK00/P10
SI00/P11
SO00/P12 CSI00
IIC00
CSI21Note
SCL00/P10
SDA00/P11
SCK21/P70
SI21/P71
SO21/P72
LOW-SPEED
ON-CHIP
OSCILLATOR
WINDOW
WATCHDOG
TIMER
TIMER ARRAY
UNIT (8ch)
ch01
ch02
ch03
ch05
ch06
ch00
TI00/P00
TO00/P01
ch04
TI04/TO04/P42
ch07TI07/TO07/P41
Note Connected inside the package.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 11
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Block diagram in analog block (64-pin products)
Configurable amplifier × 3 channels
Filter circuit
Low-pass filter
Ch1
AV
DD1
Ch2
Gain adjustment
amplifier
Ch3
MPXIN10
MPXIN11
MPXIN20
MPXIN21
AMP1_OUT
MPXIN30
MPXIN31
MPXIN40
MPXIN41
AMP2_OUT
MPXIN50
MPXIN60
AMP3_OUT
AGND1
AGND2
CLK_LPF
AGND4
LPF_OUT
AV
DD3
DAC_OUT1/VREFIN1
DAC_OUT2/VREFIN2
DAC_OUT3/VREFIN3
DAC_OUT4/VREFIN4
D/A converter × 4 channels
Variable output voltage regulator
Reference voltage generator
AGND1
AV
DD2
LDO_OUT
AGND3
BGR_OUT
Temperature sensor TEMP_OUT
SPI
DV
DD
To CSI21
ARESET
DGND
CS
SDO
SDI
SCLK
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 12
Mar 31, 2014
1. 5. 2 80-pin products
P10/ANI18/SCK00/SCL00/(KR0)
AVDD
AVSS
P24/ANI4/(KR7)
P23/ANI3/(KR6)
P22/ANI2/(KR5)
P21/ANI1/AVREFM
P20/ANI0/AVREFP
P130
P04/SCK10/SCL10/(KR4)
P03/ANI16/SI10/RxD1/SDA10/(KR3)
P02/ANI17/SO10/TxD1/(KR2)
P01/TO00/(KR1)
P00/TI00/(KR0)
P140/PCLBUZ0/INTP6
P42/TI04/TO04
P41/ANI30/TI07/TO07
P40/TOOL0
RESET
P137/INTP0
P11/ANI20/SI00/SDA00/RxD0/TOOLRxD/(KR1)
P12/ANI21/SO00/TxD0/TOOLTxD/(KR2)
P13/ANI22/SO20/TxD2/(KR3)
P14/ANI23/SI20/SDA20/RxD2/(KR4)
P15/ANI24/SCK20/SCL20/(KR5)
P51/ANI25/INTP2
P50/ANI26/INTP1
16-bit Micro.
(RL78/G1A 64-pin)
P73/SO01/KR3
P72/SO21/KR2
P71/SI21/SDA21/KR1
P70/ANI28/SCK21/SCL21/KR0
LDO_OUT
AVDD2
BGR_OUT
AGND3
MPXIN10
MPXIN20
DVDD
ARESET
TEMP_OUT
P73/KR3/CS
P72/SO21/KR2/SDI
P71/SI21/KR1/SDO
P70/ANI28/SCK21/KR0/SCLK
Analog chip
CS
SDI
SDO
MPXIN11
MPXIN21
MPXIN30
MPXIN40
MPXIN31
MPXIN41
DAC1_OUT/VREFIN1
DAC2_OUT/VREFIN2
AVDD1
AMP1_OUT
AGND1
AMP2_OUT
DAC3_OUT/VREFIN3
AMP3_OUT
MPXIN50
MPXIN60
MPXIN51
CLK_LPF
SC_IN
CLK_HPF
AVDD3
HPF_OUT
LPF_OUT
DGND
MPXIN61
GAINAMP_IN
GAINAMP_OUT
AGND2
DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4
SYNCH_OUT
AGND4
CLK_SYNCH
VDD
VSS
REGC
P121/X1
P122/X2/EXCLK
SCLK
Remark The RL78/G1E (80-pin products) is a multi-chip package (MCP) device that integrates a chip of an analog
block and a chip of 16-bit microcontroller block in a single package.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 13
Mar 31, 2014
(1) Block diagram in microcontroller block (80-pin products)
INTERVAL
TIMER
LOW-SPEED
ON-CHIP
OSCILLATOR
WINDOW
WATCHDOG
TIMER
TIMER ARRAY
UNIT (8ch)
ch01
ch02
ch03
ch05
ch06
ch00
TI00/P00
TO00/P01
ch04
TI04/TO04/P42
ch07TI07/TO07/P41
SERIAL ARRAY
UNIT0 (4ch)
RxD0/P11
TxD0/P12 UART0
RxD1/P03
TxD1/P02 UART1
SCK00/P10
SI00/P11
SO00/P12 CSI00
SCK10/P04
SI10/P03
SO10/P02 CSI10
IIC00
SCL00/P10
SDA00/P11
IIC10
SCL10/P04
SDA10/P03
RAM
MULTIPLIER&
DIVIDER,
MULITIPLY-
ACCUMULATOR
DIRECT MEMORY
ACCESS CONTROL
BCD
ADJUSTMENT
V
DD
V
SS
TOOLRxD/P11,
TOOLTxD/P12
PORT0 P00 to P045
5
PORT1 P10 to P15
5
PORT2 P20 to P24
4
PORT4 P40 to P42
2
PORT5 P50, P51
CODE FLASH MEMORY
DATA FLASH MEMORY
RL78
CPU
CORE
2PORT12 P121, P122
PORT13 P130
P137
4(8)
KEY RETURN
KR0/P70 to KR3/P73
(KR0/P00 to KR4/P04,
KR5/P22 to KR7/P24)
(KR0/P10 to KR5/P15)
TOOL0/P40
ON-CHIP
DEBUG
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR REGC
A/D
CONVERTER
5ANI0/P20 to ANI4/P24
12 ANI16/P03, ANI17/P02, ANI8/P10,
ANI20/P11 to ANI24/P15, ANI25/P51,
ANI26/P50, ANI28/P70, ANI30/P41
PORT14 P140
AV
REFP
/P20
AV
REFM
/P21
RESET
CONTROL
POR/LVD
CONTROL
POWER ON RESET
/VOLTAGE DETECTOR
4
PORT7 P70 to P72
P73
Note
To SPI
RESET
SYSTEM
CONTROL
HIGH-SPEED
ON-CHIP
OSCILLATOR
X1/P121
X2/EXCLK/P122
INTERRUPT
CONTROL
RxD2/P14
INTP0/P137
SERIAL ARRAY
UNIT1 (2ch)
RxD2/P14
TxD2/P13 UART2
LINSEL
IIC20
SCL20/P15
SDA20/P14
CSI20
SCK20/P15
SI20/P14
SO20/P13
CSI21
Note
SCK21/P70
SI21/P71
SO21/P72
To SPI
BUZZER OUTPUT
CLOCK OUTPUT
CONTROL PCLBUZ0/P140
3INTP1/P50,
INTP2/P51,
INTP6/P140
Note Connected inside the package.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 14
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Block diagram in analog block (80-pin products)
Configurable amplifier × 3 channels
Filter circuit
Low-pass filter
High-pass filter
Ch1
AV
DD1
Ch2
Gain adjustment
amplifier
Ch3
MPXIN10
MPXIN11
MPXIN20
MPXIN21
AMP1_OUT
MPXIN30
MPXIN31
MPXIN40
MPXIN41
AMP2_OUT
MPXIN50
MPXIN51
MPXIN60
MPXIN61
AMP3_OUT
AGND1
AGND2
GAINAMP-IN
GAINAMP_OUT
SYNCH_OUT
CLK_LPF
CLK_HPF
HPF_OUT
AGND4
LPF_OUT
AV
DD3
SC_IN
CLK_SYNCH
DAC_OUT1/VREFIN1
DAC_OUT2/VREFIN2
DAC_OUT3/VREFIN3
DAC_OUT4/VREFIN4
D/A converter × 4 channels
Variable output voltage regulator
Reference voltage generator
AGND1
AV
DD2
LDO_OUT
AGND3
BGR_OUT
Temperature sensor TEMP_OUT
SPI
DV
DD
To CSI21
ARESET
DGND
CS
SDO
SDI
SCLK
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 15
Mar 31, 2014
1. 6 Outline of Functions
Table 1-1 Outline of Functions (Microcontroller Block) (1/2)
Item 64-pin products 80-pin products
R5F10FLx R5F10FMx
Code flash memory (KB) 32 to 64 32 to 64
Data flash memory (KB) 4 4
RAM (KB) 2 to 4 Note1 2 to 4 Note1
Memo ry space 1 MB
Main system
clock High-speed syst em
clock X1 (crystal/ceramic) oscillation, external main system clock input (EXCLK)
1 to 20 MHz: VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, 1 to 8 MHz: VDD = 1.8 to 2.7 V, 1 to 4 MHz: VDD = 1.6 to 1.8 V
High-speed on-chi p
oscillator HS (High-speed main) m ode: 1 to 32 MHz (VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V),
HS (High-speed main) m ode: 1 to 16 MHz (VDD = 2.4 to 5.5 V),
LS (Low-speed main) mode: 1 to 8 MHz (VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V),
LV (low-voltage main) mode: 1 to 4 MHz (VDD = 1. 6 to 5.5 V)
Subsyst em cl ock
Low-speed on-chip oscillator 15 kHz (TYP.)
General-purpose regis ter (8-bit regist er × 8) × 4 banks
Minimum instruct i on execution time 0.03125
μ
s (High-speed on-chip oscillator: fIH = 32 MHz operation)
0.05
μ
s (High-s peed syst em cl ock: fMX = 20 MHz operation)
Instr u ction se t Data transfer (8/16 bits)
Adder and subtractor / logical operation (8/16 bits)
Multiplication (8 bits × 8 bits)
Rotate, barrel s hift, and bit manipulati on (Set, reset, test, and Boolean operation), etc.
I/O port Total 24 30
CMOS I/O 20 26
CMOS input 3 3
CMOS output 1 1
N-ch open-drain I/O
(6 V tolerance) – –
Timer 16-bit timer 8 channels
Watchdog timer 1 channel
Real-time clock (RTC)
12-bit Interval t imer (I T) 1 channel
Timer output 3 channels (PWM outputs: 2 channels Note2)
RTC output
Clock output / buzzer output
1 channel
2.44 kHz, 4.88 kHz,9. 76 kHz, 1. 25 MHz,
2.5 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz (Main system
clock: fMAIN = 20 MHz operation)
8/12-bit resol ut ion A/D converter 13 channels 17 channels
Notes 1. In the case of the 4 KB, this is about 3 KB when the self-programming function and data flash function are
used. (For details, see 3. 3 CPU Architecture)
2. The number of PWM outputs varies depending on the setting of channels in use. (For details, see 3. 6
Timer Array Unit)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 16
Mar 31, 2014
Table 1-1 Outline of Functions (Microcontroller Block) (2/2)
Item 64-pin products 80-pin products
R5F10FLx R5F10FMx
Serial interf ace 64-pin products
CSI: 1 channel / simplified I2C: 1 channel / UART: 1 channel
UART: 1 channel
CSI: 1 channel / UART (LIN-bus supported): 1 channel
80-pin products
CSI: 1 channel / simplified I2C: 1 channel / UART: 1 channel
CSI: 1 channel / simplified I2C: 1 channel / UART: 1 channel
CSI: 2 channels / simp l ifi ed I2C: 1 channel / UART (LIN-bus supported): 1 channel
I
2C bus
Multiplier and di vider / multiply
accumulator Multiplier: 16 bits × 16 bits (Unsigned or signed)
Divider: 32 bits ÷ 32 bits (Unsigned)
Multiply accumulator: 16 bits × 16 bits + 32 bits (Unsigned or signed)
DMA controll e r 2 channels
Vectored interrupt sources Internal 25
External 2 5
Key interrupt 4 ch (7) Note 1 4 ch (8)
Note 1
Reset Reset by RESET pin
Internal reset by watc hdog timer
Internal reset by power-on-reset
Internal reset by voltage detector
Internal reset by illegal instruction execution Note 2
Internal reset by RAM parity error
Internal reset by illegal-memory access
Power-on-reset ci rcuit Power-on-reset: 1.51 ±0.03 V
Power-down-reset: 1.50 ±0.03 V
Voltage detect or Detection level : 3 stages
On-chip debug function Provided
Notes 1. The number in parentheses is the channels of key interrupt when using the peripheral I/O redirection register
(PIOR).
2. The illegal instruction is generated when instruction code FFH is executed. Rest by the illegal instruction
execution is not issued by emulation with the in-circuit emulator or on-chip debug emulator.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 17
Mar 31, 2014
Table 1-2 Outline of Functions (Analog Block)
Item 64-pin products 80-pin products
R5F10FLx R5F10FMx
Sensor interf ace am plif i er Configurable ampl if i ers: 3 channels
Gain adjustment amplifier 1 channel 1 channel (with synchronous det ect or)
Low-pass filter 1 channel
High-pass filter 1 channel
8-bit D/A converter 4 channels
Variable output vol t age regulator 1 channel
Reference voltage generator 1 channel
Temperature sensor circuit 1 channel
Power supply volt age VDD = 1.6 to 5.5 V, AVDD = 1.6 to 3.6 V,
AVDDn = 3.0 to 5.5 V , DV DD = 3.0 to 5.5 V
Operating ambient t emperature TA = 40°C to +85°C
Remark n = 1 to 3
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 18
Mar 31, 2014
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
2. 1 Pin Functions in Microcontroller Block
The microcontroller block in the RL78/G1E is the RL78/G1A (64-pin products), but a part of pin functions of them are
different from each other. The microcontroller function pins in the RL78/G1E (64-pin and 80-pin products) that differ
from those in the RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown in the table below.
(1) Comparison of port functions (64-pin products)
(1/2)
RL78/G1E (64-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
Function Name Alternat e Function Function Name Alternat e Function
P00 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P00 TI00/(KR0)
P01 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P01 TO00/(KR1)
P02 ANI17/TxD1/(KR2) P02 ANI17/SO10/TxD1/(KR2)
P03 P03/ANI6/RxD1/(KR3) P03 ANI16/SI10/SDA10/RxD1/(KR3)
P04 SCK10/SCL10/(KR4)
P05 TI05/TO05/KR8
P06 TI06/TO06/KR9
P10 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P10 ANI18/SCK00/SCL00/(KR0)
P11 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P11 ANI20/SI00/RxD0/TOOLRxD/SDA00/(K R1)
P12 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P12 ANI21/SO00/TxD0/TOOLTxD/(KR2)
P13 ANI22/TxD2/(KR3) P13 ANI22/SO20/TxD2/(KR3)
P14 ANI23/RxD2/(KR4) P14 ANI23/SI20/SDA20/RxD2/(KR4)
P15 ANI24/SCK20/SCL20/(KR5)
P16 TI01/TO01/INTP5
P20 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P20 ANI0/AVREFP
P21 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P21 ANI1/AVREFM
P22 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P22 ANI2/(KR5)
P23 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P23 ANI3/(KR6)
P24 ANI4/(KR7)
P25 ANI5/(KR8)
P26 ANI6/(KR9)
P27 ANI7
P30 ANI27/SCK11/SCL11/INTP3/RTC1HZ
P31 ANI29/TI03/TO03/INTP4
P40 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P40 TOOL0
P41 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P41 ANI30/TI07/TO07
P42 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P 42 TI04/TO04
P43
P50 ANI26/SI11/SDA11/INTP1
P51 ANI25/SO11/INTP2
P60 SCLA0
P61 SDAA0
P62
P63
Remark Functions in parentheses in the above figure can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection
register (PIOR). About format, see Figure in 3. 4. 3. 8 Peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 19
Mar 31, 2014
(2/2)
RL78/G1E (64-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
Function Name Alternat e Function Function Name Alternat e Function
P70 ANI28/SCK21/KR0/SCLK Note P70 ANI28/SCK21/SCL21/KR0
P71 SI21/KR1/SDO Note P71 SI21/SDA21/KR1
P72 SO21/KR2/SDI Note P72 SO21/KR2
P73 KR3/CS Note P73 SO01/KR3
P74 SI01/SDA01/INTP8/KR4
P75 SCK01/SCL01/INTP9/KR5
P76 INTP10/KR6
P77 INTP11/KR7
P120 ANI19
P121 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P121 X1
P122 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P122 X2/EXCLK
P123 XT1
P124 XT2/EXCLKS
P130 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P130
P137 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P137 INTP0
P140 PCLBUZ0/INTP6
P141 PCLBUZ1/INTP7
P150 ANI8
P151 ANI9/(KR6)
P152 ANI10/(KR7)
P153 ANI11/(KR8)
P154 ANI12/(KR9)
Note SCLK, SDO, SDI, CS represent the pin functions of analog block. P70 to P73 which are connected to the pins
of the chip of analog block inside the package have some alternate functions for analog block.
Remark Functions in parentheses in the above figure can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection
register (PIOR). About format, see Figure in 3. 4. 3. 8 Peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR).
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 20
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Comparison of port functions (80-pin products)
(1/2)
RL78/G1E (80-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
Function Name Alternat e Function Function Name Alternat e Function
P00 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P00 TI00/(KR0)
P01 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P01 TO00/(KR1)
P02 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P02 ANI17/SO10/TxD1/(KR2)
P03 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P03 ANI16/SI10/S DA10/RxD1/(KR3)
P04 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P04 SCK10/SCL10/(K R4)
P05 TI05/TO05/KR8
P06 TI06/TO06/KR9
P10 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P10 ANI18/SCK00/SCL00/(KR0)
P11 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P11 ANI20/SI00/RxD0/TOOLRxD/SDA00/(K R1)
P12 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P12 ANI21/SO00/TxD0/TOOLTxD/(KR2)
P13 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P13 ANI22/SO20/TxD2/(KR3)
P14 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P14 ANI23/SI20/S DA20/RxD2/(KR4)
P15 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P15 ANI24/SCK20/SCL20/(KR5)
P16 TI01/TO01/INTP5
P20 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P20 ANI0/AVREFP
P21 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P21 ANI1/AVREFM
P22 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P22 ANI2/(KR5)
P23 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P23 ANI3/(KR6)
P24 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P24 ANI4/(KR7)
P25 ANI5/(KR8)
P26 ANI6/(KR9)
P27 ANI7
P30 ANI27/SCK11/SCL11/INTP3/RTC1HZ
P31 ANI29/TI03/TO03/INTP4
P40 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P40 TOOL0
P41 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P41 ANI30/TI07/TO07
P42 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P 42 TI04/TO04
P43
P50 ANI26/INTP1 P50 ANI26/SI11/SDA11/INTP1
P51 ANI25/INTP2 P51 ANI25/SO11/INTP2
P60 SCLA0
P61 SDAA0
P62
P63
Remark Functions in parentheses in the above figure can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection
register (PIOR). About format, see Figure in 3. 4. 3. 8 Peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR).
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 21
Mar 31, 2014
(2/2)
RL78/G1E (80-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
Function Name Alternat e Function Function Name Alternat e Function
P70 ANI28/SCK21/KR0/SCLK Note P70 ANI28/SCK21/SCL21/KR0
P71 SI21/KR1/SDO Note P71 SI21/SDA21/KR1
P72 SO21/KR2/SDI Note P72 SO21/KR2
P73 KR3/CS Note P73 SO01/KR3
P74 SI01/SDA01/INTP8/KR4
P75 SCK01/SCL01/INTP9/KR5
P76 INTP10/KR6
P77 INTP11/KR7
P120 ANI19
P121 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P121 X1
P122 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P122 X2/EXCLK
P123 XT1
P124 XT2/EXCLKS
P130 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P130
P137 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P137 INTP0
P140 Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P140 PCLBUZ0/INTP6
P141 PCLBUZ1/INTP7
P150 ANI8
P151 ANI9/(KR6)
P152 ANI10/(KR7)
P153 ANI11/(KR8)
P154 ANI12/(KR9)
Note SCLK, SDO, SDI, CS represent the pin functions of analog block. P70 to P73 which are connected to the pins of
the chip of analog block inside the package have some alternate functions for analog block.
Remark Functions in parentheses in the above figure can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection
register (PIOR). About format, see Figure in 3. 4. 3. 8 Peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR).
(3) Comparison of functions other than port functions (60-pin products and 80-pin products)
About the comparison of functions other than port pins, See 2. 1. 2. 1 Functions available for each product.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 22
Mar 31, 2014
2. 1. 1 Port functions
The relationship between pin I/O buffer power supplies and the pins is shown below.
Table 2-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies
(1) 64-pin products
Power Supply Corresponding Pins
VDD Port pins other than P20 to P23
RESET, REGC
AVDD P20 to P23
(2) 80-pin products
Power Supply Corresponding Pins
VDD Port pins other than P20 to P24
RESET, REGC
AVDD P20 to P24
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 23
Mar 31, 2014
2. 1. 1. 1 64-pin products
(1/2)
Function
Name Pin
Type I/ O After Reset Alternat e Function Function
P00 8-1-1 I/O Input port TI00/(KR0) Port 0.
4-bit I/O port.
Input of P00, P01, and P03 can be set t o TTL input buffer.
Output of P02 and P03 can be set to N-ch open-drain output (VDD
tolerance).
P02 and P03 can be set to analog input. Note1
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resist or can be specif i ed by a software
setting at input port.
P01 TO00/(KR1)
P02 7-3-2 Analog input
port ANI17/TxD1/(KR2)
P03 8-3-2 ANI16/RxD1/(KR3)
P10 8-3-2 I/O Analog input
port ANI18/SCK00/SCL00/
(KR0) Port 1.
5-bit I/O port.
Input of P10, P11, and P14 can be set t o TTL input buffer.
Output of P10 to P14 can be set to N-ch open-drain output (VDD
tolerance).
P10 to P14 can be set to analog input. Note 1
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resist or can be specif i ed by a software
setting at input port.
P11 ANI20/SI00/RxD0/
TOOLRxD/SDA00/
(KR1)
P12 7-3-2 ANI21/SO00/TxD0/
TOOLTxD/(KR2)
P13 ANI22/TxD2/(KR3)
P14 8-3-2 ANI23/RxD2/(KR4)
P20 4-3-1 I/O Analog input
port ANI0/AVREFP Port 2.
4-bit I/O port.
Can be set to analog input. Note 2
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
P21 ANI1/AVREFM
P22 ANI2/(KR5)
P23 ANI3/(KR6)
P40 7-1-1 I/O Input port TOOL0 Port 4.
3-bit I/O port.
P41 can be set to analog input. No t e 1
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resist or can be specif i ed by a software
setting at input port.
P41 7-3-1 Analog input
port ANI30/TI07/TO07
P42 7-1-1 Input port TI04/TO04
P70 7-3-1 I/O A nal og i nput
port
ANI28/KR0/SCK21/
SCLK Note3
Port 7.
4-bit I/O port.
P70 can be set to analog input. No t e 1
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resist or can be specif i ed by a software
setting at input port.
P71 7-1-2 Input port KR1/SI21/SDO Note3
P72 7-1-1 KR2/SO21/SDI Note3
P73 KR3/CS Note3
Notes 1. Digital or analog for each pin can be selected with the port mode control register x (PMCx) (can be set in 1-bit
units).
2. Digital or analog for each pin can be selected with the A/D port configuration register (ADPC).
3. SCLK, SDO, SDI, CS represent the pin functions of analog block. P70 to P73 which are connected to the pins
of the chip of analog block inside the package have some alternate functions for analog block.
Remark Functions in parentheses in the above figure can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection
register (PIOR). About format, see Figure in 3. 4. 3. 8 Peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR).
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 24
Mar 31, 2014
(2/2)
P121 2-2-1
Input Input port X1 Port 12.
2-bit input port.
P122 X2/EXCLK
P130 1-1-1 Output Output port Port 13.
1-bit output port and 1-bit input port.
P137 2-1-2 Input Input port INTP0
RESET 2-1-1 Input Input only pin for external reset .
When external reset is not used, connect this pi n to VDD directly or
via a resist or.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 25
Mar 31, 2014
2. 1. 1. 2 80-pin products
(1/2)
Function
Name
Pin
Type
I/O After Reset Alternat e Function Function
P00 8-1-1 I/O Input port TI00/(KR0) Port 0.
5-bit I/O port.
Input of P00, P01, P03, and P04 can be set to TTL input
buffer.
Output of P02 to P04 can be set to N-ch open-drain output
(VDD toleranc e).
P02 and P03 can be set to analog input. Note 1
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a
software setti ng at input port.
P01 TO00/(KR1)
P02 7-3-2 Analog input
port
ANI17/SO10/TxD1/(KR2)
P03 8-3-2 ANI16/SI10/RxD1/
SDA10/(KR3)
P04 8-1-2 Input port SCK10/SCL10/(KR4)
P10 8-3-2 I/O Analog input
port
ANI18/SCK00/
SCL00/(KR0)
Port 1.
6-bit I/O port.
Input of P10, P11, P14, and P15 can be set to TTL input
buffer.
Output of P10 to P15 can be set to N-ch open-drain output
(VDD toleranc e).
P10 to P15 can be set to analog input. Note 1
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a
software setti ng at input port.
P11 ANI20/SI00/RxD0/
TOOLRxD/SDA00/(KR1)
P12 7-3-2 ANI21/SO00/TxD0/
TOOLTxD/(KR2)
P13 ANI22/TxD2/SO20/(KR3)
P14 8-3-2 ANI23/RxD2/SI20/
SDA20/(KR4)
P15 ANI24/SCK20/
SCL20/(KR5)
P20 4-3-1 I/O Analog input
port
ANI0/AVREFP Port 2.
5-bit I/O port.
Can be set to analog input. Note 2
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
P21 ANI1/AVREFM
P22 ANI2/(KR5)
P23 ANI3/(KR6)
P24 ANI4/(KR7)
P40 7-1-1 I/O Input port TOOL0 Port 4.
3-bit I/O port.
P41 can be set to analog input. No t e 1
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a
software setti ng at input port.
P41 7-3-1 Analog input
port
ANI30/TI07/TO07
P42 7-1-1 Input port TI04/TO04
Notes 1. Digital or analog for each pin can be selected with the port mode control register x (PMCx) (can be set in 1-bit
units).
2. Digital or analog for each pin can be selected with the A/D port configuration register (ADPC).
Remark Functions in parentheses in the above figure can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection
register (PIOR). About format, see Figure in 3. 4. 3. 8 Peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR).
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 26
Mar 31, 2014
(2/2)
Function
Name
Pin
Type
I/O After Reset Alternate Function Function
P50 7-3-2 I/O Analog input
port
ANI26/INTP1 Port 5.
2-bit I/O port.
Output of P50 can be set to N-ch open-drain output (VDD
tolerance).
P50 and P51 can be set to analog input. Note 1
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by software
setting at input port.
P51 7-3-1 ANI25/INTP2
P70 7-3-1 I/O Analog input
port
ANI28/KR0/
SCK21/SCLKNote2
Port 7.
4-bit I/O port.
P70 can be set to analog input. Note 1
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by software
setting at input port.
P71 7-1-2 Input port
KR1/SI21/SDONote2
P72 7-1-1 KR2/SO21/SDINote2
P73 KR3/CSNote2
P121 2-2-1 Input Input port X1 Port 12.
2-bit input port.
P122 X2/EXCLK
P130 1-1-1 Output Output port Port 13.
1-bit output port and 1-bit input port.
P137 2-1-2 Input Input port INTP0
P140 7-1-1 I/O Input port PCLBUZ0/INTP6 Port 14.
1-bit I/O port.
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software
setting at input port.
RESET 2-1-1 Input Input only pin for external reset .
When external reset is not used, connect this pi n to VDD direct l y
or via a resistor.
Notes 1. Digital or analog for each pin can be selected with the port mode control register x (PMCx) (can be set in 1-bit
units).
2. SCLK, SDO, SDI, CS represent the pin functions of analog block. P70 to P73 which are connected to the pins of
the chip of analog block inside the package have some alternate functions for analog block.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 27
Mar 31, 2014
2. 1. 2 Functions other than port functions
2. 1. 2. 1 Functions available for each product
(1/3)
Function Name RL78/G1E
(64-pin) RL78/G1E
(80-pin) RL78/G1A
(64-pin)
ANI0
ANI1
ANI2
ANI3
ANI4
ANI5
ANI6
ANI7
ANI8
ANI9
ANI10
ANI11
ANI12
ANI16
ANI17
ANI18
ANI19
ANI20
ANI21
ANI22
ANI23
ANI24
ANI25
ANI26
ANI27
ANI28
ANI29
ANI30
INTP0
INTP1
INTP2
INTP3
INTP4
INTP5
INTP6
INTP7
INTP8
INTP9
INTP10
INTP11
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 28
Mar 31, 2014
(2/3)
Remark Functions in parentheses in the above figure can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection
register (PIOR).
Function Name RL78/G1E
(64-pin) RL78/G1E
(80-pin) RL78/G1A
(64-pin)
KR0
KR1
KR2
KR3
KR4 ( ) ( )
KR5 ( ) ( )
KR6 ( ) ( )
KR7 ( )
KR8
KR9
PCLBUZ0
PCLBUZ1
REGC
RTC1HZ –
RESET
RXD0
RXD1
RXD2
SCK00
SCK01 –
SCK10 –
SCK11 –
SCK20 –
SCK21
SCLA0 –
SCL00
SCL01 –
SCL10 –
SCL11 –
SCL20 –
SCL21 –
SDAA0 –
SDA00
SDA01 –
SDA10 –
SDA11 –
SDA20 –
SDA21 –
SI00
SI01 –
SI10 –
SI11 –
SI20 –
SI21
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 29
Mar 31, 2014
(3/3)
Note EVDD0 is connected to VDD, and EVSS0 is connected to VSS inside the package.
Function Name RL78/G1E
(64-pin) RL78/G1E
(80-pin) RL78/G1A
(64-pin)
SO00
SO01 –
SO10 –
SO11 –
SO20 –
SO21
TI00
TI01 –
TI03 –
TI04
TI05 –
TI06 –
TI07
TO00
TO01 –
TO03 –
TO04
TO05 –
TO06 –
TO07
TxD0
TxD1
TxD2
X1
X2
EXCLK
EXCLKS –
XT1 –
XT2 –
VDD
EVDD0 Note
Note
AVDD
AVREFP
AVREFM
VSS
EVSS0 Note
Note
AVSS
TOOLRxD
TOOLTxD
TOOL0
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 30
Mar 31, 2014
2. 1. 2. 2 Description of each function
The functions of RL78/G1E (64-pin products and 80-pin products) are described below.
(1/2)
Function Name I/O Function
ANI0- ANI4, ANI16- ANI18,
ANI20- ANI26, ANI28, ANI30 Input A/D converter analog input
INTP0- INTP2, INTP6 Input External interrupt request input
KR0- KR7 Input Key interrupt input
PCLBUZ0 Output Clock output / buzzer output
REGC Pin for connecting to regulator output stabilization capacitance for
internal operatio n.
Connect this pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1
μ
F).
Also, use a capacitor with good characteristics, since it is used to
stabilize internal voltage.
RESET Input External reset signal input for the functions of microcontroller block
RxD0- RxD2 Input Serial data input pins of serial interface UART0 to UART2
TxD0-TxD2 Output Serial data output pins of serial interface UART0 to UART2
SCK00, SCK10, SCK20, SCK21 I/O Serial clock I/O pins of serial interface CSI00, CSI10, CSI20 and
CSI21
SCL00, SCL10, SCL20 Output Serial clock output pins of serial interface IIC00, IIC10 and IIC20
SDA00, SDA10, SDA20 I/O Serial data I/O pins of serial interface IIC00, IIC10 and IIC20
SI00, SI10, SI20, SI21 Input Serial data input pins of serial interface CSI00, CSI10, CSI20 and
CSI21
SO00, SO10, SO20, SO21 Output Serial data output pins of serial interface CSI00, CSI10, CSI20 and
CSI21
TI00, TI04, TI07 Input The pins for inputting an external count clock/capture trigger to 16-bit
timers 00, 04 and 07
TO00, TO04, TO07 Output Timer output pins of 16-bit timers 00, 04 and 07
X1, X2 Resonator connection for main system clock
EXCLK Input External clock inp ut for main s y stem clo ck
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 31
Mar 31, 2014
(2/2)
Function Name I/O Function
VDD < 64-pin products >
Positive power supply for port pins other than P20 to P23
and also for RESET, REGC pin.
< 80-pin products >
Positive power supply for port pins other than P20 to P24
and also for RESET, REGC pin.
AVDD Positive power supply for P20 to P24 and A/D converter
AVREFP Input A/D converter reference potential (+ side) input
AVREFM Input A/D converter reference potential ( side) input
Make the potential of AVREFM pin the same as AVSS pin and VSS pin.
VSS < 64-pin products >
Ground potential for port pins other than P20 to P23
and also for RESET, REGC pin.
< 80-pin products >
Ground potential for port pins other than P20 to P24
and also for RESET, REGC pin.
AVSS Ground potential for P20 to P24 and A/D converter
Make the potential of AVSS pin the same as VSS pin.
TOOLRx D Input UART reception pin for the ex ternal device conne cti on used during
flash memory programming
TOOLTxD Output UART transmission pin for the external device connection used
during flash memory programming
TOOL0 I/O Data I/O for flash memory programmer / debugger
Caution After reset release, the relationships between P40/TOOL0 and the operating mode are as follows.
Table 2-2. Relationship Between P40/TOOL0 and Operation Mode After Reset Release
P40/TOOL0 Operating Mode
VDD Normal operation mode
0 V Flash memory programming mode
For details, see 3. 25. 4 Serial programming method.
Remark Use bypass capacitors (about 0.1 μF) as noise and latch up countermeasures with relatively thick wires at
the shortest distance to VDD to VSS line.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 32
Mar 31, 2014
2. 2 Pin Functions in Analog Block
About I/O circuit type, see 2. 4 Block Diagrams of Pins.
2. 2. 1 64-pin products
Function Name I/O Circuit
Type I/O Function
AVDD3 P ower suppl y pi n f o r filter
AGND2 GND pin for gain adjustment amplifier
MPXIN60 ANALOG6 Input Multiplexer 6 input pin 0 (Configurable am pl if i er Ch3 i nput pin 0 (+))
MPXIN50 ANALOG6 Mult i pl exer 5 input pin 0 (Confi gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch3 i nput pin 0 (-))
AMP3_OUT ANALOG10 Output Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch3 output pin
DAC3_OUT/
VREFIN3 ANALOG2 I/O D/A converter Ch3 output pin/configurable ampl i fier Ch3 reference voltage input pin
AMP2_OUT ANALOG11 Output Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch2 output pin
AGND1 GND pin for configurable amplif i ers Ch1 to Ch3.
AMP1_OUT ANALOG11 Output Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch1 output pin
AVDD1 P ower supply pi n for configurable amplifiers Ch1 to Ch3
DAC2_OUT/
VREFIN2 ANALOG2 I/O D/A converter Ch2 output pin/configurable amplifier Ch2 reference voltage input pin
DAC1_OUT/
VREFIN1 ANALOG2 D/A converter Ch1 output pin/c onfigurable ampl i fier Ch1 reference voltage input pin
MPXIN41 ANALOG6 Input Multiplexer 4 input pin 1 (Configurable am pl if i er Ch2 i nput pin 1 (+))
MPXIN31 ANALOG6 Mult i pl exer 3 input pin 1 (Confi gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch2 i nput pin 1 (-))
MPXIN40 ANALOG6 Mult i pl exer 4 input pin 0 (Configurabl e amplifier Ch2 input pin 0 (+))
MPXIN30 ANALOG6 Mult i pl exer 3 input pin 0 (Confi gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch2 i nput pin 0 (-))
MPXIN21 ANALOG6 Mult i pl exer 2 input pin 1 (Configurabl e amplifier Ch1 input pin 1 (+))
MPXIN11 ANALOG6 Mult i pl exer 1 input pin 1 (Confi gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch1 i nput pin 1 (-))
MPXIN20 ANALOG6 Mult i pl exer 2 input pin 0 (Configurabl e amplifier Ch1 input pin 0 (+))
MPXIN10 ANALOG6 Mult i pl exer 1 input pin 0 (Confi gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch1 i nput pin 0 (-))
AGND3 GND pin for variable output volt age regulator and reference voltage generator
BGR_OUT ANALOG9 Output Reference volt age generat or output pin
AVDD2 P ower supply pi n for variable output voltage regulator and reference voltage generator
LDO_OUT ANALOG3 Output Variable output voltage regulator output pi n
TEMP_OUT ANALOG4 Output Temperature sensor output pin
ARESET ANALOG5 Input External reset signal input for the functions of analog block
DVDD Power supply pin for SPI
SCLK ANALOG8 Input Serial cl ock input pi n for SPI
SDO ANALOG12 Output Serial data output pin for SPI
SDI ANALOG8 Input Serial data input pin for SPI
CS ANALOG8 Input Chip sel ect input pin for SPI
DGND GND pin for SPI
DAC4_OUT/
VREFIN4 ANALOG13 I/O D/A converter Ch4 output pin/gain adjustment amplifier, filter reference vol t age input pin
CLK_LPF ANALOG7 Input Pin for inputting low-pass filter control clock
AGND4 GND pin for filter
LPF_OUT ANALOG1 Output Low-pass filter output pin
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 33
Mar 31, 2014
2. 2. 2 80-pin products
Function Name I/O Circuit
Type I/O Function
AVDD3 Power supply pin for filter
SC_IN ANALOG6 Input Input pin for filter signal processing
CLK_SYNCH ANALOG7 Input Pin for inputting synchronous detector control clock
SYNCH_OUT ANALOG11 Output Synchronous detector output pin
AGND2 GND pin for gain adjustment amplifier
GAINAMP_OUT ANALOG10 Output Output pin for gain adjustment amplifier
GAINAMP_IN ANALOG6 Input Input pin for gain adjustm ent amplifier
MPXIN61 ANALOG6 Input Multiplexer 6 input pin 1 (Configurabl e amplifier Ch3 input pin 1 (+))
MPXIN51 ANALOG6 Multiplexer 5 input pin 1 (Configurabl e am pl if i er Ch3 i nput pin 1 (-))
MPXIN60 ANALOG6 Multiplexer 6 input pin 0 (Configurabl e am pl ifi er Ch3 i nput pi n 0 (+))
MPXIN50 ANALOG6 Multiplexer 5 input pin 0 (Configurabl e am pl if i er Ch3 i nput pin 0 (-))
AMP3_OUT ANALOG10 Output Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch3 output pin
DAC3_OUT/
VREFIN3 ANALOG2 I/O D/A converter Ch3 output pin/configurable amplifier Ch3 reference voltage input pin
AMP2_OUT ANALOG11 Output Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch2 output pin
AGND1 GND pin for configurable amplifiers Ch1 to Ch3
AMP1_OUT ANALOG11 Output Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch1 output pin
AVDD1 Power supply pin for configurable amplif i ers Ch1 to Ch3
DAC2_OUT/
VREFIN2 ANALOG2 I/O D/A converter Ch2 output pin/configurable amplifier Ch2 reference voltage input pin
DAC1_OUT/
VREFIN1 ANALOG2 D/A convert er Ch1 output pin/configurable amplifier Ch1 ref erence voltage input pin
MPXIN41 ANALOG6 Input Multiplexer 4 input pin 1 (Configurabl e amplifier Ch2 input pin 1 (+))
MPXIN31 ANALOG6 Multiplexer 3 input pin 1 (Configurabl e am pl if i er Ch2 i nput pin 1 (-))
MPXIN40 ANALOG6 Multiplexer 4 input pin 0 (Configurabl e am pl ifi er Ch2 i nput pi n 0 (+))
MPXIN30 ANALOG6 Multiplexer 3 input pin 0 (Configurabl e am pl if i er Ch2 i nput pin 0 (-))
MPXIN21 ANALOG6 Multiplexer 2 input pin 1 (Configurabl e am pl ifi er Ch1 i nput pi n 1 (+))
MPXIN11 ANALOG6 Multiplexer 1 input pin 1 (Configurabl e am pl if i er Ch1 i nput pin 1 (-))
MPXIN20 ANALOG6 Multiplexer 2 input pin 0 (Configurabl e am pl ifi er Ch1 i nput pi n 0 (+))
MPXIN10 ANALOG6 Multiplexer 1 input pin 0 (Configurabl e am pl if i er Ch1 i nput pin 0 (-))
AGND3 GND pin for variable output voltage regulator and reference voltage generator
BGR_OUT ANALOG9 Output Referenc e vol tage generator output pin
AVDD2 Power supply pin for variable output volt age regul ator and ref erence voltage generator
LDO_OUT ANALOG3 Output Variable out put voltage regulator output pin
TEMP_OUT ANALOG4 Output Temperature sensor output pin
ARESET ANALOG5 Input External reset signal input for the functions of analog block
DVDD Power supply pin for SPI
SCLK ANALOG8 Input Serial clock input pin for SPI
SDO ANALOG12 Output Serial data output pin for SPI
SDI ANALOG8 Input Serial data input pin for SPI
CS ANALOG8 I nput Chip sel ect input pin for SPI
DGND GND pin for SPI
DAC4_OUT/
VREFIN4 ANALOG13 I/O D/A convert er Ch4 out put pi n/gain adjustm ent amplifier, filter reference vol t age i nput pi n
HPF_OUT ANALOG1 Output High-pass filter output pin
CLK_HPF ANALOG7 Input Pin for i nputt i ng hi gh-pass f ilt er control cl ock
CLK_LPF ANALOG7 Input Pin for inputting low-pass filter control clock
AGND4 GND pin for filter
LPF_OUT ANALOG1 Output Low-pass filter output pin
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 34
Mar 31, 2014
2. 3 Connection of Unused Pins
Table 2-3 shows the recommended connections of unused pins.
Remark The provided pins differ depending on the products. See 1. 3 Pin Configuration (Top View), 2. 1 Pin
Functions in Microcontroller Block, and 2. 2 Pin Functions in Analog Block.
Table 2-3. Connections of Unused Pins
(1/2)
Pin Name I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins
P00 I/O I nput : Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor.
Output: Leave open
P01 I/O
P02 I/O
P03 I/O
P04 I/O
P10 I/O
P11 I/O
P12 I/O
P13 I/O
P14 I/O
P15 I/O
P20 I/O Input: Independently connect to AVDD or AVSS via a resistor.
Output: Leave open
P21 I/O
P22 I/O
P23 I/O
P24 I/O
P40 I/O I nput : Independently connect to VDD via a resistor, or leave open.
Output: Leave open
P41 I/O I nput : Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor.
Output: Leave open
P42 I/O
P50 I/O
P51 I/O
P70 I/O
P71 I/O
P72 I/O
P73 I/O
P121 Input Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor.
P122 Input
P130 Output Leave open
P137 Input Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor.
P140 I /O Input: Independently c onnect to VDD or VSS via a resistor.
Output: Leave open
RESET Input Connect directly or via a resistor to VDD.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 35
Mar 31, 2014
(2/2)
Pin Name I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins
SC_IN Input Connect to AGND4.
CLK_SYNCH Input Leave open
SYNCH_OUT Output
GAINAMP_OUT Output
GAINAMP_IN Input Connect to AGND2.
MPXIN61 Input Connect to AGND1.
MPXIN51 Input
MPXIN60 Input
MPXIN50 Input
AMP3_OUT Output Leave open
DAC3_OUT/
VREFIN3 I/O Leave open
AMP2_OUT Output Leave open
AMP1_OUT Output Connect to AGND1.
DAC2_OUT/
VREFIN2 I/O Leave open
DAC1_OUT/VREFIN1 I/O
MPXIN41 Input Connect to AGND1.
MPXIN31 Input
MPXIN40 Input
MPXIN30 Input
MPXIN21 Input
MPXIN11 Input
MPXIN20 Input
MPXIN10 Input
TEMP_OUT Output Leave open
SCLK Input
SDO Output
SDI Input
CS Input
DAC4_OUT/
VREFIN4 I/O
HPF_OUT Output
CLK_HPF Input
CLK_LPF Input
LPF_OUT Output
LDO_OUT Output
BGR_OUT Output
I.C
ARESET Input
Note
Note When the resource pin for ARESET is to be Hi-Z, connect ARESET to DGND via a resistor.
For details of functions, see 2. 5. 31 ARESET.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 36
Mar 31, 2014
2. 4 Block Diagrams of Pins
Figures 2-1 to 2-12 show the block diagrams of the pins described in 2. 1. 1 Port functions.
Figure 2-13 shows the I/O circuit type described in 2. 2 Pin Functions in Analog Block.
Figure 2-1. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 1-1-1
RD
WR
PORT
(
Pmn
)
Pmn
P-ch
N-ch
Internal bus
Output latch
V
DD
V
SS
Figure 2-2. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 2-1-1
RESET RESET
Figure 2-3. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 2-1-2
RD
Pmn
Alternate
function
Internal bus
Remark For alternate functions, see 2. 1. 1 Port functions.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 37
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 2-4. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 2-2-1
N-ch P-ch
Cl ock generator
Alternate
function
P122/X2/EXCLK/Alternate function
P121/X1/Alternate function
CMC
OSCSEL
RD
CMC
EXCLK, OSCSEL
RD
Internal bus
Alternate
function
Remark For alternate functions, see 2. 1. 1 Port functions.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 38
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 2-5. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 4-3-1
1
0
Pmn
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
ADPC2 to A DPC0
ADPC
WR
ADPC
P-ch
V
DD
N-ch
V
SS
P-ch
N-ch
PM register
(PMmn)
A/D converter
Output latch
(Pmn)
0: A nal og i nput
1: Digital I/O
Internal bus
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 39
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 2-6. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 7-1-1
1
0
RD
WRPORT
WRPM
WRPU
Pmn
P-ch
VDD
P-ch
VDD
N-ch
Internal bus
Output latch
(Pmn)
PU register
(PUmn)
Alternate
function
PM register
(PMmn)
Alternate function
(SAU)
Alternate function
(other than SAU )
VSS
Remarks 1. For alternate functions, see 2. 1. 1 Port functions.
2. SAU: Serial array unit
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 40
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 2-7. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 7-1-2
1
0
RD
WRPORT
WRPM
WRPU
Pmn
P-ch
VDD
N-ch
P-ch
VDD
Internal bus
Alternate
function
PU register
(PUmn)
Output latch
(Pmn)
PM register
(PMmn)
Alternate function
(SAU)
Alternate function
(other than SAU )
VSS
Remarks 1. For alternate functions, see 2. 1. 1 Port functions.
2. SAU: Serial array unit
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 41
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 2-8. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 7-3-1
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
WR
PMC
WR
PU
P-ch
V
DD
P-ch
N-ch
Pmn
P-ch
V
DD
N-ch
V
SS
A/D converter
1
0
PU register
(PUmn)
PMC register
(PMCmn)
Alternate
function
Output latch
(Pmn)
PM register
(PMmn)
Al ternate func ti on
(SAU)
Alternate function
(other than SAU)
Internal bus
Remarks 1. For alternate functions, see 2. 1. 1 Port functions.
2. SAU: Serial array unit
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 42
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 2-9. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 7-3-2
RD
WRPORT
WRPM
WRPMC
WRPU
WRPOM
P-ch
Pmn
P-ch
N-ch
P-ch
N-ch
POM register
(POMmn)
1
0
VDD
VDD
VSS
A/D converter
PU register
(PUmn)
PMC register
(PMCmn)
Alternate
function
Output latch
(Pmn)
PM register
(PMmn)
Alternate function
(SAU)
Alternate function
(other than SAU)
Internal bus
Remarks 1. For alternate functions, see 2. 1. 1 Port functions.
2. SAU: Serial array unit
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 43
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 2-10. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 8-1-1
1
0
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
WR
PU
CMOS
TTL
WR
PIM
P-ch
V
DD
Pmn
P-ch
V
DD
N-ch
PU register
(PUmn)
PIM regi s t er
(PIMmn)
Alternate
function
Internal bus
Output latch
(Pmn)
Alternate function
(SAU)
Alternate function
(other than SAU)
PM register
(PMmn)
V
SS
Remarks 1. For alternate functions, see 2. 1. 1 Port functions.
2. SAU: Serial array unit
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 44
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 2-11. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 8-1-2
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
WR
PU
WR
POM
CMOS
TTL
WR
PIM
Pmn
P-ch
N-ch
P-ch
1
0
POM register
(POMmn)
V
DD
V
DD
V
SS
PU register
(PUmn)
PIM register
(PIMmn)
Alternate
function
Output latch
(Pmn)
PM register
(PMmn)
Alternate function
(SAU)
Alternate function
(other than SAU)
Internal bus
Remarks 1. For alternate functions, see 2. 1. 1 Port functions.
2. SAU: Serial array unit
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 45
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 2-12. Pin Block Diagram for Pin Type 8-3-2
1
0
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
WR
PMC
WR
PU
WR
POM
P-ch
V
DD
CMOS
TTL
WR
PIM
Pmn
P-ch
V
DD
N-ch
P-ch
N-ch
A/D converter
PU register
(PUmn)
PIM register
(PMCmn)
Alternate
function
Internal bus
Output latch
(Pmn)
PM register
(PMmn)
Alternate function
(SAU)
Alternate function
(other than SAU)
PMC register
(PMCmn)
POM register
(POMmn)
V
SS
Remarks 1. For alternate functions, see 2. 1. 1 Port functions.
2. SAU: Serial array unit
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 46
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 2-13. Pin I/O Circuit List (1/2)
ANALOG1 ANALOG2
AV
DD3
OUT
AGND4
AVDD1
IN/OUT
AGND1
AGND1
ANALOG3 ANALOG4
OUT
AV
DD2
AGND3 AGND3
AVDD2
OUT
AGND3 AGND3
ANALOG5 ANALOG6
Schmitt-triggered input with hysteresis characteristics
IN
IN
ANALOG7 ANALOG8
IN
AVDD3
AGND4 AGND4
DV
DD
DGND
IN
DV
DD
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 47
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 2-13. Pin I/O Circuit List (2/2)
ANALOG9 ANALOG10
OUT
AVDD2
AGND3
AGND3
AV
DD1
OUT
AGND1
ANALOG11 ANALOG12
OUT
OUT
DGND
ANALOG13
AVDD2
AGND3
IN/OUT
AGND3
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 48
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5 Instruction of Pin Functions
Remark The pins mounted depend on the product. See 1. 3 Pin Configuration (Top View), 2. 1 Pin Functions in
Microcontroller Block, and 2. 2 Pin Functions in Analog Block.
2. 5. 1 Port 0 (P00 to P04)
(1) Port mode
P00 to P04 function as an I/O port. P00 to P04 can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register
0 (PM0).
(2) Control mode
P00 to P04 function as A/D converter analog input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, and key return input.
(a) ANI16, ANI17
These are the analog input pins of A/D converter.
(b) SI10
This is a serial data input pin of serial interface CSI10.
(c) SO10
This is a serial data output pin of serial interface CSI10.
(d) SCK10
This is a serial clock I/O pin of serial interface CSI10.
(e) TxD1
This is a serial data output pin of serial interface UART1.
(f) RxD1
This is a serial data input pin of serial interface UART1.
(g) SDA10
This is a serial data I/O pin of serial interface IIC10.
(h) SCL10
This is a serial clock output pin of serial interface IIC10.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 49
Mar 31, 2014
(i) TI00
This is a pin for inputting an external count clock/capture trigger to 16-bit timer 00.
(j) TO00
This is the timer output pin of 16-bit timer 00.
(k) KR0 to KR4
These are the key interrupt input pins.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 50
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 2 Port 1 (P10 to P15)
(1) Port mode
P10 to P15 function as an I/O port. P10 to P15 can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register
1 (PM1).
(2) Control mode
P10 to P15 function as A/D converter analog input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, and programming UART I/O.
(a) ANI18, ANI20 to ANI24
These are the analog input pins of A/D converter.
(b) TxD0, TxD2
These are the serial data output pins of serial interface UART0 and UART2.
(c) RxD0, RxD2
These are the serial data input pins of serial interface UART0 and UART2.
(d) SCK00, SCK20
These are the serial clo ck I/O pins of serial interf ac e CSI00 a nd CSI20.
(e) SI00, SI20
These are the serial data input pins of serial inter f ac e CSI00 and CSI2 0.
(f) SO00, SO20
These are the serial data output pins of serial interface CSI00 and CSI20.
(g) TOOLTxD
This UART serial data output pin for an external device connection is used during flash memory programming.
(h) TOOLRxD
This UART serial data input pin for an external device connection is used during flash memory programming.
(i) SDA00, SDA20
These are the serial data I/O pins of serial interfa ce IIC00 an d IIC20.
(j) SCL00, SCL20
These are the serial clock output pins of serial interface IIC00 and IIC20.
(k) KR0 to KR5
These are the key interrupt input pins.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 51
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 3 Port 2 (P20 to P24)
(1) Port mode
P20 to P24 function as an I/O port. P20 to P24 can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register
2 (PM2).
(2) Control mode
P20 to P24 function as A/D converter analog input, and reference voltage input.
(a) ANI0 to ANI4
These are the analog input pins of A/D converter.
(b) AVREFP
This is a pin that inputs the A/D converter reference potential (+ side).
(c) AVREFM
This is a pin that inputs the A/D converter reference potential ( side).
(d) KR5 to KR7
These are the key interrupt input pins.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 52
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 4 Port 4 (P40 to P42)
(1) Port mode
P40 to P42 function as an I/O port. P40 to P42 can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register
4 (PM4).
(2) Control mode
P40 to P42 function as A/D converter analog input, data I/O for a flash memory programmer/debugger, and timer I/O.
(a) TI04, TI07
These are the pins for inputting an external count clock/capture trigger to 16-bit timers 04 and 07.
(b) TO04, TO07
These are the timer output pins from 16-bit timers 04 and 07.
(c) TOOL0
This is a data I/O pin for a flash memory programmer/debugger.
Be sure to pull up this pin externally when on-chip debugging is enabled (pulling it down is prohibited).
(d) ANI30
This is an analog input pin of A/D converter .
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 53
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 5 Port 5 (P50, P51)
(1) Port mode
P50 and P51 function as an I/O port. P50 and P51 can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode
register 5 (PM5).
(2) Control mode
P50 and P51 function as A/D converter analog input, and external interrupt request input.
(a) ANI25, ANI26
These are the analog input pins of A/D converter.
(b) INTP1, INTP2
These are the external interrupt request input pins for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both
rising and falling edges) can be specified.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 54
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 6 Port 7 (P70 to P73)
(1) Port mode
P70 to P73 function as an I/O port. P70 to P73 can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register
7 (PM7).
(2) Control mode
P70 to P73 function as key interrupt input, A/D converter analog input, serial interface data I/O, and clock I/O.
(a) ANI28
This is the analog input pin of A/D converter .
(b) KR0 to KR2
These are the key interrupt input pins.
(c) SI21
This is the serial data input pin of serial interface CSI21.
(d) SO21
This is the serial data output pin of serial interface CSI21.
(e) SCK21
This is the serial clock I/O pin of serial interface CSI21.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 55
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 7 Port 12 (P121, P122)
(1) Port mode
P121 and P122 function as an input port.
(2) Control mode
P121 and P122 function as connecting resonator for main system clock, and external clock input for main system
clock.
(a) X1, X2
These are the pins for connecting a resonator for main system clock.
(c) EXCLK
This is an external clock input pin for main system clock.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 56
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 8 Port 13 (P130, P137)
(1) Port mode
P130 functions as an output port.
P137 functions as an input port.
(2) Control mode
P137 functions as external interrupt request input.
(a) INTP0
This is an external interrupt request input pin for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and
falling edges) can be specified.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 57
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 9 Port 14 (P140)
(1) Port mode
P140 functions as an I/O port. P140 can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 14
(PM14).
(2) Control mode
P140 functions as clock/buzzer output, and external interrupt request input.
(a) INTP6
This is the external interrupt request input pin for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising
and falling edges) can be specified.
(b) PCLBUZ0
This is the clock/buzzer output pin.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 58
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 10 AVDD, AVSS, VDD, VSS
(a) AVDD
This is the A/D converter reference voltage input pin and the positive power supply pin of P20 to P24, and A/D
converter.
(b) AVSS
This is the A/D converter ground potential pin. Even when the A/D converter is not used, always use this pin with
the same potential as the VSS pin.
(c) VDD
This is the positive power supply pin.
(d) VSS
This is the ground potential pin.
Remark Use bypass capacitors (about 0.1
μ
F) as noise and latch up countermeasures with relatively thick wires at
the shortest distance to VDD to VSS line.
2. 5. 11 RESET
This is the active-low system reset input pin for the functions of microcontroller block. When the external reset pin is not
used, connect this pin directly or via a resistor to VDD. W hen the external reset pin is used, design the circuit based on
VDD. For details of the functions, see 3. 5. 5 Clock generator operation, 3. 19 Reset Function, 3. 20 Power-On-
Reset Circuit.
2. 5. 12 REGC
This is the pin for connecting regulator output stabilization capacitance for internal operation. Connect this pin to VSS via
a capacitor (0.47 to 1
μ
F).
Also, use a capacitor with good characteristics, since it is used to stabilize internal voltage.
REGC
VSS
Caution Keep the wiring length as short as possible for the broken-line part in the above figure.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 59
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 13 AVDD3
This is the power supply pin for high-pass filterNote and low-pass filter.
2. 5. 14 SC_IN
This is the input pin for filter signal processing.
2. 5. 15 CLK_SYNCH
This is the pin for inputting synchronous detector control clock.
2. 5. 16 SYNCH_OUT
This is the synchr ono us dete ct or output pin.
2. 5. 17 AGND2
This is the ground pin for gain adjustment amplifier.
2. 5. 18 GAINAMP_OUT
This is the output pin for gain adjustment amplifier.
2. 5. 19 GAINAMP_IN
This is the input pin for gain adjustment amplifier.
2. 5. 20 MPXIN10, MPXIN11, MPXIN20, MPXIN21, MPXIN30, MPXIN31, MPXIN40, MPXIN41, MPXIN50, MPXIN51,
MPXIN60, MPXIN61
These are the input pins for multiplexer.
2. 5. 21 AMP1_OUT, AMP2_OUT, AMP3_OUT
These are the output pins for configurable amplifiers Ch1 to Ch3.
2. 5. 22 DAC1_OUT, DAC2_OUT, DAC3_OUT, DAC4_OUT
These are the output pins for D/A converters Ch1 to Ch4.
2. 5. 23 VREFIN1, VREFIN2, VREFIN3, VREFIN4
These are the reference voltage input pins for configurable amplifiers Ch1 to Ch3, gain adjustment amplifier, low-pass
filer, and high-pass filterNote.
Note 80-pin products only
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 60
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 24 AGND1
This is the ground pin for configurable amplifiers Ch1 to Ch3.
2. 5. 25 AVDD1
This is the power supply pin for configurable amplifiers Ch1 to Ch3.
2. 5. 26 AGND3
This is the GND pin for variable output voltage regulator and reference voltage generator.
2. 5. 27 BGR_OUT
This is the output pin for reference voltage generator.
2. 5. 28 AVDD2
This is the power supply pin for variable output voltage regulator and reference voltage generator.
2. 5. 29 LDO_OUT
This is the output pin for variable output voltage regulator.
2. 5. 30 TEMP_OUT
This is the output pin for temperature sensor.
2. 5. 31 ARESET
This is the active-low system reset input pin for the function of analog block. After turning on DVDD, it is necessary to
input the external reset signal to this pin before starting SPI communication. W hen controlling the external reset signal
by the microcontroller block of this package, it is recommended to directly connect this pin to P130 which is to be a low-
level output port on reset. If the resource pin of ARESET is to be Hi-Z at a short moment, this pin must be connected to
DGND via a resistor. For details of the functions, see 4. 10 Analog Reset.
2. 5. 32 DVDD
This is the power supply pin for SPI.
2. 5. 33 SCLK
This is the serial clock input pin for SPI.
2. 5. 34 SDO
This is the serial data output pin for SPI.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 61
Mar 31, 2014
2. 5. 35 SDI
This is the serial data input pin for SPI.
2. 5. 36 CS
This is the chip select input pin for SPI.
2. 5. 37 DGND
This is the GND pin for SPI.
2. 5. 38 HPF_OUT
This is the output pin for high-pass filter.
2. 5. 39 CLK_HPF
This is the control clock input pin for high-pass filter.
2. 5. 40 CLK_LPF
This is the control clock input pin for low-pass filter.
2. 5. 41 AGND4
This is the GND pin for low-pass filter and high-pass filter.
2. 5. 42 LPF_OUT
This is the output pin for low-pass filter.
2. 5. 43 I.C
The I.C (internally connected) pin has no function and is simply connected inside the chip. This pin must always be left
open.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 62
Mar 31, 2014
CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
3. 1 Outline of This Chapter
The 16-bit microcontroller block in the RL78/G1E corresponds to the RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For the details of
each function in microcontroller block, see the RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
Not all of the functions of the RL78/G1A are available to be used in the RL78/G1E package because not all pins of
function are drawn out of the package. In this chapter, the differences in functions and registers between the RL78/G1A
and the RL78/G1E are described.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 63
Mar 31, 2014
3. 2 Comparison of Each Function with RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
The differences of each function between RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) and RL78/G1A (64-pin
products) are as follows. For details, see the section showed in column of Remarks in the tables below.
(1/4)
Item RL78/G1E RL78/G1A
(64-pin products)
Remarks
64-pin products 80-pin produc ts
Code flash memory (KB ) 32 to 64 32 to 64 32 to 64 See the section 3. 3
about details.
Data flash memory (KB) 4 4 4
RAM (KB) 2 to 4 2 to 4 2 to 4
Memory space 1 MB 1 MB
Process or registers Control registers; PC, PSW, SP Cont rol regis ters; PC, PSW, SP
General-purpose regist er;
(8-bit register × 8) × 4 banks
General-purpose regist er;
(8-bit register × 8) × 4 banks
Special function regis t ers (SFRs ) Special functi on registers (SFRs) Some differences.
See the section 3. 3
about details.
Extended special funct i on regis t ers
(2nd SFRs)
Extended special funct i on regis t ers
(2nd SFRs)
I/O port Total 24 30 56 Some diff erences.
See the section 3. 4
about details.
COMS I/O 20 26 46
COMS input 3 5
COMS output 1 1
N-ch open-
drain I/O (6 V
tolerance)
– 4
Main
system
clock
High-speed
system cl ock
X1 (crystal/ceramic) oscillation,
external main syst em c l ock i nput
(EXCLK)
1 to 20 MHz: VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V,
1 to 8 MHz: VDD = 1.8 to 2.7 V,
1 to 4 MHz: VDD = 1.6 to 1.8 V
X1 (crystal/ceramic) oscillation, external
main system clock input (EXCLK)
1 to 20 MHz: VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V,
1 to 8 MHz: VDD = 1.8 to 2.7 V,
1 to 4 MHz: VDD = 1.6 to 1.8 V
There are some
differenc es between
RL78/G1E and
RL78/G1A.
See the section 3. 5
about details.
Subsyst em cl ock is
not available for
RL78/G1E.
High-speed
on-chip
oscillator
HS (High-speed main) mode:
1 to 32 MHz (VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V),
HS (High-speed main) mode:
1 to 16 MHz (VDD = 2.4 to 5.5 V),
LS (Low-speed main) mode:
1 to 8 MHz (VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V),
LV (Low-voltage main) mode:
1 to 4 MHz (VDD = 1.6 to 5.5 V)
HS (High-speed main) mode:
1 to 32 MHz (VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V),
HS (High-speed main) mode:
1 to 16 MHz (VDD = 2.4 to 3.6 V),
LS (Low-speed main) mode:
1 to 8 MHz (VDD = 1.8 to 3.6 V),
LV (Low-voltage main) mode:
1 to 4 MHz (VDD = 1.6 to 3.6 V)
Subsyst em cl ock XT1 (crystal ) oscillation, external
subsystem clock input (EXCLKS)
32.768 kHz (TYP.): V DD = 1.6 to 3.6 V
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 64
Mar 31, 2014
(2/4)
Item RL78/G1E RL78/G1A
(64-pin products)
Remarks
64-pin products 80-pin products
Low-speed on-chip
oscillator
15 kHz (TYP.): VDD = 1.6 to 5.5 V 15 kHz (TYP.): VDD = 1.6 to 3.6 V S om e dif f erences.
See the section 3. 5
about details.
Subsyst em cl ock is
not available for
RL78/G1E.
Minimum i n struction
execution time
0.03125
μ
s (High-speed on-chip
oscillator: fIH = 32 MHz operation)
0.03125
μ
s (High-speed on-chip
oscillator: fIH = 32 MHz operation)
0.05
μ
s (High-s peed system clock:
fMX = 20 MHz operation)
0.05
μ
s (High-s peed system clock:
fMX = 20 MHz operation)
30.5
μ
s (Subsystem clo c k:
fSUB = 32.768 kHz operation)
Timer 16-bit timer 8 channels 8 channels Some differences.
See the section 3. 6
about details.
Watchdog
Timer
1 channel 1 channel S ee t he section 3. 10
about details.
Real-time clock
(RTC)
1 channel RTC is not provided
in RL78/G1E.
(See 3. 7)
12-bit Interval
time r (I T)
1 channel 1 channel S ee t he section 3. 8
about details.
Timer output 3 channels (PWM outputs: 2 Not e) 7 channels (PWM outputs: 6 Note) See the section 3. 6
about details.
RTC output 1 channel
1 Hz (subsystem clock :
fSUB = 32.768 kHz)
RTC is not provided
in RL78/G1E.
(See 3. 7)
Note The number of PWM outputs varies depending on the setting of channels in use.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 65
Mar 31, 2014
(3/4)
Item RL78/G1E RL78/G1A
(64-pin products)
Remarks
64-pin products 80-pin products
Clock output
/ Buzzer out put
1 c hannel 2 channels There are some
differenc es between
RL78/G1E and
RL78/G1A.
See the section 3. 9
about details.
2.44 kHz, 4.88 kHz,
9.76 kHz, 1.25 MHz,
2.5 MHz, 5 MHz,
10 MHz
(Main system clock:
fMAIN = 20 MHz operation)
2.44 kHz, 4.88 kHz,
9.76 kHz, 1.25 MHz,
2.5 MHz, 5 MHz,
10 MHz (Main system
clock: fMAIN = 20 MHz
operation)
256 Hz, 512 Hz,
1.024 kHz, 2.048 kHz,
4.096 kHz, 8.192 kHz,
16.384 kHz, 32.768 kHz
(Subsys tem clock :
fSUB = 32.768 kHz
operation)
8/12-bit resolution
A/D converter
(AVDD = 1.6 to 3.6 V)
13 channels 17 channels 28 channels Some differences.
See the section 3. 11
about details.
Serial array unit <Unit 0>
CSI: 1 channel/
simplified I2C:
1 channel/
UART: 1 channel
UART: 1 channel
<Unit 1>
CSI: 1 channel/
UART: 1 channel
(LIN-bus supported)
<Unit 0>
CSI: 1 channel/
simplified I2C:
1 channel/
UART: 1 channel
CSI: 1 channel/
simplified I2C:
1 channel/
UART: 1 channel
<Unit 1>
CSI: 2 channel/
simplified I2C:
1 channel/
UART: 1 channel
(LIN-bus supported)
<Unit 0>
CSI: 2 channel/
simplified I2C:
2 channel/
UART: 1 channel
CSI: 2 channel/
simplified I2C:
2 channel/
UART: 1 channel
<Unit 1>
CSI: 2 channel/
simplified I2C:
2 channel/
UART: 1 channel
(LIN-bus supported)
Some diff erences.
See the section 3. 12
about details.
I
2C bus 1 channel Not provi ded i n
RL78/G1E.
(See 3. 13)
Multiplier and di vider/
multiply accumulator 5 functions
(Multiplier, divider, multiply accumulator) 5 functions
(Multiplier, divider,
multiply accumulator)
See the section 3. 14
about details.
DMA controll er 2 channels 2 channels See the section 3. 15
about details.
Vectored
interrupt
sources
Internal 25 27 Some differences.
See the section 3. 16
about details.
External 2 5 13
Key interrupt 4 (7)Note c hannels 4 (8)Note channels 10 channels Some diff erences.
See the section 3. 17
about details.
Note Functions in parentheses in the above figure can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register
(PIOR).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 66
Mar 31, 2014
(4/4)
Item RL78/G1E RL78/G1A
(64-pin products)
Remarks
64-pin products 80-pin produc ts
Standby function HALT, STOP, SNOOZE mode HALT, STOP, SNOOZE mode See 3. 18.
Reset functi on 7 reset source 7 reset source See 3. 19.
Power-on-reset ci rcuit Power-on-res et: 1.51 +/- 0.03V
Power-down-reset: 1.50 +/- 0.03V
Power-on-reset: 1.51 +/ - 0.03V
Power-down-reset: 1.50 +/- 0.03V
See 3. 20.
Voltage detect or Detection l evel : 3 stages Detection level: 12 stages Some differences.
See the section 3. 21
about details.
Safety funct i ons - Flash m emory CRC operat i on function
- CRC operation funct i on
- RAM parity error detection function
- RAM guard function
- SFR guard function
- Invalid m emory acc ess det ection
function
- Frequency detecti on functi on
- A/D test function
- Flash memory CRC operation funct i on
- CRC operation funct i on
- RAM parity error detection function
- RAM guard function
- SFR guard function
- Invalid m emory acc ess det ection
function
- Frequency detecti on functi on
- A/D test function
Some diff erences.
See the section 3. 22
about details.
Regulator 1 channel 1 channel See 3. 23
Option byte Available Available
Some diff erences.
See the section 3. 24
about details.
Flash memory Available Available Som e differences.
See the section 3. 25
about details.
On-chip debug function Available Available See 3. 26
BCD correcti on circuit Available A vail abl e See 3. 27
Instr u ction se t Data transfer (8/16 bits)
Adder and subtractor/logical operation
(8/16 bits)
Multiplication (8 bits × 8 bits)
Rotate, barrel shift,
and bit manipulation (Set, reset, test,
and Boolean operation), etc.
Data transfer (8/16 bits)
Adder and subtractor / logical operation
(8/16 bits)
Multiplication (8 bits × 8 bits)
Rotate, barrel shift, and bit
manipulati on (Set, reset , t est, and
Boolean operation), etc.
See 3. 28
Power supply volt age VDD = 1.6 to 5.5 V VDD = 1.6 to 3.6 V VDD range is
different.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 67
Mar 31, 2014
3. 3 CPU Architecture
In this section, the differences of the functions and registers from RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are described. For
details, see CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECURE in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 3. 1 Memory space
See 3. 1 Memory Space in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 3. 2 Processor registers
3. 3. 2. 1 Control registers
See 3. 2. 1 Control registers in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 3. 2. 2 General-purpose registers
See 3. 2. 2 General-purpose registers in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 3. 2. 3 ES and CS registers
See 3. 2. 3 ES and CS registers in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 68
Mar 31, 2014
3. 3. 2. 4 Special function registers (SFRs)
The differences in special function registers (SFRs) between RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) and
RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown in the tables below.
(1) 64-pin products
Table 3-1. List of Differences in Special Function Registers (SFRs) (1/4)
Address RL78/G1E (64-pin product s) RL78/ G1A (64-pin products)
SFRs Name Symbol SFRs Name Symbol
FFF00H Port register 0
Note P0 Port register 0 P 0
FFF01H Port register 1
Note P1 Port register 1 P 1
FFF02H Port register 2
Note P2 Port register 2 P 2
FFF03H Port register 3 P 3
FFF04H Port register 4
Note P4 Port register 4 P 4
FFF05H Port register 5 P 5
FFF06H Port register 6 P 6
FFF07H Port register 7
Note P7 Port register 7 P 7
FFF0CH Port register 12
Note P12 Port regis t er 12 P 12
FFF0DH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P13 P ort register 13 P13
FFF0EH Port register 14 P14
FFF0FH Port register 15 P15
FFF10H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TXD0/
SIO00
SDR00 Serial data register 00 TXD0/
SIO00
SDR 00
FFF11H
FFF12H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) RXD0/
SIO01 SDR01 Serial data register 01 RXD0/
SIO01 SDR01
FFF13H
FFF18H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR00 Timer data register 00 TDR00
FFF19H
FFF1AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR01L TDR01 Timer data register 01 TDR01L TDR01
FFF1BH
TDR01H TDR01H
FFF1EH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADCR 12-bit A/D conversion result register ADCR
FFF1FH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin) ADCRH 8-bit A/D conversion result register ADCRH
FFF20H Port mode register 0
Note P M0 Port mode register 0 PM0
FFF21H Port mode register 1
Note P M1 Port mode register 1 PM1
FFF22H Port mode register 2
Note P M2 Port mode register 2 PM2
FFF23H Port mode regist er 3 PM3
FFF24H Port mode register 4
Note P M4 Port mode register 4 PM4
FFF25H Port mode regist er 5 PM5
FFF26H Port mode register 6
Note P M6 Port mode register 6 PM6
FFF27H Port mode register 7
Note P M7 Port mode register 7 PM7
FFF2CH Port mode register 12 PM12
FFF2EH Port mode register 14
Note PM14 Port mode register 14 PM14
FFF2FH Port mode register 15
Note PM15 Port mode register 15 PM15
FFF30H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADM0 A/D convert er mode register 0 ADM0
FFF31H Analog input channel
specification register Note ADS Analog input channel
specification register ADS
FFF32H A/D converter mode register 1 Note ADM1 A/D converter mode register 1 ADM1
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 69
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-1. List of Differences in Special Function Registers (SFRs) (2/4)
Address RL78/G1E (64-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin product s)
SFRs Name Symbol SFRs Name Symbol
FFF34H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) KRCTL Key return control regist er KRCTL
FFF35H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) KRF Key return flag regist er KRF
FFF36H Key ret urn mode control register 1 KRM1
FFF37H Key return mode control register 0 Note KRM0 Key return mode control regist er 0 KRM0
FFF38H External interrupt rising edge
enable regist er 0 Note
EGP0 External interrupt rising edge
enable regist er 0
EGP0
FFF39H External interrupt falling edge
enable regist er 0 Note
EGN0 External interrupt falling edge
enable regist er 0
EGN0
FFF3AH External interrupt rising edge
enable regist er 1
EGP1
FFF3BH E xternal i nt errupt falling edge
enable regist er 1
EGN1
FFF44H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TXD1/
SIO10
SDR02 Serial data register 02 TXD1/
SIO10
SDR02
FFF45H
FFF46H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) RXD1/
SIO11 SDR03 Serial data register 03 RXD1/
SIO11 SDR03
FFF47H
FFF48H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TXD2/
SIO20
SDR10 Serial data register 10 TXD2/
SIO20
SDR10
FFF49H
FFF4AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) RXD2/
SIO21 SDR11 Serial data register 11 RXD2/
SIO21 SDR11
FFF4BH
FFF50H II CA shift register 0 IICA0
FFF51H II CA st atus regi st er 0 IICS0
FFF52H II CA flag register 0 IICF0
FFF64H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR02 Timer data register 02 TDR02
FFF65H
FFF66H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
TDR03L
TDR03 Tim er data register 03
TDR03L
TDR03
FFF67H
TDR03H TDR03H
FFF68H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR04
Timer data register 04 TDR04
FFF69H
FFF6AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR05
Timer data register 05 TDR05
FFF6BH
FFF6CH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR06
Timer data register 06 TDR06
FFF6DH
FFF6EH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR07
Timer data register 07 TDR07
FFF6FH
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 70
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-1. List of Differences in Special Function Registers (SFRs) (3/4)
Address RL78/G1E (64-pin product s) RL78/G1A (64-pin product s)
SFRs Name Sym bol S F Rs Nam e Symbol
FFF90H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ITMC Interval timer control register ITMC
FFF91H
FFF92H Second count register SEC
FFF93H Minute count register MIN
FFF94H Hour count register HOUR
FFF95H Week count register WEEK
FFF96H Day count register DAY
FFF97H Month count register MONTH
FFF98H Year count register YEAR
FFF99H Watch error correction register SUBCUD
FFF9AH Alarm minute register ALARMWM
FFF9BH Alarm hour regis t er ALARMWH
FFF9CH Alarm week regist er ALARMWW
FFF9DH Real-time clock control register 0 RTCC0
FFF9EH Real-time clock control register 1 RTCC1
FFFA0H Clock operation mode control register Note CMC Clock operation mode control register CMC
FFFA1H Clock operation status control register Note CSC Clock operation status control register CSC
FFFA2H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) OSTC Oscillation stabilization time
counter status register
OSTC
FFFA3H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) OSTS Oscillation stabilization time
select register
OSTS
FFFA4H System clo ck control regi ste r Note CKC System clock control register CKC
FFFA5H Clock output sel ect register 0 CKS0
FFFA6H Clock output sel ect register 1 CKS1
FFFA8H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) RESF Reset control flag register RESF
FFFA9H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) LVIM Volt age det ection register LVIM
FFFAAH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) LVIS Voltage detection level register LVIS
FFFABH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) WDTE Watchdog timer enable regist er WDTE
FFFACH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) CRCIN CRC input register CRCIN
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 71
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-1. List of Differences in Special Function Registers (SFRs) (4/4)
Address RL78/G1E (64-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
SFRs Name Symbol SFRs Name Symbol
FFFB0H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DSA0 DMA SFR address register 0 DSA0
FFFB1H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DSA1 DMA SFR address register 1 DSA1
FFFB2H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRA0L D RA 0 DM A R AM ad dre ss reg iste r 0L DRA0L D RA 0
FFFB3H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRA0H DM A R AM ad dr ess r egi ster 0H DRA0H
FFFB4H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRA1L D R A1 DM A RAM ad dre ss reg iste r 1L DRA1L DRA 1
FFFB5H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRA1H DM A R AM ad dr ess r egi ster 1H DRA1H
FFFB6H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DBC0L DB C0 DMA byte count register 0L DBC0L DBC0
FFFB7H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DBC0H DMA byte count register 0H DBC0H
FFFB8H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DBC1L DB C1 DMA byte count register 1L DBC1L DBC1
FFFB9H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DBC1H DMA byte count register 1H DBC1H
FFFBAH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DMC0 DMA mode control regist er 0 DMC0
FFFBBH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DMC1 DMA mode control regist er 1 DMC1
FFFBCH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRC0 DMA operation control register 0 DRC0
FFFBDH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRC1 DMA operation control register 1 DRC1
FFFD0H Interrupt mask flag register 2L Note IF2L IF2 Interrupt mask flag register 2L IF2L IF2
FFFD1H Interrupt mask flag register 2H Note IF2H Interrupt mask flag register 2H IF2H
FFFD4H Interrupt mask flag register 0L Note MK2L MK2 Interrupt mask flag register 0L MK2L MK2
FFFD5H Interrupt mask flag register 2H Note MK2H Interrupt mask flag register 2H MK2H
FFFD8H Priority specification flag register 02L Note PR02L PR02 Priority specificat i on flag regist er 02L PR02L PR02
FFFD9H Priority specification flag register 02H Note PR02H Pri ori ty specification flag regist er 02H PR02H
FFFDCH Priority specification flag register 12L Note PR12L PR12 Priori ty specification flag register 12L PR12L PR12
FFFDDH Priority specification flag register 12H Note PR12H Priority specification flag regist er 12H PR12H
FFFE0H Interrupt mask flag register 0L Note IF0L IF0 Interrupt mask flag register 0L IF0L IF0
FFFE1H Interrupt mask flag register 0H Note IF0H Interrupt mask flag register 0H IF0H
FFFE2H Interrupt mask flag register 1L Note IF1L IF1 Interrupt mask flag register 1L IF1L IF1
FFFE3H Interrupt mask flag register 1H Note IF1H Interrupt mask flag register 1H IF1H
FFFE4H Interrupt mask flag register 0L Note MK0L MK0 Interrupt mask flag register 0L MK0L MK0
FFFE5H Interrupt mask flag register 0H Note MK0H Interrupt mask flag register 0H MK0H
FFFE6H Interrupt mask flag register 1L Note MK1L MK1 Interrupt mask flag register 1L MK1L MK1
FFFE7H Interrupt mask flag register 1H Note MK1H Interrupt mask flag register 1H MK1H
FFFE8H Priority specification flag register 00L Note PR00L PR00 Priority specification flag register 00L PR00L PR00
FFFE9H Priority specification flag register 00H Note PR00H Priority spec ific at i o n flag register 00H PR00H
FFFEAH Priority specification flag register 01L Note PR01L PR01 Pri ori ty specification flag register 01L P R01L PR01
FFFEBH Priority specification flag register 01H Note PR01H Priority specification flag register 01H PR01H
FFFECH Priority specification flag register 10L Note PR10L PR10 Priority specificat i on flag register 10L PR10L PR10
FFFEDH Priority specification flag register 10H Note PR10H Priori ty specification flag regist er 10H PR10H
FFFEEH Priority specification flag register 11L Note PR11L PR11 Pri ori ty specification flag register 11L P R11L PR11
FFFEFH Priority specification flag register 11H Note PR11H Priorit y spec if ication flag register 11H P R11H
FFFF0H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDAL Multiplication/division data
register A (L) MDAL
FFFF1H
FFFF2H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDAH Multiplication/division data
register A (H) MDAH
FFFF3H
FFFF4H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDBH Multiplication/division data
register B (L) MDBH
FFFF5H
FFFF6H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDBL Multiplication/division data
register B (H) MDBL
FFFF7H
FFFFEH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PMC Processor m ode control regi ster PMC
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 72
Mar 31, 2014
(2) 80-pin products
Table 3-2. List of Differences in Special Function Registers (SFRs) (1/4)
Address RL78/G1E (80-pin product s) RL78/ G1A (64-pin products)
SFRs Name Symbol SFRs Name Symbol
FFF00H Port register 0
Note P0 Port register 0 P 0
FFF01H Port register 1
Note P1 Port register 1 P 1
FFF02H Port register 2
Note P2 Port register 2 P 2
FFF03H Port register 3 P 3
FFF04H Port register 4
Note P4 Port register 4 P 4
FFF05H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P 5 P ort register 5 P5
FFF06H Port register 6 P 6
FFF07H Port register 7
Note P7 Port register 7 P 7
FFF0CH Port register 12
Note P12 Port regis t er 12 P 12
FFF0DH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P13 P ort register 13 P13
FFF0EH Port register 14
Note P14 Port register 14 P14
FFF0FH Port register 15 P15
FFF10H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TXD0/
SIO00
SDR00 Serial data register 00 TXD0/
SIO00
SDR 00
FFF11H
FFF12H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) RXD0/
SIO01 SDR01 Serial data register 01 RXD0/
SIO01 SDR01
FFF13H
FFF18H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR00 Timer data register 00 TDR00
FFF19H
FFF1AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR01L TDR01 Timer data register 01 TDR01L TDR01
FFF1BH
TDR01H TDR01H
FFF1EH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADCR 12-bit A/D conversion result register ADCR
FFF1FH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin) ADCRH 8-bit A/D convers i on result register ADCRH
FFF20H Port mode register 0
Note P M0 Port mode register 0 PM0
FFF21H Port mode register 1
Note P M1 Port mode register 1 PM1
FFF22H Port mode register 2
Note P M2 Port mode register 2 PM2
FFF23H Port mode regist er 3 PM3
FFF24H Port mode register 4
Note P M4 Port mode register 4 PM4
FFF25H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P M5 Port mode register 5 PM5
FFF26H Port mode register 6
Note P M6 Port mode register 6 PM6
FFF27H Port mode register 7
Note P M7 Port mode register 7 PM7
FFF2CH Port mode register 12 PM12
FFF2EH Port mode register 14
Note PM14 Port mode register 14 PM14
FFF2FH Port mode register 15
Note PM15 Port mode register 15 PM15
FFF30H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADM0 A/D convert er mode register 0 ADM0
FFF31H Analog input channel
specification register Note ADS Analog input channel
specification register ADS
FFF32H A/D converter mode register 1 Note ADM1 A/D converter mode register 1 ADM1
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 73
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-2. List of Differences in Special Function Registers (SFRs) (2/4)
Address RL78/G1E (80-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin product s)
SFRs Name Symbol SFRs Name Symbol
FFF34H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) KRCTL Key return control regist er KRCTL
FFF35H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) KRF Key return flag regist er KRF
FFF36H Key ret urn mode control register 1 KRM1
FFF37H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) K RM0 Key return mode control register 0 KRM0
FFF38H External interrupt rising edge
enable regist er 0 Note
EGP0 External int errupt rising edge
enable regist er 0
EGP0
FFF39H E xternal interrupt falling edge
enable regist er 0 Note
EGN0 External interrupt falling edge
enable regist er 0
EGN0
FFF3AH External interrupt rising edge
enable regist er 1
EGP1
FFF3BH E xternal i nt errupt falling edge
enable regist er 1
EGN1
FFF44H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TXD1/
SIO10
SDR02 Serial data register 02 TXD1/
SIO10
SDR02
FFF45H
FFF46H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) RXD1/
SIO11 SDR03 Serial data register 03 RXD1/
SIO11 SDR03
FFF47H
FFF48H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TXD2/
SIO20
SDR10 Serial data register 10 TXD2/
SIO20
SDR10
FFF49H
FFF4AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) RXD2/
SIO21 SDR11 Serial data register 11 RXD2/
SIO21 SDR11
FFF4BH
FFF50H II CA shift register 0 IICA0
FFF51H II CA st atus regi st er 0 IICS0
FFF52H II CA flag register 0 IICF0
FFF64H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR02 Timer data register 02 TDR02
FFF65H
FFF66H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
TDR03L
TDR03 Tim er data register 03
TDR03L
TDR03
FFF67H
TDR03H TDR03H
FFF68H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR04
Timer data register 04 TDR04
FFF69H
FFF6AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR05
Timer data register 05 TDR05
FFF6BH
FFF6CH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR06
Timer data register 06 TDR06
FFF6DH
FFF6EH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TDR07
Timer data register 07 TDR07
FFF6FH
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 74
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-2. List of Differences in Special Function Registers (SFRs) (3/4)
Address RL78/G1E (80-pin product s) RL78/G1A (64-pin product s)
SFRs Name Sym bol S F Rs Nam e Symbol
FFF90H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ITMC Interval timer control register ITMC
FFF91H
FFF92H Second count register SEC
FFF93H Minute count register MIN
FFF94H Hour count register HOUR
FFF95H Week count register WEEK
FFF96H Day count register DAY
FFF97H Month count register MONTH
FFF98H Year count register YEAR
FFF99H Watch error correction register SUBCUD
FFF9AH Alarm minute register ALARMWM
FFF9BH Alarm hour regis t er ALARMWH
FFF9CH Alarm week regist er ALARMWW
FFF9DH Real-time clock control register 0 RTCC0
FFF9EH Real-time clock control register 1 RTCC1
FFFA0H Clock operation mode control register Note CMC Clock operation mode control register CMC
FFFA1H Clock operation status control register Note CSC Clock operation status control register CSC
FFFA2H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) OSTC Oscillation stabilization time
counter status register
OSTC
FFFA3H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) OSTS Oscillation stabilization time
select register
OSTS
FFFA4H System clo ck control regi ste r Note CKC System clock control register CKC
FFFA5H Clock output select register 0 Note CKS0 Clock output select regis t er 0 CKS0
FFFA6H Clock output sel ect register 1 CKS1
FFFA8H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) RESF Reset control flag register RESF
FFFA9H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) LVIM Volt age det ection register LVIM
FFFAAH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) LVIS Voltage detection level register LVIS
FFFABH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) WDTE Watchdog timer enable regist er WDTE
FFFACH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) CRCIN CRC input register CRCIN
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 75
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-2. List of Differences in Special Function Registers (SFRs) (4/4)
Address RL78/G1E (80-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
SFRs Name Symbol SFRs Name Symbol
FFFB0H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DSA0 DMA SFR address register 0 DSA0
FFFB1H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DSA1 DMA SFR address register 1 DSA1
FFFB2H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRA0L D RA 0 DM A R AM ad dre ss reg iste r 0L DRA0L D RA 0
FFFB3H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRA0H DM A R AM ad dr ess r egi ster 0H DRA0H
FFFB4H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRA1L D R A1 DM A RAM ad dre ss reg iste r 1L DRA1L DRA 1
FFFB5H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRA1H DM A R AM ad dr ess r egi ster 1H DRA1H
FFFB6H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DBC0L DB C0 DMA byte count register 0L DBC0L DBC0
FFFB7H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DBC0H DMA byte count register 0H DBC0H
FFFB8H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DBC1L DB C1 DMA byte count register 1L DBC1L DBC1
FFFB9H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DBC1H DMA byte count register 1H DBC1H
FFFBAH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DMC0 DMA mode control regist er 0 DMC0
FFFBBH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DMC1 DMA mode control regist er 1 DMC1
FFFBCH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRC0 DMA operation control register 0 DRC0
FFFBDH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DRC1 DMA operation control register 1 DRC1
FFFD0H Interrupt mask flag register 2L Note IF2L IF2 Interrupt mask flag register 2L IF2L IF2
FFFD1H Interrupt mask flag register 2H Note IF2H Interrupt mask flag register 2H IF2H
FFFD4H Interrupt mask flag register 0L Note MK2L MK2 Interrupt mask flag register 0L MK2L MK2
FFFD5H Interrupt mask flag register 2H Note MK2H Interrupt mask flag register 2H MK2H
FFFD8H Priority specification flag register 02L Note PR02L PR02 Priority specificat i on flag regist er 02L PR02L PR02
FFFD9H Priority specification flag register 02H Note PR02H Pri ori ty specification flag regist er 02H PR02H
FFFDCH Priority specification flag register 12L Note PR12L P R12 Priority specificat i on flag register 12L PR12L PR12
FFFDDH Priority specification flag register 12H Note PR12H Priority specification flag regist er 12H PR12H
FFFE0H Interrupt mask flag register 0L Note IF0L IF0 Interrupt mask flag register 0L IF0L IF0
FFFE1H Interrupt mask flag register 0H Note IF0H Interrupt mask flag register 0H IF0H
FFFE2H Interrupt mask flag register 1L Note IF1L IF1 Interrupt mask flag register 1L IF1L IF1
FFFE3H Interrupt mask flag register 1H Note IF1H Interrupt mask flag register 1H IF1H
FFFE4H Interrupt mask flag register 0L Note MK0L MK0 Interrupt mask flag register 0L MK0L MK0
FFFE5H Interrupt mask flag register 0H Note MK0H Interrupt mask flag register 0H MK0H
FFFE6H Interrupt mask flag register 1L Note MK1L MK1 Interrupt mask flag register 1L MK1L MK1
FFFE7H Interrupt mask flag register 1H Note MK1H Interrupt mask flag register 1H MK1H
FFFE8H Priority specification flag register 00L Note PR00L PR00 Priority specification flag register 00L PR00L PR00
FFFE9H Priority specification flag register 00H Note PR00H Priority spec ific at i o n flag register 00H PR00H
FFFEAH Priority specification flag register 01L Note PR01L PR01 Pri ori ty specification flag register 01L P R01L PR01
FFFEBH Priority specification flag register 01H Note PR01H Priority specification flag register 01H PR01H
FFFECH Priority specification flag register 10L Note PR10L PR10 Priority specificat i on flag register 10L PR10L PR10
FFFEDH Priority specification flag register 10H Note PR10H Priori ty specification flag regist er 10H PR10H
FFFEEH Priority specification flag register 11L Note PR11L PR11 Pri ori ty specification flag register 11L P R11L PR11
FFFEFH Priority specification flag register 11H Note PR11H Priorit y spec if ication flag register 11H P R11H
FFFF0H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDAL Multiplication/division data
register A (L) MDAL
FFFF1H
FFFF2H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDAH Multiplication/division data
register A (H) MDAH
FFFF3H
FFFF4H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDBH Multiplication/division data
register B (L) MDBH
FFFF5H
FFFF6H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDBL Multiplication/division data
register B (H) MDBL
FFFF7H
FFFFEH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PMC Processor m ode control regi ster PMC
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 76
Mar 31, 2014
3. 3. 2. 5 Expanded special function registers (2nd SFRs)
The differences in expanded special function registers (2nd SFRs) between RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin
products) and RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown in the tables below.
(1) 64-pin products
Table 3-3. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (1/6)
Address RL78/G1E (64-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd SFRs Name Symbol
F0010H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADM2 A/D converter mode register 2 ADM2
F0011H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADUL Conversion result comparison
upper limit setting register
ADUL
F0012H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADLL Conversion result comparison
lower limit setting regis ter
ADLL
F0013H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADTES A/D test register ADTES
F0030H Pul l -up resi stor option register 0 Note PU0 Pull-up resistor option register 0 PU0
F0031H Pul l -up resi stor option register 1 Note PU1 Pull-up resist or option register 1 PU1
F0033H Pull-up resist or option register 3 PU3
F0034H Pul l -up resi stor option register 4 Note PU4 Pull-up resist or option register 4 PU4
F0035H Pull-up resist or option register 5 PU5
F0037H Pul l -up resi stor option register 7 Note PU7 Pull-up resist or option register 7 PU7
F003CH P u l l -up resi stor option register 12 P U12
F003EH Pul l -up resi stor option register 14 P U14
F0040H Port i nput mode regist er 0 Note PIM0 Port input mode register 0 PIM0
F0041H Port i nput mode regist er 1 Note PIM1 Port input mode register 1 PIM1
F0050H Port output mode register 0 Note POM0 Port output mode register 0 POM0
F0051H Port output mode register 1 Note POM1 Port output mode register 1 POM1
F0055H Port output mode register 5 POM5
F0057H Port output mode register 7 POM7
F0060H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PMC0 Port mode control register 0 PMC0
F0061H Port mode control register 1 Note PMC1 Port mode control register 1 PMC1
F0063H Port mode control register 3 PMC3
F0064H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PMC4 Port mode control register 4 PMC4
F0065H Port mode control register 5 PMC5
F0067H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PMC7 Port mode control register 7 PMC7
F006CH Port mode control register 12 PMC12
F0070H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) NFEN0 Noi se filter enable register 0 NFEN0
F0071H Nois e filter enabl e register 1 Note NFEN1 Noise filter enable register 1 NFEN1
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 77
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-3. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (2/6)
Address RL78/G1E (64-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin product s)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd SFRs Name Symbol
F0073H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) IS C Input switch control register ISC
F0074H Timer input select register 0 Note TIS0 Timer input select register 0 TIS0
F0076H A/D port configuration regist er No te ADP C A/D port configuration regist er A DP C
F0077H Peripheral I/O redirecti on regi st er Note PIOR Peripheral I/O redirection register PIOR
F0078H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) IAWCTL In va lid memor y a ccess
detection control register
IAWCTL
F007CH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) GA IDIS Global analog input disable register GAIDIS
F007DH Global digital input disable regis t er GDIDIS
F0090H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DFLCTL Data flash control register DFLCTL
F00A0H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) HIOTRM High-s peed on-chip oscillator
trimming register
HIOTRM
F00A8H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) HOCODIV High-speed on-chi p oscillator
frequency s elect regis ter
HOCODIV
F00E0H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDCL Multiplication/division
data register C (L)
MDCL
F00E2H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDCH Multiplication/division
data register C (H)
MDCH
F00E8H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDUC Multiplication/division control register MDUC
F00F0H Peripheral enabl e regis ter 0 Note PER0 Peripheral enable register 0 PER0
F00F3H Subsystem clock supply mode
control register Note OSMC Subsystem clock supply mode
control register OSMC
F00F5H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) RP E CTL RAM parity error cont rol register RP E CTL
F00FEH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) BCDA DJ BCD adj ust result register BCDADJ
F0100H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
SSR00L
SSR00 Serial status register 00
SSR00L
SSR00
F0101H
F0102H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
SSR01L
SSR01 Serial status register 01
SSR01L
SSR01
F0103H
F0104H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
SSR02L
SSR02 Serial status register 02
SSR02L
SSR02
F0105H
F0106H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
SSR03L
SSR03 Serial status register 03
SSR03L
SSR03
F0107H
F0108H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SI R00L SIR00 Serial fl ag cl ear trigger register 00 SIR00L SIR00
F0109H
F010AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SIR01L SIR01 Serial flag cl ear trigger register 01 SIR01L SIR01
F010BH
F010CH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SIR02L S IR02 Serial fl ag clear trigger regis ter 02 SIR02L SI R02
F010DH
F010EH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SIR03L SIR03 Serial flag cl ear trigger register 03 SIR03L SIR03
F010FH
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 78
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-3. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (3/6)
Address RL78/G1E (64-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd SFRs Name Symbol
F0110H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SMR00 Serial mode register 00 SMR00
F0111H
F0112H Serial mode register 01 Note SMR01 Serial mode register 01 SMR01
F0113H
F0114H Serial mode register 02 Note SMR02 Serial mode register 02 SMR02
F0115H
F0116H Serial mode register 03 Note SMR03 Serial mode register 03 SMR03
F0117H
F0118H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SCR00 Serial communic ation operation
setting regist er 00 SCR00
F0119H
F011AH Serial communication operation
setting regist er 01 No te SCR01 Serial communication operation
setting regist er 01 SCR01
F011BH
F011CH Serial communication operation
setting regist er 02 No te SCR02 Serial communication operation
setting regist er 02 SCR02
F011DH
F011EH Serial communication operation
setting regist er 03 No te SCR03 Serial communication operation
setting regist er 03 SCR03
F011FH
F0120H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SE0L SE0 Serial channel enable st atus register 0 SE0L SE 0
F0121H
F0122H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SS0L SS0 Serial channel start register 0 SS0L SS0
F0123H
F0124H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ST0L ST0 Serial channel stop regi st er 0 ST0L ST 0
F0125H
F0126H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SPS0L SPS0 Serial clock select register 0 SPS0L SPS0
F0127H
F0128H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SO0 Serial output register 0 SO0
F0129H
F012AH Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SOE0L SOE0 Seri al output enable regi ster 0 SOE0L SOE 0
F012BH
F0134H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SOL0L SOL0 Serial output level regist er 0 S OL0L SOL0
F0135H
F0138H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SSC0L SSC0 S e ri al standby control register 0 S SC0L SSC0
F0140H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SSR10L SSR10 Serial stat us register 10 SSR10L SSR10
F0141H
F0142H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SSR11L SSR11 Serial stat us register 11 SSR11L SSR11
F0143H
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 79
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-3. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (4/6)
Address RL78/G1E (64-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pi n products)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd SFRs Name Symbol
F0148H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SI R10L SIR10 S eri al fl ag clear trigger regis ter 10 SIR10L SIR10
F0149H
F014AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SI R11L SIR11 S eri al fl ag clear trigger regis ter 11 SIR11L SIR11
F014BH
F0150H S eri al m ode regist er 10 Note SMR10 Serial mode register 10 SMR10
F0151H
F0152H S eri al m ode regist er 11 Note SMR11 Serial mode register 11 SMR11
F0153H
F0158H Serial communication operation setting
register 10 Note
SCR10 Serial communication operation setting
register 10
SCR10
F0159H
F015AH Serial communication operation setting
register 11 Note
SCR11 Serial communication operation setting
register 11
SCR11
F015BH
F0160H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SE 1L SE 1 Serial channel enable status register 1 SE1L SE1
F0161H
F0162H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SS 1L SS 1 Serial channel start register 1 SS1L SS1
F0163H
F0164H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ST1L ST1 Serial channel stop register 1 ST1L ST1
F0165H
F0166H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SPS1L SPS1 Serial clock select register 1 SPS1L SPS1
F0167H
F0168H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SO1 S eri al output register 1 SO1
F0169H
F016AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SOE 1L SOE 1 S eri al output enable regi ster 1 SOE1L SOE1
F016BH
F0174H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SOL1L SOL1 Serial output level register 1 SOL1L SOL1
F0175H
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 80
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-3. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (5/6)
Address RL78/G1E (64-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin product s)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd SFRs Name Symbol
F0180H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR00 Timer counter regist er 00 TCR00
F0181H
F0182H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR01 Timer counter regist er 01 TCR01
F0183H
F0184H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR02 Timer counter regist er 02 TCR02
F0185H
F0186H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR03 Timer counter regist er 03 TCR03
F0187H
F0188H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR04 Timer counter regist er 04 TCR04
F0189H
F018AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR05 Timer counter regist er 05 TCR05
F018BH
F018CH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR06 Timer counter register 06 TCR06
F018DH
F018EH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR07 Timer counter regist er 07 TCR07
F018FH
F0190H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TMR00 Tim er mode register 00 TMR00
F0191H
F0192H Timer mode register 01 Note TMR01 Timer mode register 01 TMR01
F0193H
F0194H Timer mode register 02 Note TMR02 Timer mode register 02 TMR02
F0195H
F0196H Timer mode register 03 Note TMR03 Timer mode register 03 TMR03
F0197H
F0198H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TMR04 Tim er mode register 04 TMR04
F0199H
F019AH Timer mode register 05 Note TMR05 Timer mode register 05 TMR05
F019BH
F019CH Timer mode register 06 Note TMR06 Timer mode regist er 06 TMR06
F019DH
F019EH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TMR07 Timer mode register 07 TMR07
F019FH
F01A0H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR00L TSR00 Timer status register 00 TSR00L TSR00
F01A1H
F01A2H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR01L TSR01 Timer status register 01 TSR01L TSR01
F01A3H
F01A4H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR02L TSR02 Timer status register 02 TSR02L TSR02
F01A5H
F01A6H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR03L TSR03 Timer status register 03 TSR03L TSR03
F01A7H
F01A8H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR04L TSR04 Timer status register 04 TSR04L TSR04
F01A9H
F01AAH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR05L TSR05 Timer status register 05 TSR05L TSR05
F01ABH
F01ACH S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR06L TS R06 Timer status register 06 TSR06L TS R06
F01ADH
F01AEH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR07L TSR07 Timer status register 07 TSR07L TSR07
F01AFH
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 81
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-3. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (6/6)
Address RL78/G1E (64-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin product s)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd S F Rs Nam e Sym bol
F01B0H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TE0L TE0 Timer channel enable status register 0 TE0L TE0
F01B1H – –
F01B2H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TS0L TS0 Timer channel start register 0 TS0L TS0
F01B3H – –
F01B4H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TT0L TT0 Timer channel stop register 0 TT0L TT0
F01B5H – –
F01B6H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TPS0 Timer clock select register 0 TPS0
F01B7H
F01B8H Timer output register 0 Note TO0L TO0 Timer output register 0 TO0L TO0
F01B9H – –
F01BAH Timer output enable register 0 Note TOE0L TOE0 Timer output enable register 0 TOE0L TOE0
F01BBH – –
F01BCH Tim er output level register 0 Note TOL0L TOL0 Timer output level register 0 TOL0L TOL0
F01BDH – –
F01BEH Timer output mode register 0 Note TOM0L TOM0 Tim er out put mode regist er 0 TOM0L TOM0
F01BFH – –
F0230H I ICA control register 00 IICCTL00
F0231H I ICA control register 01 IICCTL01
F0232H I ICA low-level width setting regi ster 0 IICWL0
F0233H I ICA high-level width setting register 0 IICWH0
F0234H S l ave address register 0 SVA40
F02F0H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) CRC0CT L Flash m emory CRC c ontrol regis ter CRC0CTL
F02F2H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P G CRCL Flash memory CRC operation
result register
PGCRCL
F02FAH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) CRCD CRC data register CRCD
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 82
Mar 31, 2014
(2) 80-pin products
Table 3-4. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (1/6)
Address RL78/G1E (80-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd SFRs Name Symbol
F0010H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADM2 A/D converter mode register 2 ADM2
F0011H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADUL Conversion result comparison
upper limit setting register
ADUL
F0012H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADLL Conversion result comparison
lower limit setting regis ter
ADLL
F0013H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ADTES A/D test register ADTES
F0030H Pul l -up resi stor option register 0 Note PU0 Pull-up resistor option register 0 PU0
F0031H Pul l -up resi stor option register 1 Note PU1 Pull-up resist or option register 1 PU1
F0033H Pull-up resist or option register 3 PU3
F0034H Pul l -up resi stor option register 4 Note PU4 Pull-up resist or option register 4 PU4
F0035H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PU5 Pull-up resistor opti on regist er 5 PU5
F0037H Pul l -up resi stor option register 7 Note PU7 Pull-up resist or option register 7 PU7
F003CH P u l l -up resi stor option register 12 P U12
F003EH Pull-up resist or option register 14 Note PU14 Pull -up resi stor option register 14 P U14
F0040H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PIM0 Port input mode register 0 PIM0
F0041H Port i nput mode regist er 1 Note PIM1 Port input mode register 1 PIM1
F0050H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) POM0 Port output mode register 0 POM0
F0051H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) POM1 Port output mode register 1 POM1
F0055H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) POM5 Port output mode register 5 POM5
F0057H Port output mode register 7 POM7
F0060H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PMC0 Port mode control register 0 PMC0
F0061H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PMC1 Port mode control register 1 PMC1
F0063H Port mode control register 3 PMC3
F0064H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PMC4 Port mode control register 4 PMC4
F0065H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PMC5 Port mode control register 5 PMC5
F0067H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) PMC7 Port mode control register 7 PMC7
F006CH Port mode control register 12 PMC12
F0070H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) NFEN0 Noi se filter enable register 0 NFEN0
F0071H Nois e filter enabl e register 1 Note NFEN1 Noise filter enable register 1 NFEN1
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 83
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-4. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (2/6)
Address RL78/ G1E (80-pi n products) RL78/G1A (64-pin product s)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd SFRs Name Symbol
F0073H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) I S C Input switch control register ISC
F0074H Timer input select register 0 Note TIS0 Timer input select register 0 TIS0
F0076H A/D port configuration regist er Note ADP C A/D port configuration register A DP C
F0077H Peripheral I/O redirection regi ster Note PIOR Peripheral I/O redirection register PIOR
F0078H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) IAWCTL Inva lid memory acce ss
detection control register
IAWCTL
F007CH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) GA IDIS Global anal og input dis abl e register GA IDIS
F007DH Global digital i nput disabl e register GDIDIS
F0090H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) DFLCTL Data flash control register DFLCTL
F00A0H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) HIOTRM High-speed on-chip oscillator
trimming register
HIOTRM
F00A8H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) HOCODIV High-speed on-chip oscillator
frequency s elect regis ter
HOCODIV
F00E0H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDCL Multiplication/division
data register C (L)
MDCL
F00E2H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDCH Multiplication/division
data register C (H)
MDCH
F00E8H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) MDUC Multiplication/division control register MDUC
F00F0H Peripheral enable regist er 0 Note PER0 Peripheral enable register 0 P E R0
F00F3H Subsystem clock supply mode
control registerr Note OSMC Subsystem clock supply mode
control register OSMC
F00F5H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) RP E CTL RAM parity error control regist er RPECTL
F00FEH Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) BCDADJ BCD adjust result register BCDADJ
F0100H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
SSR00L
SSR00 Serial status register 00
SSR00L
SSR00
F0101H
F0102H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
SSR01L
SSR01 Serial status register 01
SSR01L
SSR01
F0103H
F0104H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
SSR02L
SSR02 Serial status register 02
SSR02L
SSR02
F0105H
F0106H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
SSR03L
SSR03 Serial status register 03
SSR03L
SSR03
F0107H
F0108H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) S I R00L SIR00 Serial flag clear trigger register 00 S IR00L SI R00
F0109H
F010AH Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SIR01L SIR01 Serial fl ag clear trigger regis t er 01 S IR01L SI R01
F010BH
F010CH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) S IR02L SIR02 Serial flag clear trigger regis t er 02 S IR02L SI R02
F010DH
F010EH Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SIR03L SIR03 Serial fl ag clear trigger regis t er 03 S IR03L SI R03
F010FH
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 84
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-4. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (3/6)
Address RL78/G1E (80-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pi n products)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd SFRs Name Symbol
F0110H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SMR00 Seri al mode register 00 SMR00
F0111H
F0112H Serial mode register 01 Note SMR01 Serial mode register 01 SMR01
F0113H
F0114H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SMR02 S eri al mode regist er 02 SMR02
F0115H
F0116H Serial mode register 03 Note SMR03 Serial mode register 03 SMR03
F0117H
F0118H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SCR00 Serial communi cation operation
setting regist er 00 SCR00
F0119H
F011AH Serial communication operation
setting regist er 01 No te SCR01 Serial communication operation
setting regist er 01 SCR01
F011BH
F011CH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SCR02 Serial communication operation
setting regist er 02 SCR02
F011DH
F011EH Serial communication operation
setting regist er 03 No te SCR03 Serial communication operation
setting regist er 03 SCR03
F011FH
F0120H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SE0L S E 0 Serial channel enable status register 0 SE0L SE0
F0121H
F0122H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SS0L S S 0 Serial channel start regis t er 0 S S0L SS0
F0123H
F0124H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ST0L ST0 Serial c hannel stop regi ster 0 ST0L ST0
F0125H
F0126H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SPS0L SPS0 Serial clock select register 0 SPS0L SPS0
F0127H
F0128H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SO0 Serial output register 0 SO0
F0129H
F012AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SOE0L SOE 0 S eri al output enable regi ster 0 SOE 0L SOE0
F012BH
F0134H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SOL0L SOL0 Serial output level register 0 SOL0L SOL0
F0135H
F0138H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SSC0L SSC0 Serial standby control register 0 SSC0L SS C0
F0140H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SSR10L SSR10 Serial status register 10 SSR10L SSR10
F0141H
F0142H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SSR11L SSR11 Serial status register 11 SSR11L SSR11
F0143H
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 85
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-4. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (4/6)
Address RL78/G1E (80-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pi n products)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd SFRs Name Symbol
F0148H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SI R10L SIR10 S eri al fl ag clear trigger regis ter 10 SIR10L SIR10
F0149H
F014AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SI R11L SIR11 S eri al fl ag clear trigger regis ter 11 SIR11L SIR11
F014BH
F0150H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SMR10 Serial m ode register 10 SMR10
F0151H
F0152H S eri al m ode regist er 11 Note SMR11 Serial mode register 11 SMR11
F0153H
F0158H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SCR10 Serial communic ati on operat i on sett i ng
register 10
SCR10
F0159H
F015AH Serial communication operat i on sett ing
register 11 Note
SCR11 Serial communication operation setting
register 11
SCR11
F015BH
F0160H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SE 1L SE 1 Serial channel enable st atus register 1 SE1L SE1
F0161H
F0162H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SS 1L SS 1 Serial channel start register 1 SS1L S S1
F0163H
F0164H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) ST1L ST1 Serial channel stop register 1 ST1L ST1
F0165H
F0166H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SPS1L SPS1 Serial clock select register 1 SPS1L SPS1
F0167H
F0168H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SO1 S eri al output register 1 SO1
F0169H
F016AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SOE 1L SOE 1 S eri al output enable regi ster 1 SOE1L SOE 1
F016BH
F0174H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) SOL1L SOL1 Serial output level register 1 SOL1L SOL1
F0175H
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 86
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-4. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (5/6)
Address RL78/G1E (80-pin products) RL78/ G1A (64-pi n products)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd SFRs Name Symbol
F0180H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR00 Timer counter register 00 TCR00
F0181H
F0182H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR01 Timer counter register 01 TCR01
F0183H
F0184H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR02 Timer counter register 02 TCR02
F0185H
F0186H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR03 Timer counter register 03 TCR03
F0187H
F0188H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR04 Timer counter register 04 TCR04
F0189H
F018AH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR05 Timer counter register 05 TCR05
F018BH
F018CH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR06 Timer counter register 06 TCR06
F018DH
F018EH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TCR07 Timer counter register 07 TCR07
F018FH
F0190H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TMR00 Timer mode register 00 TMR00
F0191H
F0192H Timer mode register 01 Note TMR01 Timer mode register 01 TMR01
F0193H
F0194H Timer mode register 02 Note TMR02 Timer mode register 02 TMR02
F0195H
F0196H Timer mode register 03 Note TMR03 Timer mode register 03 TMR03
F0197H
F0198H S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TMR04 Timer m ode register 04 TMR04
F0199H
F019AH Timer mode register 05 Note TMR05 Timer mode register 05 TMR05
F019BH
F019CH Timer mode register 06 Note TMR06 Timer mode register 06 TMR06
F019DH
F019EH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TMR07 Timer mode register 07 TMR07
F019FH
F01A0H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR00L TSR00 Tim er status regist er 00 TSR00L TSR00
F01A1H
F01A2H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR01L TSR01 Tim er status regist er 01 TSR01L TSR01
F01A3H
F01A4H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR02L TSR02 Tim er status regist er 02 TSR02L TSR02
F01A5H
F01A6H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR03L TSR03 Tim er status regist er 03 TSR03L TSR03
F01A7H
F01A8H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR04L TSR04 Tim er status regist er 04 TSR04L TSR04
F01A9H
F01AAH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR05L TS R05 Timer status register 05 TSR05L TSR05
F01ABH
F01ACH S am e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR06L TS R06 Timer status register 06 TSR06L TS R06
F01ADH
F01AEH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TSR07L TS R07 Timer status register 07 TSR07L TSR07
F01AFH
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 87
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-4. List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers (2nd SFRs) (6/6)
Address RL78/G1E (80-pin products) RL78/G1A (64-pin product s)
2nd SFRs Name Symbol 2nd S F Rs Nam e Sym bol
F01B0H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TE0L TE0 Timer channel enable status register 0 TE0L TE0
F01B1H – –
F01B2H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TS0L TS0 Timer channel start register 0 TS0L TS0
F01B3H – –
F01B4H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TT0L TT0 Timer channel stop register 0 TT0L TT0
F01B5H – –
F01B6H Sam e as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) TPS0 Timer clock select register 0 TPS0
F01B7H
F01B8H Timer output register 0 Note TO0L TO0 Timer output register 0 TO0L TO0
F01B9H – –
F01BAH Timer output enable register 0 Note TOE0L TOE0 Timer output enable register 0 TOE0L TOE0
F01BBH – –
F01BCH Tim er output level register 0 Note TOL0L TOL0 Timer output level register 0 TOL0L TOL0
F01BDH – –
F01BEH Timer output mode register 0 Note TOM0L TOM0 Tim er out put mode regist er 0 TOM0L TOM0
F01BFH – –
F0230H I ICA control register 00 IICCTL00
F0231H I ICA control register 01 IICCTL01
F0232H I ICA low-level width setting regi ster 0 IICWL0
F0233H I ICA high-level width setting register 0 IICWH0
F0234H S l ave address register 0 SVA40
F02F0H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) CRC0CT L Flash m emory CRC c ontrol regis ter CRC0CTL
F02F2H Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) P G CRCL Flash memory CRC operation
result register
PGCRCL
F02FAH Same as RL78/G1A (64-pin products) CRCD CRC data register CRCD
Note The bit setting is different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products).
Caution Do not write data to the registers which is in the row with painted gray.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 88
Mar 31, 2014
3. 3. 3 Instruction address addressing
See 3. 3 Instruction Address Addressing in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 3. 4 Addressing for processing data addresses
See 3. 4 Addressing for Processing Data Addresses in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 89
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4 Port Functions
In this section, the differences of the functions and registers from RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are described. For
details, see CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 4. 1 Port functions
The RL78/G1E microcontrollers (64-pin products, 80-pin products) are provided with digital I/O ports, which enable
variety of control operations. In addition to the function as digital I/O ports, these ports have several alternate functions.
For details of the alternate functions, see CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS.
3. 4. 2 Port configuration
Ports include the following hardware.
Table 3-5. Port Configuration
Item Configuration
Control regist ers Port mode registers (PM0 to PM2, PM4 to PM7, PM14, PM15)
Port registers (P0 to P2, P4, P5, P7, P12 to P14)
Pull-up resistor option registers (PU0, PU1, PU4, PU5, PU7, PU14)
Port input mode regist ers (P IM0, PIM1)
Port output mode registers (POM0, POM1, POM5)
Port mode control registers (PMC0, PMC1, PMC3, PMC5, PMC7)
A/D port configuration register (ADPC)
Peripheral I/O redi rect ion register (PIOR)
Global analog input disable regist er (GAIDIS )
Port 64-pi n products
Total: 24 (CMOS I/O: 20, CMOS input: 3, CMOS output: 1)
80-pin products
Total: 30 (CMOS I/O: 26, CMOS input: 3, CMOS output: 1)
Pull -up resi sto r 64-pin product s Total: 16
80-pin products Total: 21
For details of each port, also see 4. 2 Port Configuration in RL78/G1A Hardwa re User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 90
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 2. 1 Port 0
Port 0 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 0 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port
mode register 0 (PM0). W hen the P00 to P04 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be
specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0). Input to the P00, P01, P03 and P04 pins can be
specified through a normal input buffer or a TTL input buffer in 1-bit units using port input mode register 0 (PIM0).
Output from the P02 to P04 pins can be specified as normal CMOS output or N-ch open-drain output (VDD tole ra nc e ) in
1-bit units using port output mode register 0 (POM0). The P02 and P03 pins can be specified as digital input/output or
analog input in 1-bit units, using port mode control register 0 (PMC0). This port can be also used for timer I/O, A/D
converter analog input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, and key interrupt input.
When reset signal is generated, the following configuration will be set.
· P00, P01 and P04 pins ··· Input mode
· P02 and P03 pins ··· Analog input
3. 4. 2. 2 Port 1
Port 1 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 1 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port
mode register 1 (PM1). W hen the P10 to P15 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be
specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1). Input to the P10, P11, P14 to P15 pins can be
specified through a normal input buffer or a TTL input buffer in 1-bit units using port input mode register 1 (PIM1).
Output from the P10 to P15 pins can be specified as normal CMOS output or N-ch open-drain output (VDD tole ra nc e ) in
1-bit units using port output mode register 1 (POM1). The P10 to P15 pins can be specified as digital input/output or
analog input in 1-bit units, using port mode control register 1 (PMC1). This port can be also used for A/D converter
analog input, serial interface data I/O, programming UART I/O, and key return input.
When reset signal is generated, the P10 to P15 pins will be set to analog input.
3. 4. 2. 3 Port 2
Port 2 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 2 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port
mode register 2 (PM2). This port can be also used for A/D converter analog input and reference voltage input, and key
return input pin. Setting digital or analog to each pin can be done in A/D port configuration register (ADPC).
When reset signal is generated, the P20/ANI0 to P24/ANI4 pins will be set to analog input.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 91
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 2. 4 Port 3
Port 3 is not available for RL78/G1E.
3. 4. 2. 5 Port 4
Port 4 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 4 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port
mode register 4 (PM4). W hen the P40 to P42 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be
specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 4 (PU4). The P41 pin can be specified as digital input/output or
analog input, using port mode control register 4 (PMC4). This port can be also used for A/D converter analog input,
data I/O for a flash memory programmer/debugger, and timer I/O. Be sure to connect an external pull-up resistor to the
P40 pins when on-chip debugging is enabled to P40 (by using an option byte).
When reset signal is generated, the P40 to P42 pins will be set to input mode.
3. 4. 2. 6 Port 5
Port 5 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 5 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port
mode register 5 (PM5). When the P50 and P51 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be
specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 5 (PU5). Output from the P50 pins can be specified as normal
CMOS output or N-ch open-drain output (VDD tolerance) in 1-bit units using port output mode register 5 (POM5). The
P50 and P51 pins can be specified as digital input/output or analog input in 1-bit units, using port mode control
register 5 (PMC5). This port can be also used for A/D converter analog input, and external interrupt request input.
When reset signal is generated, the P50 and P51 pins will be set to input mode.
3. 4. 2. 7 Port 6
Port 6 is not available for RL78/G1E.
3. 4. 2. 8 Port 7
Port 7 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 7 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port
mode register 7 (PM7). W hen the P70 to P73 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be
specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7). The P70 pin can be specified as digital input/output or
analog input, using port mode control register 7 (PMC7). This port can be also used for A/D converter analog input,
serial interface data I/O, and clock I/O.
When reset signal is generated, the P70 to P73 pins will be set to input mode.
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 92
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 2. 9 Port 12
P121 and P122 pins are specified as an input-only port. This port can be also used for the pin connecting resonator for
main system clock, and external clock input for main system clock.
When reset signal is generated, the P121 and P122 pins will be set to input mode.
3. 4. 2. 10 Port 13
P130 pin is specified as a 1-bit output-only port with an output latch. P137 pin is specified as a 1-bit input-only port and
can be also used for external interrupt request input.
3. 4. 2. 11 Port 14
Port 14 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 14 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port
mode register 14 (PM14). When the P140 pin is used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be
specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 14 (PU14). This port can be also used for clock/buzzer output,
and external interrupt request input.
When reset signal is generated, the P140 pin will be set to input mode.
3. 4. 2. 12 Port 15
Port 15 is not available for RL78/G1E.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 93
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 3 Registers controlling port function
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below. For details of each
register, see 4. 3 Registers Controlling Port Function in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
PMxx, Pxx, PUxx, PIMxx, POMxx, PMCxx registers and the bits mounted on each product (1/2)
Port
Bit Name RL78/G1E RL78/G1A
(64-pin
products)
PMxx
Register
Pxx
Register
PUxx
Register
PIMxx
Register
POMxx
Register
PMCx x
Register
(64-pin
products)
(80-pin
products)
Port 0 0 PM00 P00 P U00 PIM00
1 PM01 P01 PU01 PIM01
2 PM02 P02 PU02 POM02 PMC02
3 PM03 P03 PU03 PIM03 POM03 PMC03
4 PM04 P04Note 2 PU04 Note 2 PIM04 Note2 POM04Note 2 *
5 PM05 P05 Note 1 PU05
Note1 * *
6 PM06 P06 Note 1 PU06 Note 1 * *
Port 1 0 PM10 P10 PU10 PIM10 POM10 PMC10
1 PM11 P11 PU11 PIM11 POM11 PMC11
2 PM12 P12 PU12 POM12 PMC12
3 PM13 P13 PU13 POM13 PMC13
4 PM14 P14 PU14 PIM14 POM14 PMC14
5 PM15 P15 PU15 PIM15 POM15 PMC15
6 PM16 P16 Note 1 PU16 Note 1 PIM16 Note 1 * *
Port 2 0 PM20 P20
1 PM21 P21
2 PM22 P22
3 PM23 P23
4 PM24 P24 Note 2 *
5 PM25 P25 Note 1 * *
6 PM26 P26 Note 1 * *
7 PM27 P27 Note 1 * *
Notes 1. Not supported by RL78/G1E(Both 64-pin products and 80-pin products)
2. Not supported by RL78/G1E(64-pin products)
Remark : Mounted
*: Mounted but there are some differences between RL78/G1E and RL78/G1A
: Not mounted
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 94
Mar 31, 2014
PMxx, Pxx, PUxx, PIMxx, POMxx, PMCxx registers and the bits mounted on each product (2/2)
Port
Bit Name RL78/G1E RL78/G1A
(64-pin
products)
PMxx
Register
Pxx
Register
PUxx
Register
PIMxx
Register
POMxx
Register
PMCx x
Register
(64-pin
products)
(80-pin
products)
Port 3 0 PM30 P30 PU30 PMC30
1 PM31 P31 PU31 PMC31
Port 4 0 PM40 P40 PU40
1 PM41 P41 PU41 PMC41
2 PM42 P42 PU42
3 PM43 P43Note 1 PU43Note 1 * *
Port 5 0 PM50 P50 PU50 POM50 PMC50
1 PM51 P51 PU51 PMC51
Port 6 0 PM60 P60Note 1 * *
1 PM61 P61Note 1 * *
2 PM62 P62Note 1 * *
3 PM63 P63Note 1 * *
Port 7 0 PM70 P70 PU70 PMC70
1 PM71 P71 PU71 POM71Note 1 * *
2 PM72 P72 PU72
3 PM73 P73 PU73
4 PM74 P74Note 1 PU74Note 1 POM74Note 1 * *
5 PM75 P75Note 1 PU75Note 1 * *
6 PM76 P76Note 1 PU76Note 1 * *
7 PM77 P77Note 1 PU77Note 1 * *
Port 12 0 P M120 P120 PU120 PMC120
1 P121
2 P122
3 P123
4 P124
Port 13 0 P130
7 P137
Port 14 0 P M140 P140Note 2 PU140Note 2 *
1 PM141 P141Note 1 PU141Note 1 * *
Port 15 0 P M150 P150Note 1 * *
1 PM151 P151Note 1 * *
2 PM152 P152Note 1 * *
3 PM153 P153Note 1 * *
4 PM154 P154Note 1 * *
Notes 1. Not supported by RL78/G1E(Both 64-pin products and 80-pin products)
2. Not supported by RL78/G1E(64-pin products)
Remark : Mounted
*: Mounted but there are some differences between RL78/G1E and RL78/G1A
: Not mounted
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 95
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 3. 1 Port mode register (PMxx)
(1) 64-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
PM0 1 PM06 PM05 PM04 PM03 PM02 PM01 PM00 FFF20H FFH R/W
PM1 1 PM16 1 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10 FFF21H FFH R/W
PM2 PM27 PM26 PM25 PM24 PM23 PM22 PM21 PM20 FFF22H FFH R/W
PM4 1 1 1 1 PM43 PM42 PM41 PM40 FFF24H FFH R/W
PM6 1 1 1 1 PM63 PM62 PM61 PM60 FFF26H FFH R/W
PM7 PM77 PM76 PM75 PM74 PM73 PM72 PM71 PM70 FFF27H FFH R/W
PM14 1 1 1 1 1 1 PM141 PM140 FFF2EH FFH R/W
PM15 1 1 1 PM154 PM153 PM152 PM151 PM150 FFF2FH FFH R/W
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 4 to 6 of the PM0 register, bit 6 of the PM1 register, bits 4 to 7 of the PM2
register, bit 3 of the PM4 register, bits 0 to 3 of the PM6 register, bits 4 to 7 of the PM7 register,
bits 0 and 1 of the PM14 register, and bits 0 to 4 of the PM15 register to “0”.
2. Be sure to set bit 7 of the PM0 register, bits 5 and 7 of the PM1 register, bits 4 to 7 of the PM4
register, bits 4 to 7 of the PM6 register, bits 2 to 7 of the PM14 register, and bits 5 to 7 of the PM15
register to “1”.
(2) 80-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
PM0 1 PM06 PM05 PM04 PM03 PM02 PM01 PM00 FFF20H FFH R/W
PM1 1 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10 FFF21H FFH R/W
PM2 PM27 PM26 PM25 PM24 PM23 PM22 PM21 PM20 FFF22H FFH R/W
PM4 1 1 1 1 PM43 PM42 PM41 PM40 FFF24H FFH R/W
PM5 1 1 1 1 1 1 PM51 PM50 FFF25H FFH R/W
PM6 1 1 1 1 PM63 PM62 PM61 PM60 FFF26H FFH R/W
PM7 PM77 PM76 PM75 PM74 PM73 PM72 PM71 PM70 FFF27H FFH R/W
PM14 1 1 1 1 1 1 PM141 PM140 FFF2EH FFH R/W
PM15 1 1 1 PM154 PM153 PM152 PM151 PM150 FFF2FH FFH R/W
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 of the PM0 register, bit 6 of the PM1 register, bits 5 to 7 of the PM2
register, bit 3 of the PM4 register, bits 0 to 3 of the PM6 register, bits 4 to 7 of the PM7 register, bit
1 of the PM14 register, and bits 0 to 4 of the PM15 register to “0”.
2. Be sure to set bit 7 of the PM0 register, bit 7 of the PM1 register, bits 4 to 7 of the PM4 register,
bits 2 to 7 of the PM5 register, bits 4 to 7 of the PM6 register, bits 2 to 7 of the PM14 register, and
bits 5 to 7 of the PM15 register to “1”.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 96
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 3. 2 Port register (Pxx)
(1) 64-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
P0 0 0 0 0 P03 P02 P01 P00 FFF00H 00H R/W
P1 0 0 0 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10 FFF01H 00H R/W
P2 0 0 0 0 P23 P22 P21 P20 FFF02H 00H R/W
P4 0 0 0 0 0 P42 P41 P40 FFF04H 00H R/W
P7 0 0 0 0 P73 P72 P71 P70 FFF07H 00H R/W
P12 0 0 0 0 0 P122 P121 0 FFF0CH Undefined R/WNote 1
P13 P137 0 0 0 0 0 0 P130 FFF0DH Note2
R/WNote 1
Notes 1. P121, P122 and P137 are read-only.
2. P137: Undefined
P130: 0 (output latch)
Cautions Be sure to clear bits 4 to 7 of the P0 register, bits 5 to 7 of the P1 register, bits 4 to 7 of the P2
register, bits 3 to 7 of the P4 register, bits 4 to 7 of the P7 register, and bits 0 and 3 to 7 of the P12
register, bits 1 to 6 of the P13 register to “0”.
(2) 80-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
P0 0 0 0 P04 P03 P02 P01 P00 FFF00H 00H R/W
P1 0 0 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10 FFF01H 00H R/W
P2 0 0 0 P24 P23 P22 P21 P20 FFF02H 00H R/W
P4 0 0 0 0 0 P42 P41 P40 FFF04H 00H R/W
P5 0 0 0 0 0 0 P51 P50 FFF05H 00H R/W
P7 0 0 0 0 P73 P72 P71 P70 FFF07H 00H R/W
P12 0 0 0 0 0 P122 P121 0 FFF0CH Undefined R/WNote 1
P13 P137 0 0 0 0 0 0 P130 FFF0DH Note 2
R/WNote 1
P14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P140 FFF0EH 00H R/W
Notes 1. P121, P122 and P137 are read-only.
2. P137: Undefined
P130: 0 (output latch)
Cautions Be sure to clear bits 5 to 7 of the P0 register, bits 6 and 7of the P1 register, bits 5 to 7 of the P2
register, bits 3 to 7 of the P4 register, bits 2 to 7 of the P5 register, bits 4 to 7 of the P7 register,
bits 0 and 3 to 7 of the P12 register, bits 1 to 6 of the P13 register, and bits 1 to 7 of the P14
register to “0”.
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 97
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 3. 3 Pull-up resistor option register (PUxx)
(1) 64-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
PU0 0 0 0 0 PU03 PU02 PU01 PU00 F0030H 00H R/W
PU1 0 0 0 PU14 PU13 PU12 PU11 PU10 F0031H 00H R/W
PU4 0 0 0 0 0 PU42 PU41 PU40 F0034H 01H R/W
PU7 0 0 0 0 PU73 PU72 PU71 PU70 F0037H 00H R/W
Caution Be sure to clear bits 4 to 7 of the PU0 register, bits 5 to 7 of the PU1 register, bits 3 to 7 of the PU4
register, and bits 4 to 7 of the PU7 register to “0”.
(2) 80-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
PU0 0 0 0 PU04 PU03 PU02 PU01 PU00 F0030H 00H R/W
PU1 0 0 PU15 PU14 PU13 PU12 PU11 PU10 F0031H 00H R/W
PU4 0 0 0 0 0 PU42 PU41 PU40 F0034H 01H R/W
PU5 0 0 0 0 0 0 PU51 PU50 F0035H 00H R/W
PU7 0 0 0 0 PU73 PU72 PU71 PU70 F0037H 00H R/W
PU14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PU140 F003EH 00H R/W
Caution Be sure to clear bits 5 to 7 of the PU0 register, bits 6 and 7of the PU1 register, bits 3 to 7 of the PU4
register, bits 2 to 7 of the PU5 register, bits 4 to 7 of the PU7 register, and bits 1 to 7 of the PU14
register to “0”.
3. 4. 3. 4 Port input mode register (PIMxx)
(1) 64-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
PIM0 0 0 0 0 PIM03 0 PIM01 PIM00 F0040H 00H R/W
PIM1 0 0 0 PIM14 0 0 PIM11 PIM10 F0041H 00H R/W
Caution Be sure to clear bits 2 and 4 to 7 of the PIM0 register, and bits 2, 3 and 5 to 7 of the PIM1 register to
“0”.
(2) 80-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
PIM0 0 0 0 PIM04 PIM03 0 PIM01 PIM00 F0040H 00H R/W
PIM1 0 0 PIM15 PIM14 0 0 PIM11 PIM10 F0041H 00H R/W
Caution Be sure to clear bits 2 and 5 to 7 of the PIM0 register, and bits 2, 3, 6 and 7 of the PIM1 register to “0”.
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 98
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 3. 5 Port output mode register (POMxx)
(1) 64-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
POM0 0 0 0 0 POM03 POM02 0 0 F0050H 00H R/W
POM1 0 0 0 POM14 POM13 POM12 POM11 POM10 F0051H 00H R/W
Caution Be sure to clear bits 0, 1 and 4 to 7 of the POM0 register, and bits 5 to 7 of the POM1 register to “0”.
(2) 80-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
POM0 0 0 0 POM04 POM03 POM02 0 0 F0050H 00H R/W
POM1 0 0 POM15 POM14 POM13 POM12 POM11 POM10 F0051H 00H R/W
POM5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 POM50 F0055H 00H R/W
Caution Be sure to clear bits 0, 1 and 5 to 7 of the POM0 register, bits 6 and 7 of the POM1 register, and bits 1
to 7 of the POM5 register to “0”.
3. 4. 3. 6 Port mode control register (PMCxx)
(1) 64-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
PMC0 1 1 1 1 PMC03 PMC02 1 1 F0060H FFH R/W
PMC1 1 1 1 PMC14 PMC13 PMC12 PMC11 PMC10 F0061H FFH R/W
PMC4 1 1 1 1 1 1 PMC41 1 F0064H FFH R/W
PMC7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PMC70 F0067H FFH R/W
Caution Be sure to set bits 0, 1 and 4 to 7 of the PMC0 register, bits 5 to 7 of the PMC1 register, bits 0 and 2 to
7 of the PMC4 register, and bits 1 to 7 of the PMC7 register to “0”.
(2) 80-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
PMC0 1 1 1 1 PMC03 PMC02 1 1 F0060H FFH R/W
PMC1 1 1 PMC15 PMC14 PMC13 PMC12 PMC11 PMC10 F0061H FFH R/W
PMC4 1 1 1 1 1 1 PMC41 1 F0064H FFH R/W
PMC5 1 1 1 1 1 1 PMC51 PMC50 F0065H FFH R/W
PMC7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PMC70 F0067H FFH R/W
Caution Be sure to set bits 0, 1 and 4 to 7 of the PMC0 register, bits 6 and 7 of the PMC1 register, bits 0 and 2
to 7 of the PMC4 register, bits 2 to 7 of the PMC5 register, and bits 1 to 7 of the PMC7 register to “0”.
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 99
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 3. 7 A/D port configuration register (ADPC)
(1) 64-pin products
Address: F0076H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADPC 0 0 0 0 0 ADPC2 ADPC1 ADPC0
ADPC2
ADPC1
ADPC0
Analog input (A)/ digit al I/O (D) switchi ng
ANI3/P23
ANI2/P22
ANI1/P21
ANI0/P20
0 0 0 A A A A
0 0 1 D D D D
0 1 0 D D D A
0 1 1 D D A A
1 0 0 D A A A
Other than above Setting prohibited
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 to “0”.
2. Set the channel used for A/D conversion to the input mode by using port mode register 2 (PM2).
3. Do not set the pin set by the ADPC register as digital I/O by the analog input channel
specification register (ADS).
4. When using AVREFP and AVREFM, specify ANI0 and ANI1 as the analog input channels and specify
input mode by using the port mode register.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 100
Mar 31, 2014
(2) 80-pin products
Address: F0076H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADPC 0 0 0 0 0 ADPC2 ADPC1 ADPC0
ADPC2
ADPC1
ADPC0
Analog input (A)/ digit al I/O (D) switchi ng
ANI4/P24
ANI3/P23
ANI2/P22
ANI1/P21
ANI0/P20
0 0 0 A A A A A
0 0 1 D D D D D
0 1 0 D D D D A
0 1 1 D D D A A
1 0 0 D D A A A
1 0 1 D A A A A
Other than above Setting prohibited
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 to “0”.
2. Set the channel used for A/D conversion to the input mode by using port mode register 2 (PM2).
3. Do not set the pin set by the ADPC register as digital I/O by the analog input channel
specification register (ADS).
4. When using AVREFP and AVREFM, specify ANI0 and ANI1 as the analog input channels and specify
input mode by using the port mode register.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 101
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 3. 8 Peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR)
Address: F0077H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PIOR 0 0 0 0 0 0 PIOR1 PIOR0
Function 64-pin produc ts 80-pin products
Setting value of PIOR1, PIOR0 Setting value of PIOR1, PIOR0
0, 0 0, 1 1, 0 1, 1 0, 0 0, 1 1, 0 1, 1
KR0 P70 Setting
prohibited
P00 P10 P70 Setting
prohibited
P00 P10
KR1 P71 P01 P11 P71 P01 P11
KR2 P72 P02 P12 P72 P02 P12
KR3 P73 P03 P13 P73 P03 P13
KR4 P14 P04 P14
KR5 P22 P22 P15
KR6 P23 P23
KR7 P24
Remark : These functions are not available for use.
3. 4. 3. 9 Global digital input disable register (GDIDIS)
GDIDIS is not available for RL78/G1E.
3. 4. 3. 10 Global analog input disable register (GAIDIS)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 4. 3. 10 Global analog input disable
register (GAIDIS) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 102
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 4 Port function operation
The operations which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are described below.
3. 4. 4. 1 Writing to I/O port
See 4. 4. 1 Writing to I/O port in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 4. 4. 2 Reading from I/O port
See 4. 4. 2 Reading from I/O port in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 4. 4. 3 Operation on I/O port
See 4. 4. 3 Operation on I/O port in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 4. 4. 4 Handling different potential (1.8 V,2.5 V or 3 V) by using EVDD VDD
This function is not available, because the EVDD pin is not provided in the RL78/G1E.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 103
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 4. 5 Handling different potential (1.8 V ,2.5 V or 3V) by using I/O buffers
It is possible to connect an external device operating on a different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3V) by switching I/O buffers
with the port input mode register (PIMxx) and port output mode register (POMxx).
When receiving input from an external device with a different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3V), set the port input mode
registers 0 and 1 (PIM0 and PIM1) on a bit-by-bit basis to enable normal input (CMOS)/TTL input buffer switching.
When outputting data to an external device with a different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3V), set the port output mode
registers 0 and 1 (POM0 and POM1) on a bit-by-bit basis to enable N-ch open drain (VDD tolerance) switching.
Following, describes the connection of a serial interface.
(1) Setting procedure when using input ports of UART0 to UART2, CSI00, CSI10, and CSI20 functions for the TTL
input buffer
In case of UART0: P11
In case of UART1: P03
In case of UART2: P14
In case of CSI00: P10, P11
In case of CSI10: P03, P04
In case of CSI20: P14, P15
<1> Using an external resistor, pull up externally the input pin to be used to the power supply of the target
device (on-chip pull-up resistor cannot be used).
<2> Set the corresponding bit of the PIM0 and PIM1 registers to 1 to switch to the TTL input buffer. For VIH and
VIL, refer to the DC characteristics when the TTL input buffer is selected.
<3> Enable the operation of the serial array unit and set the mode to the UART/CSI mode.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 104
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Setting procedure when using output ports of UART0 to UART2, CSI00, CSI10, and CSI20 functions in N-ch
open-drain output mode
In case of UART0: P12
In case of UART1: P02
In case of UART2: P13
In case of CSI00: P10, P12
In case of CSI10: P02, P04
In case of CSI20: P13, P15
<1> Using an external resistor, pull up externally the output pin to be used to the power supply of the target
device (on-chip pull-up resistor cannot be used).
<2> After reset release, the port mode changes to the input mode (Hi-Z).
<3> Set the output latch of the corresponding port to 1.
<4> Set the corresponding bit of the POM0 and POM1 registers to 1 to set the N-ch open drain output (VDD
withstand voltage) mode.
<5> Enable the operation of the serial array unit and set the mode to the UART/CSI mode.
<6> Set the output mode by manipulating the PM0 and PM1 registers. At this time, the output data is high level,
so the pin is in the Hi-Z state.
(3) Setting procedure when using I/O ports of IIC00, IIC10, and IIC20 functions with a different potential (1.8 V ,2.5
V or 3V)
In case of IIC00: P10, P11
In case of IIC10: P03, P04
In case of IIC20: P14, P15
<1> Using an external resistor, pull up externally the input pin to be used to the power supply of the target
device (on-chip pull-up resistor cannot be used).
<2> After reset release, the port mode is the input mode (Hi-Z).
<3> Set the output latch of the corresponding port to 1.
<4> Set the corresponding bit of the POM0 and POM1 registers to 1 to set the N-ch open drain output (VDD
tolerance) mode.
<5> Set the corresponding bit of the PIM0 and PIM1 registers to 1 to switch to the TTL input buffer. For VIH and
VIL, refer to the DC characteristics when the TTL input buffer is selected.
<6> Enable the operation of the serial array unit and set the mode to the simplified I2C mode.
<7> Set the corresponding bit of the PM0 and PM1 registers to the output mode (data I/O is possible in the
output mode).
At this time, the outp ut data is high lev el, so the pin is in the Hi-Z state.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 105
Mar 31, 2014
3. 4. 5 Register settings when using alternate function
See 4. 5 Register Settings When Using Alternate Function in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 4. 6 Cautions when using port function
See 4. 6 Cautions When Using Port Function in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 106
Mar 31, 2014
3. 5 Clock Generator
In this section, the differences of the functions and registers from RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are described. For
details, see CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 5. 1 Functions of clock generator
The clock generator generates the clock to be supplied to the CPU and peripheral hardware.
The following two kinds of system clocks and clock oscillators are selectable.
Caution The subsystem clock is not provided in the RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products).
(1) Main system clock
<1> X1 oscillator
This circuit oscillates a clock of fX = 1 to 20 MHz by connecting a resonator to X1 and X2.
Oscillation can be stopped by executing the STOP instruction or setting of the MSTOP bit (bit 7 of the clock
operation stat us co ntrol regist er (CSC)).
<2> High-speed on-chip oscillator (High-speed OCD)
The frequency at which to oscillate can be selected from among fIH = 32, 24, 16, 12, 8, 6, 4, 3, 2 or 1 MHz (typ.)
by using the option byte (000C2H). After a reset release, the CPU always starts operating with this high-speed
on-chip oscillator clock. Oscillation can be stopped by executing the STOP instruction or setting the HIOSTOP
bit (bit 0 of the CSC register).
The frequency specified by using an option byte can be changed by using the high-speed on-chip oscillator
frequency select register (HOCODIV). For details about the frequency, see 3. 5. 3. 8 High-speed on-chip
oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV).
The frequencies that can be specified for the high-speed on-chip oscillator by using the option byte and the
high-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV) are shown below.
Power Supply Voltage Flash Operation Mode Oscillation Frequency (MHz)
1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V HS (high-speed main) mode
2.4 V VDD 5.5 V – –
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V LS (low-speed main) mode – – – –
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V LV (low-voltage main) mode – – – – – –
An external main system clock (fEX = 1 to 20 MHz) can also be supplied from the EXCLK/X2/P122 pin. An external main
system clock input can be disabled by executing the STOP instruction or setting of the MSTOP bit.
As the main system clock, a high-speed system clock (X1 clock or external main system clock) or high-speed on-chip
oscillator clock can be selected by setting of the MCM0 bit (bit 4 of the system clock control register (CKC)).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 107
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (Low-speed on-chip oscillator)
This circuit oscillates a clock of fIL = 15 kHz (TYP.).
The low-speed on-chip oscillator clock cannot be used as the CPU clock.
Only the following peripheral hardware runs on the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock.
Watchd og timer
12-bit Interval timer
This clock operates when bit 4 (WDTON) of the option byte (000C0H), bit 4 (W UTMMCK0) of the subsystem clock
supply mode control register (OSMC), or both are set to 1.
However, when WDTON = 1, WUTMMCK0 = 0, and bit 0 (WDSTBYON) of the option byte (000C0H) is 0, oscillation of
the low-speed on-chip oscillator stops if the HALT or STOP instruction is executed.
Remark fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency
fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency
f
EX: External main system clock frequency
f
IL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 108
Mar 31, 2014
3. 5. 2 Configuration of clock generator
The clock gener ator inc lud es t he following hardware.
Table 3-6. Configuration of Clock Generator
Item Configuration
Control registers Clock operation mode control register (CMC)
System clock control register (CKC)
Clock operation status control register (CSC)
Oscillatio n stab ilization ti me counter status reg is te r (OS TC )
Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)
Peripheral enable regi ster 0 (PER0)
Subsyst em clock supply mode control register (OSMC)
High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV)
High-speed on-chip oscillator trimming register (HIOTRM)
Oscillators X1 oscillator
High-speed on-chip oscillator
Low-speed on-chip oscillator
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 109
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 3-1. Block Diagram of Clock Generator
Watchdog timer
fCLK
System clock cont rol
register (CKC)
CLS
X1 oscillation
stabilization time counter
OSTS1 OSTS0OSTS2
Oscillation stabilization
time select register (OSTS)
3
MOST
18
MOST
17
MOST
15
MOST
13
MOST
11
Oscillation stabilization
time counter status
register (OSTC)
MSTOP
STOP mode
signal
EXCLK
OSCSEL
AMPH
Clock operation mode
control register
(CMC)
Option byte (000C2H)
FRQSEL0 t o FRQSEL 3
Clock operation status
control register
(CSC)
Internal bus
fMX
High-speed system
clock oscillator
Crystal/ceramic
oscillation
External input
clock
X1/P121
X2/EXCLK/
P122
fX
fEX
MCM0
MCS
CPU clock
and peripheral
hardware
cl oc k so urce
selection
CPU
MOST
10
MOST
9
MOST
8
Clock operation status
control register (CSC)
HIOSTOP
fIH
fMAIN
Main system clock
source selector
Low-speed
on-chip oscillator
Oscillation
(15 kHz (TYP.))
WDTON
WDSTBYON
Option byte (000C0H)WUTMMCK0
fIL HALT/STOP mode signal
Standby controller
HALT mode
STOP mode
Normal
operation mode
Internal bus
Serial array unit 0
A/D converter
Peripheral enable
register 0 (PER0)
Serial array unit 1
SAU0
EN
SAU1
EN
ADC
EN
Clock output/
buzzer output
High-speed on-chip oscillator
(24 MHz (TYP.)) (16 MHz (TYP.))
(8 MHz (TYP.)) (6 MHz (TYP.))
(3 MHz (TYP.)) (2 MHz (TYP.))
High-speed on-chip oscillator
trimming register (HIOTRM)
HIOTRM0
6
HIOTRM1HIOTRM2
HIOTRM3
HIOTRM4
HIOTRM5
(32 MHz (TYP.))
(12 MHz (TYP.))
(4 MHz (TYP.))
(1 MHz (TYP. ))
Timer array unit 0
RTC
EN
Selector Controller
12-bit Interval timer
TAU0
EN
High-speed on-chip
oscillator frequency select
register (HOCODIV)
HOCODIV2 HOCODIV1 HOCODIV0
WUTMMCK0
Subsystemu clock supply
mode control register
(OSMC)
Controller
(Remark is listed on the next page)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 110
Mar 31, 2014
Remark fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency
fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency
fEX: External main syst em clo ck frequen cy
fMX: High-speed system clock frequency
fMAIN: Main system clock frequency
fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequen cy
fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 111
Mar 31, 2014
3. 5. 3 Registers controlling clock generator
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below. For details of each
register, see 5. 3 Registers Controlling Clock Generator in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 5. 3. 1 Clock operation mode control register (CMC)
Address: FFFA0H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CMC EXCLK OSCSEL 0 0 0 0 0 AMPH
EXCLK OSCSEL High-speed system clock pin
operation mode
X1/P121 pin X2/E XCLK/P 122 pi n
0 0 Input port mode Input port
0 1 X1 oscillation mode Crystal/ceramic resonator connection
1 0 Input port mode Input port
1 1 External clock input mode Input port External clock i nput
AMP H Control of X1 clock osc ill ation frequency
0 1 MHz fX 10 MHz
1 10 MHz < fX 20 MHz
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 1 to 3 and 5 to “0”.
2. The CMC register can be written only once after reset release, by an 8-bit memory manipulation
instruction. When using the CMC register w ith its initial value (00H), be sure to set the register to
00H after a reset ends in order to prevent malfunction due to a program loop. Such a malfunction
becomes unrecoverable when a value other than 00H is mistakenly written.
3. After reset release, set the CMC register before X1 oscillation is started as set by the clock
operation status control register (CSC).
4. Be sure to set the AMPH bit to 1 if the X1 clock oscillation frequency exceeds 10 MHz.
5. Specify the settings for the AMPH, AMPHS1, and AMPHS0 bits while fIH is selected as fCLK after a
reset ends (before fCLK is switched to fMX).
6. Although the maximum system clock frequency is 32 MHz, the maximum frequency of the X1
oscillator is 20 MHz.
Remark fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 112
Mar 31, 2014
3. 5. 3. 2 System clock control register (CKC)
Address: FFFA4H After reset: 00H R/WNote
Symbol <7> 6 <5> <4> 3 2 1 0
CKC CLS 0 MCS MCM0 0 0 0 0
CLS Status of CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK)
0 Main system clock (fMAIN)
1
MCS Status of main system clock (fMAIN)
0 High-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH)
1 High-speed s yst em clock (fMX)
MCM0 Main system clock (fMAIN) operat i on control
0 Selects the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) as the main system clock (fMAIN)
1 Select s the high-speed system cl ock (fMX) as the main system clock (fMAIN)
Note Bits 7 and 5 are read-only.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 0 to 3 and 6 to “0”.
Remark fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency
fMX: High-speed system clock frequency
fMAIN: Main system clock frequency
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 113
Mar 31, 2014
3. 5. 3. 3 Clock operation status control register (CSC)
Address: FFFA1H After reset: C0H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0>
CSC MSTOP 1 0 0 0 0 0 HIOSTOP
MSTOP High-speed s yst em clock operation cont rol
X1 oscillation mode Ex ternal clock input mode Input port mode
0 X1 oscillat or operating E xternal clock from EXCLK pin is valid Input port
1 X1 oscillator stopped External cl ock from EXCLK pin is invalid
HIOSTOP High-speed on-chip oscillator clock operation control
0 High-speed on-chip oscillator operating
1 High-speed on-chip oscillator stopped
Cautions 1. Be sure to set bit 6 to “1”.
2. Set the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) before setting the MSTOP bit to 0 after
releasing reset. Note that if the OSTS register is being used with its default settings, the OSTS
register is not required to be set here.
3. To start X1 oscillation as set by the MSTOP bit, check the oscillation stabilization time of the X1
clock by using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC).
4. Do not stop the clock selected for the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) with the CSC register.
5. The setting of the flags of the register to stop clock oscillation (invalidate the external clock
input) and the condition before clock oscillation is to be stopped are as Table 3-7.
Table 3-7. Stopping Clock Method
Clock Condition B efore Stoppi ng Cl ock
(Invalidating External Clock Input)
Setting of CSC Register Flags
X1 clock CPU and peripheral hardware clock s operate with a clock
other than the high-s peed system clock.
(CLS = 0 and MCS = 0)
MST OP = 1
Exte rnal main sy stem clock
High-speed on-chip oscillator
clock
CPU and peripheral hardware clock s operat e with a cl ock
other than the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock.
(CLS = 0 and MCS = 1)
HIOSTOP = 1
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 114
Mar 31, 2014
3. 5. 3. 4 Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 5. 3. 4 Oscillation stabilization time
counter status register (OSTC) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 5. 3. 5 Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 5. 3. 5 Oscillation stabilization time
select register (OSTS) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 115
Mar 31, 2014
3. 5. 3. 6 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0)
Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN 0 SAU1EN SAU0EN 0 TAU0EN
RTCEN Control of 12-bit i nterval timer input clock supply
0 Stops input clock supply.
SFR used by the 12-bit interval timer cannot be written.
The 12-bit interval timer is in the reset status.
1 Enabl es i nput c l ock supply.
SFR used by the 12-bit interval timer can be written.
ADCEN Control of A/D converter input clock supply
0 Stops input clock supply.
SFR used by the A/D converter cannot be written.
The A/D converter is in the reset status.
1 Enabl es i nput c l ock supply.
SFR used by the A/D converter can be written.
SAU1EN Cont rol of seri al array unit 1 input clock supply
0 Stops input clock supply.
SFR used by the serial array unit 1 cannot be written.
The serial array unit 1 is in the reset status.
1 Enabl es i nput c l ock supply.
SFR used by the serial array unit 1 can be written.
SAU0EN Cont rol of seri al array unit 0 input clock supply
0 Stops input clock supply.
SFR used by the serial array unit 0 cannot be written.
The serial array unit 0 is in the reset status.
1 Enabl es i nput c l ock supply.
SFR used by the serial array unit 0 can be written.
TAU0EN Control of timer array unit 0 input clock suppl y
0 Stops input clock supply.
SFR used by timer array unit 0 cannot be written.
Timer array unit 0 is in the reset status.
1 Enabl es i nput c l ock supply.
SFR used by timer array unit 0 can be written.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 1, 4, and 6 to “0”.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 116
Mar 31, 2014
3. 5. 3. 7 Subs ystem clock supply mode control register (OSMC)
Address: F00F3H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OSMC 0 0 0 WUTMMCK0 0 0 0 0
WUTMMCK0 Operation clock for12-bit interval t imer
0 Initial value
1 Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bit 7 to “0”.
2. To use 12-bit interval timer, after reset release, set the WUTMMCK0 bit of the subsystem clock
supply mode control register (OSMC) to “1” before setting the RTCEN bit of the peripheral enable
register0 (PER0) to “1”.
Remark The subsystem clock is not supported by RL78/G1E, but the subsystem clock supply mode control register is
used to control the clock of 12-bit interval timer.
3. 5. 3. 8 High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 5. 3. 8 High-speed on-chip oscillator
frequency select register (HOCODIV) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 5. 3. 9 High-speed on-chip oscillator trimming register (HIOTRM)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 5. 3. 9 High-speed on-chip oscillator
trimming register (HIOTRM) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 117
Mar 31, 2014
3. 5. 4 System clock oscillator
See 5. 4 System Clock Oscillator in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 5. 5 Clock generator operation
See 5. 5 Clock Generator Operation in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 5. 6 Controlling clock
See 5. 6 Controlling Clock in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 118
Mar 31, 2014
3. 5. 7 Resonator and oscillator constants
The resonators for which the operation is verified and their oscillator constants are shown below.
Cautions 1. The oscillator constants shown above are reference values based on evaluation in a specific
environment by the resonator manufacturer. Be sure to apply to the resonator manufacturer for
evaluation on the actual circuit before using these constants for your application.
Also apply to the resonator manufacturer for re-evaluation on the actual circuit if you have changed
the make of the microcontroller or the board.
2. The oscillation voltage and oscillation frequency only indicate the oscillator characteristic. Use the
RL78/G1E so that the internal operation conditions are within the specifications of the DC and AC
characteristics.
Figure 3-2. External Oscillation Circuit Example
(a) X1 oscillation
C1
X2X1
C2
VSS
Rd
(1) X1 oscillation: As of March, 2013 (1/4)
Notes 1. Set the flash operation mode by using CMODE1 and CMODE0 bits of the option byte (000C2H).
2. C1, C2 columns indicate a reference value.
3. W hen using these oscillators, contact KYOCERA Crystal Device Corporation (http://www.kyocera-crystal.jp/).
Remark Relationship between operation voltage width, operation frequency of CPU and operation mode is as below.
HS (High speed main) mode: 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 32 MHz (When X1 oscillati on: 1 M Hz to 20 M Hz)
2.4 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz t o 16 MHz
LS (Low speed main) mode: 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 8 MHz
LV (Low voltage main) mode: 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 4 MHz
Manufacturer Resonator Part Number SMD/
Lead
Frequency
(MHz)
Flash
operation
mode Not e 1
Recommended Ci rcuit
Constants Not e 2
(reference)
Oscillation
Voltage Range
(V)
C1 (pF) C2 (pF) Rd (kΩ) MIN. MAX.
KYOCERA
rystal Device
Corporation
Note 3
Crystal
resonator
CX8045GB04000D0HEQZ1 SMD 4.0 LV 12 12 0 1.6 5.5
CX8045GB04000D0HEQZ1 SMD 4.0 LS 12 12 0 1.8 5.5
CX8045GB04000D0HEQZ1 SMD 4.0 HS 12 12 0 2.4 5.5
CX8045GB08000D0HEQZ1 SMD 8.0 LS 12 12 0 1.8 5.5
CX8045GB08000D0HEQZ1 SMD 8.0 HS 12 12 0 2.4 5.5
CX8045GB12000D0HEQZ1 SMD 12.0 HS 10 10 0 2.4 5.5
CX3225GB16000D0HEQZ1 SMD 16.0 HS 10 10 0 2.4 5.5
CX3225GB20000D0HEQZ1 SMD 20.0 HS 8 8 0 2.7 5.5
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 119
Mar 31, 2014
(1) X1 oscillation: As of March, 2013(2/4)
Manufacturer Resonator Part Number SMD/
Lead
Frequency
(MHz)
Flash
operation
mode Not e 1
Recommended Ci rcuit
Constants Note 2
(reference)
Oscillation
Voltage
Range (V)
C1
(pF)
C2
(pF)
Rd
(kΩ)
MIN. MAX.
Murata
Manufacturing
Co., Ltd.Note 3
Ceramic
resonator
CSTCC2M00G56-R0 SMD 2.0 LV (47) (47) 0 1.6 5.5
CSTCR4M00G55-R0 SMD 4.0 (39) (39) 0 1.6 5.5
CSTLS4M00G53-B0 Lead 4.0 (15) (15) 0 1.6 5.5
CSTCC2M00G56-R0 SMD 2.0 LS (47) (47) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTCR4M00G55-R0 SMD 4.0 (39) (39) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTLS4M00G53-B0 Lead 4.0 (15) (15) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTCR4M19G55-R0 SMD 4.194 (39) (39) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTLS4M19G53-B0 Lead 4.194 (15) (15) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTCR4M91G53-R0 SMD 4.915 (15) (15) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTLS4M91G53-B0 Lead 4.915 (15) (15) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTCR5M00G53-R0 SMD 5.0 (15) (15) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTLS5M00G53-B0 Lead 5.0 (15) (15) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTCR6M00G53-R0 SMD 6.0 (15) (15) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTLS6M00G53-B0 Lead 6.0 (15) (15) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTCE8M00G52-R0 SMD 8.0 (10) (10) 0 1.8 5.5
CSTLS8M00G53-B0 Lead 8.0 (15) (15) 0 1.8 5.5
Notes 1. Set the flash operation mode by using CMODE1 and CMODE0 bits of the option byte (000C2H).
2. Values in parentheses in the C1, C2 columns indicate an internal capacitance.
3. W hen using these oscillators, contact Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. (http://www.murata.co.jp/).
Remark Relationship between operation voltage width, operation frequency of CPU and operation mode is as below.
HS (High speed main) mode: 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 32 MHz (W hen X1 oscillation: 1 MHz to 20 MHz)
2.4 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 16 MHz
LS (Low speed main) mode: 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 8 MHz
LV (Low voltage main) mode: 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 4 MHz
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 120
Mar 31, 2014
(1) X1 oscillation: As of March, 2013(3/4)
Manufacturer Resonator Part Number SMD/
Lead
Frequency
(MHz)
Flash
operation
mode Note 1
Recommended Ci rcuit
Constants Not e 2
(reference)
Oscillation
Voltage
Range (V)
C1
(pF)
C2
(pF)
Rd
(kΩ)
MIN. MAX.
Murata
Manufacturing
Co., Ltd.Note 3
Ceramic
resonator
CSTCC2M00G56-R0 SMD 2.0 HS (47) (47) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTCR4M00G55-R0 SMD 4.0 (39) (39) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTLS4M00G53-B0 Lead 4.0 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTCR4M19G55-R0 SMD 4.194 (39) (39) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTLS4M19G53-B0 Lead 4.194 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTCR4M91G53-R0 SMD 4.915 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTLS4M91G53-B0 Lead 4.915 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTCR5M00G53-R0 SMD 5.0 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTLS5M00G53-B0 Lead 5.0 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTCR6M00G53-R0 SMD 6.0 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTLS6M00G53-B0 Lead 6.0 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTCE8M00G52-R0 SMD 8.0 (10) (10) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTLS8M00G53-B0 Lead 8.0 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTCE8M38G52-R0 SMD 8.388 (10) (10) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTLS8M38G53-B0 Lead 8.388 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTCE10M0G52-R0 SMD 10.0 (10) (10) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTLS10M0G53-B0 Lead 10.0 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTCE12M0G52-R0 SMD 12.0 (10) (10) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTCE16M0V53-R0 SMD 16.0 (15) (15) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTLS16M0X51-B0 Lead 16.0 (5) (5) 0 2.4 5.5
CSTCE20M0V51-R0 SMD 20.0 (5) (5) 0 2.7 5.5
CSTLS20M0X51-B0 Lead 20.0 (5) (5) 0 2.7 5.5
Notes 1. Set the flash operation mode by using CMODE1 and CMODE0 bits of the option byte (000C2H).
2. Values in parentheses in the C1, C2 columns indicate an internal capacitance.
3. W hen using these oscillators, contact Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. (http://www.murata.co.jp/).
Remark Relationship between operation voltage width, operation frequency of CPU and operation mode is as below.
HS (High speed main) mode: 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 32 MHz (W hen X1 oscillation: 1 MHz to 20 MHz)
2.4 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 16 MHz
LS (Low speed main) mode: 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 8 MHz
LV (Low voltage main) mode: 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 4 MHz
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 121
Mar 31, 2014
(1) X1 oscillation: As of March, 2013(4/4)
Manufacturer Resonator Part Number SMD/
Lead
Frequency
(MHz)
Flash
operation
mode Note 1
Recommended Ci rcuit
Constants Note 2
(reference)
Oscillation
Voltage
Range (V)
C1
(pF)
C2
(pF)
Rd
(kΩ)
MIN. MAX.
Nihon Dempa
Kogyo Co.,
Ltd.Not e 3
Crystal
resonator
NX8045GB SMD 8 LS 1 1 0 1.8 5.5
NX8045GB SMD 8 HS 1 1 0 2.4 5.5
NX3225GB SMD 16 2 2 0 2.4 5.5
NX2520SA SMD 20 1 1 0 2.7 5.5
Notes 1. Set the flash operation mode by using CMODE1 and CMODE0 bits of the option byte (000C2H).
2. C1, C2 columns indicate a reference value.
3. W hen using these oscillators, contact Nihon Dempa Kogyo Co., Ltd. (http://www.ndk.com/jp/).
Remark Relationship between operation voltage width, operation frequency of CPU and operation mode is as below.
HS (High speed main) mode: 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 32 MHz (W hen X1 oscillation: 1 MHz to 20 MHz)
2.4 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 16 MHz
LS (Low speed main) mode: 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 8 MHz
LV (Low voltage main) mode: 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V@1 MHz to 4 MHz
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 122
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6 Timer Array Unit
In this section, the differences of the functions and registers from RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are described. For
details, see CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
The timer array unit is provided in all products (Unit 0, Channels 0 to 7).
Units Channels 64-pin products, 80-pin products
Unit 0 Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Caution Most of the following descriptions in this section use the case of 80-pin products as an example.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 123
Mar 31, 2014
The timer array unit has eight 16-bit timers.
Each 16-bit timer is called a channel and can be used as an independent timer. In addition, two or more “channels” can
be used to create a high-accuracy timer.
TIMER ARRAY UNIT
16-bit timers
channel 1
channel 0
channel 2
channel 6
channel 7
For the details of each function, see the section shown below.
Independent channel operat i on functi on Simultaneous c hannel operati on functi on
Interval timer (-> see 3. 6. 8)
Square wave output (-> see 3. 6. 8)
External event counter (-> see 3. 6. 8)
Divider function Note (-> see 3. 6. 8)
Input pulse interval measurement (-> see 3. 6. 8)
Measurement of high/low-level width of input signal (-> see 3. 6. 8)
Delay counter (-> see 3. 6. 8)
One-shot pulse output (-> see 3. 6. 9)
PWM output (-> see 3. 6. 9)
Multiple PWM output (-> see 3. 6. 9)
Note Only channel 0 of unit 0.
It is possible to use the 16-bit timer of channels 1 and 3 of unit 0 as two 8-bit timers (higher and lower). The functions
that can use channels 1 and 3 as 8-bit timers are as follows:
Interval timer (higher/lower 8-bit timer)/square wave output (lower 8-bit timer only)
External event counter (lower 8-bit timer only)
Delay counter (lower 8-bit timer only)
Channel 7 of unit 0 can be used to realize LIN-bus communication operating in combination with UART2 of the serial
array unit.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 124
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 1 Functions of timer array unit
Timer array unit has the following functions.
3. 6. 1. 1 Independent channel operation function
By operating a channel independently, it can be used for the following purposes without being affected by the
operation mode of other channels.
Remark The presence or absence of timer I/O pins of channels 0 to 7 depends on the product. See Table 3-9
Timer I/O Pins provided in Each Product for details.
<1> Interval timer
Each timer of a unit can be used as a reference timer that generates an interrupt (INTTMmn) at fixed intervals.
Interrupt signal
(INTTMmn)
Operation clock Compare operation
Channel n
<2> Square wave output
A toggle operation is performed each time INTTMmn interrupt is generated and a square wave with a duty factor
of 50% is output from a timer output pin (TOmn).
Timer output
(TOmn)
Operation clock Compare operation
Channel n
<3> External event counter
Each timer of a unit can be used as an event counter that generates an interrupt when the number of the valid
edges of a signal input to the timer input pin (TImn) has reached a specific value.
Interrupt signal
(INTTMmn)
Edge detection
Timer input
(TImn) Compare operation
Channel n
<4> Divider function (channel 0 of unit 0 only)
A clock input from a timer input pin (TI00) is divided and output from an output pin (TO00).
Timer output
(TO00)
Timer input
(TI00) Channel 0
Compare operation
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 125
Mar 31, 2014
<5> Input pulse interval measurem ent
Counting is started by the valid edge of a pulse signal input to a timer input pin (TImn). The count value of the
timer is captured at the valid edge of the next pulse. In this way, the interval of the input pulse can be measured.
Edge detection
Timer input
(TImn)
Capture
xxH
00H
Start
Channel n
Capture operation
<6> Measurement of high/low-level width of input signal
Counting is started by a single edge of the signal input to the timer input pin (TImn), and the count value is
captured at the other edge. In this way, the high-level or low-level width of the input signal can be measured.
Edge detection
Timer input
(TImn)
Capture
xxH
00H
Start
Channel n
Capture operation
<7> Delay counter
Counting is started at the valid edge of the signal input to the timer input pin (TImn), and an interrupt is
generated after any delay per i od.
Edge detection
Timer input
(TImn) Channel n
Compare operation Interrupt signal
(INTTMmn)
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7 (however, timer input pin (TImn) , timer output pin
(TOmn) : n = 0, 4, 7))
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 126
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 1. 2 Simultaneous channel operation function
By using the combination of a master channel (a reference timer mainly controlling the cycle) and slave channels
(timers operating according to the master channel), channels can be used for the following purposes.
<1> One-shot pulse output
Two channels are used as a set to generate a one-shot pulse with a specified output timing and a specified
pulse width.
Timer output
(TOmp)
Interrupt signal (INTTMmn)
Edge detection
Timer input
(TImn)
set
(Master)
Output
timing Pulse width
Start
(Master)
Reset
(Slave)
Channel n (master)
Channel p (slave)
Compare operation
Compare operation
<2> PW M (Pulse Width Modulation) output
Two channels are used as a set to generate a pulse with a specified period and a specified duty factor.
Operation clock
Duty
Period
Compare operation
Compare operation
Channel n (master)
Channel p (slave) Timer output
(TOmp)
Interrupt signal (INTTMmn)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 127
Mar 31, 2014
<3> Multiple PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) output
By extending the PWM function and using one master channel and two or more slave channels, up to seven
types of PWM signals that have a specific period and a specified duty factor can be generated.
Duty
Period
Interrupt signal (INTTMmn)
Duty
Period
Channel n (master)
Channel p (slave)
Channel q (slave)
Operation clock Compare operation
Compare operation
Compare operation
Timer output
(TOmp)
Timer output
(TOmq)
Caution For details about the rules of simultaneous channel operation function, see 3. 6. 4 Basic rules
of timer array unit.
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7 (however, timer input pin (TImn) , timer output
pin (TOmn) : n = 0, 4, 7)), p, q: Slave channel number (4, 7)
3. 6. 1. 3 8-bit timer operation function (channels 1 and 3 only)
The 8-bit timer operation function makes it possible to use a 16-bit timer channel in a configuration consisting of two
8-bit timer channels. This function can only be used for channels 1 and 3.
Caution There are several rules for using 8-bit timer operation function. For details, see 3. 6. 4 Basic rules
of timer arra y unit.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 128
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 1. 4 LIN-bus supporting function (channel 7 of unit 0 only)
Timer array unit is used to check whether signals received in LIN-bus communication match the LIN-bus
communication format.
<1> Detection of wakeup signal
The timer starts counting at the falling edge of a signal input to the serial data input pin (RxD2) of UART2 and
the count value of the timer is captured at the rising edge. In this way, a low-level width can be measured. If the
low-level width is greater than a specific value, it is recognized as a wakeup signal.
<2> Detection of break field
The timer starts counting at the falling edge of a signal input to the serial data input pin (RxD2) of UART2 after a
wakeup signal is detected, and the count value of the timer is captured at the rising edge. In this way, a low-
level width is measured. If the low-level width is greater than a specific value, it is recognized as a break field.
<3> Measurement of pulse width of sync field
After a break field is detected, the low-level width and high-level width of the signal input to the serial data input
pin (RxD2) of UART2 are measured. From the bit interval of the sync field measured in this way, a baud rate is
calculated.
Remark For details about setting up the operations used to implement the LIN-bus, see 3. 6. 3. 13 Input switch
control register (ISC) and 3. 6. 8 Independent channel operation function of timer array unit.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 129
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 2 Configuration of timer array unit
Timer array unit includes the following hardware.
Table 3-8. Configuration of Timer Array Unit
Item Configuration
Timer/counter Timer count register mn (TCRmn)
Register Timer data register mn (TDRmn)
Timer input TI00, TI04, TI07, RxD2 pin (for LIN-bus)
Timer output TO00, TO04, TO07, output controller
Control regist ers <Registers of unit setting block>
Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0)
Timer clock select register m (TPSm)
Timer channel enable status register m (TEm)
Timer channel start register m (TSm)
Timer channel stop register m (TTm)
Timer input select register 0 (TIS0)
Timer output enable register m (TOEm)
Timer output register m (TOm)
Timer output level register m (TOLm)
Timer output mode register m (TOMm)
<Registers of each channel>
Timer mode register mn (TMRmn)
Timer status register mn (TSRmn)
Input switch control register (ISC)
Noise filter enable regist er 1 (NFEN1)
Port mode control register (PMCxx)
Port mode register (PMxx)
Port register (Pxx)
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 130
Mar 31, 2014
The presence or absence of timer I/O pins in each timer array unit channel is as follows.
Table 3-9. Timer I/O Pins provided in Each Product
Timer array unit channels 64-pin products, 80-pi n products
Unit 0 Channel 0 P00/TI00, P01/TO00
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4 P42/TI04/TO04
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7 P41/TI07/TO07
Remarks 1. W hen timer input and timer output are shared by the same pin, either only timer input or only timer output
can be used.
2. : here is no timer I/O pin, but the channel is available. (However, the channel can only be used as an
interval timer.)
Figures 3-3 show the block diagrams of the timer array unit of the 80-pin products.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 131
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 3-3. Entire Configuration of Timer Array Unit 0 (Example: 80-pin products)
Channel 0
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7 (LIN-bus supported)
TI00
RxD2
TI04
TO00
TO04
INTTM00
(Timer interrupt)
INTTM02
INTTM03
INTTM04
INTTM05
INTTM06
INTTM07
TI07
(Serial input pin)
TO07
INTTM01
INTTM03H
INTTM01H
Channel 1
Slave/master controller
Master controller
2 2
Timer clock select register 0 (TPS0)
44
f
CLK
f
CLK
/2
0
to f
CLK
/2
15
Selector
Selector
TAU0EN
Peripheral enable
register 0
(PER0)
Prescaler
Selector
Selector
f
CLK
/2
1
, f
CLK
/2
2
,
f
CLK
/2
4
, f
CLK
/2
6
,
f
CLK
/2
8
, f
CLK
/2
10
,
f
CLK
/2
12
, f
CLK
/2
14
,
PRS013 PRS003PRS012PRS011 PRS010 PRS002 PRS001 PRS000PRS031PRS030 PRS021 PRS020
f
IL
Timer input select
register 0 (TIS0)
TIS2 TIS0TIS1
Selector
Remark fIL: ow-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 132
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 3-4. Internal Block Diagram of Channel 0, 4 of Timer Array Unit 0
PMxx
CKS0n0
CCS0n MAS
TER0n STS0n2STS0n1 STS0n0 MD0n2CIS0n1CIS0n0 MD0n3 MD0n1 MD0n0
OVF
0n
CK00
CK01
fMCK
f
TCLK
Interrupt
controller
Output
controller
Output latch
(Pxx)
INTTM0n
(Timer interrupt)
TO0n
Timer status
register 0n (TSR0n)
Overflow
Timer data register 0n (TDR0n)
Timer counter register 0n (TCR0n)
Timer mode register 0n (TMR0n)
Channel n
Timer controller
Trigger
selection Count clock
selection
Mode
selection
Slave/master
controller
Edge
detection
Operating
clock selection
TI0n
Interrupt signal from master channel Note 1
Interrupt signal to slave channel
Note2
CKS0n1
Notes 1. Channels 4 only
2. n = 4 only
Remark n = 0, 4
Figure 3-5. Internal Block Diagram of Channel 7 of Timer Array Unit 0
TO07
PMxx
CKS070
CCS07STS072STS071 STS070 MD072CIS071CIS070 MD073 MD071 MD070
OVF
07
INTTM07
(Timer interrupt)
CK00
CK01
f
MCK
f
TCLK
TI07
ISC1
RxD0
Input switch
control register
Interrupt
controller
Output
controller
Output latch
(Pxx)
Timer status
register 07 (TSR07)
Overflow
Timer data register 07 (TDR07)
Timer counter register 07 (TCR07)
Timer mode register 07 (TMR07)
Timer controller
Mode
selection
Edge
detection
Interrupt signal from master channel
Channel 7
Trigger
selection Count clock
selection
Operating
clock selection
Selector
CKS071
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 133
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 2. 1 Timer count register mn (TCRmn)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 6. 2. 1 Timer count register mn
(TCRmn) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 2. 2 Timer data register mn (TDRmn)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 6. 2. 2 Timer data register mn
(TDRmn) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 134
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 3 Registers controlling timer array unit
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below. For details of each
register, see 6. 3 Registers Controlling Timer Array Unit in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 3. 1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0)
Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN 0 SAU1EN SAU0EN 0 TAU0EN
TAU0EN Cont rol of timer array 0 unit input clock
0 Stops input clock supply.
SFR used by timer array unit 0 cannot be written.
Timer array unit 0 is in the reset status.
1 Enabl es i nput c l ock supply.
SFR used by timer array unit 0 can be read/written.
Cautions 1. When setting the timer array unit, be sure to set the TAUmEN bit to 1 first. If TAUmEN = 0, writing
to a control register of timer array unit is ignored, and all read values are default values (except
for the timer input select register 0 (TIS0), input switch control register (ISC), noise filter enable
register 1 (NFEN1), port mode control registers 0, 1, 4 (PMC0, PMC1, PMC4), port mode registers
0, 1, 4 (PM0, PM1, PM4), and port registers 0, 1, 4 (P0, P1, P4)).
Timer clock select register m (TPSm)
Timer mode register mn (TMRmn)
Timer status register mn (TSRmn)
Timer channel enable status register m (TEm)
Timer channel start register m (TSm)
Timer channel stop register m (TTm)
Timer output enable register m (TOEm)
Timer output register m (TOm)
Timer output level register m (TOLm)
Timer output mode register m (TOMm)
2. Be sure to clear bits 1, 4, and 6 to “0”.
3. 6. 3. 2 Timer clock select register m (TPSm)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 6. 3. 2 Timer clock select register m
(TPSm) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 135
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 3. 3 Timer mode register mn (TMRmn)
Format of Timer Mode Register mn (TMRmn) (1/4)
Address: F0190H, F0191H (TMR00) - F019EH, F019FH (TMR07) After reset: 0000H R/W
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 2, 4, 6)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
MAS
TER
mn
STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0 MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 1, 3)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
SPLIT
mn
STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0 MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 0, 5, 7)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
0Note STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0 MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
CKSmn1 CK Smn0 Selecti on of operat i on cl ock (fMCK) of channel n
0 0 Operat i on cl ock CKm0 set by timer clock select register m (TPSm)
0 1 Operat i on cl ock CKm2 set by timer clock select register m (TPSm)
1 0 Operat i on cl ock CKm1 set by timer clock select register m (TPSm)
1 1 Operat i on cl ock CKm3 set by timer clock select register m (TPSm)
Operation clock (fMCK) is used by the edge detector. A count clock (f TCLK) and a sampling clock are generated depending on
the setting of the CCSmn bit.
The operation clocks CKm2 and CKm3 can only be selected for channels 1 and 3.
CCSmn Selection of count clock (fTCLK) of channel n
0 Operation clock (fMCK) specified by the CKSmn0 and CKSmn1 bits
1 Valid edge of input signal input from the TImn pin
When channel 5 is used, the valid edge of the input signal selected by the TIS0
Count clock (fTCLK) is used for the tim er/c ounter, output controller, and interrupt controller.
Note Bit 11 is fixed at 0 of read only, write is ignored.
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 13, 5, and 4 to “0”.
2. The timer array unit must be stopped (TTm = 00FFH) if the clock selected for fCLK is changed (by
changing the value of the system clock control register (CKC)), even if the operating clock
specified by using the CKSmn0 and CKSmn1 bits (fMCK) or the valid edge of the signal input from
the TImn pin is selected as the count clock (fTCLK).
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7 (however, timer input pin (TImn), timer output pin
(TOmn): n = 0, 4, 7))
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 136
Mar 31, 2014
Format of Timer Mode Register mn (TMRmn) (2/4)
Address: F0190H, F0191H (TMR00) - F019EH, F019FH (TMR07) After reset: 0000H R/W
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 2, 4, 6)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
MAS
TER
mn
STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0
MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 1, 3)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
SPLIT
mn
STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0
MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 0, 5, 7)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
0Note STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0
MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
Bit 11 of TMRmn (n = 2, 4, 6)
MASTER
mn
Selection between using channel n independently or
simultaneous ly with anot her channel (as a slave or master)
0 Operates i n independent channel operation function or as slave channel in simultaneous c hannel operati on
function.
1 Operates as master channel in sim ult aneous channel operation function.
Only the channel 2, 4, 6 can be set as a master channel (MASTERmn = 1).
Be sure to use channel 0, 5, 7 are fixed to 0 (Regardless of the bit setting, channel 0 operates as master, because it is the
highest channel).
Clear the MASTERmn bit to 0 for a channel that is used with the independent channel operation function.
Bit 11 of TMRmn (n = 1, 3)
SPLITmn Select i on of 8 or 16-bit tim er operation for channels 1 and 3
0 Operates as 16-bit tim er.
(Operates in independent channel operation f unction or as slave channel in simultaneous channel operati on
function.)
1 Operates as 8-bit timer.
STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
Setting of start tri gger or capt ure trigger of channel n
0 0 0 Only soft ware trigger start is valid (other trigger sourc es are unsel ected).
0 0 1 Vali d edge of the TImn pin input is used as both the start trigger and capture trigger.
0 1 0 Both the edges of the TImn pin input are used as a start trigger and a capture trigger.
1 0 0
Interrupt signal of the master channel is used (when the channel is used as a slave channel
with the simultaneous channel operation function).
Other than above Setting prohi bi ted
Note Bit 11 is fixed at 0 of read only, write is ignored.
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7 (however, timer input pin (TImn), timer output pin
(TOmn): n = 0, 4, 7))
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 137
Mar 31, 2014
Format of Timer Mode Register mn (TMRmn) (3/4)
Address: F0190H, F0191H (TMR00) - F019EH, F019FH (TMR07) After reset: 0000H R/W
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 2, 4, 6)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
MAS
TER
mn
STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0 MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 1, 3)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
SPLIT
mn
STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0 MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 0, 5, 7)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
0Note STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0 MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
CISmn1 CISmn0 Selection of TImn pin input valid edge
0 0 Falling edge
0 1 Rising edge
1 0 B oth edges (when low-level width is measured)
Start trigger: Falling edge, Capture trigger: Rising edge
1 1 B oth edges (when high-level width is measured)
Start trigger: Rising edge, Capture trigger: Falling edge
If both the edges are specified when the value of the STSmn2 to STSmn0 bits is other than 010B, set the CISmn1 to
CISmn0 bits to 10B.
Note Bit 11 is fixed at 0 of read only, write is ignored.
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7 (however, timer input pin (TImn), timer output pin
(TOmn): n = 0, 4, 7))
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 138
Mar 31, 2014
Format of Timer Mode Register mn (TMRmn) (4/4)
Address: F0190H, F0191H (TMR00) - F019EH, F019FH (TMR07) After reset: 0000H R/W
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 2, 4, 6)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
MAS
TER
mn
STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0 MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 1, 3)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
SPLIT
mn
STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0 MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMRmn
(n = 0, 5, 7)
CKS
mn1
CKS
mn0
0 CCS
mn
0Note STS
mn2
STS
mn1
STS
mn0
CIS
mn1
CIS
mn0
0 0 MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
MD
mn3
MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
Operation mode of
channel n
Corresponding function Count operati on of
TCR
0 0 0 1/0 Interval tim er mode I nterval timer/Square wave output/
Divider funct i on/PWM output (master)
Counting down
0 1 0 1/0 Capture mode Input pulse interval measurement Counting up
0 1 1 0 Event counter mode External event counter Counting down
1 0 0 1/0 One-count mode Delay counter/One-shot pulse output/
PWM output (slave)
Counting down
1 1 0 0 Capture & one-count
mode
Measurement of high/l ow-level width of
input signal
Counting up
Other than above Setting prohibi ted
The operation of the MDmn0 bit varies depending on each operation mode (see table below).
Note Bit 11 is fixed at 0 of read only, write is ignored.
(Remark is on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 139
Mar 31, 2014
Operation mode
(Value set by the MDmn3 to
MDmn1 bits (see table above))
MD
mn0
Setting of start i ng counting and interrupt
Interval timer mode 0, 0, 0)
Capture mode (0, 1, 0)
0 Timer interrupt is not generated when counting is started (timer output does not change, either).
1 Timer interrupt is generat ed when counting is start ed (tim er output also changes).
Event counter mode (0, 1, 1) 0 Time r i nter rupt i s n ot generated when counting is started (timer output does not change, either).
One-count mode
Note 1
(1, 0, 0)
0 Start trigger is invali d duri ng count ing operation. At that time, interrupt is not generated, eit her.
1 Start t ri gger is valid duri ng count i ng operation Note 2. At that time, interrupt i s not generated.
Capture & one-count mode
(1, 1, 0)
0 Timer interrupt is not generated when counting is started (timer output does not change, either).
Start trigger is invali d duri ng count ing operati on. At that time interrupt is not generated, either.
Other than above Setting prohibited
Notes 1. In one-count mode, interrupt output (INTTMmn) when starting a count operation and TOmn output are not
controlled.
2. If the start trigger (TSmn = 1) is issued during operation, the counter is initialized, an interrupt is generated,
and recounting is started (does not occur the interrupt request).
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7 (however, timer input pin (TImn), timer output pin
(TOmn): n = 0, 4, 7))
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 140
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 3. 4 Timer status register mn (TSRmn)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 6. 3. 4 Timer status register mn
(TSRmn) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 3. 5 Timer channel enable status register m (TEm)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 6. 3. 5 Timer channel enable status
register m (TEm) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 3. 6 Timer channel start register m (TSm)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 6. 3 . 6 Time r c ha nne l start register m
(TSm) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 3. 7 Timer channel stop register m (TTm)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 6. 3. 7 Timer channel stop register m
(TTm) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 3. 8 Timer input select register 0 (TIS0)
Address: F0074H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TIS0 0 0 0 0 0 TIS02 TIS01 TIS00
TIS02 TIS01 TIS00 Selection of timer input used with channel 5
0 0 0 Default value
1 0 0 Low-speed on-c hip os cillat or clock (fIL)
Other than above Setting prohibited
Caution High-level width, low-level width of timer input selected will require more than 1/fMCK +10 ns.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 141
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 3. 9 Timer output enable register m (TOEm)
Address: F01BAH, F01BBH (TOE0) After reset: 0000H R/W
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TOEm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOE
m7
0 0 TOE
m4
0 0 0 TOE
m0
TOEmn Timer output enable/disabl e of channel n
0 The TOmn operation stopped by count operati on (tim er channel output bit ).
Writing to the TOmn bit is enabled.
The TOmn pin functions as data output, and it outputs the level set to the TOmn bit.
The output level of the TOmn pin can be manipulated by software.
1 The TOmn operation enabled by count operati on (tim er channel output bit ).
Writing to the TOmn bit is disabled (writing is ignored).
The TOmn pin functions as timer output, and the TOEmn bit is set or reset depending on the timer operation.
The TOmn pin outputs the square-wave or PWM depending on the timer operation.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8, 6, 5, 3 to 1 to “0”.
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7 (however, timer input pin (TImn), timer output pin
(TOmn): n = 0, 4, 7))
3. 6. 3. 10 Timer output register m (TOm)
Address: F01B8H, F01B9H (TO0) After reset: 0000H R/W
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TOm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOm7 0 0 TOm4 0 0 0 TOm0
TOmn Tim er out put of channel n
0 Timer output value is “0”.
1 Timer output value is “1”.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8, 6, 5, 3 to 1 to “0”.
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7 (however, timer input pin (TImn), timer output pin
(TOmn): n = 0, 4, 7))
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 142
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 3. 11 Timer output level register m (TOLm)
Address: F01BCH, F01BDH (TOL0) After reset: 0000H R/W
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TOLm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOL
m7
0 0 TOL
m4
0 0 0 0
TOLmn Control of timer output level of channel n
0 Positi ve l ogic output (active-hi gh)
1 Negative logi c output (active-low)
Caution Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8, 6, 5, 3 to 0 to “0”.
Remarks 1. If the value of this register is rewritten during timer operation, the timer output logic is inverted when the
timer output signal changes next, instead of immediately after the register value is rewritten.
2. m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7 (however, timer input pin (TImn), timer output pin
(TOmn): n = 0, 4, 7))
3. 6. 3. 12 Timer output mode register m (TOMm)
Address: F01BEH, F01BFH (TOM0) After reset: 0000H R/W
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TOMm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOM
m7
0 0 TOM
m4
0 0 0 0
TOMmn Control of timer output mode of channel n
0 Master c hannel output mode (to produce toggl e output by timer interrupt request signal (INTTMmn))
1 Slave c hannel output mode (output is set by the timer interrupt request signal (INTTMmn) of the master
channel, and reset by the timer interrupt request signal (INTTMmp) of the slave channel)
Caution Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8 and 0 to “0”.
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0)
n: Channel number
n = 0, 1 (n = 0, 2, 4, 6)
p: Slave channel number
n = 4, 7
(For details of the relation between the master channel and slave channel, refer to 3. 6. 4 Basic rules of
timer array unit.)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 143
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 3. 13 Input switch control register (ISC)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 6. 3. 13 Input switch control register
(ISC) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 3. 14 Noise filter enable register 1 (NFEN1)
Address: F0071H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NFEN1 TNFEN07 0 0 TNFEN04 0 0 0 TNFEN00
TNFEN07
Enable/disable usi ng noise filter of TI 07/TO07/P41 pi n or RxD2/P14 pin input si gnal Note
0 Noise filter OFF
1 Noise filter ON
TNFEN04 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI04/TO04/P42 pin input signal
0 Noise filter OFF
1 Noise filter ON
TNFEN00 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI00/P00 pin input signal
0 Noise filter OFF
1 Noise filter ON
Note The applicable pin can be switched by setting the ISC1 bit of the ISC register.
ISC1 = 0: Whether or not to use the noise filter of the TI07 pin can be selected.
ISC1 = 1: Whether or not to use the noise filter of the RxD2 pin can be selected.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 6, 5, 3 to 1 to “0”.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 144
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 3. 15 Registers controlling port functions of pins to be used for timer I/O
Using port pins for the timer array unit functions requires setting of the registers that control the port functions
multiplexed on the target pins (port mode register (PMxx), port register (Pxx), and port mode control register (PMCxx)).
For details, see 3. 4. 3. 1 Port mode registers (PMxx), 3. 4. 3. 2 Port registers (Pxx), and 3. 4. 3. 6 Port mode
control registers (PMCxx).
For details of setting example, see 6. 3. 15 Registers controlling port functions of pins to be used for timer I/O in
RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 145
Mar 31, 2014
3. 6. 4 Basic rules of timer array unit
See 6. 4 Basic Rules of Timer Array Unit in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 5 Operation of counter
See 6. 5 Operation of Counter in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 6 Channel output (TOmn pin) control
See 6. 6 Channel Output (TOmn pin) Control in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 7 Timer input (TImn) control
See 6. 7 Timer Input (TImn) Control in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 8 Independent channel operation function of timer array unit
See 6. 8 Independent Channel Operation Function of Timer Array Unit in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 9 Simultaneous channel operation function of timer array unit
See 6. 9 Simultaneous Channel Operation Function of Timer Array Unit in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
3. 6. 10 Cautions when using timer array unit
See 6. 10 Cautions When Using Timer Array Unit in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 146
Mar 31, 2014
3. 7 Real-Time Clock
Real-time clock is not provided in RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 147
Mar 31, 2014
3. 8 12-bit Interval Timer
3. 8. 1 Functions of 12-bit interval timer
An interrupt (INTIT) is generated at any previously specified time interval. It can be utilized for wakeup from STOP
mode and triggering an A/D converter’s SNOOZE mode.
3. 8. 2 Configuration of 12-bit interval timer
The 12-bit interval timer includes the following hardware.
Table 3-10. Configuration of 12-bit Interval Timer
Item Configuration
Counter 12-bit counter
Control regist ers Peripheral enabl e regi ster 0 (PER0)
Subsyst em clock supply mode control register (OSMC)
Interval tim er cont rol register (ITMC)
Figure 3-6. Block Diagram of 12-bit Interval Timer
WUTMM
CK0
f
IL
RINTE ITMCMP11 to ITMCMP0
Subsystem clock supply mode
control register (OSMC) Interval timer control
register (ITMC)
Interrupt signal (INTIT)
Count clock 12-bit counter
Clear
Match signal
Selector
Internal bus
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 148
Mar 31, 2014
3. 8. 3 Registers controlling 12-bit interval timer
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below. For details of each
register, see 8. 3 Registers Controlling 12-bit Interval Timer in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
3. 8. 3. 1 Peripheral enable register0 (PER0)
Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN 0 SAU1EN SAU0EN 0 TAU0EN
RTCEN Control of 12-bit i nterval timer input clock supply
0 Stops input clock supply.
SFR used by the 12-bit interval timer cannot be writt en.
The 12-bit interval tim er is in the reset status.
1 Enables input clock supply.
SFR used by the 12-bit interval timer c an be written.
3. 8. 3. 2 Subs ystem clock supply mode control register (OSMC)
Address: F00F3H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OSMC 0 0 0 WUTMMCK0 0 0 0 0
WUTMMCK0 Operation clock for 12-bit interval timer
0 Default value
1 Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bit 7 to “0”.
2. To use 12-bit interval timer, after reset release, set the WUTMMCK0 bit of the subsystem clock
supply mode control register (OSMC) to “1” before setting the RTCEN bit of the peripheral enable
register0 (PER0) to “1”.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 149
Mar 31, 2014
3. 8. 3. 3 Interval timer control register (ITMC)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 8. 3. 3 Interval timer control register
(ITMC) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 8. 4 12- bit interval timer operation
See 8. 4 12- bit Interval Timer Operation in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 150
Mar 31, 2014
3. 9 Clock Output/Buzzer Output Contr oller
The number of output pins of the clock output and buzzer output controllers differs, depending on the product.
Output Pin 64-pin products 80-pin products
PCLBUZ0
PCLBUZ1
Caution The output pins for clock output/buzzer output controller are not provided in the 64-pin products.
3. 9. 1 Functions of clock output/buzzer output controller
The clock output controller is intended for clock output for supply to peripheral ICs.
Buzzer output is a function to output a square wave of buzzer frequency.
One pin can be used to output a clock or buzzer sound.
The PCLBUZ0 pin outputs a clock selected by clock output select register 0 (CKS0).
Figure 3-7 shows the block diagram of clock output/buzzer output controller.
Figure 3-7. Block Diagram of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller
f
MAIN
PCLOE0 0 0 0
PCLOE0
53
PCLBUZ0
Note
/INTP6/P140
Clock/buzzer
controller
Prescaler
Internal bus
CSEL0
Clock output select register 0 (CKS0)
CCS02 CCS01 CCS00
PM140
Output latch
(P140)
f
MAIN
to f
MAIN
/2
4
f
MAIN
/2
11
to f
MAIN
/2
13
Selector
Note For output frequencies available from PCLBUZ0, see CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 151
Mar 31, 2014
3. 9. 2 Configuration of clock output/buzzer output controller
The clock output/buzzer output controller includes the following hardware.
Table 3-11. Configuration of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller
Item Configuration
Control regist ers Clock output select register n (CKS0)
Port mode register 14 (PM14)
Port regist er 14 (P14)
3. 9. 3 Registers controlling clock output/buzzer output controller
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below. For details of each
register, see 9. 3 Registers Controlling Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s
Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 152
Mar 31, 2014
3. 9. 3. 1 Clock output select register 0 (CKS0)
Address: FFFA5H (CKS0) After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CKS0 PCLOE0 0 0 0 CSEL0 CCS02 CCS01 CCS00
PCLOE0 PCLBUZ0 pin output enable/disable specification
0 Output disabl e (default )
1 Output enable
CSEL0 CCS
02
CCS
01
CCS
00
PCLBUZ0 pin output clock sel ection
fMAIN = 5 MHz fMAIN = 10 MHz fMAIN = 20 MHz fMAIN = 32 MHz
0 0 0 0 fMAIN 5 MHz 10 MHzNote Setting
prohibitedNote
Setting
prohibitedNote
0 0 0 1 fMAIN/2 2. 5 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHzNote 16 MHzNote
0 0 1 0 fMAIN/22 1. 25 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHzNote
0 0 1 1 fMAIN/23 625 k Hz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz 4 MHz
0 1 0 0 fMAIN/24 312. 5 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz 2 MHz
0 1 0 1 fMAIN/211 2.44 kHz 4.88 kHz 9.77 k Hz 15.63 kHz
0 1 1 0 fMAIN/212 1.22 kHz 2.44 kHz 4.88 k Hz 7.81 kHz
0 1 1 1 fMAIN/213 610 Hz 1.22 kHz 2. 44 kHz 3.91 kHz
Other than above Setting prohibited
Note Use the output clock within a range of 16 MHz. Furthermore, when using the output clock at 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
can be use it within 8 MHz only. See 5. 2. 3 AC characteristics for details.
Cautions 1. Change the output clock after disabling clock output (PCLOEn = 0).
2. To shift to STOP mode when the main system clock is selected (CSELn = 0), set PCLOEn = 0
before executing the STOP instruction.
Remark f
MAIN: Main system clock frequency
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 153
Mar 31, 2014
3. 9. 3. 2 Registers controlling port functions of pins to be used for clock or buzzer output
Using a port pin for clock or buzzer output requires setting of the registers that control the port functions multiplexed on
the target pin (port mode register (PMxx), port register (Pxx)). For details, see 3. 4. 3. 1 Port mode registers (PMxx)
and 3. 4. 3. 2 Port registers (Pxx).
For details of setting example, see 9. 3. 2 Registers controlling port functions of pins to be used for clock or
buzzer output in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 9. 4 Operations of clock o utput/bu zzer output controller
See 9. 4 Operations of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
3. 9. 5 Cautions of clock output/buzzer output controller
See 9. 5 Cautions of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 154
Mar 31, 2014
3. 10 Watchdog Timer
See CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 155
Mar 31, 2014
3. 11 A/D Converter
The number of analog input channels of the A/D converter differs, depending on the product.
64-pin products 80-pin products
Analog input
channels
Total 13 channels 17 channels
High
accuracy
channel
Pins based on input
buffer power supply
AVDD
4 channels
(ANI0 to AN I3 )
5 channels
(ANI0 to AN I4 )
Standard
channel
Pins based on input
buffer power supply
VDD
9 channels
(ANI16 to ANI18, ANI20 to ANI23,
ANI28, ANI30)
12 channels
(ANI16 to ANI18, ANI20 to ANI26,
ANI28, ANI30)
Remark In this section, most of the following descriptions, such as function of A/D converter, block diagram and
configuration, are based on the case of the 80-pin products as an example. For the case of the 64-pin
products, ignore the des cri ptions which are not available for 64-pin products.
3. 11. 1 Function of A/D converter
The A/D converter converts analog input signals into digital values, and is configured to control analog inputs, including
up to 17 channels of A/D converter analog inputs (ANI0 to ANI4, ANI16 to ANI18, ANI20 to ANI26, ANI28, and ANI30).
12-bit resolution or 8-bit resolution can also be selected by using the ADTYP bit of A/D converter mode register 2
(ADM2). The A/D converter has the following functions.
12-bit/8-bit resolution A/D conversion
A/D conversion is carried out repeatedly for one analog input channel selected from ANI0 to ANI4, ANI16 to ANI18,
ANI20 to ANI26, ANI28, ANI30. Each time an A/D conversion operation ends, an interrupt request (INTAD) is
generated (when in the sele ct mode).
Caution The valid resolution differs depending on the voltage conditions of AVDD and AVREFP. For details, see
5. 2. 5. 1 A/D converter characteristics.
Remark When using the converter with a resolution of 10 bits, select the 12-bit resolution mode (ADTYP = 0). Use the
higher 10 bits of the conversion result. Do not use the lower 2 bits.
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 156
Mar 31, 2014
Various A/D conversion modes can be specified by using the mode combinations below.
Trigger mode Software trigger Conversion is st arted by software manipulation.
Hardware trigger no-wait m ode Conversion is started by detect i ng a hardware trigger.
Hardware trigger wait m ode The power is turned on by detecting a hardware trigger while
the system is off and in the conversion st andby st ate, and
conversion is then started automatically after the A/D power
supply stabilization wait time passes.
When using the SNOOZE mode function, specify the
hardware trigger wait m ode.
Channel selecti on
mode
Select mode A/D conversion is performed on the analog input of one
selected channel.
Scan mode A/D conversion is performed on the analog input of four
channels in order.
Conversion operati on
mode
One-shot conversion mode A/D conversion is performed on the selected channel once.
Sequential conversion mode A/D conversion is sequentially performed on the selected
channels unti l it is st opped by software.
Operation ModeNote Number of Sampling Clock
Normal 1 11 fAD Set a value to the number of sampling clocks, at whic h the
sampling capacitor is f ully charged, dependi ng on the out put
impedance of the analog input source.
Normal 2 23 fAD
Low-voltage 1 33 fAD
Low-voltage 2 187 fAD
Note The operation modes selectable differ depending on the analog input channel, AVDD voltage, trigger mode, and
fCLK. For details, see 3. 11. 3. 2 A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) and check A/D conversion time selection.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 157
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 3-8. Block Diagram of A/D Converter
INTAD
ADCS ADMD FR2 FR1 ADCEFR0
Sample & hold circuit
Temperature sensor
AVSS
A/D voltage comparator
A/D converter mode
register 0 (ADM0)
Internal bus
Internal bus
6
Analog input channel
specification register (ADS)
ANI0/AV
REFP
/P20
ANI1/AV
REFM
/P21
A
NI2/P22 to ANI4/P24
Controller
A/D conversion result
register (ADCR)
Conversion result
comparison upper limit
setting register (ADUL)
Conversion result
comparison lower limit
setting register (ADLL)
A/D conversion
result upper
limit/lower limit
comparator
Timer trigger signal (INTIT)
Comparison
voltage
generator
LV1 LV0
6
A/D port configuration
register (ADPC)
ADPC3 ADPC2 ADPC1 ADPC0
A/D test register
(ADTES)
ADTES1 ADTES0
42
ADS3ADS4 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0
ADISS
ADREFPMADREFP0
ADRCK AWC ADTYP
ADREFP1
Internal reference voltage (1.45 V)
AVDD
AV
REFP
/ANI0/P20
AV
REFM
/ANI1/P21
AVSS
ADCS bit
ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 bits
ADTMD1ADTMD0 ADTRS1 ADTRS0
A/D converter mode
register 1 (ADM1)
A/D converter mode
register 2 (ADM2)
Internal reference voltage (1.45 V)
ADREFM bit
Timer trigger signal (INTTM01)
Successive
approximation register
(SAR)
ADSCM
ANI16/P03/SI10/RxD1/SDA10
ANI17/P02/SO10/TxD1
ANI18/P10/SCK00/SCL00
ANI20/P11 to ANI24/P15
ANI25/P51/SO11/INTP2
ANI26/P50/SI11/SDA11/INTP1
ANI28/P70/SCK21/SCL21/KR0
ANI30/P41/TI07/TO07
Analog/digital
switcher
Selector
Selector
Selector
Selector
Selector
Remark Analog input pins drawn in this figure is for the case of 80-pin products
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 158
Mar 31, 2014
3. 11. 2 Configuration of A/D converter
The A/D converter includes the following hardware.
(1) ANI0 to ANI4, ANI16 to ANI18, ANI20 to ANI26, ANI28, and ANI30 pins
These are the analog input pins of the 17 channels of the A/D converter. They input analog signals to be converted
into digital signals. Pins other than the one selected as the analog input pin can be used as I/O port pins.
(2) Sample & hold circuit
The sample & hold circuit samples each of the analog input voltages sequentially sent from the input circuit, and
sends them to the A/D voltage comparator. This circuit also holds the sampled analog input voltage during A/D
conversion.
(3) A/D voltage comparator
This A/D voltage comparator compares output from the voltage tap of the comparison voltage generator with the
sampled voltage value.
If the analog input voltage is found to be greater than the reference voltage (1/2 AVREF) as a result of the comparison,
the most significant bit (MSB) of the successive approximation register (SAR) is set. If the analog input voltage is less
than the reference voltage (1/2 AVREF), the MSB bit of the SAR is reset.
After that, bit 10 of the SAR register is automatically set, and the next comparison is made. The voltage tap of the
comparison voltage generator is selected by the value of bit 11, to which the result has been already set.
Bit 11 = 0: (1/4 AVREF)
Bit 11 = 1: (3/4 AVREF)
The voltage tap of the comparison voltage generator and the analog input voltage are compared and bit 10 of the
SAR register is manipulated according to the result of the comparison.
Analog input voltage Voltage tap of comparison voltage generator: Bit 10 = 1
Analog input voltage Voltage tap of comparison voltage generator: Bit 10 = 0
Comparison is continued like this to bit 0 of the SAR register.
When performing A/D conversion at a resolution of 8 bits, the comparison continues until bit 4 of the SAR register.
Remark AVREF: The + side reference voltage of the A/D converter.
(This can be selected from AVREFP, the internal reference voltage (1.45 V), and AVDD.)
(4) Comparison voltage generator
The comparison voltage generator generates the comparison voltage input from an analog input pin.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 159
Mar 31, 2014
(5) Successive approximation register (SAR)
The SAR register is a register that sets voltage tap data whose values from the comparison voltage generator match
the voltage values of the analog input pins, 1 bit at a time starting from the most significant bit (MSB).
If data is set in the SAR register all the way to the least significant bit (LSB) (end of A/D conversion), the contents of
the SAR register (conversion results) are held in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR). When all the specified
A/D conversion operations have ended, an A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated.
(6) 1 2 -bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR)
The A/D conversion result is loaded from the successive approximation register to this register each time A/D
conversion is completed, and the ADCR register holds the A/D conversion result in its lower 12 bits (the higher 4 bits
are fixed to 0).
(7) 8 -bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH)
The A/D conversion result is loaded from the successive approximation register to this register each time A/D
conversion is completed, and the ADCRH register stores the higher 8 bits of the A/D conversion result.
(8) Controller
This circuit controls the conversion time of an input analog signal that is to be converted into a digital signal, as well
as starting and stopping of the conversion operation. When A/D conversion has been completed, this controller
generates INTAD.
(9) AVREFP pin
This pin inputs an external reference voltage (AVREFP).
If using AVREFP as the + side reference voltage of the A/D converter, set the ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 bits of A/D
converter mode register 2 (ADM2) to 1.
The analog signals input to ANI0 to ANI12 and ANI16 to ANI30 are converted to digital signals based on the voltage
applied betw een AVREFP and the side reference voltage (AVREFM/AVSS).
In addition to AVREFP, it is possible to select AVDD, or the internal reference voltage (1.45 V) as the + side reference
voltage of the A/D converter.
(10) A VREFM pin
This pin inputs an external reference voltage (AVREFM). If using AVREFM as the side reference voltage of the A/D
converter, set the ADREFM bit of the ADM2 register to 1.
In addition to AVREFM, it is possible to select AVSS as the side reference voltage of the A/D converter.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 160
Mar 31, 2014
3. 11. 3 Registers used in A/D converter
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below. For details of each
register, see 11. 3 Registers Used in A/D Converter in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 3. 1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0)
Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN 0 SAU1EN SAU0EN 0 TAU0EN
ADCEN Control of A/D converter input clock supply
0 Stops input clock supply.
SFR used by the A/D converter cannot be written.
The A/D converter is in the reset status.
1 Enabl es i nput c l ock supply.
SFR used by the A/D converter can be read/written.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 1, 4, and 6 to “0”.
3. 11. 3. 2 A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 11. 3. 2 A/D converter mode register
0 (ADM0) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 161
Mar 31, 2014
3. 11. 3. 3 A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1)
Address: FFF32H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADM1 ADTMD1 ADTMD0 ADSCM 0 0 0 ADTRS1 ADTRS0
ADTMD1 ADTMD0 Selection of the A/D conversion trigger mode
0 × Software trigger mode
1 0 Hardware trigger no-wait mode
1 1 Hardware trigger wait mode
ADSCM Specification of the A/D conversion mode
0 Sequential conversion mode
1 One-shot conversion mode
ADTRS1 ADTRS0 Selection of the hardware trigger signal
0 0 End of timer channel 1 count or capture interrupt signal (INTTM01)
0 1 Setting prohibited
1 0 Setting prohibited
1 1 Interval timer interrupt signal (INTIT)
Cautions 1. Rewrite the value of the ADM1 register while conversion is stopped (ADCS = 0, ADCE = 0).
2. To complete A/D conversion, specify at least the following time as the hardware trigger interval:
Hardware trigger no wait mode: 2 fCLK clock + A/D conversion time
Hardware trigger wait mode: 2 fCLK clock + A/D power supply stabilization wait time +A/D
conversion time
3. In modes other than SNOOZE mode, input of the next INTRTC or INTIT will not be recognized as a
valid hardware trigger for up to four fCLK cycles after the first INTRTC or INTIT is input.
Remarks 1. ×: don’t care
2. f
CLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 162
Mar 31, 2014
3. 11. 3. 4 A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 11. 3. 4 A/D converter mode register
2 (ADM2) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 3. 5 12-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 11. 3. 5 12-bit A/D conversion result
register (ADCR) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 3. 6 8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 11. 3. 6 8-bit A/D conversion result
register (ADCRH) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 163
Mar 31, 2014
3. 11. 3. 7 Analog input channel specification register (ADS)
Address: FFF31H Aft er r es et: 0 0 H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADS ADISS 0 0 ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0
Select mode (64-pin products, ADMD = 0)
ADISS ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Selected channel Input source
0 0 0 0 0 0 ANI0 P20/ANI0/AVREFP pin
0 0 0 0 0 1 ANI1 P21/ANI1/AVREFM pin
0 0 0 0 1 0 ANI2 P22/ANI2 pin
0 0 0 0 1 1 ANI3 P23/ANI3 pin
0 0 0 1 0 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 0 1 0 1 Setting prohibited
0 0 0 1 1 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 0 1 1 1 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 0 0 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 0 0 1 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 0 1 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 0 1 1 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 1 0 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 1 0 1 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 1 1 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 1 1 1 Setting prohibited
0 1 0 0 0 0 ANI16 P03/ANI16 pin
0 1 0 0 0 1 ANI17 P02/ANI17 pin
0 1 0 0 1 0 ANI18 P10/ANI18 pin
0 1 0 0 1 1 Setting prohibited
0 1 0 1 0 0 ANI20 P11/ANI20 pin
0 1 0 1 0 1 ANI21 P12/ANI21 pin
0 1 0 1 1 0 ANI22 P13/ANI22 pin
0 1 0 1 1 1 ANI23 P14/ANI23 pin
0 1 1 0 0 0 Setting prohibited
0 1 1 0 0 1 Setting prohibited
0 1 1 0 1 0 Setting prohibited
0 1 1 0 1 1 Setting prohibited
0 1 1 1 0 0 ANI28 P70/ANI28 pin
0 1 1 1 0 1 Setting prohibited
0 1 1 1 1 0 ANI30 P41/ANI30 pin
0 1 1 1 1 1 Setting prohibited
1 0 0 0 0 0 Temperature sensor output Note
1 0 0 0 0 1 Internal reference voltage output
(1.45 V)Note
Other than above Setting prohi bi t ed
Note This setting can be used only in HS (high-speed main) mode.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 164
Mar 31, 2014
Address: FFF31H Aft er r es et: 0 0 H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADS ADISS 0 0 ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0
Scan mode (64-pin products, ADMD = 1)
ADISS ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Analog input channel
Scan 0 Scan 1 Scan 2 Scan 3
0 0 0 0 0 0 ANI0 ANI1 ANI2 ANI3
0 1 0 1 0 0 ANI20 ANI21 ANI22 ANI23
Other than above Setting prohibited
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0.
2. Set a channel to be used for A/D conversion in the input mode by using port mode registers 0 to
2, 4, or 7 (PM0 to PM2, PM4, PM7).
3. Do not set the pin that is set by the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) as digital I/O by the
ADS register.
4. Do not set the pin that is set by port mode control register 0, 4, or 7 (PMC0, PMC4, PMC7) as
digital I/O by the ADS register.
5. Rewrite the value of the ADISS bit while conversion operation is stopped (ADCS = 0, ADCE = 0).
6. If using AVREFP as the + side reference voltage source of the A/D converter, do not select ANI0 as
an A/D conversion channel.
7. If using AVREFM as the side reference voltage source of the A/D converter, do not select ANI1 as
an A/D conversion channel.
8. If ADISS is set to 1, the internal reference voltage (1.45 V) cannot be used for the + side reference
voltage source. Also, after setting the ADISS to 1, the result of the first conversion cannot be
used. For details about the setting flow, refer to 3. 11. 7 A/D converter setup flowchart.
9. Do not set the ADISS bit to 1 when shifting from STOP mode to HALT mode. Also, if the ADISS bit
is set to 1, the temperature sensor operating current indicated in 5. 2. 2. 2 Supply current
characteristics (ITMPS) will be added to the current consumption when shifting to HALT mode
while the CPU is operating on the main system clock.
10. Ignore the conversion result if the corresponding ANI pin does not exist in the product used.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 165
Mar 31, 2014
Address: FFF31H Aft er r es et: 0 0 H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADS ADISS 0 0 ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0
Select mode (80-pin products, ADMD = 0)
ADISS ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Selected channel Input source
0 0 0 0 0 0 ANI0 P20/ANI0/AVREFP pin
0 0 0 0 0 1 ANI1 P21/ANI1/AVREFM pin
0 0 0 0 1 0 ANI2 P22/ANI2 pin
0 0 0 0 1 1 ANI3 P23/ANI3 pin
0 0 0 1 0 0 ANI4 P24/ANI4 pin
0 0 0 1 0 1 Setting prohibited
0 0 0 1 1 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 0 1 1 1 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 0 0 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 0 0 1 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 0 1 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 0 1 1 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 1 0 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 1 0 1 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 1 1 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 1 1 1 1 Setting prohibited
0 1 0 0 0 0 ANI16 P03/ANI16 pin
0 1 0 0 0 1 ANI17 P02/ANI17 pin
0 1 0 0 1 0 ANI18 P10/ANI18 pin
0 1 0 0 1 1 Setting prohibited
0 1 0 1 0 0 ANI20 P11/ANI20 pin
0 1 0 1 0 1 ANI21 P12/ANI21 pin
0 1 0 1 1 0 ANI22 P13/ANI22 pin
0 1 0 1 1 1 ANI23 P14/ANI23 pin
0 1 1 0 0 0 ANI24 P15/ANI24 pin
0 1 1 0 0 1 ANI25 P51/ANI25 pin
0 1 1 0 1 0 ANI26 P50/ANI26 pin
0 1 1 0 1 1 Setting prohibited
0 1 1 1 0 0 ANI28 P70/ANI28 pin
0 1 1 1 0 1 Setting prohibited
0 1 1 1 1 0 ANI30 P41/ANI30 pin
0 1 1 1 1 1 Setting prohibited
1 0 0 0 0 0 Te mperature sensor outputNote
1 0 0 0 0 1 I nt ernal reference voltage
output (1.45 V)Note
Other than above Setting prohi bi ted
Note This setting can be used only in HS (high-speed main) mode.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 166
Mar 31, 2014
Address: FFF31H Aft er r es et: 0 0 H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADS ADISS 0 0 ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0
Scan mode (80-pin products, ADMD = 1)
ADISS ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Analog input channel
Scan 0 Scan 1 Scan 2 Scan 3
0 0 0 0 0 0 ANI0 ANI1 ANI2 ANI3
0 0 0 0 0 1 ANI1 ANI2 ANI3 ANI4
0 1 0 1 0 0 ANI20 ANI21 ANI22 ANI23
0 1 0 1 0 1 ANI21 ANI22 ANI23 ANI24
0 1 0 1 1 0 ANI22 ANI23 ANI24 ANI25
0 1 0 1 1 1 ANI23 ANI24 ANI25 ANI26
Other than above Setting prohibited
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0.
2. Set a channel to be used for A/D conversion in the input mode by using port mode registers 0 to
2, 4, or 7 (PM0 to PM2, PM4, PM7).
3. Do not set the pin that is set by the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) as digital I/O by the
ADS register.
4. Do not set the pin that is set by port mode control register 0, 4, or 7 (PMC0, PMC4, PMC7) as
digital I/O by the ADS register.
5. Rewrite the value of the ADISS bit while conversion operation is stopped (ADCS = 0, ADCE = 0).
6. If using AVREFP as the + side reference voltage source of the A/D converter, do not select ANI0 as
an A/D conversion channel.
7. If using AVREFM as the side reference voltage source of the A/D converter, do not select ANI1 as
an A/D conversion channel.
8. If ADISS is set to 1, the internal reference voltage (1.45 V) cannot be used for the + side reference
voltage source. Also, after setting the ADISS to 1, the result of the first conversion cannot be
used. For details about the setting flow, refer to 3. 11. 7 A/D converter setup flowchart.
9. Do not set the ADISS bit to 1 when shifting from STOP mode to HALT mode. Also, if the ADISS bit
is set to 1, the temperature sensor operating current indicated in 5. 2. 2. 2 Supply current
characteristics (ITMPS) will be added to the current consumption when shifting to HALT mode
while the CPU is operating on the main system clock.
10. Ignore the conversion result if the corresponding ANI pin does not exist in the product used.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 167
Mar 31, 2014
3. 11. 3. 8 Conversion result comparison upper limit setting register (ADUL)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 11. 3. 8 Conversion result
comparison upper limit setting register (ADUL) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 3. 9 Conversion result comparison lower limit setting register (ADLL)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 11. 3. 9 Conversion result
comparison lower limit setting register (ADLL) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 3. 10 A/D test register (ADTES)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 11. 3. 10 A/D test register (ADTES) in
RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 3. 11 Registers controlling port function of analog input pins
Set up the registers for controlling the functions of the ports shared with the analog input pins of the A/D converter (port
mode registers (PMxx), port mode control registers (PMCxx), and A/D port configuration register (ADPC)).
For details, see as follows.
3. 4. 3. 1 Port mode registers (PMxx)
3. 4. 3. 6 Port mode control registers (PMCxx)
3. 4. 3. 7 A/D port configuration register (ADPC)
For details of setting example, see 11. 3. 11 Registers controlling port function of analog input pins in RL78/G1A
Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 168
Mar 31, 2014
3. 11. 4 A/D converter conversion operations
See 11. 4 A/D Converter Conversion Operations in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 5 Input voltage and conversion results
See 11. 5 Input Voltage and Conversion Results in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 6 A/D converter operation modes
See 11. 6 A/D Converter Operation Modes in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 7 A/D converter setup flowchart
See 11. 7 A/D Converter Setup Flowchart in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 8 SNOOZE mode function
See 11. 8 SNOOZE Mode Function in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 9 How to read A/D converter characteristics table
See 11. 9 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
3. 11. 10 Cautions for A/D converter
See 11. 10 Cautions for A/D Converter in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 169
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12 Serial Array Unit
Serial array unit 0 has four serial channels, and serial array unit 1 has two. Each channel can achieve 3-wire serial
(CSI), UART, and simplified I2C communication.
Function assignment of each channel supported by the RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) is as show n below.
64-pin products
Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Sim pl if i ed I2C
0 0 CSI00 UART0 IIC00
1
2 UART1
3
1 0 UART2
(LIN-bus supported)
1 CSI21Note
Note Connected to the pins of the chip of analog block inside the package.
80-pin products
Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UA RT Used as Simpl ifi ed I2C
0 0 CSI00 UART0 IIC00
1
2 CSI10 UART1 IIC10
3
1 0 CSI20 UART2
(LIN-bus supported)
IIC20
1 CSI21Note
Note Connected to the pins of the chip of analog block inside the package.
When “UART0” is used for channels 0 and 1 of unit 0, CSI00 cannot be used, but CSI10, UART1, or IIC10 of channel 2
or 3 can be used.
Caution Most of the descriptions in this section use the units and channels of the 80-pin products as an
example.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 170
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 1 Functions of serial array unit
Each serial interface supported by the RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) has the following features.
3. 12. 1. 1 3-wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI10, CSI20, CSI21)
Data is transmitted or received in synchronization with the serial clock (SCK) output from the master channel.
3-wire serial communication is clocked communication performed by using three communication lines: one for the
serial clock (SCK), one for transmitting serial data (SO), one for receiving serial data (SI).
For details about the settings, see 3. 12. 5 Operation of 3-Wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI10, CSI20, CSI21)
Communication.
[Data transmission/reception]
Data length of 7 or 8 bits
Phase control of transmit/receive data
MSB/LSB first selectable
Level setting of transmit/receive data
[Clock control]
Master/slave selection
Phase control of I/O clock
Setting of transfer period by prescaler and internal counter of each channel
Maximum transfer rate During master communication (CSI00): Max. fCLK/2Note
During master communication (other than CSI00): Max. fCLK/4Note
During slave communicati on: Max. fMCK/6Note
[Interrupt function]
Transfer end interrupt/buffer empty interrupt
[Error detection flag]
Overrun error
In addition, CSI00 of following channels supports the SNOOZE mode. W hen SCK input is detected while in the STOP
mode, the SNOOZE mode makes data reception that does not require the CPU possible. Only CSI00 can be
specified for asynchronous reception.
Note Use the clocks within a range satisfying the SCK cycle time (tKCY) characteristics (see CHAPTER 5
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 171
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 1. 2 UART (UART0 to UART2)
This is a start-stop synchronization function using two lines: serial data transmission (TXD) and serial data reception
(RXD) lines. By using these two communication lines, each data frame, which consist of a start bit, data, parity bit, and
stop bit, is transferred asynchronously (using the internal baud rate) between the microcontroller and the other
communication party. Full-duplex UART communication can be performed by using a channel dedicated to
transmission (even-numbered channel) and a channel dedicated to reception (odd-numbered channel). The LIN-bus
can be implemented by using timer array unit with an external interrupt (INTP0).
For details about the settings, see 3. 12. 6 Operation of UART (UART0 to UART2) Communication.
[Data transmission/reception]
Data length of 7, 8, or 9 bits Note
Select the MSB/LSB first
Level setting of transmit/receive data and select of reverse
Parity bit appending and parity check functions
Stop bit appending
[Interrupt function]
Transfer end interrupt/buffer empty interrupt
Error interrupt in case of framing error, parity error, or overrun error
[Error detection flag]
Framing error, parity error, or overrun error
In addition, UARTs of following channels support the SNOOZE mode. When RxD input is detected while in the STOP
mode, the SNOOZE mode makes data reception that does not require the CPU possible. Only UART0 can be
specified for asynchronous reception.
The LIN-bus is accepted in UART2 (0 and 1 channels of unit 1).
[LIN-bus functions]
Wakeup signa l detection
Sync break field (SBF) detection
Sync field measurement, baud rate calculation
Note Only UART0 can be specified for the 9-bit data length.
Using the external interrupt (INTP0) and
timer array unit
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 172
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 1. 3 Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC10, IIC20)
This is a clocked communication function to communicate with two or more devices by using two lines: serial clock
(SCL) and serial data (SDA). This simplified I2C is designed for single communication with a device such as EEPROM,
flash memory, or A/D converter, and therefore, it functions only as a master.
Make sure by using software, as well as operating the control registers, that the AC specifications of the start and stop
conditions are obs erv ed.
For details about the settings, see 3. 12. 8 Operation of simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC10, IIC20).
[Data transmission/reception]
Master transmission, master reception (only master function with a single master)
ACK output function Note and ACK detection function
Data length of 8 bits
(W hen an address is transmitted, the address is specified by the higher 7 bits, and the least significant bit is used
for R/W cont rol.)
Manual generation of start condition and stop condition
[Interrupt function]
Transfer end interrupt
[Error detection flag]
Parity error (ACK error), or overrun error
[Functions not supported by simplified I2C]
Slave transmission, slave reception
Arbitration loss detection function
Wait detection functions
Note When receiving the last data, ACK will not be output if 0 is written to the SOEmn bit (serial output enable
register m (SOEm)) and serial communication data output is stopped. For details, see 3. 12. 8 Operation of
simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC 10, II C 20).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 173
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 2 Configuration of serial array unit
The serial array unit includes the following hardware.
Table 3-12. Configuration of Serial Array Unit
Item Configuration
Shift register 8 bits or 9 bitsNote 1
Buff er register Lower 8 bits or 9 bits of serial data regist er mn (SDRmn)No t es 1, 2
Serial clock I/O SCK 00, S CK10, SCK20, SCK21 pins (for 3-wire serial I/ O),
SCL00, SCL10, SCL20, SCL21 pins (for simplified I2C)
Serial data input S I00, SI10, SI20, SI21 pins (for 3-wire serial I/O), RxD0, RxD1 pins (for UART), RxD2 pin (for
UART supporting LIN-bus)
Serial data output SO00, SO10, SO20, SO21 pins (for 3-wire serial I/O), TxD0, TxD1 pins (for UART), TxD2 pin (for
UART supporting LIN-bus), output controller
Serial dat a I/O SDA00, SDA10, SDA20 pins (for simplified I2C)
Control regist ers <Regist ers of unit set ting bl ock>
Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0)
Serial clock select register m (SPSm)
Serial channel enable status register m (SEm)
Serial channel start register m (SSm)
Serial channel stop register m (STm)
Serial output enable register m (SOEm)
Serial output register m (SOm)
Serial output level regist er m (SOLm)
Serial standby control register m (SSCm)
Input switch control register (ISC)
Noise filter enable regist er 0 (NFEN0)
<Registers of each channel>
Serial data register mn (SDRmn )
Serial mode register mn (SMRmn)
Serial communication operati on setting regist er mn (S CRmn)
Serial status register mn (SSRmn)
Serial flag clear trigger register m n (SIRmn)
Port input mode registers 0, 1 (PIM0, PIM1)
Port output mode registers 0, 1 (POM0, POM1)
Port mode registers 0, 1, 7 (PM0, P M1, PM7)
Port registers 0, 1, 7 (P0, P1, P7)
(Notes and Remark are on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 174
Mar 31, 2014
Notes 1. The number of bits used as the shift register and buffer register differs depending on the unit and channel.
mn = 00, 01: lower 9 bits
Other than above: lower 8 bits
2. The lower 8 bits of serial data register mn (SDRmn) can be read or written as the following SFR, depending
on the communication mode.
CSIp communication … SIOp (CSIp data register)
UARTq reception … RXDq (UARTq receive data register)
UARTq transmission … TXDq (UARTq transmit data register)
IICr communication … SIOr (IICr data register)
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1)
n: Channel number (n = 0 to 3)
p: CSI number (80-pin products: p = 00, 10, 20, 21 64-pin products: p = 00, 21)
q: UART number (q = 0 to 2)
r: IIC number (80-pin products: r = 00, 10, 20 64-pin products: r = 00)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 175
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 3-9 shows the block diagram of the serial array unit 0.
Figure 3-9. Block Diagram of Serial Array Unit 0
Serial transfer en d i nterrupt
(when UART0: INT S R0)
Serial clock s el ect registe r 0 (SPS0)
PRS
013
4
PRS
003
PRS
012 PRS
011 PRS
010 PRS
002 PRS
001 PRS
000
4
f
CLK
f
CLK
/2
0
to f
CLK
/2
11
Selector
f
CLK
/2
0
to f
CLK
/2
11
Selector
CKS00 MD001CCS00 STS00 MD002
Mod e selection
CSI00 or IIC00
or UART 0
(for tr ansmission)
Edge
detection
Communi cation cont roller
Shift register
Serial data register 00 (SDR00)
Interrupt
controller
Edge/
level
detection
SOE03 SOE02 SOE01 SOE00 Seri al output
enable register 0
(SOE0)
Serial clock I/O pin
(when CSI00: SCK00)
(when IIC00: SCL00)
PM10
SAU0EN
Peripheral enable
regis te r 0 (PER0)
Serial data input pin
(when CSI 00: SI00)
(whe n II C00: S DA00)
(when UART0: RxD0)
Serial dat a output pin
(whe n C S I 0 0: SO00 )
(whe n II C00: S DA00)
(whe n U A RT0: T
X
D0)
Serial mode regis ter 00 (SMR00)
SE03 SE02 SE01 SE00 Serial channel
enable status
regi st er 0 (SE0)
ST03 ST02 ST01 ST00 Seri al ch annel
stop register 0
(ST0)
SS03 SS02 SS01 SS00 Serial c h annel
start register 0
(SS0)
(Buffer register block)(Clo ck divisi o n sett ing block)
Error controller
TXE
00 RXE
00 DAP
00 CKP
00
Serial comm unicatio n operati on setting re gi st er 00 (SCR00 )
EOC
00
PECT
00
Serial fl ag clear tri gger
regi s ter 00 (SIR00)
OVCT
00
PTC
001 SLC
000
PTC
000 DIR
00 SLC
001 DLS
001 DLS
000 TSF
00 OVF
00
BFF
00 PEF
00
Serial status register 00 (SSR00)
Output
controller
Serial transfer end interrupt
(when CSI 00: INTCSI00)
(when II C00: INTI IC0 0 )
(when UART0: INTST0)
Clear
Channel 0
Mode selection
UART0
(for reception)
Communication co n troller
Channel 1
Serial data output pin
(w he n CSI10 : S O 10)
(w he n I I C10: SDA10)
(w he n UART1: T
X
D1)
Serial transfer end interrupt
(when CSI 10: INTCSI10)
(when II C10: INTII C10)
(when UART1: INTST1)
Mode selection
CSI10 or II C10
or UART1
(for transmission)
Comm u ni cation cont roller
Channel 2
Communi cation co ntroller
Channel 3
CK01 CK00
f
MCK
f
TCLK
f
SCK
Prescaler
Output latch
(P10)
Serial transfer er ro r in t e rrupt
(INTSRE0)
CK01 CK00
CK01 CK00
CK01 CK00
SNFEN
10
Noise fi lter enable
regi st er 0 (NFEN0 )
SNFEN
00
SSEC0
Serial st an dby
contr ol register 0
(SSC0)
SWC0
Noise
elimination
enabled/
disabled
SNFEN00
Edge/level
detection
Selector
When UART0
Selector Edge/level
detection
Edge/level
detection
Noise
elimination
enabled/
disabled
SNFEN10
When UART 1
PM11 or PM12
Output latch
(P11 or P12)
0SOL02 0SOL00
Serial output level
regi st er 0 (SOL0)
Error controll er
Error controll er
Serial transfer en d i nterrupt
(when UART1: INT S R1)
Serial transfer er ro r in t e rrupt
(INTSRE1)
Serial o ut put register 0 (SO0)
CKO03 SO03CKO02 CKO01 CKO00 SO02 SO01 SO00
0000 0000
Synchro-
nous
circuit
Synchro-
nous
circuit
Synchro-
nous
circuit
Serial clock I /O pin
(when CS I10: SCK10)
(when IIC10: SCL10)
Serial da ta I/ O pi n
(when CSI10: SI10)
(when IIC10: SDA10)
(when UAR T 1: R
X
D1)
Mode selection
UART1
(for reception)
Error
information
Clock controller
Communication
status
Selector
Selector
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 176
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 3-10 shows the block diagram of the serial array unit 1.
Figure 3-10. Block Diagram of Serial Array Unit 1
Serial clock select register 1 (SPS1)
PRS
113
4
PRS
103
PRS
112 PRS
111 PRS
110 PRS
102 PRS
101 PRS
100
4
f
CLK
f
CLK
/2
0
to f
CLK
/2
11
Selector
f
CLK
/2
0
to f
CLK
/2
11
Selector
CKS10 MD101CCS10 MD102
Communication controller
Shift register
Serial data register 10 (SDR10)
Interrupt
controller
Serial output register 1 (SO1)
SAU1EN
Peripheral enable
register 0 (PER0)
Serial mode register 10 (SMR10)
(Buffer register block)(Clock division setting block)
Error controller
TXE
10 RXE
10 DAP
10 CKP
10
Serial communication operation setting register 10 (SCR10)
EOC
10
PECT
10
Serial flag clear trigger
register 10 (SIR10)
OVCT
10
PTC
101 SLC
100
PTC
100 DIR
10 SLC
101 DLS
101 TSF
10 OVF
10
BFF
10 PEF
10
Serial status register 10 (SSR10)
Output
controller
Error
information
Clear
Channel 0
(LIN-bus supported)
CK11 CK10
f
MCK
f
TCLK
Prescaler
Noise
elimination
enabled/
disabled
SNFEN20
PM14 or PM13
Output latch
(
P14 or P13)
SOE11 SOE10 Serial output
enable register 1
(SOE1)
SE11 SE10 Serial channel
enable status
register 1 (SE1)
ST11 ST10 Serial channel
stop register 1
(ST1)
SS11 SS10 Serial channel
start register 1
(SS1)
0 SOL10 Serial output
level register 1
(SOL1)
CKO11 CKO10 SO11 SO10
0000 0000
Serial data output pin
(when CSI20: SO20)
(when IIC20: SDA20)
(when UART2: TxD2)
Serial transfer end interrupt
(when CSI20: INTCSI20)
(when IIC20: INTIIC20)
(when UART2: INTST2)
PM15
Output latch
(P15)
Edge/
level
detection
Serial clock I/O pin
(when
CSI20: SCK20)
(when IIC20: SCL20)
Serial data input pin
(when CSI20: SI20)
(when IIC20: SDA20)
(when UART2: RxD2)
Edge
detection
Synchro-
nous
circuit
Synchro-
nous
circuit
f
SCK
Mode selection
CSI20 or IIC20
or UART2
(for transmission)
Communication controller
Channel 1
(LIN-bus supported)
Serial transfer error interrupt
(INTSRE2)
CK11 CK10
When UART2
Error controller
Mode selection
CSI21 or UART2
(for reception)
Serial data input pin
(when CSI21: SI21)
Serial clock I/O pin
(when CSI21: SCK21)
Selector
Synchro-
nous
circuit
Edge/level
detection
Serial transfer end interrupt
(when CSI21: INTCSI21)
(when UART2: INTSR2)
Serial data output pin
(when CSI21: SO21)
Noise filter enable
register 0 (NFEN0)
SNFEN
20
00
00
00
00
00
11
11
DLS
100
Selector
Selector
Clock controller
Communication
status
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 177
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 2. 1 Shift register
This is a 9-bit register that converts parallel data into serial data or vice versa.
In case of the UART communication of nine bits of data, nine bits (bits 0 to 8) are usedNote 1.
The shift register cannot be directly manipulated by program.
During reception, it converts data input to the serial pin into parallel data, and stores to the lower 8/9 bits of the
SDRmn register.
When data is transmitted , the v alue transf erred from the low er 8/9 bits of the SDRmn register to this register is output
as serial data from the serial output pin.
For details, see 3. 12. 2. 2 Lower 8/9 bits of the serial data register mn (SDRmn).
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Shift register
3. 12. 2. 2 Lower 8/9 bits of the serial data register mn (SDRmn)
The SDRmn register is the transmit/receive data register (16 bits) of channel n. Bits 8 to 0 of SDR00, SDR01 (lower 9
bits) or bits 7 to 0 of SDR02, SDR03, SDR10Note 1, and SDR11Note 1 (lower 8 bits) function as a transmit/receive
buffer register, and bits 15 to 9 (higher 7 bits) are used as a register that sets the division ratio of the operation clock
(fMCK).
Remark For the function of the higher 7 bits of the SDRmn register, see 12. 3. 5 Higher 7 bits of the serial data
register mn (SDRmn) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
W hen data is r eceive d, para llel dat a conver ted by th e shift re giste r is stor ed in the lo wer 8/9 bi ts. Whe n data is t o be
transmitted, set transmit to be transferred to the shift register to the lower 8/9 bits.
The data stored in the lower 8/9 bits of this register is as follows, depending on the setting of bits 0 and 1 (DLSmn0,
DLSmn1) of serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn), regardless of the output sequence of the
data.
7-bit data length (stored in bits 0 to 6 of SDRmn register)
8-bit data length (stored in bits 0 to 7 of SDRmn register)
9-bit data length (stored in bits 0 to 8 of SDRmn register)Note 1
The SDRmn register can be read or written in 16-bit units.
The lower 8/9 bits of the SDRmn register can be read or writtenNote 2 as the following SFR, depending on the
communication mode.
CSIp communication … SIOp (CSIp data register)
UARTq reception … RXDq (UARTq receive data register)
UARTq transmission … TXDq (UARTq transmit data register)
IICr communication … SIOr (IICr data register)
The SDRmn register can be read or written in 16-bit units.
Reset signal generation clears the SDRmn register to 0000H.
Notes 1. Only following UART0 can be specified for the 9-bit data length.
2. Writing in 8-bit units is prohibited when the operation is stopped (SEmn = 0).
Remarks 1. After data is received, “0” is stored in bits 0 to 8 in bit portions that exceed the data length.
2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1)
n: Channel number (n = 0 to 3)
p: CSI number (80-pin products: p = 00, 10, 20, 21 64-pin products: p = 00, 21)
q: UART number (q = 0 to 2)
r: IIC number (80-pin products: r = 00, 10, 20 64-pin products: r = 00)
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 178
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 3-11. Format of Serial Data Register mn (SDRmn) (mn = 00, 01, 02, 03, 10, 11)
Address: FFF10H, FFF11H (SDR00), FFF12H, FFF13H (SDR01) After reset: 0000H R/W
FFF44H, FFF45H (SDR02), FFF46H, FFF47H (SDR03),
FFF48H, FFF49H (SDR10)Note, FFF4AH, FFF4BH (SDR11)Note
FFF11H (SDR00) FFF10H (SDR00)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SDRmn
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Shift register
For 9-bit data communication with UART0 (mn = 00, 01)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Shift register
Caution For 9-bit data communication, be sure to clear bit 8 of the SDRmn register to “0”.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 179
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 3 Registers controlling serial array unit
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below. For details of each
register, see 12. 3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 3. 1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0)
Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN 0 SAU1EN SAU0EN 0 TAU0EN
SAU1EN Cont rol of seri al array unit 1 input clock supply
0 Stops input clock supply.
SFR used by the serial array unit 1 cannot be written.
The serial array unit 1 is in the reset status.
1 Enabl es i nput c l ock supply.
SFR used by the serial array unit 1 can be read/written.
SAU0EN Cont rol of seri al array unit 0 input clock supply
0 Stops input clock supply.
SFR used by the serial array unit 0 cannot be written.
The serial array unit 0 is in the reset status.
1 Enabl es i nput c l ock supply.
SFR used by the serial array unit 0 can be read/written.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 1, 4, and 6 to “0”.
3. 12. 3. 2 Serial clock select register m (SPSm)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 2 Serial clock select register m
(SPSm) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 180
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 3. 3 Serial mode register mn (SMRmn)
Setting of serial mode register mn (SMRmn) (1/2)
Address: F0110H, F0111H (S MR00) - F0116H, F0117H (SMR03), After reset: 0020H R/W
F0150H, F0151H (SMR10), F0152H, F0153H (SMR11)
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SMRmn CKS
mn
CCS
mn
0 0 0 0 0 STS
mnNote
0 SIS
mn0Note
1 0 0 MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
CKSmn Selection of operation clock (fMCK) of channel n
0 Operation clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register
1 Operation clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register
Operation clock (fMCK) is used by the edge detector. In addition, depending on the setti ng of the CCSmn bit and the higher 7
bits of the SDRmn regist er, a transf er cl ock (fTCLK) is generated.
CCSmn Sel ection of transfer clock (fTCLK) of channel n
0 Divided operation clock fMCK specified by the CKSmn bit
1 Clock input fSCK from the SCKp pin (slave trans fer in CSI mode)
Transfer clock fTCLK is used for the shift register, communication controller, output controller, interrupt controller, and error
controll er. When CCSmn = 0, the divisi on ratio of operat i on cl ock (fMCK) is set by the higher 7 bits of the SDRmn register.
STSmnNote Selection of start trigger source
0 Only s oft ware trigger i s val i d (select ed for CSI, UA RT transm issi on, and simpli fied I2C).
1 Val i d edge of the RXDq pin (selected for UART reception)
Transfer is started when the above source is satisfied aft er 1 is set to the SSm register.
Note The SMR01, SMR03, and SMR11 registers only.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 13 to 9, 7, 4, and 3 (or bits 13 to 6, 4, and 3 for the SMR00, SMR02, or SMR10
register) to “0”. Be sure to set bit 5 to “1”.
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1)
n: Channel number (n = 0 to 3)
p: CSI number (80-pin products: p = 00, 10, 20, 21 64-pin products: p = 00, 21)
q: UART number (q = 0 to 2)
r: IIC number (80-pin products: r = 00, 10, 20 64-pin products: r = 00)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 181
Mar 31, 2014
Setting of serial mode register mn (SMRmn) (2/2)
Address: F0110H, F0111H (S MR00) - F0116H, F0117H (SMR03), After reset: 0020H R/W
F0150H, F0151H (SMR10), F0152H, F0153H (SMR11)
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SMRmn CKS
mn
CCS
mn
0 0 0 0 0 STS
mnNote
0
SIS
mn0
Note
1 0 0 MD
mn2
MD
mn1
MD
mn0
SISmn0Note Controls inversion of level of receive data of channel n in UART mode
0 Falling edge is detected as the start bit.
The input communication data is captured as is.
1 Rising edge is detected as the start bit.
The input communication data is inverted and captured.
MDmn2 MDmn1 Setting of operation mode of channel n
0 0 CSI mode
0 1 UART mode
1 0 Simplified I2C mode
1 1 Setting prohibited
MDmn0 Selecti on of interrupt sourc e of channel n
0 Transfer end interrupt
1 Buffer empty interrupt
(Occurs when data is transferred from t he SDRmn register t o the shift register.)
For successive t ransm issi on, t he next transmit data is written by setting the MDmn0 bit to 1 when SDRmn data has run out.
Note The SMR01, SMR03, and SMR11 registers only.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 13 to 9, 7, 4, and 3 (or bits 13 to 6, 4, and 3 for the SMR00, SMR02, or SMR10
register) to “0”. Be sure to set bit 5 to “1”.
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1)
n: Channel number (n = 0 to 3)
p: CSI number (80-pin products: p = 00, 10, 20, 21 64-pin products: p = 00, 21)
q: UART number (q = 0 to 2)
r: IIC number (80-pin products: r = 00, 10, 20 64-pin products: r = 00)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 182
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 3. 4 Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn)
Setting of serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) (1/2)
Address: F0118H, F0119H (S CR00) - F011EH, F011FH (SCR03), After reset: 0087H R/W
F0158H, F0159H (SCR10), F015AH, F015BH (SCR11)
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SCR
mn
TXE
mn
RXE
mn
DAP
mn
CKP
mn
0 EOC
mn
PTC
mn1
PTC
mn0
DIR
mn
0 SLC
mn1
Note 1
SLC
mn0
0 1 DLS
mn1
Note 2
DLS
mn0
TXEmn RXEmn Setting of operation mode of channel n
0 0 Disable communication.
0 1 Reception only
1 0 Transmission only
1 1 Transmission/reception
DAPmn CKPmn Select i on of dat a and clock phase in CSI mode Type
0 0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCKp
SOp
SI
p
1
0 1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCKp
SOp
SI
p
2
1 0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCKp
SOp
SI
p
3
1 1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCKp
SOp
SI
p
4
Be sure to set DAPmn, CKPmn = 0, 0 in the UART mode and simplified I 2C mode.
EOCmn Selection of masking of error i nterrupt si gnal (INTSREx (x = 0 to 2))
0 Masks error i nt errupt INTSREx (INTSRx is not masked).
1 Enables generation of error interrupt INTSREx (INTSRx is masked if an error occurs).
Set EOCmn = 0 in the CSI mode, simplified I2C mode, and during UART transmissionNote 3.
Set EOCmn = 1 during UART reception.
(Notes, Caution and Remark are on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 183
Mar 31, 2014
Notes 1. The SCR00, SCR02, and SCR10 registers only. Others are fixed to 0.
2. The SCR00 and SCR01 registers only. Others are fixed to 1.
3. When using CSImn not with EOCmn = 0, error interrupt INTSRE0 may be generated.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 3, 6, and 11 to “0”. Be sure to set bit 2 to “1”.
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1)
n: Channel number (n = 0 to 3)
p: CSI number (80-pin products: p = 00, 10, 20, 21 64-pin products: p = 00, 21)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 184
Mar 31, 2014
Setting of serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) (2/2)
Address: F0118H, F0119H (S CR00) - F011EH, F011FH (SCR03), After reset: 0087H R/W
F0158H, F0159H (SCR10), F015AH, F015BH (SCR11)
Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SCRmn TXE
mn
RXE
mn
DAP
mn
CKP
mn
0 EOC
mn
PTC
mn1
PTC
mn0
DIR
mn
0 SLC
mn1
Note 1
SLC
mn0
0 1 DLS
mn1
Note 2
DLS
mn0
PTCmn1 PTCmn0 S etting of parity bit in UART mode
Transmission Reception
0 0 Does not output the parity bit. Receives without parity
0 1
Outputs 0 parityNote 3. No parity judgm ent
1 0 Outputs even parity. Judged as even parity.
1 1 Outputs odd parity. Judges as odd parity.
Be sure to set PTCmn1, PTCmn0 = 0, 0 in the CSI mode and simplified I2C mode.
DIRmn Selecti on of dat a transf er sequence i n CSI and UART modes
0 Input s/outputs data with MSB first.
1 Input s/ outputs data with LSB first.
Be sure to clear DIRmn = 0 in the simplified I2C mode.
SLCmn1Note 1 SLCmn0 Setting of stop bit in UART mode
0 0 No stop bit
0 1 St op bit length = 1 bit
1 0 St op bit length = 2 bits (mn = 00, 02, 10 only)
1 1 Setting prohibited
When the transfer end interrupt is selected, the interrupt is generated when all stop bits have been completely transferred.
Set 1 bit (SLCmn1, SLCmn0 = 0, 1) during UART reception and in the simplified I2C mode.
Set no stop bit (SLCmn1, SLCmn0 = 0, 0) in the CSI mode.
DLSmn1Note 2 DLSmn0 Setting of data length in CSI and UART m odes
0 1 9-bit data length (stored in bits 0 to 8 of the SDRmn register) (settable in UART mode only)
1 0 7-bit data length (st ored in bits 0 to 6 of the SDRmn register)
1 1 8-bit data length (st ored in bits 0 to 7 of the SDRmn register)
Other than above Setting prohibited
Be sure to set DLSmn1, DLSmn0 = 1, 1 in the sim plified I 2C mode.
(Notes, Caution and Remark are on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 185
Mar 31, 2014
Notes 1. The SCR00, SCR02, and SCR10 registers only.
2. The SCR00 and SCR01 registers only. Others are fixed to 1.
3. 0 is always added regardless of the data contents.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 3, 6, and 11 to “0”. (Also clear bit 5 of the SCR01, SCR03, or SCR11 register to 0,
as well as bit 1 of the SCR02, SCR03, SCR10, SCR11 registers). Be sure to set bit 2 to “1”.
Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1)
n: Channel number (n = 0 to 3)
p: CSI number (80-pin products: p = 00, 10, 20, 21 64-pin products: p = 00, 21)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 186
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 3. 5 Higher 7 bits of the serial data register mn (SDRmn)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 5 Higher 7 bits of the serial
data register mn (SDRmn) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 3. 6 Serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 6 Serial flag clear trigger
register mn (SIRmn) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 3. 7 Serial status register mn (SSRmn)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 7 Serial status register mn
(SSRmn) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 3. 8 Serial channel start register m (SSm)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 8 Serial channel start register
m (SSm) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 3. 9 Serial channel stop register m (STm)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 9 Serial channel stop register
m (STm) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 3. 10 Serial channel enable status register m (SEm)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 10 Serial channel enable status
register m (SEm) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 3. 11 Serial output enable register m (SOEm)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 11 Serial output enable register
m (SOEm) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 3. 12 Serial output register m (SOm)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 12 Serial output register m
(SOm) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 187
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 3. 13 Serial output level register m (SOLm)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 13 Serial output level register
m (SOLm) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 3. 14 Serial standby control register 0 (SSC0)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 14 Serial standby control
register 0 (SSC0) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 3. 15 Input switch control register (ISC)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 15 Input switch control register
(ISC) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 3. 16 Noise filter enable register 0 (NFEN0)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 12. 3. 16 Noise filter enable register 0
(NFEN0) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 188
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 3. 17 Registers controlling port functions of serial input/output pins
Using the serial array unit requires setting of the registers that control the port functions multiplexed on the target
channel (port mode register (PMxx), port register (Pxx), port input mode register (PIMxx), port output mode register
(POMxx), port mode control register (PMCxx)).
For details, see 3. 4. 3. 1 Port mode registers (PMxx), 3. 4. 3. 2 Port registers (Pxx), 3. 4. 3. 4 Port input mode
registers (PIMxx), 3. 4. 3. 5 Port output mode registers (POMxx), and 3. 4. 3. 6 Port mode control registers
(PMCxx).
For details of setting example, see 12. 3. 17 Registers controlling port functions of serial Input/output pins in
RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 189
Mar 31, 2014
3. 12. 4 Operation stop mode
See 12. 4 Operation Stop Mode in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 5 Operation of 3-Wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI10, CSI20, CSI21) communication
See 12. 5 Operation of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11, CSI20, CSI21) Communication in
RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 6 Operation of UART (UART0 to UART2) communication
See 12. 6 Operation of UART (UART0 to UART2) Communication in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 7 LIN communication operation
See 12. 7 LIN Communication Operation in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 12. 8 Operation of simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC10, IIC20) communication
See 12. 8 Operation of Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11, IIC20, IIC21) Communication in RL78/G1A
Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 190
Mar 31, 2014
3. 13 Serial Interface IICA
Serial interface IICA is not provided in RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 191
Mar 31, 2014
3. 14 Multiplier and Divider/Multiply-Accumulator
See CHAPTER 14 MULTIPLIER AND DIVIDER/MULTIPLY-ACCUMULATOR in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s
Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 192
Mar 31, 2014
3. 15 DMA Controller
See CHAPTER 15 DMA CONTROLLER in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 193
Mar 31, 2014
3. 16 Interrupt Functions
The interrupt function switches the program execution to other processing. When the branch processing is finished,
the program returns to the interrupted processing. The number of interrupt sources differs, depending on the product.
64-pin products 80-pin products
Maskable
interrupts
External 2 5
Internal 25
3. 16. 1 Interrupt function types
The following two types of interrupt functions are used.
(1) Maskable interrupts
These interrupts undergo mask control. Maskable interrupts can be divided into four priority groups by setting the
priority specification flag registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H,
PR12L, PR12H).
Multiple interrupt servicing can be applied to low-priority interrupts when high-priority interrupts are generated. If two
or more interrupt requests, each having the same priority, are simultaneously generated, then they are processed
according to the default priority of vectored interrupt servicing. Default priority, see Table 3-13.
A standby release signal is generated and STOP, HALT, and SNOOZE modes are released.
External interrupt requests and internal interrupt requests are provided as maskable interrupts.
(2) Software interrupt
This is a vectored interrupt generated by executing the BRK instruction. It is acknowledged even when interrupts are
disabled. The software interrupt does not undergo interrupt priority control.
3. 16. 2 Interrupt sources and configuration
Interrupt sources include maskable interrupts and software interrupts. In addition, they also have up to seven reset
sources (see Table 3-13). The vector codes that store the program start address when branching due to the generation
of a reset or various interrupt requests are two bytes each, so interrupts jump to a 64 K address of 00000H to 0FFFFH.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 194
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-13. Interrupt Source List (1/3)
Interrupt Ty pe
Default PriorityNote 1
Interrupt Source
Internal/External
Vector Table Address
Basic Configurati on TypeNote 2
RL78/G1E
Name Trigger
64-pin
80-pin
Maskable
0 INTWDTI Watchdog timer intervalNote 3
(75% of overflow time + 1/2fIL)
Internal 0004H (A)
1 INTLVI Voltage detectionNot e 4 0006H
2 INTP0 Pin i nput edge detecti on External 0008H (B)
3 INTP1 000AH
4 INTP2 000CH
5 INTP3 000EH
6 INTP4 0010H
7 INTP5 0012H
8 INTST2/
INTCSI20/
INTIIC20
UART2 transmissi on trans fer end or buffer empty interrupt/
CSI20 transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/
IIC20 transfer end
Internal 0014H (A)
Note 5
9 INTSR2/
INTCSI21/
INTIIC21
UART2 reception transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/
CSI21 transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/
IIC21 transfer end
0016H Note 6 Note 6
10 INTSRE2 UART2 reception communication error occurrence 0018H
11 INTDMA0 End of DMA0 transfer 001AH
12 INTDMA1 End of DMA1 transfer 001CH
13 INTST0/
INTCSI00/
INTIIC00
UART0 transmissi on trans fer end or buffer empty interrupt/
CSI00 transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/
IIC00 transfer end
001EH
14 INTSR0/
INTCSI01/
INTIIC01
UART0 reception transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/
CSI01 transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/
IIC01 transfer end
0020H Note 7 Note 7
15 INTSRE0 UART0 reception communication error occurrence 0022H
INTTM01H End of timer channel 1 count or capture (at higher 8-bit
timer operation)
Notes 1. The default priority determines the sequence of interrupts if two or more maskable interrupts occur
simultaneously. Zero indicates the highest priority and 53 indicates the lowest priority.
2. Basic configuration types (A) to (D) correspond to (A) to (D) in Figure 3-13.
3. When bit 7 (WDTINT) of the option byte (000C0H) is set to 1.
4. When bit 7 (LVIMD) of the voltage detection level register (LVIS) is cleared to 0.
5. INTST2 only.
6. INTSR2 and INTCSI21 only.
7. INTSR0 only.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 195
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-13. Interrupt Source List (2/3)
Interrupt Ty pe
Default PriorityNote 1
Interrupt Source
Internal/External
Vector Table Address
Basic Configurati on TypeNote 2
RL78/G1E
Name Trigger
64-pin
80-pin
Maskable
16 INTST1/
INTCSI10/
INTIIC10
UART1 transmissi on trans fer end or buffer empty interrupt/
CSI10 transf e r end or buffer empty interrupt /
IIC10 transfer end
Internal 0024H (A)
Note 3
17 INTSR1/
INTCSI11/
INTIIC11
UART1 reception transf er end/
CSI11 transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/
IIC11 transfer end
0026H Note 4 Note 4
18 INTSRE1 UART1 reception communication error occurrence 0028H
INTTM03H E nd of t imer channel 3 count or capture (at higher 8-bit
timer operation)
19 INTIICA0 End of IICA0 communicat i on 002AH
20 INTTM00 End of timer channel 0 count or capture 002CH
21 INTTM01 End of timer channel 1 count or capture (at 16-bit/lower 8-
bit timer operation)
002EH
22 INTTM02 End of timer channel 2 count or capture 0030H
23 INTTM03 End of timer channel 3 count or capture (at 16-bit/lower 8-
bit timer operation)
0032H
24 INTAD End of A/D conversion 0034H
25 INTRTC Fixed-cycle signal of real-tim e clock / al arm matc h detecti on 0036H
26 INTIT Interval signal of 12-bit interval timer detection 0038H
27 INTKR Key return signal detection External 003AH (C)
28 INTTM04 End of timer channel 4 count or capture Internal 0042H (A)
Notes 1. The default priority determines the sequence of interrupts if two or more maskable interrupts occur
simultaneously. Zero indicates the highest priority and 39 indicates the lowest priority.
2. Basic configuration types (A) to (D) correspond to (A) to (D) in Figure 3-13.
3. INTST1 only.
4. INTSR1 only.
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 196
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-13. Interrupt Source List (3/3)
Interrupt Ty pe
Default PriorityNote 1
Interrupt Source
Internal/External
Vector Table Address
Basic Configurati on TypeNote 2
RL78/G1E
Name Trigger
64-pin
80-pin
Maskable
29 INTTM05 End of timer channel 5 count or capture Internal 0044H (A)
30 INTTM06 End of timer channel 6 count or capture 0046H
31 INTTM07 End of timer channel 7 count or capture 0048H
32 INTP6 P i n i nput edge detecti on External 004AH (B)
33 INTP7 004CH
34 INTP8 004EH
35 INTP9 0050H
36 INTP10 0052H
37 INTP11 0054H
38 INTMD End of divi si on operation/Overflow of multipl yaccumulation
result occurs
Internal 005EH (A)
39 INTFL Reserved Note 3 0062H
Software
BRK Execution of BRK instructi on 007EH (D)
Reset
RES ET RESET pin input 0000H
POR Power-on-reset
LVD Voltage detecti on No te 4
WDT Overfl ow of watchdog t imer
TRAP Execution of illegal inst ructionNote 5
IAW Illegal-memory access
RAMTOP RAM parity error
Notes 1. The default priority determines the sequence of interrupts if two or more maskable interrupts occur
simultaneously. Zero indicates the highest priority and 39 indicates the lowest priority.
2. Basic configuration types (A) to (D) correspond to (A) to (D) in Figure 3-13.
3. Be used at the flash self programming library or the data flash library.
4. When bit 7 (LVIMD) of the voltage detection level register (LVIS) is set to 1.
5. When the instruction code in FFH is executed.
Reset by the illegal instruction execution not issued by emulation with the in-circuit emulator or on-chip
debug emulator.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 197
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 3-13. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function (1/2)
(a) Internal maskable interrupt
IF
MK IE PR1 ISP1
PR0 ISP0
Internal bus
Interrupt
request Priority controller
Vector table
address generator
Standby release
signal
(b) External mask able interrupt (INTPn)
IF
MK IE PR1 ISP1
PR0 ISP0
Internal bus
External interrupt edge
enable register
(EGP, EGN)
INTPn pin input Edge
detector Priority controller
Vector table
address generator
Standby release
signal
IF: Interrupt request flag
IE: Interrupt enable flag
ISP0: In-service priority flag 0
ISP1: In-service priority flag 1
MK: Interrupt mask flag
PR0: Priority specification flag 0
PR1: Priority specification flag 1
Remark 64-pin products: n = 0
80-pin products: n = 0 to 3, 6
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 198
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 3-13. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function (2/2)
(c) External maskable interrupt (INTKR)
IF
MK IE PR1 ISP1
PR0 ISP0
Internal bus
KRn pin input Priority controller
Vector table
address generator
Standby release
signal
Key interrupt
detector
Key return mode
register (KRM)
(d) Software interrupt
Vector table
address generator
Internal bus
Interrupt
request
IF: Interrupt request flag
IE: Interrupt enable flag
ISP0: In-service priority flag 0
ISP1: In-service priority flag 1
MK: Interrupt mask flag
PR0: Priority specification flag 0
PR1: Priority specification flag 1
Remark 64-pin products: n = 0 to 6
80-pin products: n = 0 to 7
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 199
Mar 31, 2014
3. 16. 3 Registers controlling interrupt functions
The following 6 types of registers are used to control the interrupt functions.
Interrupt request flag register (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H, IF2L, IF2H)
Interrupt mask flag register (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H, MK2L, MK2H)
Priority specification flag registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L,
PR11H, PR12L, PR12H)
External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP0)
External interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN0)
Program status word (PSW)
Table 3-14 shows a list of interrupt request flags, interrupt mask flags, and priority specification flags corresponding to
interrupt request sources.
Table 3-14. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources (1/4)
Interr upt
Source
Interrupt Request Flag Interrupt Mask Flag Priority Specification Flag RL78/G1E
Register Register Register
64-pin
80-pin
INTWDTI WDTIIF IF0L WDTIMK MK0L WDTIPR0, WDTIPR1 PR00L,
PR10L
INTLVI LVIIF LVIMK LVIPR0, LVIPR1
INTP0 PIF0 PMK0 PPR00, PPR10
INTP1 PIF1 PMK1 PPR01, PPR11
INTP2 PIF2 PMK2 PPR02, PPR12
INTP3 PIF3 PMK3 PPR03, PPR13
INTP4 PIF4 PMK4 PPR04, PPR14
INTP5 PIF5 PMK5 PPR05, PPR15
INTST2Note 1 STIF2Note 1 IF0H STMK2Note 1 MK0H STPR02 , STPR 1 2 Note 1 PR00H,
PR10H
INTCSI20Note 1 CSIIF20Note 1 CSIMK20Note 1 CSIPR020,
CSIPR120Note 1
INTIIC20Note 1 IICIF20Note 1 IICMK20Note 1 IICPR020,
IICPR120Note 1
INTSR2Note 2 SRIF2Note 2 SRMK2Note 2 SRPR02, SRPR12Not e 2
INTCSI21Note 2 CSIIF21Note 2 CSIMK21Note 2 CSIPR021,
CSIPR121Note 2
INTIIC21Note 2 IICIF21Note 2 IICMK21Note 2 IICPR021,
IICPR121Note 2
Notes 1. If one of the interrupt sources INTST2, INTCSI20, and INTIIC20 is generated, bit 0 of the IF0H register is set to
1. Bit 0 of the MK0H, PR00H, and PR10H registers can be used for all three of these interrupt sources.
2. If one of the interrupt sources INTSR2, INTCSI21, and INTIIC21 is generated, bit 1 of the IF0H register is set to
1. Bit 1 of the MK0H, PR00H, and PR10H registers can be used for all three of these interrupt sources.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 200
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-14. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources (2/4)
Interrupt
Source
Interrupt Request Flag Interrupt Mask Flag Priority Specification Flag RL78/G1E
Register Register Register
64-pin
80-pin
INTSRE2 SREIF2 IF0H SREMK2 MK0H SREPR02,
SREPR12
PR00H,
PR10H
INTDMA0 DMAIF0 DMAMK0 DMAPR00,
DMAPR10
INTDMA1 DMAIF1 DMAMK1 DMAPR01,
DMAPR11
INTST0Note 1 STIF0Note 1 STMK0Note 1 STPR00,
STPR10Note 1
INTCSI00Note 1 CSIIF00Note 1 CSIMK00Note 1 CSIPR000,
CSIPR100Not e 1
INTIIC00Note 1 IICIF00Note 1 IICMK00Note 1 IICPR000,
IICPR100Note 1
INTSR0Note 2 SRIF0Note 2 SRMK0Note 2 SRPR00,
SRPR10Note 2
INTCSI01Note 2 CSIIF01Note 2 CSIMK01Note 2 CSIPR001,
CSIPR101Not e 2
INTIIC01Note 2 IICIF01Note 2 IICMK01Note 2 IICPR001,
IICPR101Note 2
INTSRE0Note 3 SREIF0Note 3 SREMK0Note 3 SREPR00,
SREPR10No te 3
INTTM01HNote 3 TMIF01HNote 3 TMMK01HNote 3 TMPR001H,
TMPR101HNote 3
Notes 1. If one of the interrupt sources INTST0, INTCSI00, and INTIIC00 is generated, bit 5 of the IF0H register is set to
1. Bit 5 of the MK0H, PR00H, and PR10H registers can be used for all three of these interrupt sources.
2. If one of the interrupt sources INTSR0, INTCSI01, and INTIIC01 is generated, bit 6 of the IF0H register is set to
1. Bit 6 of the MK0H, PR00H, and PR10H registers can be used for all three of these interrupt sources.
3. Do not use the error interrupt of UART0 reception and the interrupt of channel 1 of TAU0 (while the higher 8 bits
are operating at a timer) at the same time because they share flags for the interrupt request sources. If the error
interrupt of UART0 reception is not used (EOC01 = 0), UART0 and channel 1 of TAU0 (while the higher 8 bits
are operating at a timer) can be used at the same time. If the interrupt source INTSRE0 or INTTM01H is
generated, bit 7 of the IF0H register is set to 1. Bit 7 of the MK0H, PR00H, and PR10H registers can be used
for both these interrupt sources.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 201
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-14. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources (3/4)
Interrupt
Source
Interrupt Request Flag Interrupt Mask Flag Priority Specification Flag RL78/G1E
Register Register Register
64-pin
80-pin
INTST1Note 1 STIF1Note 1 IF1L STMK1Note 1 MK1L STPR01,
STPR11Note 1
PR01L,
PR11L
INTCSI10Note 1 CSIIF10Note 1 CSIMK10Note 1 CSIPR010,
CSIPR110Not e 1
INTIIC10Note 1 IICIF10Note 1 IICMK10Note 1 IICPR010,
IICPR110Note 1
INTSR1Note 2 SRIF1Note 2 SRMK1Note 2 SRPR01,
SRPR11Note 2
INTCSI11Note 2 CSIIF11Note 2 CSIMK11Note 2 CSIPR011,
CSIPR111Not e 2
INTIIC11Note 2 IICIF11Note 2 IICMK11Note 2 IICPR011,
IICPR111Note 2
INTSRE1Note 3 SREIF1Note 3 SREMK1Note 3 SREPR01,
SREPR11No te 3
INTTM03HNote 3 TMIF03HNote 3 TMMK03HNote 3 TMPR003H,
TMPR103HNote 3
INTIICA0 IICAIF0 IICAMK0 IICAPR00,
IICAPR10
INTTM00 TMIF00 TMMK00 TMPR000,
TMPR100
INTTM01 TMIF01 TMMK01 TMPR001,
TMPR101
INTTM02 TMIF02 TMMK02 TMPR002,
TMPR102
INTTM03 TMIF03 TMMK03 TMPR003,
TMPR103
INTAD ADIF IF1H ADMK MK1H ADPR0, ADPR1 PR01H,
PR11H
INTRTC RTCIF RTCMK RTCPR0,
RTCPR1
INTIT ITIF ITMK ITPR0, ITPR1
INTKR KRIF KRMK KRPR0, KRPR1
INTTM04 TMIF04 TMMK04 TMPR004,
TMPR104
(Notes are on the next page.)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 202
Mar 31, 2014
Notes 1. If one of the interrupt sources INTST1, INTCSI10, and INTIIC10 is generated, bit 0 of the IF1L register is set
to 1. Bit 0 of the MK1L, PR01L, and PR11L registers can be used for all three of these interrupt sources.
2. If one of the interrupt sources INTSR1, INTCSI11, and INTIIC11 is generated, bit 1 of the IF1L register is
set to 1. Bit 1 of the MK1L, PR01L, and PR11L registers can be used for all three of these interrupt sources.
3. Do not use the error interrupt of UART1 reception and the interrupt of channel 3 of TAU0 (while the higher 8
bits are operating at a timer) at the same time because they share flags for the interrupt request sources. If
the error interrupt of UART1 reception is not used (EOC03 = 0), UART1 and channel 3 of TAU0 (while the
higher 8 bits are operating at a timer) can be used at the same time. If the interrupt source INTSRE1 or
INTTM03H is generated, bit 2 of the IF1L register is set to 1. Bit 2 of the MK1L, PR01L, and PR11L
registers can be used for both these interrupt sources.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 203
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-14. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources (4/4)
Interr u pt
Source
Interrupt Request Flag Interrupt Mask Flag Priority Specification Flag RL78/G1E
Register Register Register
64-pin
80-pin
INTTM05 TMIF05 IF2L TMMK05 MK2L TMPR005,
TMPR105
PR02L,
PR12L
INTTM06 TMIF06 TMMK06 TMPR006,
TMPR106
INTTM07 TMIF07 TMMK07 TMPR007,
TMPR107
INTP6 PIF6 PMK6 PPR06, PPR16
INTP7 PIF7 PMK7 PPR07, PPR17
INTP8 PIF8 PMK8 PPR08, PPR18
INTP9 PIF9 PMK9 PPR09, PPR19
INTP10 PIF10 PMK10 PPR010,
PPR110
INTP11 PIF11 IF2H PMK11 MK2H PPR011,
PPR111
PR02H,
PR12H
INTMD MDIF MDMK MDPR0,
MDPR1
INTFL FLIF FLMK FLPR0, FLPR1
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown on the next page. For details of
each register, see 16. 3 Registers Controlling Interrupt Functions in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 204
Mar 31, 2014
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below. For details of each
register, see 16. 3 Registers Controlling Interrupt Functions in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
3. 16. 3. 1 Interrupt request flag register (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H, IF2L, IF2H)
64-pin products
Address: FFFE0H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 <2> <1> <0>
IF0L 0 0 0 0 0 PIF0 LVIIF WDTIIF
Address: FFFE1H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
IF0H TMIF01H
SREIF0
SRIF0 STIF0
CSIIF00
IICIF00
DMAIF1 DMAIF0 SREIF2 SRIF2
CSIIF21
STIF2
Address: FFFE2H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 <2> <1> <0>
IF1L TMIF03 TMIF02 TMIF01 TMIF00 0 SREIF1
TMIF03H
SRIF1 STIF1
Address: FFFE3H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
IF1H TMIF04 0 0 0 KRIF ITIF 0 ADIF
Address: FFFD0H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 <2> <1> <0>
IF2L 0 0 0 0 0 TMIF07 TMIF06 TMIF05
Address: FFFD1H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 3 2 1 0
IF2H FLIF 0 MDIF 0 0 0 0 0
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 of the IF0L register to “0”.
2. Be sure to clear bit 3 of the IF1L register to “0”.
3. Be sure to clear bits 1 and 4 to 6 of the IF1H register to “0”.
4. Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 of the IF2L register to “0”.
5. Be sure to clear bits 0 to 4 and 6 of the IF2H register to “0”.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 205
Mar 31, 2014
80-pin products
Address: FFFE0H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
IF0L 0 0 0 PIF2 PIF1 PIF0 LVIIF WDTIIF
Address: FFFE1H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
IF0H TMIF01H
SREIF0
SRIF0 STIF0
CSIIF00
IICIF00
DMAIF1 DMAIF0 SREIF2 SRIF2
CSIIF21
STIF2
CSIIF20
IICIF20
Address: FFFE2H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 <2> <1> <0>
IF1L TMIF03 TMIF02 TMIF01 TMIF00 0 SREIF1
TMIF03H
SRIF1 STIF1
CSIIF10
IICIF10
Address: FFFE3H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
IF1H TMIF04 0 0 0 KRIF ITIF 0 ADIF
Address: FFFD0H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> <1> <0>
IF2L 0 0 0 0 PIF6 TMIF07 TMIF06 TMIF05
Address: FFFD1H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 3 2 1 0
IF2H FLIF 0 MDIF 0 0 0 0 0
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 5 to 7 of the IF0L register to “0”.
2. Be sure to clear bit 3 of the IF1L register to “0”.
3. Be sure to clear bits 1 and 4 to 6 of the IF1H register to “0”.
4. Be sure to clear bits 4 to 7 of the IF2L register to “0”.
5. Be sure to clear bits 0 to 4 and 6 of the IF2H register to “0”.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 206
Mar 31, 2014
3. 16. 3. 2 Interrupt mask flag register (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H, MK2L, MK2H)
64-pin products
Address: FFFE4H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 <2> <1> <0>
MK0L 1 1 1 1 1 PMK0 LVIMK WDTIMK
Address: FFFE5H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
MK0H TMMK01H
SREMK0
SRMK0 STMK0
CSIMK00
IICMK00
DMAMK1 DMAMK0 SREMK2 SRMK2
CSIMK21
STMK2
Address: FFFE6H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 <2> <1> <0>
MK1L TMMK03 TMMK02 TMMK01 TMMK00 1 SREMK1
TMMK03H
SRMK1 STMK1
Address: FFFE7H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
MK1H TMMK04 1 1 1 KRMK ITMK 1 ADMK
Address: FFFD4H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 <2> <1> <0>
MK2L 1 1 1 1 1 TMMK07 TMMK06 TMMK05
Address: FFFD5H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 3 2 1 0
MK2H FLMK 1 MDMK 1 1 1 1 1
Cautions 1. Be sure to set bits 3 to 7 of the MK0L register to “1”.
2. Be sure to set bit 3 of the MK1L register to “1”.
3. Be sure to set bits 1 and 4 to 6 of the MK1H register to “1”.
4. Be sure to set bits 3 to 7 of the MK2L register to “1”.
5. Be sure to set bits 0 to 4 and 6 of the MK2H register to “1”.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 207
Mar 31, 2014
80-pin products
Address: FFFE4H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
MK0L 1 1 1 PMK2 PMK1 PMK0 LVIMK WDTIMK
Address: FFFE5H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
MK0H TMMK01H
SREMK0
SRMK0 STMK0
CSIMK00
IICMK00
DMAMK1 DMAMK0 SREMK2 SRMK2
CSIMK21
STMK2
CSIMK20
IICMK20
Address: FFFE6H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 <2> <1> <0>
MK1L TMMK03 TMMK02 TMMK01 TMMK00 1 SREMK1
TMMK03H
SRMK1 STMK1
CSIMK10
IICMK10
Address: FFFE7H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
MK1H TMMK04 1 1 1 KRMK ITMK 1 ADMK
Address: FFFD4H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> <1> <0>
MK2L 1 1 1 1 PMK6 TMMK07 TMMK06 TMMK05
Address: FFFD5H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 3 2 1 0
MK2H FLMK 1 MDMK 1 1 1 1 1
Cautions 1. Be sure to set bits 5 to 7 of the MK0L register to “1”.
2. Be sure to set bit 3 of the MK1L register to “1”.
3. Be sure to set bits 1 and 4 to 6 of the MK1H register to “1”.
4. Be sure to set bits 4 to 7 of the MK2L register to “1”.
5. Be sure to set bits 0 to 4 and 6 of the MK2H register to “1”.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 208
Mar 31, 2014
3. 16. 3. 3 Priority specification flag registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H,
PR12L, PR12H, PR02L, PR02H)
64-pin products
Address: FFFE8H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 <2> <1> <0>
PR00L 1 1 1 1 1 PPR00 LVIPR0 WDTIPR0
Address: FFFECH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 <2> <1> <0>
PR10L 1 1 1 1 1 PPR10 LVIPR1 WDTIPR1
Address: FFFE9H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
PR00H TMPR001H
SREPR00
SRPR00 STPR00
CSIPR000
IICPR00
DMAPR01 DMAPR00 SREPR02 SRPR02
CSIPR021
STPR02
Address: FFFEDH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
PR10H TMPR101H
SREPR10
SRPR10 STPR10
CSIPR100
IICPR100
DMAPR11 DMAPR10 SREPR12 SRPR12
CSIPR121
STPR12
Address: FFFEAH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 <2> <1> <0>
PR01L TMPR003 TMPR002 TMPR001 TMPR000 1 SREPR01
TMPR003H
SRPR01 STPR01
Address: FFFEEH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 <2> <1> <0>
PR11L TMPR103 TMPR102 TMPR101 TMPR100 1 SREPR11
TMPR103H
SRPR11 STPR11
Address: FFFEBH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
PR01H TMPR004 1 1 1 KRPR0 ITPR0 1 ADPR0
Address: FFFEFH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
PR11H TMPR104 1 1 1 KRPR1 ITPR1 1 ADPR1
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 209
Mar 31, 2014
Address: FFFD8H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 <2> <1> <0>
PR02L 1 1 1 1 1 TMPR007 TMPR006 TMPR005
Address: FFFDCH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 <2> <1> <0>
PR12L 1 1 1 1 1 TMPR107 TMPR106 TMPR105
Address: FFFD9H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 3 2 1 0
PR02H FLPR0 1 MDPR0 1 1 1 1 1
Address: FFFDDH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 3 2 1 0
PR12H FLPR1 1 MDPR1 1 1 1 1 1
Cautions 1. Be sure to set bits 3 to 7 of the PR00L register to “1”.
2. Be sure to set bits 3 to 7 of the PR10L register to “1”.
3. Be sure to set bit 3 of the PR01L register to “1”.
4. Be sure to set bit 3 of the PR11L register to “1”.
5. Be sure to set bits 1 and 4 to 6 of the PR01H register to “1”.
6. Be sure to set bits 1 and 4 to 6 of the PR11H register to “1”.
7. Be sure to set bits 3 to 7 of the PR02L register to “1”.
8. Be sure to set bits 3 to 7 of the PR12L register to “1”.
9. Be sure to set bits 0 to 4 and 6 of the PR02H register to “1”.
10. Be sure to set bits 0 to 4 and 6 of the PR12H register to “1”.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 210
Mar 31, 2014
80-pin products
Address: FFFE8H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
PR00L 1 1 1 PPR02 PPR01 PPR00 LVIPR0 WDTIPR0
Address: FFFECH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> <1> <0>
PR10L 1 1 1 PPR12 PPR11 PPR10 LVIPR1 WDTIPR1
Address: FFFE9H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
PR00H TMPR001H
SREPR00
SRPR00 STPR00
IICPR000
DMAPR01 DMAPR00 SREPR02 SRPR02
CSIPR021
STPR02
CSIPR020
IICPR020
Address: FFFEDH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
PR10H TMPR101H
SREPR10
SRPR10 STPR10
CSIPR100
IICPR100
DMAPR11 DMAPR10 SREPR12 SRPR12
CSIPR121
STPR12
CSIPR120
IICPR120
Address: FFFEAH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 <2> <1> <0>
PR01L TMPR003 TMPR002 TMPR001 TMPR000 1 SREPR01
TMPR003H
SRPR01 STPR01
CSIPR010
IICPR010
Address: FFFEEH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 <2> <1> <0>
PR11L TMPR103 TMPR102 TMPR101 TMPR100 1 SREPR11
TMPR103H
SRPR11 STPR11
CSIPR110
IICPR110
Address: FFFEBH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
PR01H TMPR004 1 1 1 KRPR0 ITPR0 1 ADPR0
Address: FFFEFH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
PR11H TMPR104 1 1 1 KRPR1 ITPR1 1 ADPR1
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 211
Mar 31, 2014
Address: FFFD8H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> <1> <0>
PR02L 1 1 1 1 PPR06 TMPR007 TMPR006 TMPR005
Address: FFFDCH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> <1> <0>
PR12L 1 1 1 1 PPR16 TMPR107 TMPR106 TMPR105
Address: FFFD9H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 3 2 1 0
PR02H FLPR0 1 MDPR0 1 1 1 1 1
Address: FFFDDH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 3 2 1 0
PR12H FLPR1 1 MDPR1 1 1 1 1 1
Cautions 1. Be sure to set bits 5 to 7 of the PR00L register to “1”.
2. Be sure to set bits 5 to 7 of the PR10L register to “1”.
3. Be sure to set bit 3 of the PR01L register to “1”.
4. Be sure to set bit 3 of the PR11L register to “1”.
5. Be sure to set bits 1 and 4 to 6 of the PR01H register to “1”.
6. Be sure to set bits 1 and 4 to 6 of the PR11H register to “1”.
7. Be sure to set bits 4 to 7 of the PR02L register to “1”.
8. Be sure to set bits 4 to 7 of the PR12L register to “1”.
9. Be sure to set bits 4 to 7 of the PR02H register to “1”.
10. Be sure to set bits 0 to 4 and 6 of the PR12H register to “1”.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 212
Mar 31, 2014
3. 16. 3. 4 External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP0),
External interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN0)
64-pin products
Address: FFF38H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EGP0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EGP0
Address: FFF39H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EGN0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EGN0
80-pin products
Address: FFF38H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EGP0 0 EGP6 0 0 0 EGP2 EGP1 EGP0
Address: FFF39H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EGN0 0 EGN6 0 0 0 EGN2 EGN1 EGN0
Table 3-15 shows the ports corresponding to the EGPn and EGNn bits.
Table 3-15. Ports Corresponding to EGPn and EGNn Bits
Detection E nabl e Bit Edge Detection Port Interrupt Request Signal RL78/G1E
64-pin 80-pin
EGP0 EGN0 P137 INTP0
EGP1 EGN1 P50 INTP1
EGP2 EGN2 P51 INTP2
EGP6 EGN6 P140 INTP6
Caution Select the port mode by clearing the EGPn and EGNn bits to 0 because an edge may be detected
when the external interrupt function is switched to the port function.
Remark n = 0 to 2, 6
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 213
Mar 31, 2014
3. 16. 3. 5 Program status word (PSW)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 16. 3. 5 Program status word (PSW)
in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 16. 4 Interrupt servicing operations
See 16. 4 Interrupt Servicing Operations in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 214
Mar 31, 2014
3. 17 Key Interrupt Function
The number of key interrupt input channels differs, depending on the product.
64-pin products 80-pin products
Key interrupt
input channels 4 ch (7 ch) 4 ch (8 ch)
Remarks 1. Functions in parentheses in the above figure can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection
register (PIOR).
2. Most of the following descriptions in this section use the case of 80-pin products as an example.
3. 17. 1 Functions of key interrupt
A key interrupt (INTKR) can be generated by inputting a rising/falling edge to the key interrupt input pins (KR0 to KR7).
There are two ways to identify the channel(s) to which a valid edge has been input:
Identify the channel(s) (KR0 to KR7) by using the port input level.
Identify the channel(s) (KR0 to KR5) by using the key interrupt flag.
Table 3-16. Assignment of Key Interrupt Detection Pins
Key Int errupt Pins Key return mode register (K RM0) Key return flag regi ster (KRF)
KR0 KRM00 KRF0
KR1 KRM01 KRF1
KR2 KRM02 KRF2
KR3 KRM03 KRF3
KR4 KRM04 KRF4
KR5 KRM05 KRF5
KR6 KRM06
KR7 KRM07
Remark KR0 to KR3 (KR0 to KR6): 64-pin products
KR0 to KR3 (KR0 to KR7): 80-pin products
Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 215
Mar 31, 2014
3. 17. 2 Configuration of key interrupt
The key interrupt in clud es the following hardware.
Table 3-17. Configuration of Key Interrupt
Item Configuration
Control regist er Key int errupt control register (KRCTL)
Key interrupt mode control register 0 (KRM0)
Key interrupt fl ag regis ter (KRF)
Port mode registers 0, 1, 2, 7 (PM0, PM1, PM2, PM7)
Peripheral I/O redi rect i on regis ter (PIOR)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 216
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 3-14. Block Diagram of Key Interrupt
INTKR
KR5
KR4
KR3
KR2
KR1
KR0
KRF1
KRMD
KRM01
KRF3
KRMD
KRM03
KRF5
KRMD
KRM05
KRMD
KRF4
KRM04
KRF2
KRMD
KRM02
KRF0
KRMD
KRM00
KREG
KREG
KREG
KREG
KREG
KREG
KR6
KRM06
KREG
KR7
KRM07
KREG
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Remark KR0 to KR3 (KR0 to KR6): 64-pin products
KR0 to KR3 (KR0 to KR7): 80-pin products
Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 217
Mar 31, 2014
3. 17. 3 Register controlling key interrupt
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below. For details of each
register, see 17. 3 Register Controlling Key Interrupt in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 17. 3. 1 Key return control register (KRCTL)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 17. 3. 1 Key return control register
(KRCTL) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 17. 3. 2 Key return mode register 0 (KRM0)
(1) 64-pin products
Address: FFF37H Aft er r es et: 0 0 H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
KRM0 0 KRM06 KRM05 KRM04 KRM03 KRM02 KRM01 KRM00
Caution Be sure to clear bit 7 of the KRM0 register to “0”.
(2) 80-pin products
Address: FFF37H Aft er r es et: 0 0 H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
KRM0 KRM07 KRM06 KRM05 KRM04 KRM03 KRM02 KRM01 KRM00
3. 17. 3. 3 Key return flag register (KRF)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 17. 3. 3 Key return flag register (KRF)
in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 218
Mar 31, 2014
3. 17. 3. 4 Port mode registers 0 to 2, 7 (PM0 to PM2, PM7)
(1) 64-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
PM0 1 PM06 PM05 PM04 PM03 PM02 PM01 PM00 FFF20H FFH R/W
PM1 1 PM16 1 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10 FFF21H FFH R/W
PM2 PM27 PM26 PM25 PM24 PM23 PM22 PM21 PM20 FFF22H FFH R/W
PM7 PM77 PM76 PM75 PM74 PM73 PM72 PM71 PM70 FFF27H FFH R/W
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 4 to 6 of the PM0 register, bit 6 of the PM1 register, bits 4 to 7 of the PM2
register, bits 4 to 7 of the PM7 register to “0”.
2. Be sure to set bit 7 of the PM0 register, bits 5 and 7 of the PM1 register to “1”.
(2) 80-pin products
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After Reset R/W
PM0 1 PM06 PM05 PM04 PM03 PM02 PM01 PM00 FFF20H FFH R/W
PM1 1 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10 FFF21H FFH R/W
PM2 PM27 PM26 PM25 PM24 PM23 PM22 PM21 PM20 FFF22H FFH R/W
PM7 PM77 PM76 PM75 PM74 PM73 PM72 PM71 PM70 FFF27H FFH R/W
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 of the PM0 register, bit 6 of the PM1 register, bits 5 to 7 of the PM2
register, bits 4 to 7 of the PM7 register to “0”.
2. Be sure to set bit 7 of the PM0 register, bit 7 of the PM1 register to “1”.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 219
Mar 31, 2014
3. 17. 3. 5 Peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR)
Address: F0077H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PIOR 0 0 0 0 0 0 PIOR1 PIOR0
Function 64-pin produc ts 80-pin products
Setting value of PIOR1, PIOR0 Setting value of PIOR1, PIOR0
0, 0 0, 1 1, 0 1, 1 0, 0 0, 1 1, 0 1, 1
KR0 P70 Setting
prohibited
P00 P10 P70 Setting
prohibited
P00 P10
KR1 P71 P01 P11 P71 P01 P11
KR2 P72 P02 P12 P72 P02 P12
KR3 P73 P03 P13 P73 P03 P13
KR4 P14 P04 P14
KR5 P22 P22 P15
KR6 P23 P23
KR7 P24
3. 17. 4 Key interrupt operation
See 17. 4 Key Interrupt Operation in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 220
Mar 31, 2014
3. 18 Standby Function
See CHAPTER 18 STANDBY FUNCTION in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 221
Mar 31, 2014
3. 19 Reset Function
See CHAPTER 19 RESET FUNCTION in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 222
Mar 31, 2014
3. 20 Power-On-Reset Circuit
See CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 223
Mar 31, 2014
3. 21 Voltage Detector
3. 21. 1 Functions of voltage detector
The operation mode and detection voltages (VLVDH, VLVDL, VLVD) for the voltage detector is set by using the option byte
(000C1H).
The voltage detector (LVD) has the following functions.
The LVD circuit compares the supply voltage (VDD) with the detection voltage (VLVDH, VLVDL, VLVD), and generates an
internal reset or interrupt request signal.
The detection level for the power supply detection voltage (VLVDH, VLVDL, VLVD) can be selected by using the option
byte as one of 3 levels (For details, see 3. 24 Option Byte).
Operable in STOP mode.
After power is supplied, the reset state must be retained until the operating voltage becomes in the range defined in 5.
2. 3 AC characteristics. This is done by utilizing the voltage detector or controlling the externally input reset signal.
After the power supply is turned off, this LSI should be placed in the STOP mode, or placed in the reset state by
utilizing the voltage detector or controlling the externally input reset signal before the voltage falls below the operating
range. The range of operating voltage varies with the setting of the user option byte (000C2H or 010C2H).
(a) Interrupt & reset mode (option byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 0)
The two detection voltages (VLVDH, VLVDL) are selected by the option byte 000C1H. The high-voltage detection level
(VLVDH) is used for releasing resets and generating interrupts. The low-voltage detection level (VLVDL) is used for
generating resets.
(b) Reset mode (option byte LVIM DS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 1)
The detection voltage (VLVD) selected by the option byte 000C1H is used for generating/releasing resets.
(c) Interrupt mode (option byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 0, 1)
The detection voltage (VLVD) selected by the option byte 000C1H is used for releasing resets/generating interrupts.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 224
Mar 31, 2014
The reset and internal interrupt signals are generated in each mode as follows.
Interr u p t & reset mod e
(LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 0)
Reset mode
(LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 1)
Interrupt mode
(LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 0, 1)
Generates an interrupt request si gnal by
detecting VDD < VLVDH when the operating
voltage fal ls, and an internal reset by
detecting VDD < VLVDL.
Releases an internal reset by detecting
VDD VLVDH.
Releases an internal reset by detecting
VDD VLVD.
Generates an interrupt request si gnal by
detecting VDD < VLVD.
Releases an internal reset by detecting
VDD VLVD at power on after t he first
release of the POR.
Generates an interrupt request s i gnal by
detecting VDD < VLVD or VDD VLVD at
power on after the second release of the
POR.
While the voltage detector is operating, whether the supply voltage or the input voltage from an external input pin is
more than or less than the detection level can be checked by reading the voltage detection flag (LVIF: bit 0 of the
voltage detection register (LVIM)).
Bit 0 (LVIRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1 if reset occurs. For details of the RESF register, see 3.
19 Reset Function.
3. 21. 2 Configuration of voltage detector
The block diagram of the voltage detector is shown in Figure 3-15.
Figure 3-15. Block Diagram of Voltage Detector
LVIOMSK
V
DD
N-ch
LVILV
LVIMD
LVIF LVISEN
Voltage detection
level selector
V
LVDH
V
LVDL
/V
LVD
Reference
voltage
source
Selector
Option byte (000C1H)
VPOC2 to VPOC0
Option byte (000C1H)
LVIS1, LVIS0
V
DD
Voltage detection
level register (LVIS)
Voltage detection
register (LVIM)
INTLVI
Internal reset signal
Controller
Internal bus
+
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 225
Mar 31, 2014
3. 21. 3 Registers controlling voltage detector
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below. For details of each
register, see 21. 3 Registers Controlling Voltage Detector in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 21. 3. 1 Voltage detection register (LVIM)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 21. 3. 1 Voltage detection register
(LVIM) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 21. 3. 2 Voltage detection level register (LVIS)
The bit setting is same as that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products). For details, see 21. 3. 2 Voltage detection level
register (LVIS) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 226
Mar 31, 2014
Format of User Option Byte (000C1H/010C1H) (1/2)
Address: 000C1H/ 010C1H Note
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 1 LVIS1 LVIS0 LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
LVD setting (interrupt & reset mode)
Detection voltage Option byte setting value
VLVDH VLVDL VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 Mode setting
Rising
edge
Falling
edge
Falling
edge
LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
3.13 3.06 1.84 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
3.75 3.67 2.45 0 1 0 0 0
4.06 3.98 2.75 0 1 1 0 0
Value other than above is setting prohibited.
LVD setting (reset mode)
Detection voltage Option byt e setti ng value
VLVDH VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 Mode setting
Rising
edge
Falling
edge
LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
3.13 3.06 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
3.75 3.67 0 1 0 0 0
4.06 3.98 0 1 1 0 0
Value other than above is setting prohibit ed.
Note Set the same value as 000C1H to 010C1H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C1H is replaced
by 010C1H.
Remarks 1. For details on the LVD circuit, see 3. 21 Voltage Detector.
2. The detection voltage is a TYP. value. For details, see 5. 2. 5. 4 LVD circuit characteristics.
(Cautions are listed on the next page.)
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 227
Mar 31, 2014
Format of User Option Byte (000C1H/010C1H) (2/2)
Address: 000C1H/ 010C1H Note
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 1 LVIS1 LVIS0 LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
LVD setting (interrupt mode)
Detection voltage Option byte setti ng value
VLVDH VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 Mode setting
Rising
edge
Falling
edge
LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
3.13 3.06 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
3.75 3.67 0 1 0 0 0
4.06 3.98 0 1 1 0 0
Value other than above is setting prohibited.
LVD off (use of external reset input via RESET pin)
Detection voltage Opt i on byte setting value
VLVD VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 Mode setting
Rising
edge
Falling
edge
LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
1 × × × × × 1
Value other than above is setting prohibited.
Note Set the same value as 000C1H to 010C1H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C1H is replaced
by 010C1H.
Cautions1. Set bit 4 to 1.
2. After power is supplied, the reset state must be retained until the operating voltage becomes in
the range defined in 5. 2. 3 AC characteristics. This is done by utilizing the voltage detector or
controlling the externally input reset signal. After the power supply is turned off, this LSI should
be placed in the STOP mode, or placed in the reset state by utilizing the voltage detector or
controlling the externally input reset signal, before the voltage falls below the operating range.
The range of operating voltage varies with the setting of the user option byte (000C2H or
010C2H).
Remarks 1. ×: don’t care
2. For details on the LVD circuit, see 3. 21 Voltage Detector.
3. The detection voltage is a TYP. value. For details, see 5. 2. 5. 4 LVD circuit characteristics.
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 228
Mar 31, 2014
3. 21. 4 Operation of voltage detector
See 21. 4 Operation of Voltage Detector in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 21. 5 Cautions for voltage detector
See 21. 5 Cautions for Voltage Detector in RL78/G1A Hardwa re User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 229
Mar 31, 2014
3. 22 Safety Functions
3. 22. 1 Overview of safety functions
The following safety functions are provided in the RL78/G1E to comply with the IEC60730 and IEC61508 safety
standards. These functions enable the microcontroller to self-diagnose abnormalities and stop operating if an
abnormality is detected.
(1) Flash memory CRC operation function (high-speed CRC, general-purpose CRC)
This detects data errors in the flash memory by performing CRC operations.
Two CRC functions are provided in the RL78/G1E that can be used according to the application or purpose of use.
High-speed CRC: The CPU can be stopped and a high-speed check executed on its entire code flash
memory area during the initialization routine.
General CRC: This can be used for checking various data in addition to the code flash memory
area while the CPU is running.
(2) RAM parity error detection function
This detects parity errors when reading RAM data.
(3) RAM guard function
This prevents RAM data from being rewritten when the CPU freezes.
(4) SFR guard function
This prevents SFRs from being rewritten when the CPU freezes.
(5) Invalid memory access detection function
This detects illegal accesses to invalid memory areas (such as areas where no memory is allocated and areas to
which access is restricted).
(6) Frequency detection function
This function allows a self-check of the CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequencies using the timer array unit.
(7) A/D test function
This is used to perform a self-check of the A/D converter by performing A/D conversion of the A/D converters
positive and negative reference voltages, analog input channel (ANI), temperature sensor output voltage, and
internal reference voltage.
Remark See the self-testing library application note for the RL78 MCU series (R01AN0749, R01AN1062,
R01AN1296) for use examples of the safety functions compliant with the safety standard IEC60730.
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 230
Mar 31, 2014
3. 22. 2 Registers used by safety functions
See 22. 2 Registers Used by Safety Functions in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 22. 3 Operation of safety functions
3. 22. 3. 1 Flash memory CRC operation function (high-speed CRC)
See 22. 3. 1 Flash memory CRC operation function (high-speed CRC) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
3. 22. 3. 2 CRC operation function (general-purpose CRC)
See 22. 3. 2 CRC operation function (general-purpose CRC) in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
3. 22. 3. 3 RAM parity error detection function
See 22. 3. 3 RAM parity error detection function in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 22. 3. 4 RAM guard function
See 22. 3. 4 RAM guard function in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 22. 3. 5 SFR guard function
See 22. 3. 5 SFR guard function in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 22. 3. 6 Invalid memory access detection function
See 22. 3. 6 Invalid memory access detection function in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 231
Mar 31, 2014
3. 22. 3. 7 Frequency detection function
For details of each register, see 22. 3. 7 Frequency detection function in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below.
(1) Timer input select register 0 (TIS0)
Address: F0074H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TIS0 0 0 0 0 0 TIS02 TIS01 TIS00
TIS02 TIS01 TIS00 Selection of timer input used with channel 5
0 0 0 Default value
1 0 0 Low-speed on-c hip os cillat or clock (fIL)
Other than above Setting prohibited
Caution High-level width, low-level width of timer input is selected, will require more than 1/fMCK +10 ns.
Therefore, when selecting fSUB to fCLK (CSS bit of CKS register = 1), can not TIS02 bit set to 1.
3. 22. 3. 8 A/D test function
See 22. 3. 8 A/D test function in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 232
Mar 31, 2014
3. 23 Regulator
See CHAPTER 23 REGULATOR in RL78/G1A Hardw a re User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 233
Mar 31, 2014
3. 24 Option Byte
3. 24. 1 Functions of option bytes
Addresses 000C0H to 000C3H of the flash memory of the RL78/G1E form an option byte area.
Option bytes consist of user option byte (000C0H to 000C2H) and on-chip debug option byte (000C3H).
Upon power application or resetting and starting, an option byte is automatically referenced and a specified function is
set. For the bits to which no function is allocated, be sure to set the value specified in this manual.
To use the boot swap operation during self programming, 000C0H to 000C3H are replaced by 010C0H to 010C3H.
Therefore, set the same values as 000C0H to 000C3H to 010C0H to 010C3H.
Caution Be sure to specify option byte settings regardless of whether they are used or not.
3. 24. 1. 1 User option byte (000C0H to 000C2H/010C0H to 010C2H)
(1) 000C0H/010C0H
Setting of watchdog timer operation
Enabling or disabling of counter operation
Enabling or disabling of counter operation in the HALT or STOP mode
Setting of overflow time of watchdog timer
Setting of window open period of watchdog timer
Setting of interval interrupt of watchdog timer
Whether or not to use the interval interrupt is selectable
Caution Set the same value as 000C0H to 010C0H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C0H is
replaced by 010C0H.
(2) 000C1H/010C1H
Setting of LVD operation mode
Interrupt & reset mode.
Reset mode.
Interrupt mode.
LVD off (by controlling the externally input reset signal on the RESET pin)
Setting of LVD detection level (VLVDH, VLVDL, VLVD)
Cautions1. After power is supplied, the reset state must be retained until the operating voltage becomes in
the range defined in 5. 2. 3 AC characteristics. This is done by utilizing the voltage detection
circuit or controlling the externally input reset signal. After the power supply is turned off, this
LSI should be placed in the STOP mode, or placed in the reset state by utilizing the voltage
detection circuit or controlling the externally input reset signal, before the voltage falls below the
operating range. The range of operating voltage varies with the setting of the user option byte
(000C2H or 010C2H).
2. Set the same value as 000C1H to 010C1H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C1H
is replaced by 010C1H.
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 234
Mar 31, 2014
(3) 000C2H/010C2H
Setting of flash operation mode
LV (low voltage main) mode
LS (low speed main) mode
HS (high speed main) mode
Setting of the frequency of the high-speed on-chip oscillator
Select from 32 MHz/24 MHz/16 MHz/12 MHz/8 MHz/6 MHz/4 MHz/3 MHz/2 MHz/1 MHz (TYP.).
Caution Set the same value as 000C2H to 010C2H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C2H is
replaced by 010C2H.
3. 24. 1. 2 On-chip debug option byte (000C3H/010C3H)
Control of on-ch ip debu g oper ation
On-chip debug operation is disabled or enabled.
Handling of data of flash memory in case of failure in on-chip debug security ID authentication
Data of flash memory is erased or not erased in case of failure in on-chip debug security ID authentication.
Caution Set the same value as 000C3H to 010C3H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C3H is
replaced by 010C3H.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 235
Mar 31, 2014
3. 24. 2 Format of user option byte
For details of each register, see 24. 2 Format of User Option Byte in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual
(R01UH0305E).
The bit settings which are different from that of RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are shown below.
Format of user option byte (000C1H/010C1H) (1/2)
Address: 000C1H/ 010C1H Note
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 1 LVIS1 LVIS0 LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
LVD setting (interrupt & reset mode)
Detection voltage Option byte setting value
VLVDH VLVDL VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 Mode setting
Rising
edge
Falling
edge
Falling
edge
LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
3.13 3.06 1.84 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
3.75 3.67 2.45 0 1 0 0 0
4.06 3.98 2.75 0 1 1 0 0
Value other than above is setting prohibited.
LVD setting (reset mode)
Detection voltage Option byt e setti ng value
VLVDH VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 Mode setting
Rising
edge
Falling
edge
LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
3.13 3.06 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
3.75 3.67 0 1 0 0 0
4.06 3.98 0 1 1 0 0
Value other than above is setting prohibited.
Note Set the same value as 000C1H to 010C1H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C1H is replaced
by 010C1H.
Cautions 1. Be sure to set bit 4 to “1”.
2. After power is supplied, the reset state must be retained until the operating voltage becomes in
the range defined in 5. 2. 3 AC Characteristics. This is done by utilizing the voltage detection
circuit or controlling the externally input reset signal. After the power supply is turned off, this
LSI should be placed in the STOP mode, or placed in the reset state by utilizing the voltage
detection circuit or controlling the externally input reset signal, before the voltage falls below the
operating range. The range of operating voltage varies with the setting of the user option byte
(000C2H or 010C2H).
Remarks 1. For details on the LVD circuit, see 3. 21 Voltage Detector.
2. The detection voltage is a typical value. For details, see 5. 2. 5. 4 LVD circuit characteristics.
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 236
Mar 31, 2014
Format of user option byte (000C1H/010C1H) (2/2)
Address: 000C1H/ 010C1H Note
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 1 LVIS1 LVIS0 LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
LVD setting (interrupt mode)
Detection voltage Option byte setti ng value
VLVDH VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 Mode setting
Rising
edge
Falling
edge
LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
3.13 3.06 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
3.75 3.67 0 1 0 0 0
4.06 3.98 0 1 1 0 0
Value other than above is setting prohibited.
LVD off (by controlling the externally input reset signal on the RESET pin)
Detection voltage Option byte setti ng value
VLVD VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 Mode setting
Rising
edge
Falling
edge
LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0
1 × × × × × 1
Value ot her than above is setting prohibit ed.
Note Set the same value as 000C1H to 010C1H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C1H is replaced
by 010C1H.
Cautions 1. Be sure to set bit 4 to “1”.
2. After power is supplied, the reset state must be retained until the operating voltage becomes in
the range defined in 5. 2. 3 AC characteristics. This is done by utilizing the voltage detection
circuit or controlling the externally input reset signal. After the power supply is turned off, this
LSI should be placed in the STOP mode, or placed in the reset state by utilizing the voltage
detection circuit or controlling the externally input reset signal, before the voltage falls below the
operating range. The range of operating voltage varies with the setting of the user option byte
(000C2H or 010C2H).
Remarks 1. ×: don’t care
2. For details on the LVD circuit, see 3. 21 Voltage Detector.
3. The detection voltage is a typical value. For details, see 5. 2. 5. 4 LVD circuit characteristics.
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 237
Mar 31, 2014
Format of user option byte (000C2H/010C2H)
Address: 000C2H/ 010C2H Note
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CMODE1 CMODE0 1 0 FRQSEL3 FRQSEL2 FRQSEL1 FRQSEL0
CMODE1 CMODE0 Setting of flash operation m ode
Operating Frequency
Range
Operating Voltage Range
0 0 LV (low voltage main) mode 1 to 4 MHz 1.6 to 5.5 V
1 0 LS (low speed main) mode 1 to 8 MHz 1.8 to 5.5 V
1 1 HS (high speed main) mode 1 to 16 MHz 2.4 to 5.5 V
1 to 32 MHz 2. 7 t o 5.5 V
Other than above Setting prohibited
FRQSEL3 FRQSEL2 FRQSEL1 FRQS EL0 Frequency of the high-speed on-chip oscillator
1 0 0 0 32 MHz
0 0 0 0 24 MHz
1 0 0 1 16 MHz
0 0 0 1 12 MHz
1 0 1 0 8 MHz
0 0 1 0 6 MHz
1 0 1 1 4 MHz
0 0 1 1 3 MHz
1 1 0 0 2 MHz
1 1 0 1 1 MHz
Other than above Setting prohibited
Note Set the same value as 000C2H to 010C2H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C2H is replaced
by 010C2H.
Cautions 1. Be sure to set bits 5, 4 to “10B”.
2. The ranges of operation frequency and operation voltage vary depending on the flash operation
mode. For details, see 5. 2. 3 AC characteristics.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 238
Mar 31, 2014
3. 24. 3 Format of on-chip debug option byte
See 24. 3 Format of On-chip Debug Option Byte in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 24. 4 Setting of option byte
See 24. 4 Setting of Option Byte in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 239
Mar 31, 2014
3. 25 Flash Memory
In this section, the differences of the functions and registers from RL78/G1A (64-pin products) are described. For
details, see CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 25. 1 Serial Programming Using Flash Memory Programmer
The following dedicated flash memory programmer can be used to write data to the internal flash memory of the
RL78/G1E.
PG-FP5, FL-PR5
E1 on-chip debugging emulator
Data can be written to the flash memory on-board or off-board, by using a dedicated flash memory programmer.
(1) On-board programming
The contents of the flash memory can be rewritten after the RL78/G1E has been mounted on the target system. The
connectors that connect the dedicated flash memory programmer must be mounted on the target system.
(2) Off-board programming
Data can be written to the flash memory with a dedicated program adapter (FA series) before the RL78/G1E is
mounted on the target system.
Remark FL-PR5 and FA series are products of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 240
Mar 31, 2014
Table 3-18. Wiring Between RL78/G1E and Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer
Pin Configuration of Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer Pin Name Pin No.
Signal Name I/O Pin Function 64-pin products 80-pin products
PG-FP5
FL-PR5
E1 On-chip
Debugging
Emulator
WQFN (9 × 9) LQFP (12 × 12)
TOOL0 I/O Transmit/receive signal TOOL0/P40 15 18
SI / RxD I/O
RESET Output Reset signal RESET 16 19
/RESET Output
VDD I/O VDD voltage generation/
power monitoring
VDD 22 25
GND Ground VSS 21 24
EVSS0
REGC Note 20 23
EMVDD Driving power
for T OOL0 pi n
VDD 22 25
EVDD0
Note Connect REGC pin to ground via a capacitor (0.47 to 1
μ
F).
Remark Pins that are not indicated in the above table can be left open when using the flash memory programmer for
flash programming.
3. 25. 1. 1 Programming environment
See 25. 1. 1 Programming environment in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 25. 1. 2 Communication mode
See 25. 1. 2 Communication mode in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 241
Mar 31, 2014
3. 25. 2 Serial programming using external device (that Incorporates UART)
See 25. 2 Serial Programming Using External Device (that Incorporates UART) in RL7 8/G1 A Hardw are User’s
Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 25. 3 Connection of pins on board
See 25. 3 Connection of Pins on Board in RL78/G1A Hardwa re User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 25. 4 Serial programming method
See 25. 4 Serial Programming Method in RL78/G1A Hardw a re User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 25. 5 Processing time for each command when PG-FP5 Is in use (Reference value)
See 25. 5 Processing Time for Each Command When PG-FP5 Is in Use (Reference Value) in RL78/G1A
Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 25. 6 Self-programming
See 25. 6 Self-Programming in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 25. 7 Security Settings
See 25. 7 Security Settings in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 25. 8 Data flash
See 25. 8 Data Flash in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 242
Mar 31, 2014
3. 26 On-chip Debug Function
3. 26. 1 Connecting E1 on-chip debugging emulator to RL78/G1E
The RL78/G1A uses the VDD, RESET, TOOL0, and VSS pins to communicate with the host machine via an E1 on-chip
debugging emulator. Serial communication is performed by using a single-line UART that uses the TOOL0 pin.
Caution The RL78/G1E has an on-chip debug function, which is provided for development and evaluation. Do
not use the on-chip debug function in products designated for mass production, because the
guaranteed number of rewritable times of the flash memory may be exceeded when this function is
used, and product reliability therefore cannot be guaranteed. Renesas Electronics is not liable for
problems occurring when the on-chip debug function is used.
Figure 3-16. Connection Example of E1 On-chip Debugging Emulator and RL78/G1E
E1 target connector
Note1
V
DD
TOOL0
V
DD
Reset circuit
Reset signal
GND
GND V
SS
GND
TOOL0
Reset_out RESET
Reset_out
Reset_in
V
DD
V
DD
V
DD
V
DD
10 kΩ1 kΩ
Note2
1 kΩ
RL78/G1E
V
DD
AV
DDNote3
AV
DD
EMV
DD
Notes 1. Connecting the dotted line is not necessary during serial flash programming..
2. If the reset circuit on the target system does not have a buffer and generates a reset signal only with
resistors and capacitors, this pull-up resistor is not necessary.
3. AVDD 3.6 V.
Cautions 1. This circuit diagram is assumed that the reset signal outputs from an N-ch open drain buffer
(output resistor: 100 Ω or less).
2. For the details of ARESET pin, see 2. 5. 31 ARESET.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 243
Mar 31, 2014
3. 26. 2 On-chip debug security ID
See 26. 2 On-Chip Debug Security ID in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
3. 26. 3 Securing of user resources
See 26. 3 Securing of User Resources in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 244
Mar 31, 2014
3. 27 BCD Correction Circuit
See CHAPTER 27 BCD CORRECTION CIRCUIT in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 245
Mar 31, 2014
3. 28 Instruction Set
See CHAPTER 28 INSTRUCTION SET in RL78/G1A Hardware User’s Manual (R01UH0305E).
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 246
Mar 31, 2014
CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
4. 1 Configurable Amplifier
The RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) has three on-chip configurable amplifier channels.
4. 1. 1 Overview of configurable amplifier features
By specifying settings in the SPI control registers, the configurable amplifiers can be used to realize the following
features:
Single-channel operation
Non-inverting amplifier
The gain can be specified between 9.5 dB and 40.1 dB in 18 steps
Four operating modes are av ai labl e
Includes a power-off function
Inverting amplifier
The gain can be specified between 6 dB and 40 dB in 18 steps
Four operating modes are av ai labl e
Includes a power-off function
Differential amplifier
The gain can be specified between 6 dB and 40 dB in 18 steps
Four operating modes are av ai labl e
Includes a power-off function
Transimpedance amplifier
The feedback resistance can be specified between 20 kΩ and 640 kΩ in 6 steps
Four operating modes are av ai labl e
Includes a power-off function
Multiple-channel operation
Instrumentation amplifier
The gain can be specified between 20 dB and 54 dB in 18 steps
Four operat ing mo des are av ai labl e
Includes a power-off function
And also, the DACn_OUT output signals can be used as the reference voltage for each configurable amplifier.
If D/A converter is powered off, the external reference voltage is to be input to DACn_OUT/VREFINn pin.
For details about use of D/A converter, see 4. 3 D/A Converter.
Remark n = 1 to 3
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 247
Mar 31, 2014
4. 1. 2 Block diagram
Figure 4-1. Block Diagram of Configurable Amplifier Ch1
SW12 SW13SW11 AMPG11
AMPG13 AMPG12 AMPG10
AMPG14
Selector Selector
+
-
8-bit
DAC1
DAC1_OUT/VREFIN1
MPXIN20
MPXIN21
MPXIN10
MPXIN11
MPX2
MPX1
AMP1_OUT
SW11
SW12
SW13
MPX20 MPX31 MPX30MPX10 MPX21MPX11
CC0CC1
AMP operation mode control register
(AOMC)
Configuration register 1
(CONFIG1) Gain control register 1
(GC1)
MPX setting register 1
(MPX1)
AMP1OF DAC1OF DAC12 DAC11DAC14 DAC13DAC16 DAC15 DAC10DAC17
Power control r egi ster 1 (PC1) DAC control register 1 (DAC1C)
Selector
MPX3
Source of configurable amp
Ch2 inverted input
MPXIN30
MPXIN31
DAC2_OUT/VREFI N2
SW00 SW01
Configuration register 2
(CONFIG2)
SW00
SW01
MPX5, MXP6, MPX7
Internal bus
Internal bus
AVDD1
AGND1
VRB0VRT0 VRB1VRT1
DAC reference voltage control
register (DACRC)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 248
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 4-2. Block Diagram of Configurable Amplifier Ch2
SW22 SW23SW21 AMPG21
AMPG23 AMPG22 AMPG20
AMPG24
Selector Selector
+
-
8-bit
DAC2
DAC2_OUT/VREFIN2
MPXIN40
MPXIN41
MPXIN30
MPXIN31
MPX4
MPX3
AMP2_OUT
SW21
SW22
SW23
MPX30 MPX41 MPX40MPX10 MPX31MPX11
CC0CC1
AMP operation mode control register
(AOMC)
Configurat ion r egi ster 1
(CONFIG1) Gain contr ol r egi ster 2
(GC2)
MPX settin g register 1
(MPX1)
AMP2OF DAC2OF DAC22 DAC21DAC24 DAC23DAC26 DAC25 DAC20DAC27
Power control register 1 (PC1) DAC control register 2 (DAC2C)
Selector
MPX1
Source of configurable amp
Ch1 inverted input
MPXIN10
MPXIN11
DAC1_OUT/VREFIN1
SW00 SW01
Configuration register 2
(CONFIG2)
SW00
SW02
MPX5 , MXP6, MPX7
Internal bus
Internal bus
AVDD1
AGND1
VRB0VRT0 VRB1VRT1
DAC reference voltage control
register (DACRC)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 249
Mar 31, 2014
Figure 4-3. Block Diagram of Configurable Amplifier Ch3
64-pin products
SW32 SW33SW31 AMPG31AMPG33 AMPG32 AMPG30AMPG34
+
-
DAC3_OUT/VREFIN3
MPXIN50
MPX6
MPX5
AMP3_OUT
SW31
SW32
SW33
MPX62 MPX61 MPX60MPX51 MPX50MPX52
CC0CC1
AMP3OF DAC3OF DAC32 DAC31DAC34 DAC33DAC36 DAC35 DAC30DAC37
MPX7
AVDD1
AGND1
VRB0VRT0 VRB1VRT1
MPXIN60
8-bit
DAC3
AMP operat i on m ode control regist er
(AOMC)
Conf i gura tion register 2
(CONFIG2) Gain control registe r 3 (GC3)
MPX setting regis ter 2
(MPX2) Power contro l register 1 (PC1 ) D AC control regist er 3 (DAC3C)
Selector Selector
Internal bus
DAC reference voltage control
registe r (DACRC)
Configurable amp
Ch1 output signal
Configurable amp
Ch2 output signal
Configurable amp
Ch1 output signal
Configurable amp
Ch2 output signal
Internal bus
80-pin products
SW32 SW33SW31 AMPG31AMPG33 AMPG32 AMPG30AMPG34
+
-
8-bit
DAC3
DAC3_OUT/VREFIN3
MPXIN50
MPXIN51
MPX6
MPX5
AMP3_OUT
SW31
SW32
SW33
MPX62 MPX61 MPX60MPX51 MPX50MPX52
CC0CC1
AMP operat io n m ode control regist er
(AOMC)
Configuration register 2
(CONFIG2) Gain control register 3 (GC3)
MPX setting register 2
(MPX 2)
AMP3OF DAC3OF DAC32 DAC31DAC34 DAC33DAC36 DAC35 DAC30DAC37
Power co ntrol register 1 (PC1) DAC contro l reg i ster 3 (DAC3C)
Selector Selector
MPX7
Internal bus
Internal bus
AVDD1
AGND1
VRB0VRT0 VRB1VRT1
DAC reference voltage control
register (DACRC)
Configurable amp
Ch1 output signal
Configurable amp
Ch2 output signal
MPXIN60
MPXIN61
Configurable amp
Ch1 output signal
Configurable amp
Ch2 output signal
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 250
Mar 31, 2014
4. 1. 3 Registers controlling the configurable amplifiers
The configurable amplifiers are controlled by the following 9 registers:
Configuration register 1 (CONFIG1)
Configuration register 2 (CONFIG2)
MPX setting register 1 (MPX1)
MPX setting register 2 (MPX2)
Gain control register 1 (GC1)
Gain control register 2 (GC2)
Gain control register 3 (GC3)
AMP operation mode control register (AOMC)
Power control register 1 (PC1)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 251
Mar 31, 2014
(1) Configuration register 1 (CONFIG1)
This register is used to turn on or off each switch of configurable amplifiers Ch1 and Ch2.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
Address: 00H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CONFIG1 0 SW11 SW12 SW13 0 SW21 SW22 SW23
SW11 Control of SW11
0 Turn off SW11.
1 Turn on SW11.
SW12 Control of SW12
0 Turn off SW12.
1 Turn on SW12.
SW13 Control of SW13
0 Turn off SW13.
1 Turn on SW13.
SW21 Control of SW21
0 Turn off SW21.
1 Turn on SW21.
SW22 Control of SW22
0 Turn off SW22.
1 Turn on SW22.
SW23 Control of SW23
0 Turn off SW23.
1 Turn on SW23.
Remark Bits 7 and 3 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 252
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Configuration register 2 (CONFIG2)
This register is used to turn on or off each switch of configurable amplifiers Ch1 to Ch3.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
Address: 01H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CONFIG2 0 SW31 SW32 SW33 0 SW02 SW01 SW00
SW31 Control of SW31
0 Turn off SW31.
1 Turn on SW31.
SW32 Control of SW32
0 Turn off SW32.
1 Turn on SW32.
SW33 Control of SW33
0 Turn off SW33.
1 Turn on SW33.
SW02 Control of SW02
0 Turn off SW02.
1 Turn on SW02.
SW01 Control of SW01
0 Turn off SW01.
1 Turn on SW01.
SW00 Control of SW00
0 Turn off SW00.
1 Turn on SW00.
Remark Bits 7 and 3 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 253
Mar 31, 2014
(3) MPX setting register 1 (MPX1)
This register is used to control MPX1, MPX2, MPX3, and MPX4.
This register is used to select the signal input to configurable amplifiers Ch1 and Ch2.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
Address: 03H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MPX1 MPX11 MPX10 MPX21 MPX20 MPX31 MPX30 MPX41 MPX40
MPX11 MPX10 Source of configurable amplifier Ch1 inverse input
0 0 MPXIN10 pin
0 1 MPXIN11 pin
1 0 D/A converter Ch1 output signal or VREFIN1 pin
1 1 Open pin
MPX21 MPX20 Source of confi gurabl e amplifi er Ch1 non-inverted i nput
0 0 MPXIN20 pin
0 1 MPXIN21 pin
1 0 D/A converter Ch1 output signal or VREFIN1 pin
1 1 Open pin
MPX31 MPX30 Source of configurable amplifier Ch2 inverse input
0 0 MPXIN30 pin
0 1 MPXIN31 pin
1 0 D/A converter Ch2 output signal or VREFIN2 pin
1 1 Open pin
MPX41 MPX40 Source of confi gurabl e amplifi er Ch2 non-inverted i nput
0 0 MPXIN40 pin
0 1 MPXIN41 pin
1 0 D/A converter Ch2 output signal or VREFIN2 pin
1 1 Open pin
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 254
Mar 31, 2014
(4) MPX setting register 2 (MPX2)
This register is used to control MPX5 and MPX6.
This register is used to select the signal input to configurable amplifier Ch3.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
64-pin products
Address: 04H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MPX2 0 MPX52 MPX51 MPX50 0 MPX62 MPX61 MPX60
MPX52 MPX51 MP X50 Source of configurable amplifier Ch3 invers e i nput
0 0 0 MPXIN50 pin
0 1 0 Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch1 output si gnal
0 1 1 Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch2 output si gnal
1 0 0 D/ A converter Ch3 output signal or VREFIN3 pin
Other than above Setting prohibi t ed
MPX62 MPX61 MPX60 Source of configurable amplifier Ch3 non-inverted input
0 0 0 MPXIN60 pin
0 1 0 Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch1 output signal
0 1 1 Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch2 output signal
1 0 0 D/ A converter Ch3 output signal or VREFIN3 pin
Other than above Setting prohibi t ed
Remark Bits 7 and 3 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 255
Mar 31, 2014
80-pin products
Address: 04H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MPX2 0 MPX52 MPX51 MPX50 0 MPX62 MPX61 MPX60
MPX52 MPX51 MP X50 Source of configurable amplifier Ch3 invers e i nput
0 0 0 MPXIN50 pin
0 0 1 MPXIN51 pin
0 1 0 Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch1 output si gnal
0 1 1 Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch2 output si gnal
1 0 0 D/ A converter Ch3 output signal or VREFIN3 pin
Other than above Setting prohibi t ed
MPX62 MPX61 MPX60 Source of configurable amplifier Ch3 non-inverted input
0 0 0 MPXIN60 pin
0 0 1 MPXIN61 pin
0 1 0 Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch1 output signal
0 1 1 Conf i gurabl e am pl ifi er Ch2 output signal
1 0 0 D/ A converter Ch3 output signal or VREFIN3 pin
Other than above Setting prohibi t ed
Remark Bits 7 and 3 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 256
Mar 31, 2014
(5) Gain control register 1 (GC1)
This register is used to specify the gain and feedback resistance of configurable amplifier Ch1.
The value to specify depends on the configuration of configurable amplifier Ch1.
When using configurable amplifiers Ch1 to Ch3 together as an instrumentation amplifier, be sure to set gain control
register 1 (GC1) to 03H.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
Address: 06H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
GC1 0 0 0 AMPG14 AMPG13 AMPG12 AMPG11 AMPG10
Table 4-1. Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch1 (Non-Inverting Amplifier)
AMPG14 AMPG13 AMPG12 AMPG11 AMPG10 Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch1 (Typ.)
0 0 0 0 0 9.5 dB
0 0 0 0 1 10.9 dB
0 0 0 1 0 12.4 dB
0 0 0 1 1 14.0 dB
0 0 1 0 0 15.6 dB
0 0 1 0 1 17.3 dB
0 0 1 1 0 19.0 dB
0 0 1 1 1 20.8 dB
0 1 0 0 0 22.7 dB
0 1 0 0 1 24.5 dB
0 1 0 1 0 26.4 dB
0 1 0 1 1 28.3 dB
0 1 1 0 0 30.3 dB
0 1 1 0 1 32.2 dB
0 1 1 1 0 34.2 dB
0 1 1 1 1 36.1 dB
1 0 0 0 0 38.1 dB
1 0 0 0 1 40.1 dB
Other than above Setting prohibited
Remark Bits 7 to 5 are fixed at 0 of read only.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 257
Mar 31, 2014
Table 4-2. Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch1 (Inverting Amplifier and Differential Amplifier)
AMPG14 AMPG13 AMPG12 AMPG11 AMPG10 Gain of Conf i gurabl e Ampl ifi er Ch1 (Typ.)
0 0 0 0 0 6 dB
0 0 0 0 1 8 dB
0 0 0 1 0 10 dB
0 0 0 1 1 12 dB
0 0 1 0 0 14 dB
0 0 1 0 1 16 dB
0 0 1 1 0 18 dB
0 0 1 1 1 20 dB
0 1 0 0 0 22 dB
0 1 0 0 1 24 dB
0 1 0 1 0 26 dB
0 1 0 1 1 28 dB
0 1 1 0 0 30 dB
0 1 1 0 1 32 dB
0 1 1 1 0 34 dB
0 1 1 1 1 36 dB
1 0 0 0 0 38 dB
1 0 0 0 1 40 dB
Other than above Setting prohibited
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 258
Mar 31, 2014
Table 4-3. Feedback Resistance of Configurable Amplifier Ch1 (Transimpedance Amplifier)
AMPG14 AMPG13 AMPG12 AMPG11 AMPG10 Feedback Resistance of Configurable Amplifier
Ch1 (Typ.)
0 0 0 0 0 20 kΩ
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 40 kΩ
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 0 80 kΩ
0 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 1 160 kΩ
0 1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 320 kΩ
0 1 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0
0 1 1 1 1 640 kΩ
1 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
Other than above Setting prohibited
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 259
Mar 31, 2014
(6) Gain control register 2 (GC2)
This register is used to specify the gain and feedback resistance of configurable amplifier Ch2.
The value to specify depends on the configuration of configurable amplifier Ch2.
When using configurable amplifiers Ch1 to Ch3 together as an instrumentation amplifier, be sure to set gain control
register 2 (GC2) to 03H.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
Address: 07H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
GC2 0 0 0 AMPG24 AMPG23 AMPG22 AMPG21 AMPG20
Table 4-4. Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch2 (Non-Inverting Amplifier)
AMPG24 AMPG23 AMPG22 AMPG21 AMPG20 Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch2 (Typ.)
0 0 0 0 0 9.5 dB
0 0 0 0 1 10.9 dB
0 0 0 1 0 12.4 dB
0 0 0 1 1 14.0 dB
0 0 1 0 0 15.6 dB
0 0 1 0 1 17.3 dB
0 0 1 1 0 19.0 dB
0 0 1 1 1 20.8 dB
0 1 0 0 0 22.7 dB
0 1 0 0 1 24.5 dB
0 1 0 1 0 26.4 dB
0 1 0 1 1 28.3 dB
0 1 1 0 0 30.3 dB
0 1 1 0 1 32.2 dB
0 1 1 1 0 34.2 dB
0 1 1 1 1 36.1 dB
1 0 0 0 0 38.1 dB
1 0 0 0 1 40.1 dB
Other than above Setting prohibited
Remark Bits 7 to 5 are fixed at 0 of read only.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 260
Mar 31, 2014
Table 4-5. Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch2 (Inverting Amplifier and Differential Amplifier)
AMPG24 AMPG23 AMPG22 AMPG21 AMPG20 Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch2 (Typ.)
0 0 0 0 0 6 dB
0 0 0 0 1 8 dB
0 0 0 1 0 10 dB
0 0 0 1 1 12 dB
0 0 1 0 0 14 dB
0 0 1 0 1 16 dB
0 0 1 1 0 18 dB
0 0 1 1 1 20 dB
0 1 0 0 0 22 dB
0 1 0 0 1 24 dB
0 1 0 1 0 26 dB
0 1 0 1 1 28 dB
0 1 1 0 0 30 dB
0 1 1 0 1 32 dB
0 1 1 1 0 34 dB
0 1 1 1 1 36 dB
1 0 0 0 0 38 dB
1 0 0 0 1 40 dB
Other than above Setting prohibited
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 261
Mar 31, 2014
Table 4-6. Feedback Resistance of Configurable Amplifier Ch2 (Transimpedance Amplifier)
AMPG24 AMPG23 AMPG22 AMPG21 AMPG20 Feedback Resistance of Configurable Amplifier
Ch2 (Typ.)
0 0 0 0 0 20 kΩ
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 40 kΩ
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 0 80 kΩ
0 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 1 160 kΩ
0 1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 320 kΩ
0 1 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0
0 1 1 1 1 640 kΩ
1 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
Other than above Setting prohibited
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 262
Mar 31, 2014
(7) Gain control register 3 (GC3)
This register is used to specify the gain and feedback resistance of configurable amplifier Ch3.
The value to specify depends on the configuration of configurable amplifier Ch3.
When using configurable amplifiers Ch1 to Ch3 together as an instrumentation amplifier, be sure to set gain control
register 1 (GC1) and gain control register 2 (GC2) to 03H, respectively.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
Address: 08H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
GC3 0 0 0 AMPG34 AMPG33 AMPG32 AMPG31 AMPG30
Table 4-7. Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch3 (Non-Inverting Amplifier)
AMPG34 AMPG33 AMPG32 AMPG31 AMPG30 Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch3 (Typ.)
0 0 0 0 0 9.5 dB
0 0 0 0 1 10.9 dB
0 0 0 1 0 12.4 dB
0 0 0 1 1 14.0 dB
0 0 1 0 0 15.6 dB
0 0 1 0 1 17.3 dB
0 0 1 1 0 19.0 dB
0 0 1 1 1 20.8 dB
0 1 0 0 0 22.7 dB
0 1 0 0 1 24.5 dB
0 1 0 1 0 26.4 dB
0 1 0 1 1 28.3 dB
0 1 1 0 0 30.3 dB
0 1 1 0 1 32.2 dB
0 1 1 1 0 34.2 dB
0 1 1 1 1 36.1 dB
1 0 0 0 0 38.1 dB
1 0 0 0 1 40.1 dB
Other than above Setting prohibited
Remark Bits 7 to 5 are fixed at 0 of read only.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 263
Mar 31, 2014
Table 4-8. Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch3 (Inverting Amplifier and Differential Amplifier)
AMPG34 AMPG33 AMPG32 AMPG31 AMPG30 Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch3 (Typ.)
0 0 0 0 0 6 dB
0 0 0 0 1 8 dB
0 0 0 1 0 10 dB
0 0 0 1 1 12 dB
0 0 1 0 0 14 dB
0 0 1 0 1 16 dB
0 0 1 1 0 18 dB
0 0 1 1 1 20 dB
0 1 0 0 0 22 dB
0 1 0 0 1 24 dB
0 1 0 1 0 26 dB
0 1 0 1 1 28 dB
0 1 1 0 0 30 dB
0 1 1 0 1 32 dB
0 1 1 1 0 34 dB
0 1 1 1 1 36 dB
1 0 0 0 0 38 dB
1 0 0 0 1 40 dB
Other than above Setting prohibited
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 264
Mar 31, 2014
Table 4-9. Feedback Resistance of Configurable Amplifier Ch3 (Transimpedance Amplifier)
AMPG34 AMPG33 AMPG32 AMPG31 AMPG 30 Feedback Resis tance of Configurable Amplifier Ch3 (Typ.)
0 0 0 0 0 20 kΩ
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 40 kΩ
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 0 80 kΩ
0 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 1 160 kΩ
0 1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 320 kΩ
0 1 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0
0 1 1 1 1 640 kΩ
1 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
Other than above Setting prohi bi ted
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 265
Mar 31, 2014
Table 4-10. Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch3 (Instrumentation Amplifier)
AMPG34 AMPG33 AMPG32 AMPG31 AMPG30 Gain of Configurable Amplifier Ch3 (Typ.)
0 0 0 0 0 20 dB
0 0 0 0 1 22 dB
0 0 0 1 0 24 dB
0 0 0 1 1 26 dB
0 0 1 0 0 28 dB
0 0 1 0 1 30 dB
0 0 1 1 0 32 dB
0 0 1 1 1 34 dB
0 1 0 0 0 36 dB
0 1 0 0 1 38 dB
0 1 0 1 0 40 dB
0 1 0 1 1 42 dB
0 1 1 0 0 44 dB
0 1 1 0 1 46 dB
0 1 1 1 0 48 dB
0 1 1 1 1 50 dB
1 0 0 0 0 52 dB
1 0 0 0 1 54 dB
Other than above Setting prohibited
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 266
Mar 31, 2014
(8) AMP operation mode control register (AOMC)
This register is used to specify the operating mode of configurable amplifiers Ch1 to Ch3.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
Address: 09H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AOMC 0 0 0 0 0 0 CC1 CC0
CC1 CC0 Operating mode of configurable am plif iers Ch1 to Ch3
0 0 High-speed mode
0 1 Mid-speed mode 2
1 0 Mid-speed mode 1
1 1 Low-speed mode
Remarks 1. Bits 5 to 2 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
2. Bits 7 and 6 are fixed at 0 of read only.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 267
Mar 31, 2014
(9) Power control register 1 (PC1)
This register is used to enable or disable operation of the configurable amplifiers and the D/A converters.
Use this register to stop unused functions to reduce power consumption and noise.
When using one of configurable amplifier channels Ch1 to Ch3, be sure to set the control bit that corresponds to the
channel (bit s 0 to 2) to 1.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
Address: 11H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC1 DAC4OF DAC3OF DAC2OF DAC1OF 0 AMP3OF AMP2OF AMP1OF
AMP3OF Operation of configurable amplifier Ch3
0 St op operati on of c onfigurabl e ampli f i er Ch3.
1 Enabl e operat i on of conf i gurabl e amplifier Ch3.
AMP2OF Operation of configurable amplifier Ch2
0 St op operati on of c onfigurabl e ampli f i er Ch2.
1 Enabl e operat i on of conf i gurabl e amplifier Ch2.
AMP1OF Operation of configurable amplifier Ch1
0 St op operati on of c onfigurabl e ampli f i er Ch1.
1 Enabl e operat i on of conf i gurabl e amplifier Ch1.
Caution Be sure to clear bit 3 to “0”.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 268
Mar 31, 2014
4. 1. 4 Procedure for operating the configurable amplifiers
(1) Procedure when using the amplifiers as non-inverting amplifiers
When using the configurable amplifiers as non-inverting amplifiers, follow the procedures below to start and stop the
amplifiers.
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch1 (non-inverting amplifier)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch1 (non-inverting amplifier)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 269
Mar 31, 2014
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch2 (non-inverting amplifier)
Start
Set CONFIG1 register
Specify the circuit configuration of
configurable amplifier Ch2.
(SW21, SW22, SW23 = 0, 1, 0)
Set MPX1 register
Set the input pins.
(MPX31, MPX30, MPX41, MPX40
= 1, 0, 0, *)
*: don’t care
Set GC2 register Specify the gain. (GC2 = **H)
Set CONFIG2 register Set the output switches. (SW02 = 1)
Set PC1 register
Start operation of configurable
amplifier Ch2. (AMP2OF = 1)
Operation starts
Set AOMC register
Specify the amplifier operation
mode. (CC1, CC0 = *, *)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch2 (non-inverting amplifier)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 270
Mar 31, 2014
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch3 (non-inverting amplifier)
Start
Set CONFIG2 register Specify the circuit configuration of
configurable amplifier Ch3.
(SW31, SW32, SW33 = 0, 1, 0)
Set MPX2 register Set the input pins.
(MP52, MPX51, MPX50, MPX62,
MPX61, MPX60 = 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, *)
Remark *: don’t care
Set GC3 register Specify th e ga in . (G C3 = **H)
Set PC1 register Start ope ration of configurable
amplifier Ch3. (AMP3OF = 1)
Operation starts
Set AOMC register Specify the amp lifie r operation
mode. (CC1, CC0 = *, *)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch3 (non-inverting amplifier)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 271
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Procedure when using the amplifiers as inverting amplifiers
When using the configurable amplifiers as inverting amplifiers, follow the procedures below to start and stop the
amplifiers.
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch1 (inverting amplifier)
Start
Set CONFIG1 register Specify the circuit configuration of
confi gurable amplifier Ch1.
(SW11, SW12, SW13 = 0, 1, 1)
Set MPX1 register Set the input pins.
(MPX11, MP X10, MPX21, MPX20
= 0, *, 1, 0)
Remark *: don’t c are
Set GC 1 regis te r Spe cif y th e gain. (GC1 = **H)
Set CONFIG2 register Set the ou tput switches . (SW01 = 1)
Set PC1 register Start operation of configurable
amplifier Ch1. (AMP1OF = 1)
Operation starts
Set AOMC reg ister Specify th e amp lifie r ope ra tio n
mode. (CC1, CC0 = *, *)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch1 (inverting amplifier)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 272
Mar 31, 2014
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch2 (inverting amplifier)
Start
Set CONFIG 1 register Specify the circuit configuration of
configu rable amplifier Ch2.
(SW21, SW22, SW 23 = 0, 1, 1)
Set MPX 1 register Set the in put pi ns.
(MPX31, MPX30, MPX41, M PX40
= 0, *, 1, 0)
Remark *: don’t care
Set GC2 register Specify the gain . (GC2 = **H)
Set CONFIG 2 register Set the output switches. (SW02 = 1)
Set PC1 register Sta rt oper ation of configurable
amplifier Ch2. (AMP2OF = 1)
Opera tio n starts
Set A O MC registe r Specify the amplifier operation
mode. (CC1 , CC0 = *, *)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch2 (inverting amplifier)
Operating
Set PC1 register
Operation stops
Stop operation of configurable
amplifie r Ch2. (AMP2OF = 0)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 273
Mar 31, 2014
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch3 (inverting amplifier)
Start
Set CONFIG2 register
Specify the circuit configuration of
configurable amplifier Ch3.
(SW31, SW32, SW33 = 0, 1, 1)
Set MPX2 register
Set the input pins.
(MP52, MPX51, MPX50, MPX62,
MPX61, MPX60 = 0, 0, *, 1, 0, 0)
*: don’t care
Set GC3 register Specify the gain (GC3 = **H)
Set PC1 register
Start operation of configurable
amplifier Ch3. (AMP3OF = 1)
Operation starts
Set AOMC register
Specify the amplifier operation
mode. (CC1, CC0 = *, *)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch3 (inverting amplifier)
Operating
Set PC1 register
Operation stops
Stop operation of configurable
amplifier Ch3. (AMP3OF = 0)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 274
Mar 31, 2014
(3) Procedure when using the amplifiers as differential amplifiers
When using the configurable amplifiers together as a differential amplifier, follow the procedures below to start and
stop the amplif ier.
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch1 (differential amplifier)
Start
Set CONFIG1 register Specify the circuit configuration of
configurable amplifier Ch 1.
(SW11, SW12, SW13 = 0, 0, 1)
Set MPX1 register Set the input pins.
(MPX11, MPX10, MPX21, MPX20
= 0, *, 0, *)
Remark *: don’t care
Set GC1 register Specify the gain. (GC1 = **H)
Set CONFIG2 register Set the output switches. (SW01 = 1)
Set PC1 register Start operation of configurable
amplifie r Ch1. (AMP1OF = 1)
Operation starts
Set AOMC regist er Specify the amplifier operation
mode. (CC1, CC0 = *, *)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch1 (differential amplifier)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 275
Mar 31, 2014
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch2 (differential amplifier)
Start
Set CONFIG1 register Specify the circuit configuration of
configurable amplifier Ch2.
(SW21, S W22, SW23 = 0, 0, 1)
Set MPX1 register Set the input pins.
(MPX31, MPX30, MPX41, MPX40
= 0, *, 0, *)
Remark *: don’t care
Set GC2 register Specify the gain. (GC2 = **H)
Set CONFIG2 register Set the out put switches. (SW02 = 1)
Set PC1 register Start operation of configurable
amplifier Ch2. (AMP2OF = 1)
Operation starts
Set AOMC register Specify the amplifier operation
mode. (CC1, CC0 = *, *)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch2 (differential amplifier)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 276
Mar 31, 2014
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch3 (differential amplifier)
Start
Set CONFIG2 register Specify the circuit configuration of
configurable amplifier Ch 3.
(SW31, SW32, SW33 = 0, 0, 1)
Set MPX2 register Set the input pins.
(MP52, MPX51, MPX50, MPX62,
MPX61, MPX60 = 0, 0, *, 0, 0, *)
Remark *: don’t care
Set GC3 register Specify the gain. (GC3 = **H)
Set PC1 register Start operation of configurable
amplifie r Ch3. (AMP3OF = 1)
Operation starts
Set AOMC register Specify the amplifier operation
mode. (CC1, CC0 = *, *)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch3 (differential amplifier)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 277
Mar 31, 2014
(4) Procedure when using the amplifiers as a transimpedance amplifier
When using the configurable amplifiers as transimpedance amplifiers, follow the procedures below to start and stop
the amplifiers.
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch1 (transimpedance amplifier)
Start
Set CONFIG1 register Specify the circuit configuration of
configurable amplifier Ch1.
(SW11, SW12, SW13 = 1, 1, 1)
Set MPX1 register Set the input pins.
(MPX11, MPX10, MPX21, MPX20
= 0, *, 1, 0)
Remark *: don’t care
Set GC1 register Specify the feedback resistance.
(GC1 = **H)
Set CONFIG2 register Set the output switches. (SW01 = 1)
Set PC1 register Start operation of configurable
amplifie r Ch1. (AMP1OF = 1)
Operation starts
Set AOMC register Specify the amplifier operation
mode. (CC1, CC0 = *, *)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch1 (transimpedance amplifier)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 278
Mar 31, 2014
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch2 (transimpedance amplifier)
Start
Set CO NFIG 1 regi ster Specify the circuit configurat ion of
configu rable amplifier Ch2.
(SW21, SW22, SW 23 = 1, 1, 1)
Set MPX1 register Se t the input pins.
(MPX31, MPX30, MPX41, M PX40
= 0, *, 1, 0)
Remark *: don’t care
Set GC2 register Specify the feedback resistance.
(GC2 = **H)
Set CO NFIG 2 regi ster Set the output swit ches. (SW02 = 1)
Set PC1 register Start operation of configurable
amplifier Ch2. (AMP2OF = 1)
Opera tio n starts
Set A O MC registe r Specify the amplifier operation
mode. (CC1 , CC0 = *, *)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch2 (transimpedance amplifier)
Operating
Set PC1 register
Operation stops
Stop operation of configurable
amplifier Ch2. (AMP2OF = 0)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 279
Mar 31, 2014
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifier Ch3 (transimpedance amplifier)
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifier Ch3 (transimpedance amplifier)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 280
Mar 31, 2014
(5) Procedure when using the amplifiers as an instrumentation amplifier
When using the configurable amplifiers together as an instrumentation amplifier, follow the procedures below to start
and stop the amplif ier.
Example of procedure for starting configurable amplifiers (instrumentation amplifier)
Start
Set CO NFIG 1 register Specif y th e circuit configuration of
configurable amp lifie rs Ch1 an d Ch 2 .
(SW11, SW12, SW13, SW21,
SW22, SW23 = 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0)
Set MPX1 register
Set the input pins of configurable amplifiers
Ch1 and Ch2.
(MPX11, MPX10, MPX2 1, MPX20,
MPX31, MPX30, MPX41, MPX40
= 1, 1, 0, *, 1, 1, 0, *)
Remark *: don’t care
Set GC1 register Specify the gain of configurable amplifier
Ch1. (GC1 = 03H)
Set PC1 register
Opera tio n starts
Set CO NFIG 2 register Specify the circuit configuration and
switch es of conf igur ab le am plifier Ch3.
(SW31, SW32, SW33, SW02,
SW01, SW00 = 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1)
Set MPX2 register
Set the input pins of configurable amplifier
Ch3.
(MP52, MPX51, MPX5 0, MPX62,
MPX61, MPX60 = 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1)
Set GC2 register Specify the gain of configurable amplifier
Ch2. (GC2 = 03H)
Set GC3 register Specify the gain of configurable amplifier
Ch3. (GC3 =**H)
Set AOMC register Specify the amplifier operation mode.
(CC1, C C 0 = *, *)
Start operati on of con figurable am plifi ers
Ch1 to Ch3. (AMP1OF, AMP2OF,
AMP3OF = 1, 1, 1)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 281
Mar 31, 2014
Example of procedure for stopping configurable amplifiers (instrumentation amplifier)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 282
Mar 31, 2014
4. 2 Gain Adjustment Am plifier
The RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) has one on-chip gain adjustment amplifier channel.
4. 2. 1 Overview of gain adjustment amplifier features
The features of gain adjustment amplifier are described below.
Rail-to-rail I/O
The gain can be specified between 6 dB and 40 dB in 18 steps.
Includes a power-off function.
Includes a synchronous detector Note.
CLK_SYNCH = H: Inverted output signal (SYNCH_OUT pin)
CLK_SYNCH = L: Non-inverted output signal (SYNCH_OUT pin )
Note 80-pin products only. There are two output pins (GAINAMP_OUT pin, SYNCH_OUT pin), the output from
SYNCH_OUT pin c an be in verted output or non-inverted output according to the input of CLK_SYNCH pin.
And also, the DAC4_OUT output signals can be used as the reference voltage for gain adjustment amplifier.
If D/A converter is powered off, the external reference voltage is to be input to DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4 pin.
For details about use of D/A converter, see 4. 3 D/A Converter.
4. 2. 2 Block diagram
64-pin products
MPX7
+
-
+
-
MPX9
MPX9
AMPG41AMPG43 AMPG42 AMPG40AMPG44
GAINOF
DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4
DAC4OF
MPX70MPX71 MPX72
AVDD1
AGND2
VRB0VRT0 VRB1VRT1
DAC42 DAC41DAC44 DAC43DAC46 DAC45 DAC40DAC47
Selector
Configurable amplifier
Ch1 outp ut si gn al
Configurable amplifier
Ch2 output signal
Configu rab le am plifie r
Ch3 output signal
8-bit
DAC4
Gain control
register 4 (GC4)
Power control
register 2 (PC2)
Power control
register 1 (PC1)
Internal bus
MPX setting
register 3 (MPX3) DAC reference voltage
control regi ster (DACRC)
Internal bus
DAC control register 4 (DAC4C)
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 283
Mar 31, 2014
80-pin products
MPX7
Selector
Configurable amplifier
Ch1 outp ut sig na l
Configurable amplifier
Ch2 output signal
Configu rab le am plifie r
Ch3 output signal
GAINAMP_IN
+
-
+
-GAINAMP_OUT
8-bit
DAC4
Selector
SYNCH_OUT
CLK_SYNCH
MPX9
MPX9
MPX8
AMPG41AMPG43 AMPG42 AMPG40AMPG44
Gain control
register 4 (GC4)
GAINOF
Power control
register 2 (PC2)
DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4
DAC4OF
Power control
register 1 (PC1)
Internal bus
MPX70MPX71 MPX72
MPX setting
register 3 (MPX3)
AVDD1
AGND2
VRB0VRT0 VRB1VRT1
DAC reference volt age
control regi ster (DACRC)
Internal bus
DAC42 DAC41DAC44 DAC43DAC46 DAC45 DAC40DAC47
DAC control register 4 (DAC4C)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 284
Mar 31, 2014
4. 2. 3 Registers controlling the gain adjustment amplifier
The gain adjustment amplifier is controlled by the following 3 registers:
MPX setting register 3 (MPX3)
Gain control register 4 (GC4)
Power control register 2 (PC2)
(1) MPX setting register 3 (MPX3)
This register is used to control MPX7, MPX9, MPX10, and MPX11.
When selecting the signal to be input to the gain adjustment amplifier, use bits 2 to 0.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
64-pin products
Address: 05H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MPX3 0 0 SCF2 SCF1 0 MPX72 MPX71 MPX70
MPX72 MPX71 MPX70 Source of gain adjustment amplifi er input
0 0 0
0 0 1 Configurabl e amplifier Ch1 output signal
0 1 0 Configurabl e amplifier Ch2 output signal
0 1 1 Configurabl e amplifier Ch3 output signal
1 0 0 D/A convert er Ch4 output signal or VREFIN4 pin
Other than above Setting prohibi t ed
Caution Be sure to clear bit 3 to “0”.
Remark Bits 7 and 6 are fixed at 0 of read only.
80-pin products
Address: 05H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MPX3 0 0 SCF2 SCF1 SCF0 MPX72 MPX71 MPX70
MPX72 MPX71 MPX70 Source of gai n adjustm ent am plif i er input
0 0 0 GAINAMP_IN pin
0 0 1 Configurabl e amplifier Ch1 output signal
0 1 0 Configurabl e amplifier Ch2 output signal
0 1 1 Configurabl e amplifier Ch3 output signal
1 0 0 D/A convert er Ch4 output signal or VREFIN4 pin
Other than above Setting prohibi t ed
Remark Bits 7 and 6 are fixed at 0 of read only.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 285
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Gain control register 4 (GC4)
This register is used to specify the gain of the gain adjustment amplifier.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
Address: 0AH After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
GC4 0 0 0 AMP44 AMP43 AMP42 AMP41 AMP40
AMP44 AMP43 AMP42 AMP41 AMP40 Gain
0 0 0 0 0 6 dB
0 0 0 0 1 8 dB
0 0 0 1 0 10 dB
0 0 0 1 1 12 dB
0 0 1 0 0 14 dB
0 0 1 0 1 16 dB
0 0 1 1 0 18 dB
0 0 1 1 1 20 dB
0 1 0 0 0 22 dB
0 1 0 0 1 24 dB
0 1 0 1 0 26 dB
0 1 0 1 1 28 dB
0 1 1 0 0 30 dB
0 1 1 0 1 32 dB
0 1 1 1 0 34 dB
0 1 1 1 1 36 dB
1 0 0 0 0 38 dB
1 0 0 0 1 40 dB
Other than above Setting prohibited
Remark Bits 7 to 5 are fixed at 0 of read only.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 286
Mar 31, 2014
(3) Power control register 2 (PC2)
This register is used to enable or disable operation of the gain adjustment amplifier, the low-pass filter, the high-pass
filter, the variable output voltage regulator, the reference voltage generator, and the temperature sensor. Use this
register to stop unused functions to reduce power consumption and noise.
When using the gain adjustment amplifier, be sure to set bit 4 to 1.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
64-pin products
Address: 12H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC2 0 0 0 GAINOF
LPFOF 0 LDOOF TEMPOF
GAINOF Operation of gain adjustment amplifier
0 Stop operation of the gain adjustment amplifier.
1 Enable operation of the gain adjustment amplifi er.
Caution Be sure to clear bit 2 to “0”.
Remark Bits 7 to 5 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
80-pin products
Address: 12H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC2 0 0 0 GAINOF
LPFOF HPFOF LDOOF TEMPOF
GAINOF Operation of gain adjustment amplifier
0 Stop operation of the gain adjustment amplifier.
1 Enable operation of the gain adjustment amplifi er.
Remark Bits 7 to 5 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 287
Mar 31, 2014
4. 2. 4 Procedure for operating the gain adjustment amplifier
Follow the procedures below to start and stop the gain adjustment amplifier.
Example of procedure for starting the gain adjust ment a mplifier
Start
Set MPX3 register
Set the input pins.
(MPX72, MPX71, MPX70 = *, *, *)
*: don’t care
Set GC4 register
Specify the gain. (GC4 = **H)
Set PC2 register
Start operation of the gain
adjustment amplifier.
(GAINOF = 1)
Operation starts
Example of procedure for stopping the gain adjustment amplifier
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 288
Mar 31, 2014
4. 3 D/A Converter
The RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) has four on-chip D/A converter channels.
4. 3. 1 Overview of D/A converter features
The D/A converters are 8-bit resolution converters that convert digital input signals into analog signals.
The D/A converters have the following features:
8-bit resolution (× 4 ch: Ch1 to Ch4)
R-2R ladder method
Analog output voltage: Output voltage can be calculated with the equation shown below.
Output voltage = {(Reference voltage upper limit – Reference voltage lower limit) × m/256}
+ Reference voltage lower limit
(m = 0 to 255: Value set to DACnC register)
Controls the reference voltage for the configurable amplifiers, gain adjustment amplifiers, low-pass filter, and high-
pass filter Note
Includes a power-off function.
Note 80-pin products only.
Remark n = 1 to 4
4. 3. 2 Block diagram
AVDD1/AVDD2
Selector Selector
+
-
+
-
8-bit
DACn +
-DACn_OUT/VREFINn
Remark: n = 1 to 4
VRB0VRT0 VRB1VRT1 DAC reference voltage control
register (DACRC)
Internal bus
DACnOF
Powe r contro l
register 1 (PC1)
DACn2 DACn1DACn4 DACn3DACn6 DACn5 DACn0DACn7 DAC control register n
(DACnC)
AVDD1
AGND1
Ch4
AVDD2
AGND3
Ch1 to Ch3
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 289
Mar 31, 2014
4. 3. 3 Registers controlling the D/A converters
The D/A converters are controlled by the following 3 registers:
DAC reference voltage control register (DACRC)
DAC control registers 1, 2, 3, 4 (DAC1C, DAC2C, DAC3C, DAC4C)
Power control register 1 (PC1)
(1) DAC reference voltage control register (DACRC)
This register is used to specify the upper (VRT) and lower (VRB) limits of the reference voltage for D/A converter
channels Ch1 to Ch4.
When selecting the upper limit of the reference voltage, use bits 3 and 2. When selecting the lower limit of the
reference voltage, use bits 1 and 0.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
Address: 0CH After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DACRC 0 0 0 0 VRT1 VRT0 VRB1 VRB0
VRT1 VRT0 Reference volt age upper limit (Typ.)
0 0 AVDD1
0 1 AVDD1 × 4/5
1 0 AVDD1 × 3/5
1 1 AVDD1
VRB1 V RB0 Reference voltage lower limit (Typ.)
0 0 AGND1
0 1 AVDD1 × 1/5
1 0 AVDD1 × 2/5
1 1 AGND1
Remarks 1. Bits 7 to 4 are fixed at 0 of read only.
2. To calculate the output voltage, see 4. 3. 1 Overview of D/A converter features.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 290
Mar 31, 2014
(2) DAC control registers 1 , 2, 3, 4 (DAC1C, DAC2C, DAC3C, DAC4C)
This register is used to specify the analog voltage to be output to the DACn_OUT pin. The DACn_OUT output signal
can be used as the reference voltage for the configurable amplifiers, gain adjustment amplifier, low-pass filter, and
high-pass filter.
Reset signal input sets this reg ister to 80H.
Address: 0DH (n = 1), 0EH (n = 2), 0FH (n = 3), 10H (n = 4) After reset: 80H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DACnC DACn7 DACn6 DACn5 DACn4 DACn3 DACn2 DACn1 DACn0
Remarks 1. n = 1 to 4
2. To calculate the output voltage, see 4. 3. 1 Overview of D/A converter features.
(3) Power control register 1 (PC1)
This register is used to enable or disable operation of the configurable amplifiers and the D/A converters. Use this
register to stop unused functions to reduce power consumption and noise.
When using one of D/A converter channels Ch1 to Ch4, be sure to set the control bit that corresponds to the channel
(bits 7 to 4) to 1.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
Address: 11H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC1 DAC4OF DAC3OF DAC2OF DAC1OF 0 AMP3OF AMP2OF AMP1OF
DAC4OF Operation of D/A converter Ch4
0 St op operati on of D/A convert er Ch4.
1 Enabl e operat i on of D/A convert er Ch4.
DAC3OF Operation of D/A converter Ch3
0 St op operati on of D/A convert er Ch3.
1 Enabl e operat i on of D/A convert er Ch3.
DAC2OF Operation of D/A converter Ch2
0 St op operati on of D/A convert er Ch2.
1 Enabl e operat i on of D/A convert er Ch2.
DAC1OF Operation of D/A converter Ch1
0 St op operati on of D/A convert er Ch1.
1 Enabl e operat i on of D/A convert er Ch1.
Caution Be sure to clear bit 3 to “0”.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 291
Mar 31, 2014
4. 3. 4 Procedure for operating the D/A converters
Follow the procedures below to start and stop the D/A converters.
Example of procedure for starting the D/A converters
Example of procedure for stopping the D/A converters
*: don’t care
n = 1 to 4
Operating
Set PC1 register
Operation stops
Stop operation of the D/A
converter.
(DACnOF = 0)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 292
Mar 31, 2014
4. 3. 5 Notes on using D/A converters
Observe the following points when using the D/A converters:
(1) Only a very small current can flow from the DACn_OUT pin because the output impedance of the D/A converters is
high. If the load input impedance is low, insert a follower amplifier between the load and the DACn_OUT pin. Also,
make sure that the wiring between the pin and the follower amplifier or load is as short as possible (because of the
high output impedance). If it is not possible to keep the wiring short, take measures such as surrounding the pin
with a ground pattern.
(2) If inputting an external reference power supply to the VREFINn pin, be sure to set the DACnOF bit to 0.
Remark n = 1 to 4
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 293
Mar 31, 2014
4. 4 Low-Pass Filter
The RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) has one on-chip switched-capacitor low-pass filter channel.
4. 4. 1 Overview of low-pass filter features
The features of low-pass filter are described below.
Butterworth characteristics (Q value = 0.702)
Cutoff frequency (fC) range: 9 Hz to 4.5 kHz
External input clock frequency (fCLK_LPF) range: fC × 2 / 0.009 = 2 kHz to 1 MHz
Includes a power-off function.
And also, the DAC4_OUT output signals can be used as the reference voltage for low-pass filter.
If D/A converter is powered off, the external reference voltage is to be input to DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4 pin.
For details about use of D/A converter, see 4. 3 D/A Converter.
Remarks 1. The internal control clock (fS) of the low-pass filter has a duty of 50%, so the external input clock is divided
by two at the internal D flip-flop before being used for the low-pass filter. If the internal control clock
frequency (fS) is 100 kHz, therefore, input a 200 kHz clock signal to the CLK_LPF pin.
2. The phase of the signal input to the low-pass filter inverts after passing the low-pass filter.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 294
Mar 31, 2014
4. 4. 2 Block diagram
64-pin products
+
-
+
-
+
-
D Q
Q
CLK
fs = fCLK_LPF/2
MPX9
CLK_LPF
8-bit
DAC4
LPF_OUT
DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4
LPFOF
DAC4OF
AVDD3
AGND4
VRB0VRT0 VRB1VRT1
DAC42 DAC41DAC44 DAC43DAC46 DAC45 DAC40DAC47
fCLK_LPF
SCF1 SCF2
Selector
MPX7 output
Gain ad ju stm e nt
ampli fier output signal
Power control
regis ter 2 (PC2)
Power control
register 1 (PC1)
MPX setting
register 3 (MPX3) Inter na l bus
DAC reference voltage
control regist er (DACRC)
DAC control register 4
(DAC4C)
2
1
2
1
22
1
1
1 2
2
1
80-pin products
Selector
Selector
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 295
Mar 31, 2014
4. 4. 3 Registers controlling the low-pass filter
The low-pass filter is controlled by the following 2 registers:
MPX setting register 3 (MPX3)
Power control register 2 (PC2)
(1) MPX setting register 3 (MPX3)
This register is used to control MPX7, MPX9, MPX10, and MPX11.
W hen selec ting the sig nal t o be inpu t to the f ilte r circui ts, use bits 5 and 4. W hen swit ching t he ord er in whi ch sig nals
are processed by the low-pass and high-pass filters, use bit 3.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
64-pin products
Address: 05H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MPX3 0 0 SCF2 SCF1 0 MPX72 MPX71 MPX70
SCF2 SCF1 Source of input to filter circuits
0 0
0 1 MPX7 output signal
1 0 Gain adj ustment amplifier output signal
1 1 Setting prohibited
Caution Be sure to clear bit 3 to “0”.
Remark Bits 7 and 6 are fixed at 0 of read only.
80-pin products
Address: 05H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MPX3 0 0 SCF2 SCF1 SCF0 MPX72 MPX71 MPX70
SCF2 SCF1 Sourc e of input to filter circuits
0 0 SC_IN pin
0 1 MPX7 output signal
1 0 Gain adj ustment amplifier output signal
1 1 Setting prohibited
SCF0 Specificat i on of the order of filter signal proc essing
0 The MPX9 output si gnal passes the low-pass filt er and then is input to the high-pass filter.
1 The MPX9 output si gnal pass es the high-pass filt er and then is input to the low-pass filt er.
Remark Bits 7 and 6 are fixed at 0 of read only.
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 296
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Power control register 2 (PC2)
This register is used to enable or disable operation of the gain adjustment amplifier, the low-pass filter, the high-pass
filter, the variable output voltage regulator, the reference voltage generator, and the temperature sensor. Use this
register to stop unused functions to reduce power consumption and noise.
When using the low-pass filter, be sure to set bit 3 to 1.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
64-pin products
Address: 12H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC2 0 0 0 GAINOF LPFOF 0 LDOOF TEMPOF
LPFOF Operation of low-pass filter
0 St op operation of t he low-pass filter.
1 Enabl e operat i on of the low-pass f ilt er.
Caution Be sure to clear bit 2 to “0”.
Remark Bits 7 to 5 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
80-pin products
Address: 12H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC2 0 0 0 GAINOF LPFOF HPFOF LDOOF TEMPOF
LPFOF Operation of low-pass filter
0 St op operation of t he low-pass filter.
1 Enabl e operat i on of the low-pass f ilt er.
Remark Bits 7 to 5 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 297
Mar 31, 2014
4. 4. 4 Procedure for operating the low-pass filter
Follow the procedures below to start and stop the low-pass filter.
Example of procedure for starting the low-pass filter
Example of procedure for stopping the low-pass filter
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 298
Mar 31, 2014
4. 5 High-Pass Filter
The RL78/G1E (80-pin products) has one on-chip switched-capacitor high-pass filter channel Note.
Note The high-pass filter is not provided in the RL78/G1E (64-pin products).
4. 5. 1 Overview of high-pass filter features
The features of high-pass filter are described below.
Butterworth characteristics (Q value = 0.702)
Cutoff frequency (fC) range: 8 Hz to 800 Hz
External input clock frequency (fCLK_HPF) range: fC × 2 / 0.008 = 2 kHz to 200 kHz
Includes a power-off function.
And also, the DAC4_OUT output signals can be used as the reference voltage for high-pass filter.
If D/A converter is powered off, the external reference voltage is to be input to DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4 pin.
For details about use of D/A converter, see 4. 3 D/A Converter.
Remarks 1. The internal control clock (fS) of the high-pass filter has a duty of 50%, so the external input clock is
divided by two at the internal D flip-flop before being used for the low-pass filter. If the internal control
clock frequency (fS) is 100 kHz, therefore, input a 200 kHz clock signal to the CLK_HPF pin.
2. The phase of the signal input to the high-pass filter inverts after passing the high-pass filter.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 299
Mar 31, 2014
4. 5. 2 Block diagram
+
-
+
-
+
-
1
D Q
Q
CLK
fs
MPX11
Selector
CLK _ H P F
MPX9 output
8-bit
DAC4
LPF_OUT HPF_OUT
MPX10
DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4
HPFOF
Power control
register 2 (PC2)
DAC4OF
Power control
regis t er 1 (PC1)
SCF0
MPX setting
regist er 3 (MPX3) Inte r nal bus
AVDD3
AGND4
VRB0VRT0 VRB1VRT1 DAC reference voltage
control regist er ( DACRC)
DAC42 DAC41DAC44 DAC43DAC46 DAC45 DAC40DAC47
DAC control register 4
(DAC4C)
2
12
1
2
2
2
1
1
fCLK_HPF
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 300
Mar 31, 2014
4. 5. 3 Registers controlling the high-pass filter
The high-pass filter is controlled by the following 2 registers:
MPX setting register 3 (MPX3)
Power control register 2 (PC2)
(1) MPX setting register 3 (MPX3)
This register is used to control MPX7, MPX9, MPX10, and MPX11.
W hen selec ting the sig nal t o be inpu t to the f ilte r circui ts, use bits 5 and 4. W hen swit ching t he ord er in whi ch sig nals
are processed by the low-pass and high-pass filters, use bit 3.
80-pin products
Address: 05H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MPX3 0 0 SCF2 SCF1 SCF0 MPX72 MPX71 MPX70
SCF2 SCF1 Sourc e of input to filter circuits
0 0 SC_IN pin
0 1 MPX7 output signal
1 0 Gain adjustment amplifier output signal
1 1 Setting prohibited
SCF0 Specificat i on of the order of filter signal proc essing
0 The MPX9 output si gnal passes the low-pass filt er and then is input to the high-pass filter.
1 The MPX9 output si gnal pass es the high-pass filt er and then is input to the low-pass filt er.
Remark Bits 7 and 6 are fixed at 0 of read only.
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 301
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Power control register 2 (PC2)
This register is used to enable or disable operation of the gain adjustment amplifier, the low-pass filter, the high-pass
filter, the variable output voltage regulator, the reference voltage generator, and the temperature sensor. Use this
register to stop unused functions to reduce power consumption and noise.
When using the high-pass filter, be sure to set bit 2 to 1.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
80-pin products
Address: 12H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC2 0 0 0 GAINOF LPFOF HPFOF LDOOF TEMPOF
HPFOF Operation of high-pass fil t er
0 St op operati on of the high-pas s fil ter.
1 Enabl e operat ion of the high-pass filter.
Remark Bits 7 to 5 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 302
Mar 31, 2014
4. 5. 4 Procedure for operating the high-pass filter
Follow the procedures below to start and stop the high-pass filter.
Example of procedure for starting the high-pass filter
Start
Set MPX3 register
Select the signal processing
route. (SCF0 = *)
*: don’t care
Set PC2 register
Start operation of the high-pass
filter. (HPFOF = 1)
Operation starts
Input control clock to CLK_HPF pin
Example of procedure for stopping the high-pass filter
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 303
Mar 31, 2014
4 .6 Temperature Sensor
The RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) has one on-chip temperature sensor channel.
4. 6. 1 Overview of temperature sensor features
The features of temperature sensor are described below.
Output voltage temperature coefficient: 5 mV/°C (Typ.)
Includes a power-off function.
4. 6. 2 Block diagram
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 304
Mar 31, 2014
4. 6. 3 Registers controlling the temperature sensor
The temperature sensor is controlled by power control register 2 (PC2).
(1) Power control register 2 (PC2)
This register is used to enable or disable operation of the gain adjustment amplifier, the low-pass filter, the high-pass
filter, the variable output voltage regulator, the reference voltage generator, and the temperature sensor. Use this
register to stop unused functions to reduce power consumption and noise.
When selecting the signal to be input to the temperature sensor, be sure to set bit 0 to 1.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
64-pin products
Address: 12H After reset: 00 R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC2 0 0 0 GAINOF LPFOF 0 LDOOF TEMPOF
TEMPOF Operation of temperature sensor
0 St op operation of t he tem perat ure sensor.
1 Enabl e operat i on of the temperature sensor.
Caution Be sure to clear bit 2 to “0”.
Remark Bits 7 to 5 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
80-pin products
Address: 12H After reset: 00 R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC2 0 0 0 GAINOF LPFOF HPFOF LDOOF TEMPOF
TEMPOF Operation of temperature sensor
0 St op operation of t he tem perat ure sensor.
1 Enabl e operat i on of the temperature sensor.
Remark Bits 7 to 5 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 305
Mar 31, 2014
4. 6. 4 Procedure for operating the temperature sensor
Follow the procedures below to start and stop the temperature sensor.
Example of procedure for starting the temperature sensor
Example of procedure for stopping the temperature sensor
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 306
Mar 31, 2014
4. 7 Variable Output Voltage Regulator
The RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) has one on-chip variable output voltage regulator channel. This is a
series regulator that generates a voltage of 3.3 V (default) from a supplied voltage of 5 V.
4. 7. 1 Overview of variable output voltage regulator features
The features of variable output voltage regulator are described below.
Output voltage range: 2.0 to 3.3 V (Typ.)
Output current: 15 mA (Max.)
Includes a power-off function.
4. 7. 2 Block diagram
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 307
Mar 31, 2014
4. 7. 3 Registers controlling the variable output voltage regulator
The variable output voltage regulator is controlled by the following 2 registers:
LDO control register (LDOC)
Power control register 2 (PC2)
(1) LDO control register (LDOC)
This register is used to specify the output voltage of the variable output voltage regulator.
Reset signal input sets this register to 0DH.
Address: 0BH After reset: 0DH R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LDOC 0 0 0 0 LDO3 LDO2 LDO1 LDO0
LDO3 LDO2 LDO1 LDO0 Output Voltage of Variable Output Voltage Regulator (Typ.)
0 0 0 0 2.0 V
0 0 0 1 2.1 V
0 0 1 0 2.2 V
0 0 1 1 2.3 V
0 1 0 0 2.4 V
0 1 0 1 2.5 V
0 1 1 0 2.6 V
0 1 1 1 2.7 V
1 0 0 0 2.8 V
1 0 0 1 2.9 V
1 0 1 0 3.0 V
1 0 1 1 3.1 V
1 1 0 0 3.2 V
1 1 0 1 3.3 V
Note
Other than above Setting prohibit ed
Note Output voltage of 3.3 V is available when the power supply voltage is more than 4 V.
Remark Bits 7 to 4 are fixed at 0 of read only.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 308
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Power control register 2 (PC2)
This register is used to enable or disable operation of the gain adjustment amplifier, the low-pass filter, the high-pass
filter, the variable output voltage regulator, the reference voltage generator, and the temperature sensor. Use this
register to stop unused functions to reduce power consumption and noise.
When using the variable output voltage regulator and reference voltage generator, be sure to set bit 1 to 1.
Reset signal input clears this register to 00H.
64-pin products
Address: 12H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC2 0 0 0 GAINOF LPFOF 0 LDOOF TEMPOF
LDOOF Operation of variabl e output voltage regulator and referenc e voltage generator
0 Stop operation of the variable output voltage regulator and reference voltage generator.
1 Enable operation of the variable output vol t age regulat or and referenc e vol tage generator.
Caution Be sure to clear bit 2 to “0”.
Remark Bits 7 to 5 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
80-pin products
Address: 12H After reset: 00H R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC2 0 0 0 GAINOF LPFOF HPFOF LDOOF TEMPOF
LDOOF Operation of variabl e output voltage regulator and referenc e voltage generator
0 Stop operation of the variable output voltage regulator and reference voltage generator.
1 Enable operation of the variable output vol t age regulat or and referenc e vol tage generator.
Remark Bits 7 to 5 can be set to 1, but this has no effect on the function.
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 309
Mar 31, 2014
4. 7. 4 Procedure for operating the variable output voltage regulator
Follow the procedures below to start and stop the variable output voltage regulator and reference voltage generator.
Example of procedure for starting the variable output voltage regulator and reference voltage generator
Start
Set LDOC register
Select the output voltage
value. (LDOC = **H)
*: don’t care
Set PC2 register
Start operation of the variable
output voltage regulator and
reference voltage generator.
(LDOOF = 1)
Operation starts
Example of procedure for stopping the variable output voltage regulator and reference voltage generator
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 310
Mar 31, 2014
4. 8 Reference Voltage Generator
The RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) has one on-chip reference voltage generator channel.
4. 8. 1 Overview of reference voltage generator features
The features of reference voltage generator are described below.
Output reference voltage: 1.21 V (Typ.)
Includes a power-off function.
4. 8. 2 Block diagram
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 311
Mar 31, 2014
4. 8. 3 Registers controlling the reference voltage generator
The reference voltage generator is controlled by power control register 2 (PC2).
For details about the setting of power control register 2, see 4. 7. 3 (2) Power control register 2 (PC2).
4. 8. 4 Procedure for operating the reference voltage generator
For details about the procedures to start and stop the reference voltage generator, see 4. 7. 4 Procedure for
operating the variable output voltage regulator.
4. 8. 5 Notes on using the reference voltage generator
Observe the following points when using the reference voltage generator:
(1) Only a very small current can flow from the BGR_OUT pin because the output impedance of the reference voltage
generator is high. If the load input impedance is low, insert a follower amplifier between the load and the BGR_OUT
pin. Also, make sure that the wiring between the pin and the follower amplifier or load is as short as possible
(because of the high output impedance). If it is not possible to keep the wiring short, take measures such as
surrounding the pin with a ground pattern.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 312
Mar 31, 2014
4. 9 SPI
4. 9. 1 Overview of SPI features
The SPI interface is used to allow control from external devices by using clocked communication via four lines: a serial
clock line (SCLK), two serial data lines (SDI and SDO), and a chip select input line (CS).
Data tr ansmissio n/reception:
16-bit data unit
MSB first
Figure 4-4. SPI Configuration Example
16-bit Micro.
(RL78/G1A) Master
CSI21
SCK21
SI21
SO21
Analog chip
Slave 1
SPI
SCLK
SDO
SDI
CS
Slave 2
SPI
SCLK
SDO
SDI
CS
P73
Port
RL78/G1E (60-pin, 8 0- pin)
DVDD
Caution After turning on DVDD, be sure to generate external reset by inputting a reset signal to ARESET pin
before starting SPI communication. For details, see 4.10 A nalog Reset.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 313
Mar 31, 2014
4. 9. 2 SPI communication
The SPI transmits and receives data in 16-bit units. Data can be transmitted and received when CS is low. Data is
transmitted one bit at a time in synchronization with the falling edge of the serial clock, and is received one bit at a time
in synchronization with the rising edge of the serial clock. When the R/W bit is 1, data is written to the SPI control
register in accordance with the address/data setting after the 16th rising edge of SCLK has been detected following the
fall of CS, and the operation specified by the data is executed. When the R/W bit is 0, the data is output from the
register in accordance with the address/data setting in synchronization with the 9th and later falling edges of SCLK
following the fall of CS.
Figure 4-5. SPI Communication Timing
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 314
Mar 31, 2014
Table 4-11. SPI Control Registers
Address SPI Control Regist er R/W After Reset
00H Conf i guration register 1 (CONFIG1) R/W 00H
01H Conf i guration register 2 (CONFIG2) R/W 00H
03H MPX setting register 1 (MPX1) R/W 00H
04H MPX setting register 2 (MPX2) R/W 00H
05H MPX setting register 3 (MPX3) R/W 00H
06H Gain control register 1 (GC1) R/W 00H
07H Gain control register 2 (GC2) R/W 00H
08H Gain control register 3 (GC3) R/W 00H
09H AMP operation mode control register (AOMC) R/W 00H
0AH Gain control register 4 (GC4) R/W 00H
0BH LDO control regist er (LDOC) R/W 0DH
0CH DAC reference voltage control regis ter (DACRC) R/W 00H
0DH DAC control register 1 (DAC1C) R/W 80H
0EH DAC control register 2 (DAC2C) R/W 80H
0FH DA C control register 3 (DAC3C) R/W 80H
10H DA C control register 4 (DAC4C) R/W 80H
11H P ower cont rol register 1 (PC1) R/W 00H
12H P ower cont rol register 2 (PC2) R/W 00H
13H Reset control register (RC) R/W 00HNote
Note The reset control register is not initialized by generating internal reset of the reset control register. For details,
see 4. 10 Analog Reset.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 315
Mar 31, 2014
4. 10 Analog Reset
4. 10. 1 Overview of analog reset feature
The RL78/G1E (64-pin products, 80-pin products) has an on-chip analog reset function. The SPI control registers of
analog block are initialized by analog reset. Reset can be generated in the following two ways:
External reset by inputting an external reset signal to the ARESET pin
Internal reset by writing 1 to the RESET bit of the reset control register (RC)
The function s of the external r eset and the inter nal reset are des crib ed below.
After turning on DVDD, be sure to generate external reset by inputting a reset signal to ARESET pin before starting
SPI communication. For the details of ARESET pin, see 2. 5. 31 ARESET.
During analog reset, each function of analog block is shifted to the status shown in Table 4-12. The status of each
SPI control register after analog reset has been acknowledged is shown in Table 4-13. After analog reset, the status
of each pin is shown in Table 4-14.
External reset is generated when a low-level signal is input to the ARESET pin. On the other hand, internal reset is
generated when 1 is written to the RESET bit of the reset control register (RC).
External reset is subsequently cancelled by inputting a high-level signal to ARESET pin after a low-level signal is
input to this pin. On the other hand, internal reset is subsequently cancelled by writing 0 to the RESET bit of the
reset control register (RC) after 1 is written to the same bit of this register.
Cautions When generating an external reset, input a low-level signal to the ARESET pin for at least 10 μs.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 316
Mar 31, 2014
Table 4-12. Statuses during Analog Reset
Function Block External Reset from ARESET Pin Internal Reset by Reset Control Register (RC)
Configurable ampl ifier Operation stops.
Gain adjustment am plif i er Operation stops.
D/A converter Operation stops.
Low-pass filter Operation stops.
High-pass filter Note Operation stops.
Temperature sensor Operation stops.
Variable output vol t age regulat or Operation stops.
Reference voltage generator Operation stops.
SPI Operation stops. Operation enabl ed.
Note 80-pin products only.
Table 4-13. Statuses of SPI Control Registers after Analog Reset Is Acknowledged
Address SPI Cont rol Regist er Status After a Reset Is Acknowledged
External Reset I nternal Reset
00H Configuration regi st er 1 (CONFIG1) 00H 00H
01H Configuration regi st er 2 (CONFIG2) 00H 00H
03H MPX setting register 1 (MPX1) 00H 00H
04H MPX setting register 2 (MPX2) 00H 00H
05H MPX setting register 3 (MPX3) 00H 00H
06H Gain control register 1 (GC1) 00H 00H
07H Gain control register 2 (GC2) 00H 00H
08H Gain control register 3 (GC3) 00H 00H
09H AMP operation mode control register (AOMC) 00H 00H
0AH Gai n control register 4 (GC4) 00H 00H
0BH LDO control register (LDOC) 0DH 0DH
0CH DA C reference voltage control register (DACRC) 00H 00H
0DH DA C control register 1 (DAC1C) 80H 80H
0EH DA C control register 2 (DAC2C) 80H 80H
0FH DAC control register 3 (DAC3C) 80H 80H
10H DAC control regist er 4 (DAC4C) 80H 80H
11H Power control regist er 1 (PC1) 00H 00H
12H Power control regist er 2 (PC2) 00H 00H
13H Reset control regist er (RC) 00H 01H Note
Note The reset control register is not initialized by generating internal reset of the reset control register, but it can be
done to 00H by generating external reset from ARESET pin or writing 0 to the RESET bit of the reset control
register (RC)..
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 317
Mar 31, 2014
Table 4-14. Pin Statuses after Analog Reset
Pin Name External Reset from ARESET Pin Int ernal Reset by Reset Control Register (RC)
SC_IN Hi-Z Hi-Z
CLK_SYNCH Pull-down input Pull-down input
SYNCH_OUT Hi-Z Hi-Z
GAINAMP_OUT Hi-Z Hi-Z
GAINAMP_IN Hi-Z Hi-Z
MPXIN61 Hi-Z Hi-Z
MPXIN51 Hi-Z Hi-Z
MPXIN60 Hi-Z Hi-Z
MPXIN50 Hi-Z Hi-Z
AMP3_OUT Hi-Z Hi-Z
DAC3_OUT/VREFIN3 P ul l -down input Pull-down input
AMP2_OUT Hi-Z Hi-Z
AMP1_OUT Hi-Z Hi-Z
DAC2_OUT/VREFIN2 P ul l -down input Pull-down input
DAC1_OUT/VREFIN1 P ul l -down input Pull-down input
MPXIN41 Hi-Z Hi-Z
MPXIN31 Hi-Z Hi-Z
MPXIN40 Hi-Z Hi-Z
MPXIN30 Hi-Z Hi-Z
MPXIN21 Hi-Z Hi-Z
MPXIN11 Hi-Z Hi-Z
MPXIN20 Hi-Z Hi-Z
MPXIN10 Hi-Z Hi-Z
BGR_OUT Pull down Pull down
LDO_OUT P ul l down Pull down
TEMP_OUT Pull down Pull down
SCLK Hi-Z Pull-up input
SDO Hi-Z (open drain) Hi-Z (open drai n)
SDI Hi-Z Pull-up input
CS Hi-Z Pull-up input
DAC4_OUT/VREFIN4 P ul l -down input Pull-down input
HPF_OUT Hi-Z Hi-Z
CLK_HPF Pull-down input Pull-down input
CLK_LPF Pull -down input Pull-down input
LPF_OUT Hi-Z Hi-Z
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 318
Mar 31, 2014
4. 10. 2 Registers controlling the analog reset
(1) Reset control register (RC)
This register is used to control the reset feature in the analog block.
An internal reset can be generated by writing 1 to the RESET bit. The reset control register (RC) is not initialized by
generating internal reset of the reset control register, but it can be done by generating external reset from ARESET
pin. External reset from ARESET pin clears this register to 00H.
Address: 13H After reset: 00H Note R/W
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RESET
RESET Reset request by internal reset signal
0 Do not make a reset request by using the internal reset si gnal, or cancel the res et.
1 Make a reset request by using the internal reset signal, or the reset signal is currently being input.
Note The reset control register is not initialized by generating internal reset of the reset control register, but it can be
done to 00H by generating external reset from ARESET pin or by writing 0 to the RESET bit of the reset control
register (RC).
Caution When the RESET bit is 1, writing to any register other than the reset control register (RC) is ignored.
Initializing the reset control register (RC) to 00H by external reset, or writing 0 to the RESET bit
enables writing to all the registers.
Remark Bits 7 to 1 are fixed at 0 of read only.
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 319
Mar 31, 2014
CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
In this capter, the electrical specification is described for the target products shown below.
Target products A: Consumer applications TA = 40 to +85°C
R5F10FLCANA, R5F10FLCANA, R5F10FLDANA, R5F10FLDANA,
R5F10FLEANA, R5F10FLEANA, R5F10FMCAFB, R5F10FMCAFB,
R5F10FMDAFB, R5F10FMDAFB, R5F10FMEAFB, R5F10FMEAFB
Target products D: Industrial applications TA = 40 to +85°C
R5F10FLCDNA, R5F10FLCDNA, R5F10FLDDNA, R5F10FLDDNA,
R5F10FLEDNA, R5F10FLEDNA, R5F10FMCDFB, R5F10FMCDFB,
R5F10FMDDFB, R5F10FMDDFB, R5F10FMEDFB, R5F10FMEDFB
Cautions 1. The RL78/G1E microcontrollers have an on-chip debug function, which is provided for
development and evaluation. Do not use the on-chip debug function in products designated for
mass production, because the guaranteed number of rewritable times of the flash memory may
be exceeded when this function is used, and product reliability therefore cannot be guaranteed.
Renesas Electronics is not liable for problems occurring when the on-chip debug function is
used.
2. The pins mounted depend on the product, so that refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS. In this
Chapter, most of the descriptions use the case of 80-pin products as an example.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 320
Mar 31, 2014
5. 1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
5. 1. 1 Absolute maximum ratings of microcontroller block
Absolute maximum ratings (TA = 25°C)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
Supply volt age VDD 0.5 to +6.5 V
AVDD 0.5 to +4.6 V
AVREFP 0.3 to AVDD +0.3 Note 3 V
AVSS 0.5 to +0.3 V
AVREFM 0.3 to AVDD +0.3 Note 3
and AVREFM AVREFP
V
REGC pin input
voltage
VIREGC REGC 0.3 to 2.8
and
0.3 to VDD + 0.3Not e 1
V
Input volt age VI1 P00 to P04, P10 to P15, P40 to P42, P50, P51, P70 to P73, P140 0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 2 V
VI3 P121, P122, P 137, EXCLK, RESET 0.3 to VDD + 0.3 No te 2 V
VI4 P20 to P24 0.3 to AVDD + 0. 3Note 3 V
VI5 I.C pin 0.5 to +0.3 V
Output voltage VO1 P00 to P04, P10 to P15, P40 to P42, P50, P51, P70 to P73,
P130, P140
0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 2 V
VO2 P 20 to P24 0.3 to AVDD + 0. 3Note 3 V
Analog input
voltage
VAI1 ANI16 to ANI18, ANI20 to ANI26, ANI28, ANI30 0.3 to VDD + 0.3
and
-0.3 to AVREF(+) + 0.3Note 2 , 4
V
VAI2 ANI0 to AN I4 0.3 to AVDD + 0. 3
and
-0.3 to AVREF(+) + 0.3Note 3 , 4
V
Output current,
high
IOH1 Per pin 40 mA
Total of all pins:
170 mA
P00 to P04, P40 to P42, P130, P140 70 mA
P10 to P15, P50, P51, P70 to P73 100 mA
IOH2 Per pin ANI0 to AN I4 0.1 mA
Total of all pins 1.3 mA
Output current,
low
IOL1 Per pin 40 mA
Total of all pins:
170 mA
P00 to P04, P40 to P42, P130, P140 70 mA
P10 to P15, P50, P51, P70 to P73 100 mA
IOL2 Per pin ANI0 to AN I4 0.4 mA
Total of all pins 6.4 mA
(Notes, Causion and Remarks are listed on the next page.)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 321
Mar 31, 2014
Notes 1. Connect the REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1
μ
F). This value regulates the absolute maximum
rating of the REGC pin. Do not apply any external voltage to this pin.
2. Must be 6.5 V or lower.
3. Must be 4.6 V or lower.
4. Do not exceed AVREF(+)+0.3 V in case of A/D conversion target pin.
Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any
parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the
verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that
ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.
Remark 1. Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port
pins.
2. AVREF(+): + side reference voltage of the A/D Conveter.
3. VSS is reference voltage.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 322
Mar 31, 2014
5. 1. 2 Absolute maximum ratings of analog block
Absolute maximum ratings (TA = 25°C)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
Supply volt age AVDDA AVDD1, AVDD2, AVDD3 0.3 to +6.0 V
DVDD DVDD 0.3 to +6.0 V
AGND AGND1, AGND2, AGND3, AGND4 0.3 to +0 .3 V
DGND DGND 0 .3 to +0.3 V
Input volt age VI1 MPXIN10, MPXIN11, MPXIN20, MPXIN21,
MPXIN30, MPXIN31, MPXIN40, MP XIN41,
MPXIN50, MPXIN51, MPXIN60, MP XIN61,
SC_IN, CLK_SYN C H, VREFIN 1 , VREFIN2 ,
VREFIN 3 , VR EFIN4, CLK_ L PF, CLK_ H PF,
RESET
0.3 to AVDDA + 0.3Note V
VI2 SCLK, SDI, CS 0.3 to DVDD + 0.3Note V
Output voltage VO1 LDO_OUT, BGR_OUT, AMP1_OUT,
AMP2_OUT, AMP3_OUT, GAINAMP_OUT,
SYNCH_OUT, LPF_OUT, HPF_OUT,
DAC1_OUT, DAC2_OUT, DAC3_OUT,
DAC4_OUT, TEMP_OUT
0.3 to AVDDA + 0.3Note V
VO2 SDO 0.3 to DVDD + 0.3Note V
Output current IO1 AMP1_OUT, AMP2_OUT, AMP3_OUT,
GAINAMP_OUT, SYNCH_OUT
LPF_OUT, HPF_OUT
DAC1_OUT, DAC2_OUT, DAC3_OUT,
DAC4_OUT, TEMP_OUT
1 mA
IO2 SDO 10 mA
ILDOOUT LDO_OUT 15 mA
Note Must be 6.0 V or lower.
Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any
parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the
verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that
ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 323
Mar 31, 2014
5. 1. 3 Absolute maximum ratings (common to microcontroller block and analog block)
Absolute maximum ratings
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
Operating ambient
temperature TA In norm al operati on m ode 40 to +85 °C
In flash memory programming m ode 40 to +85 °C
Storage temperature Tstg 40 to +150 °C
Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any
parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the
verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that
ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 324
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2 Electrical Specifications of Microcontroller Block
5. 2. 1 Oscillator characteristics
5. 2. 1. 1 X1 oscillator characteristics
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Resonator Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
X1 clock oscillation frequency (fX)Note Ceramic resonat or
/ Crystal resonator
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.0 20.0 MHz
2.4 V VDD < 2.7 V 1.0 16.0
1.8 V VDD < 2.4 V 1.0 8.0
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 1.0 4.0
Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time. Also, be sure
to apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation on the actual circuit so as to confirm the oscillation
characteristics.
Caution Since the CPU is started by the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock after a reset release, check the
X1 clock oscillation stabilization time using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register
(OSTC) by the user. Determine the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTC register and the
oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation
stabilization time with the resonator to be used.
Remark When using the X1 oscillator, see 3. 5. 4 System clock oscillator.
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 325
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 1. 2 On-chip oscillator characteristics
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
Resonator Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
High-speed on-chip oscillator
clock f requency Note 1, 2
fIH 1 32 MHz
High-speed on-chip oscillator
clock frequency accuracy
20 to + 85 °C 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 1.0 + 1.0 %
1.6 V VDD 1.8 V 5.0 + 5.0 %
40 to 20 °C 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 1.5 + 1.5 %
1.6 V VDD 1.8 V 5.5 + 5.5 %
Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock
frequency
fIL 15 kHz
Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock
frequency acc uracy
15 + 15 %
Notes 1. Frequency can be selected in a high-speed on-chip oscillator. Selected by bits 0 to 3 of option byte
(000C2H/010C2H) and bits 0 to 2 of HOCODIV register.
2. Indicates only permissible frequency level. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 326
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 2 DC characteristics
5. 2. 2. 1 Pin characteristics
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Output current,
highNote 1
IOH1 Per pin for P00 to P04, P10 to P15,
P40 to P42, P50, P51, P130, P140
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 10.0Note 2mA
Per pin for P70 to P73 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 3.0Note 2mA
Total of P00 to P04, P40 to P42,
P130, P140
(When duty = 70%Note 3)
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 55.0 mA
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 10.0
1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V 5.0
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 2.5
Total of P10 to P15, P50, P51,
P70 to P73
(When duty = 70%Note 3)
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 80.0 mA
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 19.0
1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V 10.0
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 5.0
Total of all pins
(When duty = 70%Note 3)
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 100.0 mA
IOH2 Per pin for P20 to P24 1.6 V AVDD 3.6
V
0.1Note 2 mA
Total of all pins
(When duty = 70%Note 3)
1.6 V AVDD 3.6
V
1.3 mA
Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from the VDD pin to an
output pin.
2. Do not exceed the total current value.
3. Specification under conditions where the duty 70%.
The output current value that has changed the duty ratio > 70% can be calculated with the following
expression (when changing the duty ratio to n%).
Total output current of pins = (IOH × 0.7) / (n × 0.01)
<Example> When IOH = 10.0 mA and n = 80%
Total output current of pins = (-10.0 × 0.7) / (80 × 0.01) -8.7 mA
However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor.
A current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin.
Caution P00, P02 to P04, P10 to P15 and P50 do not output high level in N-ch open-drain mode.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port
pins.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 327
Mar 31, 2014
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Output current,
lowNote 1
IOL1 Per pin for P00 to P04, P10 to P15,
P40 to P42, P50 to P51, P130, P140
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 20.0Note 2 mA
Per pin for P70 to P73 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 3.0No t e 2 mA
Total of P00 to P04, P40 to P42,
P130, P140
(When duty = 70%Note 3)
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 70.0 mA
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 15.0
1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V 9.0
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 4.5
Total of P10 to P15, P50, P51,
P70 to P73
(When duty = 70%Note 3)
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 80.0 mA
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 35.0
1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V 20.0
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 10.0
Total of all pinsNote 3 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 150.0 mA
IOL2 Per pin for P 20 to P24 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V 0.4Not e 2 mA
Total of all pinsNote 3 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V 5.2 mA
Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from the VSS pin to an
output pin.
2. Do not exceed the total current value.
3. Specification under conditions where the duty 70%.
The output current value that has changed the duty ratio > 70 % can be calculated with the following
expression (when changing the duty ratio to n%).
Total output current of pins = (IOL × 0.7) / (n × 0.01)
<Example> When IOL = 10.0 mA and n = 80%
Total output current of pins = (10.0 × 0.7) / (80 × 0.01) 8.7 mA
However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor.
A current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port
pins.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 328
Mar 31, 2014
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Input volt age,
high
VIH1 P00 t o P04, P10 to P15,
P40 to P42, P50, P51,
P70 to P73, P140
Normal input buff er 0.8VDD VDD V
VIH2 P01, P03, P04, P10, P11,
P13 to P15
TTL input buffer
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V
2.2 VDD V
TTL input buffer
3.3V VDD < 4.0 V
2.0 VDD V
TTL input buffer
1.6 V VDD < 3.3 V
1.5 VDD V
VIH3 P20 to P24 0.7AVDD AVDD V
VIH5 P121, P122, P137, EXCLK, RESET 0.8VDD VDD V
Input volt age,
low
VIL1 P00 to P04, P10 to P15,
P40 to P42, P50, P51,
P70 to P73, P140
Normal input buff er 0 0.2VDD V
VIL2 P01, P03, P04, P10, P11,
P13 to P15
TTL input buffer
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V
0 0.8 V
TTL input buffer
3.3 V VDD 4.0 V
0 0.5 V
TTL input buffer
1.6 V VDD < 3.3 V
0 0.32 V
VIL3 P20 to P24 0 0.3AVDD V
VIL5 P121, P122, P 137, EXCLK, RESET 0 0.2VDD V
Caution The maximum value of VIH of pins P00, P02 to P04, P10 to P15, and P50 is VDD, even in the N-ch open-
drain mode.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port
pins.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 329
Mar 31, 2014
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Output voltage,
high
VOH1 P00 t o P04, P10 to P15,
P40 to P42, P50, P51,
P130, P140
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOH1 = 10.0 mA
VDD 1.5 V
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOH1 = 3.0 mA
VDD 0.7 V
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOH1 = 2.0 mA
VDD 0.6 V
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOH1 = 1.5 mA
VDD 0.5 V
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOH1 = 1.0 mA
VDD 0.5 V
VOH2 P20 t o P24 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V,
IOH2 = 100
μ
A
AVDD 0.5 V
VOH4 P70 t o P73 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOH4 = 3.0 mA
VDD 1.1 V
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOH4 = 2.0 mA
VDD 0.9 V
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOH4 = 1.5 mA
VDD 0.7 V
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOH4 = 1.0 mA
VDD 0.7 V
Caution P00, P02 to P04, P10 to P15 and P50 do not output high level in N-ch open-drain mode.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port
pins.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 330
Mar 31, 2014
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Output voltage,
low
VOL1 P00 to P04, P10 to P15,
P40 to P42, P50, P51,
P130, P140
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOL1 = 20.0 mA
1.5 V
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOL1 = 8.5 mA
0.7 V
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOL1 = 3.0 mA
0.6 V
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOL1 = 1.5 mA
0.4 V
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOL1 = 0.6 mA
0.4 V
1.6 V VDD < 5.5 V,
IOL1 = 0.3 mA
0.4 V
VOL2 P20 to P24 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V,
IOL2 = 400
μ
A
0.4 V
VOL4 P70 to P73 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOL4 = -3.0 mA
1.0 V
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOL4 = -1.5 mA
0.6 V
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOL4 = -0.6 mA
0.5 V
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V,
IOL4 = -0.3 mA
0.5 V
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port
pins.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 331
Mar 31, 2014
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Input leakage current,
high
ILIH1 P00 to P04,
P10 to P15,
P40 to P42,
P50, P51,
P70 to P73, P140
VI = VDD 1
μ
A
ILIH2 P137, RESET VI = VDD 1
μ
A
ILIH3 P121, P122
(X1, X2, EXCLK)
VI = VDD I nput port or external
clock input s el ected
1
μ
A
Resonator connected 10
μ
A
ILIH4 P20 to P24 VI = AV DD 1
μ
A
Input leakage current,
low
ILIL1 P00 to P04,
P10 to P15,
P40 to P42,
P50, P51,
P70 to P73, P140
VI = VSS 1
μ
A
ILIL2 P121, P122,
P137, RESET
VI = VSS 1
μ
A
ILIL3 P121, P122
(X1, X2, EXCLK)
VI = VSS Input port or external
clock input s el ected
1
μ
A
Resonator connected 10
μ
A
ILIL4 P20 to P24 V I = A VSS 1
μ
A
On-chip pull-up
resistance
RU P00 t o P04,
P10 to P15,
P40 to P42,
P50, P51,
P70 to P73, P140
VI = VSS, input port selected 10 20 100 kΩ
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port
pins.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 332
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 2. 2 Supply current characteristics
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (1/3)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX
.
Unit
Supply
current
Note 1
IDD1 Operating
mode
HS(High-
speed main)
modeNote 4
fIH = 32 MHzNote 3 Basic
operation
VDD = 5.0 V 2.1 mA
VDD = 3.0 V 2.1
Normal
operation
VDD = 5.0 V 4.6 7.0 mA
VDD = 3.0 V 4.6 7.0
fIH = 24 MHzNote 3 Normal
operation
VDD = 5.0 V 3.7 5.5 mA
VDD = 3.0 V 3.7 5.5
fIH = 16 MHzNote 3 Normal
operation
VDD = 5.0 V 2.7 4.0 mA
VDD = 3.0 V 2.7 4.0
LS (Low-
speed main)
modeNote 4
fIH = 8 MHzNot e 3 Normal
operation
VDD = 3.0 V 1.2 1.8 mA
VDD = 2.0 V 1.2 1.8
LV (Low-
voltage main)
modeNote 4
fIH = 4 MHzNot e 3 Normal
operation
VDD = 3.0 V 1.2 1.7 mA
VDD = 2.0 V 1.2 1.7
HS (High-
speed main)
modeNote 4
fMX = 20 MHzNote 2
VDD = 5.0 V
Normal
operation
Square wave input 3.0 4.6 mA
Resonator connection 3.2 4.8
fMX = 20 MHzNote 2
VDD = 3.0 V
Normal
operation
Square wave input 3.0 4.6
Resonator connection 3.2 4.8
fMX = 10 MHzNote 2
VDD = 5.0 V
Normal
operation
Square wave input 1.9 2.7 mA
Resonator connection 1.9 2.7
fMX = 10 MHzNote 2
VDD = 3.0 V
Normal
operation
Square wave input 1.9 2.7
Resonator connection 1.9 2.7
LS (Low-
speed main)
modeNote 4
fMX = 8 MHzNote 2
VDD = 3.0 V
Normal
operation
Square wave input 1.1 1.7 mA
Resonator connection 1.1 1.7
fMX = 8 MHzNote 2
VDD = 2.0 V
Normal
operation
Square wave input 1.1 1.7
Resonator connection 1.1 1.7
Notes 1. Total current flowing into VDD, including the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is
fixed to VDD or VSS. The values below the MAX. column include the peripheral operation current. However,
not including the current flowing into the A/D converter, LVD circuit, I/O port, on-chip pullup/pull-down
resistors, and data flash rewriting.
2. When the high-spe ed on-c hip osc ill ator is stop ped .
3. When the high-speed system clo ck is sto pped.
4. The relationship between the operation voltage range, CPU operating frequency, and operating mode is as
below.
HS (High-speed main) mode: VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V @ 1 MHz to 32 MHz
VDD = 2.4 to 5.5 V @ 1 MHz to 16 MHz
LS (Low-speed main) mode: VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V @ 1 MHz to 8 MHz
LV (Low-voltage main) mode: VDD = 1.6 to 5.5 V @ 1 MHz to 4 MHz
Remarks 1. f
MX: High-speed system clock frequency (X1 clock oscillation frequency or external main system clock
frequency)
2. fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 333
Mar 31, 2014
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (2/3)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Supply
currentNote
1
IDD2Note 2 HALT
mode
HS (High-speed
ma in) mod eNote 6
fIH = 32 MHzNote 4 VDD = 5.0 V 0.54 1.63 mA
VDD = 3.0 V 0.54 1.63
fIH = 24 MHzNote 4 VDD = 5.0 V 0.44 1.28 mA
VDD = 3.0 V 0.44 1.28
fIH = 16 MHzNote 4 VDD = 5.0 V 0.40 1.00 mA
VDD = 3.0 V 0.40 1.00
LS (Low-speed
ma in) mod eNote 6
fIH = 8 MHzNot e 4 VDD = 3.0 V 260 530
μ
A
VDD = 2.0 V 260 530
LV (Low-voltage
ma in) mod eNote 6
fIH = 4 MHzNot e 4 VDD = 3.0 V 420 640
μ
A
VDD = 2.0 V 420 640
HS (High-speed
ma in) mod eNote 6
fMX = 20 MHzNote 3
VDD = 5.0 V
Square wave input 0.28 1.00 mA
Resonator connection 0.45 1.17
fMX = 20 MHzNote 3
VDD = 3.0 V
Square wave input 0.28 1.00
Resonator connection 0.45 1.17
fMX = 10 MHzNote 3
VDD = 5.0 V
Square wave input 0.19 0.60 mA
Resonator connection 0.26 0.67
fMX = 10 MHzNote 3
VDD = 3.0 V
Square wave input 0.19 0.60
Resonator connection 0.26 0.67
LS (Low-speed
ma in) mod eNote 6
fMX = 8 MHzNote 3
VDD = 3.0 V
Square wave input 95 330
μ
A
Resonator connection 145 380
fMX = 8 MHzNote 3
VDD = 2.0 V
Square wave input 95 330
Resonator connection 145 380
IDD3Note 5 STOP
mode
TA = 40°C 0.15 0.50
μ
A
TA = +25°C 0.22 0.50
TA = +50°C 0.34 1.10
TA = +70°C 0.46 1.90
TA = +85°C 0.75 3.30
(Notes and Remarks are listed on the nex t page.)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 334
Mar 31, 2014
Notes 1. Total current flowing into VDD, including the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is
fixed to VDD or VSS. The values below the MAX. column include the peripheral operation current. However,
not including the current flowing into the A/D converter, LVD circuit, I/O port, on-chip pullup/pull-down
resistors, and data flash rewriting.
2. When the HALT instruction is executed for the flash memory.
3. When the high-speed on-chip osc ill ator is stopped.
4. When the high- speed system clo ck is stopped.
5. Not including the current flowing into 12-bit interval timer, watchdog timer.
6. The relationship between the operation voltage range, CPU operating frequency, and operating mode is as
below.
HS (High-speed main) mode: VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V @ 1 MHz to 32 MHz
VDD = 2.4 to 5.5 V @ 1 MHz to 16 MHz
LS (Low-speed main) mode: VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V @ 1 MHz to 8 MHz
LV (Low-voltage main) mode: VDD = 1.6 to 5.5 V @ 1 MHz to 4 MHz
Remarks 1. fMX: High-speed system clock frequency (X1 clock oscillation frequency or external main system clock
frequency)
2. f
IH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency
3. The TYP. temperature condition in modes other than STOP mode is TA = 25°C.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 335
Mar 31, 2014
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (3/3)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Low-speed on-chip
oscillat or operating
current
IfIL Note 1 0.20
μ
A
12-bit Interval timer
operating current
IIT Note 1, 2, 3
0.02 Not e 3
μ
A
Watchdog timer
operating current
IWDT Note 1, 2, 4 fIL = 15 kHz, fMAIN is stopped 0.22
μ
A
A/D converter
operating current
IADC Note 5, 6 AVDD = 3.0 V, When conversi on at maximum speed 420 720
μ
A
AVREF (+) current IAVREF Note 7 AVDD = 3.0 V, ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 0 Note 6 14.0 25.0
μ
A
AVREFP = 3.0 V, ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 1 Note 9 14.0 25.0
μ
A
ADREFP1 = 1, ADREFP0 = 0 Note 1 14.0 25.0
μ
A
A/D converter
reference voltage
current
IADREF Note 1, 8 VDD = 3.0 V 75.0
μ
A
Temperature sensor
operating current
ITMPS Note 1 VDD = 3.0 V 75.0
μ
A
LVD operating
current
ILVD Note 1, 10 0.08
μ
A
BGO operating
current
IBGO Note 1, 11 2.5 12.2 mA
Selfprogramming
operating
current
IFSP Note 1, 12 2.5 12.2 mA
SNOOZE operating
current
ISNOZ A/D converter
operation
(AVDD = 3.0 V)
The mode is performed Not e 1, 13 0.50 0.60 mA
During A/D convers i on Not e 1 0.60 0.75 mA
During A/D convers i on Not e 6 420 720
μ
A
CSI/UART operation No t e 1 0.70 0.84 mA
(Notes and Remarks are listed on the nex t page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 336
Mar 31, 2014
Notes 1. Current flowing to VDD.
2. When high-speed on-chip oscillator and high-speed system clock are stopped.
3. Current flowing only to the 12-bit interval timer (excluding the operating current of the low-speed on-chip
ocsillator). The supply current of the RL78 microcontrollers is the sum of the values of either IDD1 or IDD2,
and IIT, when the 12-bit interval timer operates in operation mode or HALT mode. W hen the low-speed on-
chip oscillator is selected, IFIL should be added.
4. Current flowing only to the watchdog timer (including the operating current of the low-speed on-chip
oscillator). The supply current of the RL78 microcontrollers is the sum of IDD1, IDD2, or IDD3 and IWDT when
the watchdog timer is in operation.
5. Current flowing only to the A/D converter. The supply current of the RL78 microcontrollers is the sum of IDD1
or IDD2 and IADC, IAVREF, IADREF when the A/D converter operates in an operation mode or the HALT mode.
6. Current flowing to the AVDD.
7. Current flowing from the reference voltage source of A/D converter.
8. Operation current flowing to the internal reference voltage.
9. Current flowing to the AVREFP.
10. Current flowing only to the LVD circuit. The supply current of the RL78 microcontrollers is the sum of IDD1,
IDD2 or IDD3 and ILVD when the LVD circuit is in operation.
11. Current flowing only during data flash rewrite.
12. Current flowing only during self programming.
13. For shift time to the SNOOZE mode, see 3. 18 Standby Function.
Remarks 1. f
IL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency
2. f
CLK: CPU/peripheral hardw are clock frequency
3. The TYP. temperature condition is TA = 25°C.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 337
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 3 AC characteristics
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Instr uction cycle
(minimum instruction
execution time)
TCY Main system
clock (f MAIN)
operation
HS (high-speed main)
mode 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.03125 1
μ
s
2.4 V VDD < 2.7 V 0.0625 1
μ
s
LV (Low-voltage mai n)
mode 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 0.25 1
μ
s
LS (Low-speed main)
mode 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 0.125 1
μ
s
In the self
programming
mode
HS (high-speed main)
mode 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0. 03125 1
μ
s
2.4 V VDD < 2.7 V 0.0625 1
μ
s
LV (Low-voltage mai n)
mode 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 0.25 1
μ
s
LS (Low-speed main)
mode 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 0.125 1
μ
s
External main system
clock frequency fEX 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.0 20.0 MHz
2.4 V VDD < 2.7 V 1. 0 16.0
1.8 V VDD < 2.4 V 1. 0 8.0
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 1. 0 4.0
External main system
clock input
high-level width,
low-level width
tEXH,
tEXL 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 24 ns
2.4 V VDD < 2.7 V 30
1.8 V VDD < 2.4 V 60
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 120
TI00, TI04, TI07 input
high/low level width tTIH,
tTIL 1/fMCK
+ 10 ns
TO00, TO04, TO07
output frequency fTO HS (high-speed main) mode 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 16 MHz
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 8
1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V 4
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 2
LV (Low-voltage mai n) mode 1.6 V VDD < 5.5 V 2
LS (Low-speed main) mode 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 4
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 2
PCLBUZ0 output
frequency fPCL HS (high-speed main) mode 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 16 MHz
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 8
1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V 4
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 2
LV (Low-voltage mai n) mode 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 4
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 2
LS (Low-speed main) mode 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 4
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V 2
Interrupt i nput
high level width,
low level width
tINIH,
tINIL INTP0, INTP1, INTP2, INTP6 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 1
μ
s
Key interrupt input
high level width,
low level width
tKR K R0 t o KR7 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V
1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V 250 ns
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V
1.6 V AVDD < 1.8 V 1
μ
s
RESET low level width tRSL 10
μ
s
Remark fMCK: Timer array unit operation clock frequency. (Operation clock to be set by the timer clock select register
0 (TPS0) and CKS0n bit of timer mode register 0n (TMR0n). n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7))
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 338
Mar 31, 2014
Minimum Instruction Execution Time during Main System Clock Operation
TCY vs VDD (HS (high-speed main) mode)
1.0
0.1
0
10
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
5.5
2.7
0.01
2.4
0.03125
0.0625
0.05
Cycle time T
CY
[μs]
Supply voltage V
DD
[V]
During self programming
Whe n t he high-spee d on-chip oscillator
clock is se lected
When high-speed system clock is selecte
d
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 339
Mar 31, 2014
TCY vs VDD (LS (low-speed main) mode)
1.0
0.1
0
10
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
5.5
0.01
1.8
0.125
Cycle time T
CY
[μs]
Supply voltage V
DD
[V]
During self programming
When the high- spe ed on-chip oscillator
clock i s select e d
When high-sp eed system clock is selecte
d
TCY vs VDD (LV (low-voltage main) mode)
1.0
0.1
0
10
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
0.01
1.8
0.25
1.6 5.5
Cycl e time T
CY
[μs]
Supply voltage V
DD
[V]
During se lf pr ogramm ing
When the high-speed on-chip oscillator
clock is selected
When high-speed system clock is selecte
d
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 340
Mar 31, 2014
AC Timing Test Points
Test points
V
IH
/V
OH
V
IL
/V
OL
V
IH
/V
OH
V
IL
/V
OL
External System Clock Timing
EXCLK
1/fEX
tEXL tEXH
0.7VDD (MIN.)
0.3VDD (MAX.)
TI/TO Timing
TI00, TI04, TI07
t
TIL
t
TIH
TO00, TO04, TO07
1/f
TO
Interrupt Request Input Timing
INTP0 to INTP2, INTP6
tINTL tINTH
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 341
Mar 31, 2014
Ke y Interrupt Input Timing
KR0 to KR7
t
KR
RESET Input Timing
RESET
tRSL
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 342
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 4 Peripheral functions characteristics
AC Timing Test Points
Test points
V
IH
/V
OH
V
IL
/V
OL
V
IH
/V
OH
V
IL
/V
OL
5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit
(1) Communication between devices at same potential (UART mode) (dedicated baud rate generator output)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
Paramete
r Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
Transfer
rate Note 4 2.4 V VDD 5.5 V fMCK/6 fMCK/6 fMCK/6 bps
Theoretical value of the
maximum transfer rate:
fMCK = fCLK Note 6
5.3
Note 5 1.3 0.6 Mbps
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V fMCK/6 fMCK/6 fMCK/6 bps
Theoretical value of the
maximum transfer rate:
fMCK = fCLK Note 6
5.3
Note 5 1.3 0.6 Mbps
1.7 V VDD 5.5 V fMCK/6 fMCK/6 fMCK/6 bps
Theoretical value of the
maximum transfer rate:
fMCK = fCLK Note 6
5.3
Note 5 1.3
Note 5 0.6 Mbps
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V fMCK/6 fMCK/6 bps
Theoretical value of the
maximum transfer rate:
fMCK = fCLK Note 6
1.3
Note 5 0.6 Mbps
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. Transfer rate in the SNOOZE mode is 4800 bps.
5. The following conditions are required for low voltage interface.
2.4 V VDD < 2.7 V: 2.6 Mbps max.
1.8 V VDD < 2.4 V: 1.3 Mbps max.
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V: 0.6 Mbps max.
6. f
CLK in each operating mode is as below.
HS (high-speed main) mode : fCLK = 32 MHz
LS (low-speed main) mode : fCLK = 8 MHz
LV (low-voltage main) mode : fCLK = 4 MHz
Caution Select the normal input buffer for the RxDq pin and the normal output mode for the TxDq pin by
using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode register g (POMg).
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 343
Mar 31, 2014
UART mode connection diagram (during communication between devices at same potential)
RL78
microcontroller User's
device
TxD
Tx
RxD
Rx
UART mode bit width (during communication between devices at same potential) (reference)
TxDq
RxDq
Baud rate error tolerance
High/Low-bit width
1/Transfer rate
Remarks 1. q: UART number (q = 0 to 2), g: PIM, POM number (g = 0, 1)
2. f
MCK: Serial array unit operating clock frequency
(Operation clock to be set by the CKSmn bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn).
m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00 to 03, 10, 11))
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 344
Mar 31, 2014
(2) Communication between devices at same potential (CSI mode) (master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output
corresponding CSI00 only)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. fMCK must be 24 MHz or less.
5. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. W hen DAPmn =
0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0, this specification refers to SCKp.
6. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. W hen DAPmn =
0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0, this specification refers to SCKp.
7. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines.
Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp pin and the normal output mode for the SOp pin and SCKp
pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode register g (POMg).
Remarks 1. p: CSI number (p = 00), m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0),
g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 1)
2. f
MCK: Serial array unit operating clock frequency
(Operation clock to be set by the CKSmn bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn).
m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00))
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
SCKp cy c l e ti me tKCY1 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V
tKCY1 2/fCLK 83.3 Note 4 250 500 ns
SCKp
high-level width,
low-level width
tKH1
tKL1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V tKCY1/2
-7 t
KCY1/2
-50 t
KCY1/2
-50 ns
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V tKCY1/2
-10 t
KCY1/2
-50 t
KCY1/2
-50
Slp setup time
(to SCKp) Note 5 tSIK1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 23 110 110 ns
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 33 110 110
Slp hold time
(from SCKp) No t e 5 tKSI1 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 10 10 10 ns
Delay time from
SCKp to SO p
output Not e 6
tKSO1 C = 20 pF Note 7 10 10 10 ns
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 345
Mar 31, 2014
(3) Communication between devices at same potenntial (CSI mode) (master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Uni
t
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
SCKp cycle time tKCY1 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V
tKCY1 4/fCLK 125 500 1000 ns
2.4 V VDD 5.5 V
tKCY1 4/fCLK 250 500 1000 ns
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V
tKCY1 4/fCLK 500 500 1000 ns
1.7 V VDD 5.5 V
tKCY1 4/fCLK 1000 1000 1000 ns
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V
tKCY1 4/fCLK
1000 1000 ns
SCKp
high-level width
low-level width
tKH1
tKL1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V tKCY1/2
-12 t
KCY1/2
-50 t
KCY1/2
-50 ns
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V tKCY1/2
-18 t
KCY1/2
-50 t
KCY1/2
-50 ns
2.4 V VDD 5.5 V tKCY1/2
-38 t
KCY1/2
-50 t
KCY1/2
-50 ns
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V tKCY1/2
-50 t
KCY1/2
-50 t
KCY1/2
-50 ns
1.7 V VDD 5.5 V tKCY1/2
-100 t
KCY1/2
-100 t
KCY1/2
-100 ns
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V t
KCY1/2
-100 t
KCY1/2
-100 ns
Slp setup time
(to SCKp)Note 4 tSIK1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 44 110 110 ns
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 44 110 110 ns
2.4 V VDD 5.5 V 75 110 110 ns
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 110 110 110 ns
1.7 V VDD 5.5 V 220 220 220 ns
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 220 220 ns
Slp hold time
(from SCKp)Note 4 tKSI1 1.7 V VDD 5.5 V 19 19 19 ns
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 19 19
Slp hold time
(from SCKp)Note 5 tKSO1 1.7 V VDD 5.5 V
C = 30 pF Note 6 25 25 25 ns
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V
C = 30 pF Note 6 25 25
(Notes Caution and Remark are listed on the next page.)
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 346
Mar 31, 2014
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. W hen DAPmn =
0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0, this specification refers to SCKp.
5. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. W hen DAPmn =
0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0, this specification refers to SCKp.
6. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines.
Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp pin and the normal output mode for the SOp pin and SCKp
pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode register g (POMg).
Remark p: CSI number (p = 00, 10, 20, 21), m: Unit number (m = 0, 1),
n: Channel number (n = 0 to 2), g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 0, 1)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 347
Mar 31, 2014
(4) Communication between devices at same potential (CSI mode)
(slave mode, SCKp ... External clock input) (1/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
SCKp
cycle time Note 4 tKCY2 4.0V VDD
5.5V 20MHz < fMCK 8/fMCK ns
fMCK 20MHz 6/fMCK 6/fMCK 6/fMCK ns
2.7V VDD
5.5V 16MHz < fMCK 8/fMCK ns
fMCK 16MHz 6/fMCK 6/fMCK 6/fMCK ns
2.4 V VDD 5.5 V 6/fMCK
and
500ns
6/fMCK
and
500ns
6/fMCK
and
500ns
ns
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 6/fMCK
and
750ns
6/fMCK
and
750ns
6/fMCK
and
750ns
ns
1.7 V VDD 5.5 V 6/fMCK
and
1500ns
6/fMCK
and
1500ns
6/fMCK
and
1500ns
ns
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 6/fMCK
and
1500ns
6/fMCK
and
1500ns
ns
SCKp
high-level
width
low-level width
tKH2,
tKL2 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V tKCY2/2
-7 t
KCY2/2
-7 t
KCY2/2
-7 ns
2.7 V VDD 5.5 V tKCY2/2
-8 t
KCY2/2
-8 t
KCY2/2
-8 ns
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V tKCY2/2
-18 t
KCY2/2
-18 t
KCY2/2
-18 ns
1.7 V VDD 5.5 V tKCY2/2
-66 t
KCY2/2
-66 t
KCY2/2
-66 ns
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V t
KCY2/2
-66 t
KCY2/2
-66 ns
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. Transfer rate in the SNOOZE mode: MAX. 1 Mbps
Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp pin and SCKp pin and the normal output mode for the SOp
pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode register g (POMg).
Remarks 1. p: CSI number (p = 00, 10, 20, 21), m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 2),
g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 0, 1)
2. f
MCK: Serial array unit operating clock frequency
(Operation clock to be set by the CKSmn bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn).
m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00 to 03, 10, 11))
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 348
Mar 31, 2014
(4) Communication between devices at same potential (CSI mode)
(slave mode, SCKp ... External clock input) (2/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (2/2)
Parameter Symbo
l Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
SIp setup time
(to SCKp)Note 4 tSIK2 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1/fMCK
+20 1/fMCK
+30 1/fMCK
+30 ns
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 1/fMCK
+30 1/fMCK
+30 1/fMCK
+30 ns
1.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1/fMCK
+40 1/fMCK
+40 1/fMCK
+40 ns
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 1/fMCK
+40 1/fMCK
+40 ns
SIp hold time
(from SCKp)Note 4 tKSI2 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 1/fMCK
+31 1/fMCK
+31 1/fMCK
+31 ns
1.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1/fMCK
+250 1/fMCK
+250 1/fMCK
+250 ns
1.6 V VDD 5.5 V 1/fMCK
+250 1/fMCK
+250 ns
Delay time from
SCKp to SOp
output Note 5
tKSO2 C = 30 pF
Note 6 2.7V VDD 5.5V 2/fMCK
+44 2/fMCK
+110 2/fMCK
+110 ns
2.4V VDD 5.5V 2/fMCK
+75 2/fMCK
+110 2/fMCK
+110 ns
1.8V VDD 5.5V 2/fMCK
+110 2/fMCK
+110 2/fMCK
+110 ns
1.7V VDD 5.5V 2/fMCK
+220 2/fMCK
+220 2/fMCK
+220 ns
1.6V VDD 5.5V 2/fMCK
+220 2/fMCK
+220 ns
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. W hen DAPmn =
0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0, this specification refers to SCKp.
5. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. W hen DAPmn =
0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0, this specification refers to SCKp.
6. C is the load capacitance of the SOp output line.
Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp pin and SCKp pin and the normal output mode for the SOp
pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode register g (POMg).
Remarks 1. p: CSI number (p = 00, 10, 20, 21), m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 2),
g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 0, 1)
2. f
MCK: Serial array unit operating clock frequency
(Operation clock to be set by the CKSmn bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn).
m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00 to 03, 10, 11))
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 349
Mar 31, 2014
CSI mode connection diagram (during communication betw een devices with the same voltage)
SCKp SCK
SIp
SI
SOp
SO
RL78
microcontroller
User's
device
CSI mode serial transfer timing (during communication between devices with the same voltage)
(when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1)
SIp
SOp
t
KCY1, 2
t
KL1, 2
t
KH1, 2
t
SIK1, 2
t
KSI1, 2
Input data
t
KSO1, 2
Output data
SCKp
CSI mode serial transfer timing (during communication between devices with the same voltage)
(when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0)
SIp
SOp
t
KCY1, 2
t
KH1, 2
t
KL1, 2
t
SIK1, 2
t
KSI1, 2
Input data
t
KSO1, 2
Output data
SCKp
Remarks 1. p: CSI number (p = 00, 10, 20, 21)
2. m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00 to 03, 10, 11)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 350
Mar 31, 2014
(5) Communication between devices at same potential (simplified I2C mode) (1/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
SCLr clock frequency fSCL 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
1000
Note 4 400
Note 4 400
Note 4 kHz
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 3 kΩ 400
Note 4 400
Note 4 400
Note 4 kHz
1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ 300
Note 4 300
Note 4 300
Note 4 kHz
1.7 V VDD < 1.8 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ 250
Note 4 250
Note 4 250
Note 4 kHz
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ 250
Note 4 250
Note 4 kHz
Hold time
when SCLr = L tLOW 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
475 1150 1150 ns
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 3 kΩ 1150 1150 1150 ns
1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ 1550 1550 1550 ns
1.7 V VDD < 1.8 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ 1850 1850 1850 ns
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ
1850 1850 ns
Hold time
when SCLr = H tHIGH 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
475 1150 1150 ns
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 3 kΩ 1150 1150 1150 ns
1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ 1550 1550 1550 ns
1.7 V VDD < 1.8 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ 1850 1850 1850 ns
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ
1850 1850 ns
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. The value must also be fCLK/4 or lower.
(Caution are listed on the next page, and Remarks are listed on the page after the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 351
Mar 31, 2014
(5) Communication between devices at same potential (simplified I2C mode) (2/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
Data setup time
(for reception) tSU:DAT 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
1/fMCK
+85
Note 4
1/fMCK
+145
Note 4
1/fMCK
+145
Note 4
ns
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 3 kΩ 1/fMCK
+145
Note 4
1/fMCK
+145
Note 4
1/fMCK
+145
Note 4
ns
1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ 1/fMCK
+230
Note 4
1/fMCK
+230
Note 4
1/fMCK
+230
Note 4
ns
1.7 V VDD < 1.8 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ 1/fMCK
+290
Note 4
1/fMCK
+290
Note 4
1/fMCK
+290
Note 4
ns
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ
1/fMCK
+290
Note 4
1/fMCK
+290
Note 4
ns
Data hold time
(for transmission) tHD:DAT 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
0 305 0 305 0 305 ns
1.8 V VDD 5.5 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 3 kΩ 0 355 0 355 0 355 ns
1.8 V VDD < 2.7 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ 0 405 0 405 0 405 ns
1.7 V VDD < 1.8 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ 0 405 0 405 0 405 ns
1.6 V VDD < 1.8 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5 kΩ
0 405 0 405 ns
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. Set the fMCK value so as not to exceed the hold time when SCLr = “L” and SCLr = “H”.
Caution Select the normal input buffer and the N-ch open drain output (VDD tolerance) mode for the SDAr pin
and the normal output mode for the SCLr pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port
output mode register h (POMh). For VIH and VIL, see the DC characteristics with TTL input buffer
selected
(Remarks are listed on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 352
Mar 31, 2014
Simplified I2C connection diagram (during communication between devices at same potential)
SDAr User's
device
RL78
microcontroller
SCLr
SDA
SCL
Rb
V
DD
Simplified I2C mode serial transfer timing (during communication between devices at same potential)
SDAr
tLOW tHIGH
tHD:DAT
SCLr
tSU:DAT
1/fSCL
Remarks 1. Rb [Ω]: Communication line (SDAr) pull-up resistance,
Cb [F]: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) load capacitance
2. r: IIC number (r = 00, 10, 20), g: PIM number (g = 0, 1), h: POM number (h = 0, 1)
3. f
MCK: Serial array unit operating clock frequency
(Operation clock to be set by the CKSmn bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn).
m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 2), mn = 00 to 03, 10, 11)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 353
Mar 31, 2014
(6) Communication between devices at different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V) (UART mode)
(output from dedicated baud rate generator) (1/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (1/2)
Paramete
r
Symbo
l
Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
Transfer
rate Note 4 Reception 4.0V VDD 5.5V,
2.7V Vb 4.0V f
MCK/6 fMCK/6 fMCK/6 bps
Theoretical value of the
maximum transfer rate:
fMCK = fCLK Note 7
5.3 1.3 0.6 Mbps
2.7V VDD < 4.0V,
2.3V Vb 2.7V f
MCK/6 fMCK/6 fMCK/6 bps
Theoretical value of the
maximum transfer rate:
fMCK = fCLK Note 7
5.3 1.3 0.6 Mbps
1.8V VDD < 3.3V,
1.6V Vb 2.0V Note 5 f
MCK/6 fMCK/6 fMCK/6 bps
Theoretical value of the
maximum transfer rate:
fMCK = fCLK Note 7
5.3
Note 6 1.3 0.6 Mbps
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. Transfer rate in the SNOOZE mode is 4,800 bps.
5. Specify a value so as to satisfy VDD Vb.
6. The following conditions are also required for low voltage interface.
2.4 V VDD < 2.7 V: MAX. 2.6 Mbps
1.8 V VDD < 2.4 V: MAX. 1.3 Mbps
7. f
CLK in each operating mode is as below.
HS (high-speed main) mode: fCLK = 32 MHz
LS (low-speed main) mode: fCLK = 8 MHz
LV (low-voltage main) mode: fCLK = 4 MHz
(Caution and Remarks are listed on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 354
Mar 31, 2014
Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the RxDq pin and the N-ch open drain output (VDD tolerance) mode for
the TxDq pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode register g (POMg). For
VIH and VIL, see the DC characteristics with TTL input buffer selected
Remarks 1. Vb [V]: Communication line voltage
2. q: UART number (q = 0 to 2), g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 0, 1)
3. f
MCK: Serial array unit operating clock frequency
(Operation clock to be set by the CKSmn bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn).
m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00 to 03, 10, 11))
4. The AC characteristics of serial array units communicating with a device at different potential in UART
mode is observed at VIH and VIL below.
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V: VIH = 2.0 V, VIL = 0.5 V
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V: VIH = 1.5 V, VIL = 0.32 V
5. UART2 cannot communicate with a device at different potential when bit 1 (PIOR1) of the peripheral I/O
redirection register (PIOR) is 1.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 355
Mar 31, 2014
(6) Communication between devices at different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V) (UART mode)
(output from dedicated baud rate generator) (2/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (2/2)
Paramete
r
Symbo
l
Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
Transfer
rate Transmissio
n 4.0V VDD 5.5V,
2.7V Vb 4.0V Note
4
Note
4 Note
4 bps
Theoretical value of the
maximum transfer rate:
Cb = 50 pF,
Rb = 1.4 k,
Vb = 2.7 V
2.8
Note 5 2.8
Note 5 2.8
Note 5 Mbps
2.7V VDD < 4.0V,
2.3V Vb 2.7V Note
7 Note
7 Note
7 bps
Theoretical value of the
maximum transfer rate:
Cb = 50 pF,
Rb = 2.7 k,
Vb = 2.3 V
1.2
Note 8 1.2
Note 8 1.2
Note 8 Mbps
1.8V VDD < 3.3V,
1.6V Vb 2.0V Note 5 Note
9 Note
9 Note
9 bps
Theoretical value of the
maximum transfer rate:
Cb = 50 pF,
Rb = 5.5 k,
Vb = 1.6 V
0.43
Note 10 0.43
Note 10 0.43
Note 10 Mbps
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. The smaller value derived by using fMCK/6 or the following expression is the valid maximum transfer rate.
Expression for calculating the transfer rate when 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V
Maximum transfer rate = 1 [bps]
{Cb × Rb × ln (1 2.2 )} × 3
Vb
1
{Cb × Rb × ln (1 2.2 )}
Baud rate error
(theoretical value) = Transfer rate × 2Vb
× 100 [%]
( 1 ) × Number of transferred bits
Transfer rate
* This value is the theoretical value of the relative difference between the transmission and reception sides.
(Other Notes and Caution are listed on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 356
Mar 31, 2014
5. This value as an example is calculated when the conditions described in the “Conditions” column are met.
Refer to Note 4 above to calculate the maximum transfer rate under conditions of the customer.
6. Specify a value so as to satisfy VDD Vb.
7. The smaller value derived by using fMCK/6 or the following expression is the valid maximum transfer rate.
Expression for calculating the transfer rate when 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V
Maximum transfer rate = 1 [bps]
{Cb × Rb × ln (1 2.0 )} × 3
Vb
1
{Cb × Rb × ln (1 2.0 )}
Baud rate error
(theoretical value) = Transfer rate × 2Vb × 100[%]
( 1 ) × Number of transferred bits
Transfer rate
* This value is the theoretical value of the relative difference between the transmission and reception sides.
8. This value as an example is calculated when the conditions described in the “Conditions” column are met.
Refer to Note 7 above to calculate the maximum transfer rate under conditions of the customer.
9. The smaller value derived by using fMCK/6 or the following expression is the valid maximum transfer rate.
Expression for calculating the transfer rate when 1.8 V VDD 3.3 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V
Maximum transfer rate
=
1 [bps]
{Cb × Rb × ln (11.5 )} × 3
Vb
1
{Cb × Rb × ln (1 1.5 )}
Baud rate error
(theoretical value) = Transfer rate × 2Vb
× 100[%]
( 1 ) × Number of transferred bits
Transfer rate
* This value is the theoretical value of the relative difference between the transmission and reception sides.
10. This value as an example is calculated when the conditions described in the Conditions column are met.
See Note 9 above to calculate the maximum transfer rate under conditions of the customer.
Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the RxDq pin and the N-ch open drain output (VDD tolerance) mode for
the TxDq pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode register g (POMg). For
VIH and VIL, see the DC characteristics with TTL input buffer selected
(Remarks are listed on the next page.)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 357
Mar 31, 2014
UART mode connection diagram (during communication between devices at different potential)
RL78
microcontroller
User's
device
TxDq
Tx
RxDq
Rx
Rb
Vb
UART mode bit width (during communication between devices at different potential) (reference)
TxDq
RxDq
Baud rate error tolerance
Baud rate error tolerance
Low-bit width
High/Low-bit width
High-bit width
1/Transfer rate
1/Transfer rate
Remarks 1. Rb [Ω]: Communication line (TxDq) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (TxDq) load
capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage
2. q: UART number (q = 0 to 2), g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 0, 1)
3. f
MCK: Serial array unit operating clock frequency
(Operation clock to be set by the CKSmn bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn).
m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00 to 03, 10, 11))
4. The AC characteristics of serial array units communicating with a device at different potential in UART
mode is observed at VIH and VIL below.
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V: VIH = 2.0 V, VIL = 0.5 V
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V: VIH = 1.5 V, VIL = 0.32 V
5. UART2 cannot communicate with a device at different potential when bit 1 (PIOR1) of the peripheral I/O
redirection register (PIOR) is 1.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 358
Mar 31, 2014
(7) Communication between devices at different potential (2.5 V or 3 V) (CSI mode)
(master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output corresponding CSI00 only) (1/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
SCKp cy c le time tKCY1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ,
tKCY1 2/fCLK
200 1150 1150 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ,
tKCY1 2/fCLK
300 1150 1150
SCKp high level width tKH1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
tKCY1/2
-50 tKCY1/2
-50 tKCY1/2
-50 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
tKCY1/2
-120 tKCY1/2
-120 tKCY1/2
-120
SCKp low level width tKL1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
tKCY1/2
-7 tKCY1/2
-50 tKCY1/2
-50 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
tKCY1/2
-10 tKCY1/2
-50 tKCY1/2
-50
SIp setup time
(to SCKp)Note 4 tSIK1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
58 479 479 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
121 479 479
SIp hold time
(from SCKp)Note 4 tKSI1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
10 10 10 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
10 10 10
Delay time
fro m SCKp to SOp
output Not e 4
tKSO1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
60 60 60 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
130 130 130
(Notes are listed on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 359
Mar 31, 2014
(7) Communication between devices at different potential (2.5 V or 3 V) (CSI mode)
(master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output corresponding CSI00 only) (2/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
SIp setup time
(to SCKp)Note 5
tSIK1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
23 110 110 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
33 110 110
SIp hold time
(from SCKp) Note 5
tKSI1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
10 10 10 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
10 10 10
Delay time
fro m SCKp to SOp
output Note 5
tKSO1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
10 10 10 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 20 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
10 10 10
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1.
5. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0.
Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the SIp pin and the N-ch open drain output (VDD tolerance) mode for
the SOp pin and SCKp pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode register
g (POMg). For VIH and VIL, see the DC characteristics with TTL input buffer selected.
Remarks 1. Rb [Ω]: Communication line (SCKp, SOp) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SCKp, SOp)
load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage
2. p: CSI number (p = 00), m: Unit number (m = 0), n: Channel number (n = 0),
g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 1)
3. The AC characteristics of serial array units communicating with a device at different potential in CSI mode
is observed at VIH and VIL below.
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V: VIH = 2.0 V, VIL = 0.5 V
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 360
Mar 31, 2014
(8) Communication between devices at different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V) (CSI mode)
(master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output) (1/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
SCKp cy c l e ti me tKCY1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
tKCY1 4/fCLK
300 1150 1150 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
tKCY1 4/fCLK
500 1150 1150
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V, Note 4
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ
tKCY1 4/fCLK
1150 1150 1150
SCKp
high level width
tKH1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
tKCY1/2
-75 tKCY1/2
-75 tKCY1/2
-75 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
tKCY1/2
-170 tKCY1/2
-170 tKCY1/2
-170
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V, Note 4
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ
tKCY1/2
-458 tKCY1/2
-458 tKCY1/2
-458
SCKp
low level width
tKL1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
tKCY1/2
-12 tKCY1/2
-50 tKCY1/2
-50 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
tKCY1/2
-18 tKCY1/2
-50 tKCY1/2
-50
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V, Note 4
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ
tKCY1/2
-50 tKCY1/2
-50 tKCY1/2
-50
(Notes, Caution and Remarks are listed on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 361
Mar 31, 2014
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. Specify a value so as to satisfy VDD Vb.
Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the SIp pin and the N-ch open drain output (VDD tolerance) mode
for the SOp pin and SCKp pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode
register g (POMg). For VIH and VIL, see the DC characteristics with TTL input buffer selected.
Remarks 1. Rb [Ω]: Communication line (SCKp, SOp) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SCKp, SOp)
load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage
2. p: CSI number (p = 00, 10, 20), m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00, 10, 20),
g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 0, 1)
3. The AC characteristics of serial array units communicating with a device at different potential in CSI mode
is observed at VIH and VIL below.
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V: VIH = 2.0 V, VIL = 0.5 V
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V: VIH = 1.5 V, VIL = 0.32 V
4. CSI21 cannot communicate with a device at different potential. Use other CSI channels for communication
between devices at different potential.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 362
Mar 31, 2014
(8) Communication between devices at different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V) (CSI mode)
(master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output) (2/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
SIp setup time
(to SCKp)Note 4
tSIK1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ 81 479 479 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ 177 479 479 ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V, Note 6
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ 479 479 479 ns
SIp hold time
(from SCKp) Note 4
tKSI1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ 19 19 19 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ 19 19 19 ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V, Note 6
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ 19 19 19 ns
Delay time
fro m SCKp to
SOp output Note 4
tKSO1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ 100 100 100 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ 195 195 195 ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V, Note 6
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ 483 483 483 ns
SIp setup time
(to SCKp) Note 5
tSIK1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ 44 110 110 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ 44 110 110 ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V, Note 6
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ 110 110 110 ns
SIp hold time
(from SCKp) Note 5
tKSI1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ 19 19 19 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ 19 19 19 ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V, Note 6
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ 19 19 19 ns
Delay time
fro m SCKp to
SOp output Note 5
tKSO1 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ 25 25 25 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ 25 25 25 ns
1.8 V VDD < 4.0 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V, Note 6
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ 25 25 25 ns
(Notes, Caution and Remarks are listed on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 363
Mar 31, 2014
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1.
5. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0.
6. Specify a value so as to satisfy VDD Vb.
Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the SIp pin and the N-ch open drain output (VDD tolerance) mode
for the SOp pin and SCKp pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode
register g (POMg). For VIH and VIL, see the DC characteristics with TTL input buffer selected
CSI mode connection diagram (during communication between devices at different potential)
User's
device
RL78
microcontroller
<Master>
SCKp
SIp
SOp
Vb Vb
Rb Rb
SCK
SO
SI
Remarks 1. Rb [Ω]: Communication line (SCKp, SOp) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SCKp, SOp)
load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage
2. p: CSI number (p = 00, 10, 20), m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00, 10, 20),
g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 0, 1)
3. The AC characteristics of serial array units communicating with a device at different potential in CSI mode
is observed at VIH and VIL below.
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V: VIH = 2.0 V, VIL = 0.5 V
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V: VIH = 1.5 V, VIL = 0.32 V
4. CSI21 cannot communicate with a device at different potential. Use other CSI channels for communication
between devices at different potential.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 364
Mar 31, 2014
CSI mode serial transfer timing: master mode (during communication between devices at different potential)
(when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1)
SIp
SOp
t
KCY1
t
KL1
t
KH1
t
SIK1
t
KSI1
Input data
t
KSO1
Output data
SCKp
CSI mode serial transfer timing: master mode (during communication between devices at different potential)
(when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0)
SIp
SOp
t
KCY1
t
KL1
t
KH1
t
SIK1
t
KSI1
Input data
t
KSO1
Output data
SCKp
Remarks 1. p: CSI number (p = 00, 10, 20), m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00, 10, 20),
g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 0, 1)
2. CSI21 cannot communicate with a device at different potential. Use other CSI channels for
communication between devices at different potential.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 365
Mar 31, 2014
(9) Communication between devices at different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V) (CSI mode)
(slave mode, SCKp ... External clock input) (1/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
SCKp
cycle time Note 4 tKCY2 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V
24 MHz < fMCK 14/fMCK ns
20 MHz < fMCK 24 MHz 12/fMCK ns
8 MHz < fMCK 20 MHz 10/fMCK ns
4 MHz < fMCK 8 MHz 8/fMCK 16/fMCK ns
fMCK 4 MHz 6/fMCK 10/fMCK 10/fMCK ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V
24 MHz < fMCK 20/fMCK ns
20 MHz < fMCK 24 MHz 16/fMCK ns
16 MHz < fMCK 20 MHz 14/fMCK ns
8 MHz < fMCK 16 MHz 12/fMCK ns
4 MHz < fMCK 8 MHz 8/fMCK 16/fMCK ns
fMCK 4 MHz 6/fMCK 10/fMCK 10/fMCK ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V Note 5
24 MHz < fMCK 48/fMCK ns
20 MHz < fMCK 24 MHz 36/fMCK ns
16 MHz < fMCK 20 MHz 32/fMCK ns
8 MHz < fMCK 16 MHz 26/fMCK ns
4 MHz < fMCK 8 MHz 16/fMCK 16/fMCK ns
fMCK 4 MHz 10/fMCK 10/fMCK 10/fMCK ns
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. Transfer rate in the SNOOZE mode: MAX. 1 Mbps
5. Specify a value so as to satisfy VDD Vb.
Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the SIp pin and SCKp pin and the N-ch open drain output (VDD tolerance)
mode for the SOp pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode register g
(POMg).For VIH and VIL, see the DC characteristics with TTL input buffer selected
(Remarks are listed on the page after the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 366
Mar 31, 2014
(9) Communication between devices at different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V) (CSI mode)
(slave mode, SCKp ... External clock input) (2/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
SCKp
high-level width
low-level width
tKH2,
tKL2 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V tKCY2/2
-12 tKCY2/2
-50 tKCY2/2
-50 ns
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V tKCY2/2
-18 tKCY2/2
-50 tKCY2/2
-50 ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V Note 4 tKCY2/2
-50 tKCY2/2
-50 tKCY2/2
-50 ns
SIp setup time
(to SCKp)Note 5 tSIK2 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V 1/fMCK
+20 1/fMCK
+30 1/fMCK
+30 ns
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V 1/fMCK
+20 1/fMCK
+30 1/fMCK
+30 ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V Note 4 1/fMCK
+30 1/fMCK
+30 1/fMCK
+30 ns
SIp hold time
(from SCKp) Note 5 tKSI2 1/fMCK
+31 1/fMCK
+31 1/fMCK
+31 ns
Delay ti me
from SCKp
to SOp output Note 6
tKSO2 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 kΩ
2/fMCK
+120 2/fMCK
+573 2/fMCK
+573 ns
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
2/fMCK
+214 2/fMCK
+573 2/fMCK
+573 ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V Note 4,
Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ
2/fMCK
+573 2/fMCK
+573 2/fMCK
+573 ns
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. Specify a value so as to satisfy VDD Vb.
5. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. When DAPmn =
0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0, this specification refers to SCKp.
6. This indicates the time when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. When DAPmn =
0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0, this specification refers to SCKp.
Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the SIp pin and SCKp pin and the N-ch open drain output (VDD tolerance)
mode for the SOp pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg) and port output mode register g
(POMg).For VIH and VIL, see the DC characteristics with TTL input buffer selected
(Remarks are listed on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 367
Mar 31, 2014
CSI mode connection diagram (during communication between devices at different potential)
User's
device
<Slave>
SCKp
SIp
SOp
RL78
microcontroller
SCK
SO
SI
Rb
Vb
Remarks 1. Rb [Ω]: Communication line (SOp) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SOp) load
capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage
2. p: CSI number (p = 00, 10, 20), m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00, 10, 20),
g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 0, 1)
3. f
MCK: Serial array unit operating clock frequency
(Operation clock to be set by the CKSmn bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn). m: Unit number, n:
Channel number (mn = 00, 10, 20))
4. The AC characteristics of serial array units communicating with a device at different potential in CSI
mode is observed at VIH and VIL below.
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V
2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V, 2.3 V Vb 2.7 V: VIH = 2.0 V, VIL = 0.5 V
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V, 1.6 V Vb 2.0 V: VIH = 1.5 V, VIL = 0.32 V
5. CSI01, CSI11, and CSI21 cannot communicate with a device at different potential. Use other CSI
channels for communication between devices at different potential.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 368
Mar 31, 2014
CSI mode serial transfer timing: slave mode (during communication between devices at different potential)
(when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1)
SIp
SOp
t
KCY2
t
KL2
t
KH2
t
SIK2
t
KSI2
Input data
t
KSO2
Output data
SCKp
CSI mode serial transfer timing: slave mode (during communication between devices at different potential)
(when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0)
SIp
SOp
t
KCY2
t
KL2
t
KH2
t
SIK2
t
KSI2
Input data
t
KSO2
Output data
SCKp
Remarks 1. p: CSI number (p = 00, 10, 20), m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00, 10, 20),
g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 0, 1)
2. CSI21 cannot communicate with a device at different potential. Use other CSI channels for
communication between devices at different potential.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 369
Mar 31, 2014
(10) Communication between devices at different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V) (simplified I2C mode) (1/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
SCLr clock
frequency fSCL 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
1000
Note 4 300Note 4 300 Note 4 kHz
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
1000
Note 4 300Note 4 300 Note 4 kHz
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.8 kΩ
400Note 4 300Note 4 300Note 4 kHz
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
400Note 4 300Note 4 300Note 4 kHz
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V Note 5,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ
300Note 4 300Note 4 300Note 4 kHz
Hold time
when SCLr = L tLOW 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
475 1550 1550 ns
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
475 1550 1550 ns
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.8 kΩ
1150 1550 1550 ns
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
1150 1550 1550 ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V Note 5,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ
1550 1550 1550 ns
Hold tim e
when SCLr = H tHIGH 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
245 610 610 ns
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
200 610 610 ns
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.8 kΩ
675 610 610 ns
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
600 610 610 ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V Note 5,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ
610 610 610 ns
(Notes are listed on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 370
Mar 31, 2014
(10) Communication between devices at different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V) (simplified I2C mode) (2/2)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions HS Note 1 LS Note 2 LV Note 3 Unit
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
Data se tu p time
(for reception)
tSU:DAT 4.0 V VDD 5.5V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
1/fMCK
+135
Note 6
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
ns
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
1/fMCK
+135
Note 6
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
ns
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.8 kΩ
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
ns
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V Note 5,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
1/fMCK
+190
Note 6
ns
Data hold time
(for transmissi on)
tHD:DAT 4.0 V VDD 5.5V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
0 305 0 305 0 305 ns
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
0 305 0 305 0 305 ns
4.0 V VDD 5.5 V,
2.7 V Vb 4.0 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.8 kΩ
0 355 0 355 0 355 ns
2.7 V VDD 4.0 V,
2.3 V Vb 2.7 V,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 kΩ
0 355 0 355 0 355 ns
1.8 V VDD < 3.3 V,
1.6 V Vb 2.0 V Note 5,
Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 5.5 kΩ
0 405 0 405 0 405 ns
Notes 1. HS is condition of HS (high-speed main) mode.
2. LS is condition of LS (low-speed main) mode.
3. LV is condition of LV (low-voltage main) mode.
4. The value must also be fCLK/4 or lower.
5. Specify a value so as to satisfy VDD Vb.
6. Set the fMCK value so as not to exceed the hold time when SCLr = “L” and SCLr = “H”.
Caution Select the TTL input buffer and the N-ch open drain output (VDD tolerance) mode for the SDAr pin and the
N-ch open drain output (VDD tolerance) mode for the SCLr pin by using port input mode register g (PIMg)
and port output mode register g (POMg).For VIH and VIL, see the DC characteristics with TTL input buffer
selected
(Remarks are listed on the next page.)
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 371
Mar 31, 2014
Simplified I2C mode connection diagram (during communication between devices at different potential)
SDAr
SCLr
SDA
SCL
User’s device
V
b
R
b
V
b
R
b
RL78/G1E
Simplified I2C mode serial transfer timing (during communication between devices at different potential)
SDAr
tLOW tHIGH
tHD:DAT
SCLr
tSU:DAT
1/fSCL
Remarks 1. Rb [Ω]: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr)
load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage
2. r: IIC number (r = 00, 10, 20), g: PIM and POM numbers (g = 0, 1)
3. f
MCK: Serial array unit operating clock frequency
(Operation clock to be set by the CKSmn bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn).
m: Unit number, n: Channel number (mn = 00, 01, 02, 10))
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 372
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 5 Analog block characteristics
5. 2. 5. 1 A/D converter characteristics
Division of A/D Converter Characteristics
Reference voltage
Input channel
Reference volt age (+) = AVREFP
Reference voltage (-) = AVREFM
Reference volt age (+) = AVDD
Reference voltage (-) = AVSS
Reference voltage (+)
= Internal refrence volt age
Reference voltage (-) = AVSS
High-accuracy channe;
ANI0 to ANI4
(input buffer power supply: AV DD)
See 5. 2. 5. 1 (1)
See 5. 2. 5. 1 (2)
See 5. 2. 5. 1 (3) See 5. 2. 5. 1 (6)
Normal channel;
ANI16 to ANI18, ANI20 to ANI26,
ANI28, ANI30
(input buffer power supply: VDD)
See 5. 2. 5. 1 (4) See 5. 2. 5. 1 (5)
Internal ref erence vol tage,
temperature sensor output
See 5. 2. 5. 1 (4) See 5. 2. 5. 1 (5)
See the section shown above for the electrical specifications depending on both input channel and reference voltage.
(1) When reference voltage (+) = AVREFP/ANI0 (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 1), reference voltage () = AVREFM/ANI1
(ADREFM = 1), target for conversion: ANI2 to ANI4
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V, 2.7 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V, AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V, AVSS = 0 V, Reference
voltage (+) = AVREFP, Reference voltage () = AVREFM = 0 V, HALT mode)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Resolution RES 12 bit
Overall errorNotes 1, 2, 3 AINL 12-bit resolution ±1.7 ±3.3 LSB
Conversion time t CONV ADTYP = 0, 12-bit resolution 3.375
μ
s
Zero-scal e errorNot es 1, 2, 3 EZS 12-bit resolution ±1.3 ±3.2 LSB
Full-scale error Notes 1, 2, 3 EFS 12-bit resolution ±0.7 ±2.9 LSB
Integral lineari t y error Notes 1, 2, 3 ILE 12-bit resolution ±1.0 ±1.4 LSB
Differential linearity errorNot es 1, 2, 3 DLE 12-bit resolution ±0.9 ±1.2 LSB
Analog input voltage VAIN 0 AVREFP V
Notes 1. TYP. Value is the average value at AVDD = AVREFP = 3 V and TA = 25°C. MAX. value is the average value ±3
σ
at normalized distribution.
2. These values are the results of characteristic evaluation and are not checked for shipment.
3. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).
Cautions 1. Route the wiring so that noise will not be superimposed on each power line and ground line, and
insert a capacitor to suppress noise.
In addition, separate the reference voltage line of AVREFP from the other power lines to keep it free
from the influences of noise.
2. During A/D conversion, keep a pulse, such as a digital signal, that abruptly changes its level from
being input to or output from the pins adjacent to the converter pins and P20 to P27.
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 373
Mar 31, 2014
(2) When reference voltage (+) = AVREFP/ANI0 (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 1), reference voltage (–) = AVREFM/ANI1
(ADREFM = 1), target for conversion: ANI2 to ANI4 (ANI pins that use AVDD as their power source)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V, AVDD VDD, AVREFP AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V,
AVSS = 0 V, reference voltage (+) = AVREFP, reference voltage () = AVREFM = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Resolution RES 2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 8 12 bi t
1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 8 10Note 1
1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 8Note 2
Overall errorNote 3 AINL 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±6.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±5.0
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±2.5
Conversion time tCONV ADTYP = 0,
12-bit resol ution
2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 3.375
μ
s
ADTYP = 0,
10-bit resol utionNote 1
1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 6.75
ADTYP = 0,
8-bit resol utionNote 2
1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 13.5
ADTYP = 1,
8-bit resol ution
2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 2. 5625
1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 5.125
1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 10.25
Zero-scale
errorNotes 3
EZS 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±4.5 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±4.5
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±2.0
Full-scale
errorNotes 3
EFS 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±4.5 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±4.5
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±2.0
Integral lineari ty
errorNote 3
ILE 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±2.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±1.5
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±1.0
Differential
linearity error Note 3
DLE 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±1.5 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±1.5
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±1.0
Analog input
voltage
VAIN 0 AVREFP V
Notes 1. The lower 2 bits of the ADCR register cannot be used.
2. The lower 4 bits of the ADCR register cannot be used.
3. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 374
Mar 31, 2014
(3) When reference voltage (+) = AVDD (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 0), reference voltage (–) = AVSS (ADREFM = 0),
target for conversion: ANI0 to ANI4 (ANI pins that use AVDD as their power source)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V, AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V, AVSS = 0 V, reference voltage (+) =
AVDD, reference voltage () = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Resolution RES 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V 8 12 bit
1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V 8 10Note 1
1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V 8Note 2
Overall errorNote 3 A INL 12-bit res ol uti on 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V ±7.5 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V ±5.5
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V ±3.0
Conversion time tCONV ADTYP = 0, 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V 3.375
μ
s
ADTYP = 0, 10-bit resolutionNote 1 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V 6. 75
ADTYP = 0, 8-bit resolutionNote 2 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V 13.5
ADTYP = 1, 8-bit resolution 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V 2.5625
1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V 5.125
1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V 10.25
Zero-scale
errorNotes 3
EZS 12-bit resolution 2. 4 V AVDD 3.6 V ±6.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V ±5.0
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V ±2.5
Full-scale
errorNotes 3
EFS 12-bit resolution 2. 4 V AVDD 3.6 V ±6.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V ±5.0
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V ±2.5
Integral lineari ty
errorNote 3
ILE 12-bi t resolution 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V ±3.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V ±2.0
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V ±1.5
Differential
linearity error Note 3
DLE 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V ±2.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V ±2.0
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V ±1.5
Analog input
voltage
VAIN 0 AVDD V
Notes 1. The lower 2 bits of the ADCR register cannot be used.
2. The lower 4 bits of the ADCR register cannot be used.
3. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 375
Mar 31, 2014
(4) When reference voltage (+) = AVREFP/ANI0 (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 1), reference voltage (–) = AVREFM/ANI1
(ADREFM = 1), target for conversion: ANI16 to ANI18, ANI20 to ANI26, ANI28, and ANI30 (ANI pins that use VDD as
their power source), interanal reference voltage, temperature sensor output voltage
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V, AVREFP AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V, AVSS = 0 V,
reference voltage (+) = AVREFP, reference voltage () = AVREFM = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Resolution RES 2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 8 12 bit
1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 8 10Note 1
1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 8Note 2
Overall errorNote 3 A INL 12-bi t resolution 2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±7.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±5.5
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±3.0
Conversion time tCONV ADTYP = 0,
12-bit resol ution
2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 4.125
μ
s
ADTYP = 0,
10-bit resol utionNote 1
1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 9.5
ADTYP = 0,
8-bit resol utionNote 2
1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 57.5
ADTYP = 1,
8-bit resol ution
2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 3.3125
1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 7.875
1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V 54.25
Zero-scal e errorNot es 3 E Z S 12-bit resolution 2. 4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±5.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±5.0
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±2.5
Full-scale error Notes 3 EFS 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±5.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±5.0
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±2.5
Integral lineari ty
errorNote 3
ILE 12-bi t resolution 2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±3.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±2.0
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±1.5
Differential linearity
errorNote 3
DLE 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±2.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±2.0
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVREFP AVDD 3.6 V ±1.5
Analog input voltage VAIN 0 AVREFP
and
VDD
V
Intenal referenc e vol tage
(2.4 V VDD 5.5 V, HS (high-speed main) mode)
VBGR Note 4 V
Temperature sensor output voltage
(2.4 V VDD 5.5 V, HS (high-speed main) mode)
VTMPS25 Note 4 V
Notes 1. The lower 2 bits of the ADCR register cannot be used.
2. The lower 4 bits of the ADCR register cannot be used.
3. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).
4. Refer to 5. 2. 5. 2 Temperature sensor, internal reference voltage output characteristics.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 376
Mar 31, 2014
(5) When reference voltage (+) = AVDD (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 0), reference voltage (–) = AVSS (ADREFM = 0),
target for conversion: ANI16 to ANI18, ANI20 to ANI26, ANI28, and ANI30 (ANI pins that use VDD as their power
source), interanal reference voltage, temperature sensor output voltage
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.6 V VDD 5.5 V, 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V, AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V, AVSS = 0 V, reference voltage (+) =
AVDD, reference voltage () = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Resolution RES 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V 8 12 bit
1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V 8 10Not e 1
1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V 8Note 2
Overall errorNote 3 AINL 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V ±8.5 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V ±6.0
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V ±3.5
Conversion time tCONV ADTYP = 0, 12-bit resolut i on 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V 4.125
μ
s
ADTYP = 0, 10-bit resolutionNote 1 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V 9.5
ADTYP = 0, 8-bit resolutionNote 2 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V 57.5
ADTYP = 1, 8-bit resolution 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V 3.3125
1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V 7.875
1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V 54.25
Zero-scal e errorNot es 3 EZS 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V ±8.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V ±5.5
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V ±3.0
Full-scale error Notes 3 EFS 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AVDD 3.6 V ±8.0 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V ±5.5
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V ±3.0
Integral lineari ty
errorNote 3
ILE 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AV DD 3.6 V ±3.5 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V ±2.5
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V ±1.5
Differential linearity
errorNote 3
DLE 12-bit resolution 2.4 V AV DD 3.6 V ±2.5 LSB
10-bit resol ution 1.8 V AVDD 3.6 V ±2.5
8-bit resol ution 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V ±2.0
Analog input voltage VAIN 0 AVDD
and
VDD
V
Intenal referenc e vol tage
(2.4 V VDD 5.5 V, HS (high-speed main) mode)
VBGR Note 4 V
Temperature sensor output voltage
(2.4 V VDD 5.5 V, HS (high-speed main) mode)
VTMPS25 Note 4 V
Notes 1. The lower 2 bits of the ADCR register cannot be used.
2. The lower 4 bits of the ADCR register cannot be used.
3. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).
4. Refer to 5. 2. 5. 2 Temperature sensor, internal reference voltage output characteristics.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 377
Mar 31, 2014
(6) W hen reference voltage (+) = internal reference voltage (1.45 V) (ADREFP1 = 1, ADREFP0 = 0), reference voltage (–
) = AVSS (ADREFM = 0), target for conversion: ANI0 to ANI4, ANI16 to ANI18, ANI20 to ANI26, ANI28, and ANI30
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 2.4 V VDD 5.5 V, 1.6 V AVDD 3.6 V, AVDD VDD, VSS = 0 V, AVSS = 0 V, reference voltage (+) =
internal reference voltage, reference voltage () = AVSS = 0 V, HS (high-speed main) mode)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Resolution RES 8 bit
Conversion time t CONV 8-bit resolution 16
μ
s
Zero-scal e errorNotes EZS 8-bit resolution ±4.0 LSB
Integral lineari t y error Note ILE 8-bit resolution ±2.0 LSB
Differential linearity errorNote DLE 8-bit resolution ±2.5 LSB
Reference voltage (+) AVREF(+) = internal reference voltage (VBGR) 1.38 1.45 1.5 V
Analog input voltage VAIN 0 VBGR V
Note Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 378
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 5. 2 Temperature sensor, internal reference voltage output characteristics
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 2.4 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, HS (high-speed main) mode)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Temperature sensor output voltage VTMPS25 ADS regis t er = 80H, TA = +25°C 1.05 V
Internal ref erence vol tage VBGR ADS register = 81H 1.38 1.45 1.5 V
Temperature coefficient FVTMPS Temperature sens or output voltage that
depends on the temperature
3.6 mV/°C
Operation stabilization wait time tAMP 10
μ
s
5. 2. 5. 3 POR circuit characteristics
(TA = 40 to +85°C, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Detection voltage VPOR When power supply voltage is rising 1.47 1.51 1.55 V
VPDR When power supply voltage is falling 1.46 1.50 1.54 V
Minimum pulse widthNote TPW 300
μ
s
Note This is the time required for the POR circuit to execute a reset when VDD falls below VPDR. When the
microcontroller enters STOP mode or if the main system clock (fMAIN) has been stop ped by setting bit 0
(HIOSTOP) and bit 7 (MSTOP) of the clock operation status control register (CSC), this is the time required for
the POR circuit to execute a reset before VDD rises to VPOR after having fallen below 0.7 V.
V
POR
T
PW
Supply voltage
(V
DD
V
POR
or 0.7 V
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 379
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 5. 4 LVD circuit characteristics
LVD detection voltage of reset mode and interrupt mode
(TA = 40 to +85°C, VPDR VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Detection
voltage
Supply volt age l evel VLVD10 When power supply voltage is rising 3.98 4. 06 4.14 V
When power supply volt age is falling 3.90 3.98 4.06 V
VLVD11 When power suppl y vol t age is rising 3.68 3.75 3.82 V
When power supply volt age is falling 3.60 3.67 3.74 V
VLVD12 When power suppl y vol t age is rising 3.07 3.13 3.19 V
When power supply volt age is falling 3.00 3.06 3.12 V
Minimum pulse width t LW 300
μ
s
Detection delay time 300
μ
s
LVD detection voltage of interrupt & reset mode
(TA = 40 to +85°C, VPDR VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Interrupt and
reset mode
VLVDB0 VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 0, 1
reset release when power supply voltage i s f alling
1.80 1.84 1.87 V
VLVDB3 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 0 Reset release voltage when
power supply volt age is ris i ng
3.07 3.13 3.19 V
Interrupt generating voltage when
power supply volt age is fal ling
3.00 3.06 3.12 V
VLVDC0 VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 1, 0
reset release when power supply voltage i s f alling
2.40 2.45 2.50 V
VLVDC3 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 0 Res et rel ease vol tage when
power supply volt age is ris i ng
3.68 3.75 3.82 V
Interrupt generating voltage when
power supply volt age is fal ling
3.60 3.67 3.74 V
VLVDD0 VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 1, 1
reset release when power supply voltage i s f alling
2.70 2.75 2.81 V
VLVDD3 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 0 Res et rel ease vol tage when
power supply volt age is ris i ng
3.98 4.06 4.14 V
Interrupt generating voltage when
power supply volt age is fal ling
3.90 3.98 4.06 V
Caution Set the detection voltage (VLVD) to be within the operating voltage range. The operating voltage range
depends on the setting of the user option byte (000C2H/010C2H). The following shows the operating
voltage range.
HS (high-speed main) mode: VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V@1 MHz to 32 MHz
VDD = 2.4 to 5.5 V@1 MHz to 16 MHz
LS (low-speed main) mode: VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V@1 MHz to 8 MHz
LV (low voltage main) mode: VDD = 1.6 to 5.5 V@1 MHz to 4 MHz
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 380
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 5. 5 Supply voltage rise slope characteristics
(TA = 40 to +85°C, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Supply volt age rise SV DD 54 V/ms
Caution Be sure to maintain the internal reset state until VDD reaches the operating voltage range specified in
5. 2. 3 AC Characteristics, by using the LVD circuit or external reset pin.
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 381
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 6 Data memory STOP mode low supply voltage data retention characteristics
(TA = 40 to +85°C, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Data retent i on suppl y voltage VDDDR 1.46Note 5.5 V
Note The value depends on the POR detection voltage. When the voltage drops, the data is retained before a POR
reset is effective, but data is n ot retaine d w hen a POR reset is effective.
VDDDR
VDD
STOP instruction execution
Standby release signal
(interrupt request)
STOP mode
Data retention mode
Operation mode
5. 2. 7 Flash memory programming characteristics
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
System clock frequency fCLK 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V 1 32 MHz
Number of code flash rewrites
Note 1, 2
Cerwr Retained for 20 years TA = 85°C Not e 3 1,000 time
s
Number of data flash rewrites
Note 1, 2
Retained for 1 year TA = 25°C Note 3 1,000,000
Retained for 5 years TA = 85°C Note 3 100,000
Retained for 20 years TA = 85°C No te 3 10,000
Notes 1. 1 erase + 1 write after the erase is regarded as 1 rewrite.
The retaining years are until next rewrite after the rewrite.
2. When using a flash memory programmer and a Renesas Electronics self programming library.
3. These are the characteristics of the flash memory and the results obtained from reliability testing by
Renesas Electronics Corporation.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 382
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 8 Dedicated flash memory programmer communication (UART)
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Transfer rat e When programming for fl ash memory 115.2 k 1 M bps
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 383
Mar 31, 2014
5. 2. 9 Timing specs for switching flash memory programming modes
(TA = 40 to +85°C, 1.8 V VDD 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
How long from when a external reset ends
until the initial communication settings are
specified
tSUINIT POR and LVD resets must end
before the external reset ends.
100 ms
How long from when the TOOL0 pin is placed
at the low level until a external reset ends
tSU PO R and LVD res ets must end
before the external reset ends.
10
μ
s
How long the TOOL0 pin must be kept at the
low level after a reset ends
(except flas h firm ware process i ng time)
tHD POR and LVD resets must end
before the external reset ends.
1 ms
RESET
TOOL0
(1) (2) (3) (4)
tSUINIT
723 µs+t
HD
process time
tSU
00H is received
(TOOLRxD, T OOLTxD mode)
<1> The low level is input to the TOOL0 pin.
<2> The external reset ends (POR and LVD resets must end before the external reset ends.).
<3> The TOOL0 pin is set to the high level.
<4> The flash memory programming mode is set by UART reception and the baud rate setting completes.
Remark t
SUINIT: The segment shows that it is necessary to finish specifying the initial communication settings within
100 ms from when the resets end.
t
SU: How long from when the TOOL0 pin is placed at the low level until a external reset ends.
t
HD: How long to keep the TOOL0 pin at the low level from when the external or internal resets end
(except flash firmware processing time).
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 384
Mar 31, 2014
5. 3 Electrical Specifications of Analog Block
5. 3. 1 Operating conditions of analog block
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP. MAX.
Power supply
voltage range
VDDOP AVDD1, AVDD2, AVDD3, DVDD 3.0 5.5 V
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 385
Mar 31, 2014
5. 3. 2 Supply current characteristics
(40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Supply
current
Istby11Note PC1 = 00H,
PC2 = 00H
TA = -40°C – 100 150 nA
TA = +25°C140 210 nA
TA = +50°C290 550 nA
TA = +85°C850 1850 nA
Im111Note PC1 = 47H (configurabl e am pl ifi ers Ch1 to Ch3 and D/A converters
Ch3 are operating)
PC2 = 00H, CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, DACRC = 00H
– 1.55 3.6 mA
Im112Note PC1 = F7H, PC2 = 13H (configurable ampl ifi ers Ch1 to Ch3, D/A
converters Ch1 to Ch4, gain adjustment am pl ifi er, variabl e output
voltage regulat or, reference voltage generator, and temperature
sensor are operating), CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, DACRC = 00H
– 3.4 7.6 mA
Im113Note PC1 = 7FH, PC2 = 0FH (configurable amplifi ers Ch1 t o Ch3, D/A
converters Ch1 to Ch4, low-pass filter, high-pass filter, variable
output volt age regulat or, reference voltage generator, and
temperature sensor are operating), CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, DACRC = 00H
– 4.5 11.0 mA
Im114Note PC1 = F7H, PC2 = 1FH (configurable amplifiers Ch1 t o Ch3, D/A
converters Ch1 to Ch4, general operational amplifier, low-pass filter,
high-pass filt er, gain adjustment amplifier, variable output voltage
regulator, ref erence voltage generator, and temperature sensor are
operating),
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, DACRC = 00H
– 4.5 11.3 mA
Im121Note PC1 = 47H (configurabl e am pl ifi ers Ch1 to Ch3 and D/A converters
Ch1 to Ch3 are operating),
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, DACRC = 00H
– 0.73 1.8 mA
Im122Note PC1 = F7H, PC2 = 13H (configurable ampl ifi ers Ch1 to Ch3, D/A
converters Ch1 to Ch4, gain adjustment am pl ifi er, variabl e output
voltage regulat or, reference voltage generator, and temperature
sensor are operating),
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, DACRC = 00H
– 2.6 5.8 mA
Im123Note PC1 = F7H, PC2 = 0FH (configurable amplifiers Ch1 t o Ch3, D/A
converters Ch1 to Ch4, low-pass filter, high-pass filter, variable
output volt age regulat or, reference voltage generator, and
temperature sens or are operating),
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, DACRC = 00H
– 3.7 9.2 mA
Im124Note PC1 = F7H, PC2 = 1FH (configurable amplifiers Ch1 t o Ch3, D/A
converters Ch1 to Ch4, low-pass filter, high-pass filter, gain
adjustment amplifi er, variable output voltage regulator, reference
voltage generator, and tem perat ure sensor are operat i ng),
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, DACRC = 00H
– 3.9 9.5 mA
(Note is listed on the next page.)
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 386
Mar 31, 2014
Note Total current flowing to internal power supply pins AVDD1, AVDD2, AVDD3, and DVDD. Current flowing through the
pull-up resistor is not included. The input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is fixed to AVDD1,
AVDD2, AVDD3 or DVDD, or AGND1, AGND2, AGND3, AGND4, or DGND is included. See the table below to
check the definition of those symbols of the current flowing.
Notes 1. CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
2. CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
Parameter Symbol
Analog function with power on
Configurable
amplifier Gain
adjustment
amplifier
D/A converter Low-
pass
filter
High-
pass
filter
Temperature
sensor
Variable
output
voltage
regulator
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4
Supply
current
Im111 Note 1 ON ON ON ON
Im112 Note 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Im113 Note 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Im114 Note1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Im121 Note 2 ON ON ON ON
Im122 Note 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Im123 Note 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Im124 Note 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 387
Mar 31, 2014
5. 3. 3 Electrical specifications of each block
5. 3. 3. 1 Configurable amplifier characteristics
(-40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN1 = VREFIN2 = VREFIN3 = 1.7 V, AMP1OF =
AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1, DAC1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF = 0, non-inverting amplifier) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Current
consumption Note
Icc00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0 330 720
μ
A
Icc01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1 175 390
μ
A
Icc10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0 125 275
μ
A
Icc11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1 55 120
μ
A
Input voltage VINL AGND1 - 0.1 V
VINH AVDD1 - 1.5 V
Output voltage VOUTL IOL = -200
μ
A – AGND1 + 0.02
AGN D 1 + 0. 06
V
VOUTH IOH = 200
μ
A AVDD1 - 0.06 AV DD1 - 0.02 V
Setting time tSET_AMP00 GCn = 00H (9.5 dB), CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 9
μ
s
tSET_AMP01 GCn = 00H (9. 5 dB), CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 18
μ
s
tSET_AMP10 GCn = 00H (9. 5 dB), CC1, CC0 = 1, 0, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 28
μ
s
tSET_AMP11 GCn = 00H (9. 5 dB), CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 71
μ
s
Gain bandwidth GBW00 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
GCn = 11H (40.1 dB)
– 2.3 MHz
GBW01 CL = 30 pF,CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
GCn = 11H (40.1 dB)
– 1.1 MHz
GBW10 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
GCn = 11H (40.1 dB)
– 0.71 MHz
GBW11 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
GCn = 11H (40.1 dB)
– 0.22 MHz
Equivalent i nput
noise
En00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40.1 dB)
– 64 nV/ Hz
En01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40.1 dB)
– 85 nV/ Hz
En10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40.1 dB)
– 107 nV/ Hz
En11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40.1 dB)
– 159 nV/ Hz
Note These are the values for one channel of configurable amplifier.
Remark n = 1 to 3
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 388
Mar 31, 2014
(-40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN1 = VREFIN2 = VREFIN3 = 1.7 V, AMP1OF =
AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1, DAC1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF = 0, non-inverting amplifier) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Input conversion
offset voltage
VOFF00 CC 1, CC0 = 0, 0, T A = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20.8 dB)
-7 – 7 mV
VOFF01 CC 1, CC0 = 0, 1, T A = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20.8 dB)
-10 – 10 mV
VOFF10 CC 1, CC0 = 1, 0, T A = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20.8 dB)
-10 – 10 mV
VOFF11 CC 1, CC0 = 1, 1, T A = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20.8 dB)
-12 – 12 mV
Input conversion
offset voltage
temperature
coefficient
VOTC ±6 –
μ
V/°C
Slew rate S R00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (9.5 dB)
– 0.68 V/
μ
s
SR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (9.5 dB)
– 0.35 V/
μ
s
SR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (9.5 dB)
– 0.25 V/
μ
s
SR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (9.5 dB)
– 0.09 V/
μ
s
Power supply
rejection ratio
PSRR00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, GCn = 00H (9.5 dB),
f = 1 kHz
– 70 dB
PSRR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, GCn = 00H (9.5 dB),
f = 1 kHz
– 68 dB
PSRR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0, GCn = 00H (9.5 dB),
f = 1 kHz
– 62 dB
PSRR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, GCn = 00H (9.5 dB),
f = 1 kHz
– 50 dB
Gain setting error GAIN_Accu1 TA = 25°C -0.6 0.6 dB
GAIN_Accu2 TA = –40 to 85°C -1.0 1.0 dB
Remark n = 1 to 3
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 389
Mar 31, 2014
(-40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN1 = VREFIN2 = VREFIN3 = 1.7 V, AMP1OF =
AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1, DAC1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF = 0, inverting amplifier) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Current
consumption Note
Icc00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0 330 720
μ
A
Icc01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1 175 390
μ
A
Icc10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0 125 275
μ
A
Icc11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1 55 120
μ
A
Input voltage VINL AGND1 - 0.1 V
VINH AVDD1 - 1.5 V
Output voltage VOUTL I OL = -200
μ
A – AGND1 + 0.02
AGN D 1 + 0. 06
V
VOUTH IOH = 200
μ
A AVDD1 - 0.06 A V DD1 - 0.02 V
Settling time tSET_AMP00 GCn = 00H (6 dB), CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 9
μ
s
tSET_AMP01 GCn = 00H (6 dB), CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 18
μ
s
tSET_AMP10 GCn = 00H (6 dB), CC1, CC0 = 1, 0, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 28
μ
s
tSET_AMP11 GCn = 00H (6 dB), CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 71
μ
s
Gain bandwidth GBW00 CL = 30 pF,CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 1.5 MHz
GBW01 CL = 30 pF,CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 0.9 MHz
GBW10 CL = 30 pF,CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 0.67 MHz
GBW11 CL = 30 pF,CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 0.22 MHz
Equivalent i nput
noise
En00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 63 nV/ Hz
En01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 85 nV/ Hz
En10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 105 nV/ Hz
En11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 150 nV/ Hz
Note These are the values for one channel of configurable amplifier.
Remark n = 1 to 3
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 390
Mar 31, 2014
(-40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN1 = VREFIN2 = VREFIN3 = 1.7 V, AMP1OF =
AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1, DAC1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF = 0, inverting amplifier) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Input conversion
offset voltage
VOFF00 CC1, C C0 = 0, 0, TA = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20 dB)
-7 – 7 mV
VOFF01 CC1, C C0 = 0, 1, TA = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20 dB)
-10 – 10 mV
VOFF10 CC1, C C0 = 1, 0, TA = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20 dB)
-10 – 10 mV
VOFF11 CC1, C C0 = 1, 1, TA = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20 dB)
-12 – 12 mV
Input conversion
offset voltage
temperature
coefficient
VOTC ±6 –
μ
V/°C
Slew rate SR00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (6 dB)
– 0.68 V/
μ
s
SR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (6 dB)
– 0.35 V/
μ
s
SR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (6 dB)
– 0.25 V/
μ
s
SR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (6 dB)
– 0.09 V/
μ
s
Power supply
rejection ratio
PSRR00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0 GCn = 00H (6 dB),
f = 1 kHz
– 70 dB
PSRR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1 GCn = 00H (6 dB),
f = 1 kHz
– 68 dB
PSRR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0 GCn = 00H (6 dB),
f = 1 kHz
– 62 dB
PSRR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1 GCn = 00H (6 dB),
f = 1 kHz
– 50 dB
Gain setting error GAIN_Accu1 TA = 25°C -0.6 – 0.6 dB
GAIN_Accu2 TA = –40 to 85°C -1.0 – 1.0 dB
Remark n = 1 to 3
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 391
Mar 31, 2014
(-40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN = VREFIN2 = VREFIN3 = 1.7 V,
AMP1OF = AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1, DAC1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF = 0, differential amplifier) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Current
consumption Note
Icc00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0 330 720
μ
A
Icc01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1 175 390
μ
A
Icc10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0 125 275
μ
A
Icc11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1 55 120
μ
A
Input voltage VINL AGND1 - 0.1 V
VINH AVDD1 - 1.5 V
Output voltage VOUTL IOL = -200
μ
A – AGND1 + 0.02
AGND1+ 0.06
V
VOUTH IOH = 200
μ
A AVDD1- 0.06 AVDD1 - 0.02 V
Settling time tSET_AMP00 GCn = 00H (6 dB), CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 9
μ
s
tSET_AMP01 GCn = 00H (6 dB), CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 18
μ
s
tSET_AMP10 GCn = 00H (6 dB), CC1, CC0 = 1, 0, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 28
μ
s
tSET_AMP11 GCn = 00H (6 dB), CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 71
μ
s
Gain bandwidth GBW00 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 0, 0,
GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 1.5 MHz
GBW01 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 0, 1,
GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 1.0 MHz
GBW10 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 1, 0,
GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 0.67 – MHz
GBW11 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 1, 1,
GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 0.22 – MHz
Equivalent i nput
noise
En00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 63 – nV/ Hz
En01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 85 – nV/ Hz
En10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 106 nV/ Hz
En11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 11H (40 dB)
– 160 nV/ Hz
Note These are the values for one channel of configurable amplifier.
Remark n = 1 to 3
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 392
Mar 31, 2014
(-40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN = VREFIN2 = VREFIN3 = 1.7 V,
AMP1OF = AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1, DAC1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF = 0, differential amplifier) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Input conversion
offset voltage
VOFF00 C C1, CC0 = 0, 0, TA = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20 dB)
-7 – 7 mV
VOFF01 C C1, CC0 = 0, 1, TA = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20 dB)
-10 – 10 mV
VOFF10 C C1, CC0 = 1, 0, TA = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20 dB)
-10 – 10 mV
VOFF11 C C1, CC0 = 1, 1, TA = 25°C
GCn = 07H (20 dB)
-12 – 12 mV
Input conversion
offset voltage
temperature
coefficient
VOTC ±6 –
μ
V/°C
Slew rate SR00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (6 dB)
– 0.68 – V/
μ
s
SR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (6 dB)
– 0.35 – V/
μ
s
SR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0 CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (6 dB)
– 0.25 – V/
μ
s
SR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (6 dB)
– 0.09 – V/
μ
s
Common mode
rejection ratio
CMRR00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, GCn = 11H (40 dB),
f = 1 kHz
– 84 – dB
CMRR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, GCn = 11H (40 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 82 – dB
CMRR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0, GCn = 11H (40 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 80 – dB
CMRR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, GCn = 11H (40 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 76 – dB
Power supply
rejection ratio
PSRR00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, GCn = 00H (6 dB),
f = 1 kHz
– 70 – dB
PSRR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, GCn = 00H (6 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 68 – dB
PSRR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0, GCn = 00H (6 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 62 – dB
PSRR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, GCn = 00H (6 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 50 – dB
Gain setting error GAIN_Accu1 T A = 25°C -0.6 0.6 dB
GAIN_Accu2 TA = –40 to 85°C -1.0 1.0 dB
Remark n = 1 to 3
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 393
Mar 31, 2014
(-40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN1 = VREFIN2 = VREFIN3 = 1.7 V, AMP1OF =
AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1, DAC1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF = 0, transimpedance amplifier) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Current
consumption Note Icc00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0 330 720
μ
A
Icc01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1 175 390
μ
A
Icc10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0 125 275
μ
A
Icc11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1 55 120
μ
A
Input current II NL GCn = 0FH (Rfb = 640 kΩ) (10) nA
Output voltage VOUTL IOL= -200
μ
A – AGND1 + 0.02
AGN D 1 + 0. 06
V
VOUTH IOH = 200
μ
A AVDD1- 0.06 AVDD1 - 0.02 V
Settling time tSET_AMP00 GCn = 00H (20 kΩ), CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
CL = 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 9
μ
s
tSET_AMP01 GCn = 00H (20 kΩ), CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
CL = 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 18
μ
s
tSET_AMP10 GCn = 00H (20 kΩ), CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
CL = 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 28
μ
s
tSET_AMP11 GCn = 00H (20 kΩ), CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
CL = 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 71
μ
s
Current-to-voltage
conversion gai n
bandwidth
GBW00_0 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ) – 1.3 MHz
GBW00_1 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
GCn = 0FH (Rfb = 640 kΩ) – 1.0 MHz
GBW01_0 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ) – 0.79 MHz
GBW01_1 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
GCn = 0FH (Rfb = 640 kΩ) – 0.51 MHz
GBW10_0 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ) – 0.58 MHz
GBW10_1 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
GCn = 0FH (Rfb = 640 kΩ) – 0.31 MHz
GBW11_0 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ) – 0.25 MHz
GBW11_1 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
GCn = 0FH (Rfb = 640 kΩ) – 0.09 MHz
Equivalent i nput
noise En00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ) – 66 nV/ Hz
En01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ) – 90 nV/ Hz
En10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ) – 116 nV/ Hz
En11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
f = 1 kHz, GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ) – 193 nV/ Hz
Note These are the values for one channel of configurable amplifier.
Remark 1. In the ratings column, values in parentheses are the target design values and therefore are not tested for
shipment.
2. n = 1 to 3
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 394
Mar 31, 2014
(-40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN1 = VREFIN2 = VREFIN3 = 1.7 V, AMP1OF =
AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1, DAC1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF = 0, transimpedance amplifier) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Input conversion
offset voltage
VOFF00 C C1, CC0 = 0, 0, TA = 25°C,
GCn = 07H (Rfb = 80 kΩ)
-7 – 7 mV
VOFF01 C C1, CC0 = 0, 1, TA = 25°C,
GCn = 07H (Rfb = 80 kΩ)
-10 – 10 mV
VOFF10 C C1, CC0 = 1, 0, TA = 25°C,
GCn = 07H (Rfb = 80 kΩ)
-10 – 10 mV
VOFF11 C C1, CC0 = 1, 1, TA = 25°C,
GCn = 07H (Rfb = 80 kΩ)
-12 – 12 mV
Input conversion offset
voltage tem pe rat ur e
coefficient
VOTC ±6 – μV/°C
Slew rate SR00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ)
– 0.68 V/
μ
s
SR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ)
– 0.35 V/
μ
s
SR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ)
– 0.25 V/
μ
s
SR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, CL = 30 pF,
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ)
– 0.09 V/
μ
s
Power supply
rejection ratio
PSRR00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0,
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ)
– 70 dB
PSRR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1,
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ)
– 68 dB
PSRR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0,
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ)
– 62 dB
PSRR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1,
GCn = 00H (Rfb = 20 kΩ)
– 50 dB
Rfb setti ng error Rfb_Accu1 TA = 25°C -25 25 %
Rfb_Accu2 TA = –40 to 85°C -35 35 %
Remark n = 1 to 3
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 395
Mar 31, 2014
(-40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN1 = VREFIN2 = VREFIN3 = 1.7 V, AMP1OF =
AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1, DAC1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF = 0, GC1 = GC2 = 03H, instrumentation amplifier) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Current
consumption Icc00 AMP1OF = AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0 – 970 2,150
μ
A
Icc01 AMP1OF = AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 1 – 510 1,150
μ
A
Icc10 AMP1OF = AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1,
CC1, CC0 = 1, 0 – 350 780
μ
A
Icc11 AMP1OF = AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1,
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1 – 140 330
μ
A
Input voltage VINL A GND1 - 0.1 V
VINH AVDD1 - 1.5 V
Output voltage VOUTL I OL = -200
μ
A – AGND1 + 0.02
AGN D 1 + 0. 06
V
VOUTH IOH = 200
μ
A AVDD1- 0.06 AVDD1 - 0.02 V
Settling time tSET_AMP00 GC3 = 00H (20 dB), CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 9
μ
s
tSET_AMP01 GC3 = 00H (20 dB), CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 18
μ
s
tSET_AMP10 GC3 = 00H (20 dB), CC1, CC0 = 1, 0, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 28
μ
s
tSET_AMP11 GC3 = 00H (20 dB), CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, CL
= 30 pF, output voltage = 1VPP, output
convergence voltage VPP = 999 mV
– – 71
μ
s
Gain bandwidth GBW00 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
GC3 = 11H (54 dB) – 1.82 MHz
GBW01 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
GC3 = 11H (54 dB) – 1.03 MHz
GBW10 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
GC3 = 11H (54 dB) – 0.69 MHz
GBW11 CL = 30 pF, CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
GC3 = 11H (54 dB) – 0.22 MHz
Equivalent i nput
noise En00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
GC3 = 11H (54 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 90 nV/ Hz
En01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
GC3 = 11H (54 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 119 nV/ Hz
En10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
GC3 = 11H (54 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 150 nV/ Hz
En11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
GC3 = 11H (54 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 260 nV/ Hz
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 396
Mar 31, 2014
(-40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN1 = VREFIN2 = VREFIN3 = 1.7 V, AMP1OF =
AMP2OF = AMP3OF = 1, DAC1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF = 0, GC1 = GC2 = 03H, instrumentation amplifier) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Input conversion
offset voltage VOFF00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, TA = 25°C,
GC3 = 00H (20 dB) -7 – 7 mV
VOFF01 CC1, CC 0 = 0, 1, TA = 25°C,
GC3 = 00H (20 dB) -10 – 10 mV
VOFF10 CC1, CC 0 = 1, 0, TA = 25°C,
GC3 = 00H (20 dB) -10 – 10 mV
VOFF11 CC1, CC 0 = 1, 1, TA = 25°C,
GC3 = 00H (20 dB) -12 – 12 mV
Input conversion
offset voltage
temperature
coefficient
VOTC ±6.0 –
μ
V/°C
Slew rate SR00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0, CL = 30 pF,
GC3 = 00H (20 dB) – 0.68 V/
μ
s
SR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1, CL = 30 pF,
GC3 = 00H (20 dB) – 0.35 V/
μ
s
SR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0, CL = 30 pF,
GC3 = 00H (20 dB) – 0.25 V/
μ
s
SR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1, CL = 30 pF,
GC3 = 00H (20 dB) – 0.09 V/
μ
s
Common mode
rejection ratio CMRR00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
GC3 = 11H (54 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 86 dB
CMRR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
GC3 = 11H (54 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 84 dB
CMRR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
GC3 = 11H (54 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 82 dB
CMRR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
GC3 = 11H (54 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 76 dB
Power supply
rejection ratio PSRR00 CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
GC3 = 00H (20 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 70 dB
PSRR01 CC1, CC0 = 0, 1
GC3 = 00H (20 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 68 dB
PSRR10 CC1, CC0 = 1, 0
GC3 = 00H (20 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 62 dB
PSRR11 CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
GC3 = 00H (20 dB)
f = 1 kHz
– 50 dB
Gain setting error GAI N_Accu1 TA = 25°C -0.6 – 0.6 dB
GAIN_Accu2 TA = –40 to 85°C -1.0 1.0 dB
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 397
Mar 31, 2014
5. 3. 3. 2 Gain adjustment amplifier characteristics
(1) 64-pin products
(40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN4 = 1.7 V, GAINOF = 1, DAC4OF = 0)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Current
consumption
IccA 530 1,300 μA
Input voltage VINL AGND2 - 0.1 V
VINH AVDD1 - 0.05 V
Output voltage VOUTL1 IOL = -100
μ
A –
AGN D 2 + 0. 02
AGND2 + 0.05 V
VOUTH1 IOH = 100
μ
A AVDD1 - 0.05 AVDD1 - 0.02 V
Gain bandwidth
GBW2 CL = 30 pF, GC4 = 11H (40 dB) 0.86 MHz
Input conversion
offset voltage
VOFF GC4 = 00H (6 dB), TA = 25°C,
GAINAMP_IN = 2.5 V
-30 – 30 mV
Input conversion
offset voltage
temperature
coefficient
VOTC2 CLK_SYNCH = L, GAINAMP_OUT pin ±18 –
μ
V/°C
Slew rate
SR CL = 30 pF 0.9 V/
μ
s
Equivalent i nput
noise
En_Gain f = 1 kHz, GC4 = 11H (40 dB)
– 700 nV/ Hz
Power supply
rejection ratio
PSRR2 f = 1 kHz, GC4 = 00H (6 dB) 45 dB
Gain setting error GAIN_Accu1
TA = 25°C -0.6 – 0.6 dB
GAIN_Accu2
TA = –40 to 85°C -1.0 1.0 dB
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 398
Mar 31, 2014
(2) 80-pin products
(40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, VREFIN4 = 1.7 V, GAINOF = 1, DAC4OF = 0)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Current
consumption
IccA 530 1,300 μA
Input voltage VINL AGND2 - 0.1 V
VINH AVDD1 - 0.05 V
Output voltage V O UTL1 IO L = -100
μ
A, GAINAMP_OUT pin
AGN D 2 + 0. 02
AGND2 + 0.05 V
VOUTH1 IOH = 100
μ
A, GAINAMP_OUT pin AVDD1 - 0.05 AVDD1 - 0.02 V
VOUTL2 IOL = -100
μ
A, SYNCH_OUT pin
AGN D 2 + 0. 03
AGND2 + 0.06 V
VOUTH2 IOH = 100
μ
A, SYNCH_OUT pin A V DD1 - 0.06 A VDD1 - 0.03 V
Gain bandwidth GBW 1 CLK_S YNCH = H, SYNCH_OUT pin
CL = 30 pF, GC4 = 11H (40 dB)
– 1.38 MHz
GBW2 CLK_SY NCH = L, SYNCH_OUT or
GAINAMP_OUT pin
CL = 30 pF, GC4 = 11H (40 dB)
– 0.86 MHz
Input conversion
offset voltage
VOFF GC4 = 00H (6 dB), TA = 25°C,
GAINAMP_IN = 2.5 V
-30 – 30 mV
Input conversion
offset voltage
temperature
coefficient
VOTC1 CLK_SYNCH = H, SYNCH_OUT pin ±6 –
μ
V/°C
VOTC2 CLK_SYNCH = L, GAINAMP_OUT pin ±18 –
μ
V/°C
Slew rate S R CL = 30 pF 0.9 V /
μ
s
Equivalent i nput
noise
En_Gain f = 1 kHz, GC4 = 11H (40 dB)
GAINAMP_OUT pin
– 700 nV/ Hz
Power supply
rejection ratio
PSRR1 CLK_SYNCH = H,
SYNCH_OUT pin,
f = 1 kHz, GC4 = 00H (6 dB)
– 60 dB
PSRR2 CLK_SYNCH = L,
SYNCH_OUT or GAINAMP_OUT pin,
f = 1 kHz, GC4 = 00H (6 dB)
– 45 dB
Gain setting error GAIN_Accu1
TA = 25°C -0.6 – 0.6 dB
GAIN_Accu2
TA = –40 to 85°C -1.0 1.0 dB
CLK_SYNCH
low-level
input volt age
VILCLK_SYNCH 0.3 × AVDD1 V
CLK_SYNCH
high-level
input volt age
VIHCLK_SYNCH 0.7 × AVDD1 V
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 399
Mar 31, 2014
5. 3. 3. 3 D/A converter characteristics
(40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = DVDD = 5.0 V, DAC1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF = DAC4OF = 1)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN. TYP. MAX.
DAC ALL ON current
consumption 1
I_DAC_ON1 DA C1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF =
DAC4OF = 1, VRB1, VRB0 = 0, 0
– 1400 2950
μ
A
DAC ALL ON current
consumption 2
I_DAC_ON2 DA C1OF = DAC2OF = DAC3OF =
DAC4OF = 1, VRB1, VRB0 0, 0
– 1620 3360
μ
A
Buffer AMP ON current
consumption 1 Note 1
I_DAC_Buff1 DACxOF = 1, VRB1, VRB0 = 0, 0
(x = 1, 2, 3, 4)
– 390 820 μA
Buffer AMP ON current
consumption 2 Note 1
I_DAC_Buff2 DACxOF = 1, VRB1, VRB0 0, 0
(x = 1, 2, 3, 4)
– 610 1320 μA
DAC1 GAMP ON
current consumption
I_DAC_AMP1 DA C1OF = 1 140 320 μA
DAC2 GAMP ON
current consumption
I_DAC_AMP2 DA C2OF = 1 120 265 μA
DAC3 GAMP ON
current consumption
I_DAC_AMP3 DA C3OF = 1 120 265 μA
DAC4 GAMP ON
current consumption
I_DAC_AMP4 DA C4OF = 1 630 1370 μA
Resolution
RES – – 8 bit
Settling time tSET output volt age = 1 Vpp
output convergence vol tage Vpp = 990 mV
– – 100
μ
s
Differential non-linearity
error Note 2
DNL VRT1 = VRT0 = 0,
VRB1 = VRB0 = 0
–2 – 2 LSB
Integral non-l i neari ty
error
INL VRT1 = VRT0 = 0,
VRB1 = VRB0 = 0
–2 – 2 LSB
Notes 1. Buffer amplifier is powered on when one of DACx (x = 1, 2, 3, 4) is powered on at least. For example, the
current consumption (I_EXAMPLE) is shown as a following equation when “DAC1OF=DAC2OF=1”, and “VRB1,
VRB0=0, 0”. I_EXAMPLE = I_DAC_Buff1 + I_DAC_AMP1 + I_DAC_AMP2
2. Guaranteed mono ton ic.
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 400
Mar 31, 2014
5. 3. 3. 4 Low-pass filter characteristics
(40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = AVDD4 = DVDD = 5.0 V, LPFOF = 1)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN. TYP. MAX.
Current cons umpti on IccA 800 1800
μ
A
Input volt age VILLPF AGND4 +0.2 V
VIHLPF AVDD3 -1. 5 V
Output voltage VOLLPF IOL = –200
μ
A AG ND4 +0. 22 AGND4 +0.25 V
VOHLPF IOH = 200
μ
A AVDD3 -1.55 AV DD3 -1.52 V
Cutoff frequenc y fc1 fCLK_LPF = 2 kHz – 9 – Hz
fc2 fCLK_LPF = 1 MHz 4.5 kHz
CLK_LPF
low-level
input volt age
VILCLK_LPF
0.3 × AVDD3 V
CLK_LPF
high-level
input volt age
VIHCLK_LPF 0.7 × AVDD3 V
CLK_LPF
Input frequency
fCLK_LPF 2 1000 kHz
CLK_LPF
Input low-level-width
Input high-l evel -width
tILW_LPF
tIHW_LPF
200 ns
Clock T iming
CLK_LPF
0.3×AVDD3
0.7×AVDD3
t
ILW_LPF
t
IHW_LPF
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 401
Mar 31, 2014
5. 3. 3. 5 High-pass filter characteristics
(40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = AVDD4 = DVDD = 5.0 V, HPFOF = 1)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN. TYP. MAX.
Current cons umpti on IccA 800 1800
μ
A
Input volt age VILHPF AGND4 +0.2 V
VIHHPF AVDD3 - 1.5 V
Output voltage VOLHPF IOL = –200
μ
A – AGND4 +0.22 AGND4 +0.25 V
VOHHPF IOH = 200
μ
A AVDD3 -1.55 AVDD3 -1.52 V
Cutoff frequenc y fc 1 fCLK_HPF = 2 kHz 8 Hz
fc2 fCLK_HPF = 200 kHz 800 Hz
CLK_HPF
low-level
input volt age
VILCLK_HPF
0.3 × AVDD3 V
CLK_HPF
high-level
input volt age
VIHCLK_HPF 0.7 × AVDD3 V
CLK_HPF
Input frequency
fCLK_HPF 2 200 kHz
CLK_HPF
Input low-lev el-width
Input high-l evel -width
tILW_HPF
tIHW_HPF
200 ns
Clock T iming
Clock Timing
CLK_HPF
0.3×AVDD3
0.7×AVDD3
tILW_HPF tIHW_HPF
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 402
Mar 31, 2014
5. 3. 3. 6 Temperature sensor characteristics
(40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = AVDD4 = DVDD = 5.0 V, TEMPOF = 1)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN. TYP. MAX.
Current cons umpti on Icc A 105 220
μ
A
Output voltage VO TA = 25°C – 1.67 V
Temperature sensitivity TSE –5.0 mV/°C
5. 3. 3. 7 Variable output voltage regulator characteristics
(-40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = AVDD4 = DVDD = 5.0 V, LDOOF = 1)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Current cons umpti on IccON Iout = 0 mA 150 320
μ
A
Output voltage
accuracy
V_Accu Iout = 0 mA -10 10 %
Load current
characteristics
Vout_load Iout = 0 to 5 mA 15 30 mV
Output current Io 15 mA
Dropout voltage Note Vd Iout = 15 mA 0.4 V
Power supply
rejection ratio
PSRR f = 1 k Hz, CL = 4.7 μF, Io = 5 mA,
AVDD2 = 5.0 V, LDOC = 0DH (3.3 V)
– 60 – dB
Discharge resist ance Rs LDOOF = 0 540 715 1200 Ω
Settling time Tset_rise CL = 4.7
μ
F, CBGR_OUT = 0.1
μ
F – 5.0 ms
Tset_fall CL = 4.7
μ
F, CBGR_OUT = 0.1
μ
F – 45 ms
Note The output voltage range is determined not only by dropout voltage but also by output voltage accuracy.
5. 3. 3. 8 Reference voltage generator characteristics
(40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = AVDD4 = DVDD = 5.0 V, LDOOF = 1)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN. TYP. MAX.
Output voltage VBGR – 1.21 – V
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 403
Mar 31, 2014
5. 3. 3. 9 SPI characteristics
(40°C TA 85°C, AVDD1 = AVDD2 = AVDD3 = AVDD4 = DVDD = 5.0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
MIN. TYP. MAX.
Input volt age, hi gh VIH CS pin, SDI pin, SCLK pin,
RESET pin
2.0 DVDD DVDD + 0.1 V
Input volt age, l ow VIL CS pin, SDI pin, SCLK pin,
RESET pin
–0.1 DGND 0.7 V
Leakage current during
high level input
Ileak_Hi1 CS pin, SDI pin, SCLK pin –1 2
μ
A
Ileak_Hi2 RESET pin –1 2
μ
A
Leakage current during
low level input Note
Ileak_Lo1 CS pin, SDI pin, SCLK pin 50 100 200
μ
A
Ileak_Lo2 RESET pin –1 2
μ
A
Low-level output vol tage
at SDO pin
VSDO_Lo IO = -5 mA 400 830 m V
Leakage current when
SDO pin is off
Ileak_SDO –1 2
μ
A
Pull-up resi stance RSPI CS pi n, SDI pin, SCLK pin 32.5 50 67.5 kΩ
SCLK cycle time tKCYA 100 ns
SCLK high-level width
low-level width
tKHA,
tKLA
0.9tKCYA/2 – – ns
SDI setup time
(to SCLK)
tSIKA 40 ns
SDI hold time
(from SCLK)
tKSIA 20 ns
Delay time from SCLK
to SDO output
tKSOAR P ul l -up resistance = 10 kΩ, CL = 5
pF, VSDO = 5 V
– 250 300 ns
tKSOAF Pul l -up resi stance = 10 kΩ, CL = 5
pF, VSDO = 5 V
– – 20 ns
CS high-level width tSHA 200 ns
Delay time from CSto
SCLK output
tSKA 200 – ns
Delay time from SCLK
to CS output
tKSA 200 – ns
Note Including the current flowing into each pull-up resistor
<R>
<R>
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 404
Mar 31, 2014
SPI transfer clock timing
SCLK
SDI
SDO
tKSOAR, tKSOAF
tKLA tKHA
tKSIAtSIKA
CS
tKCYA
tSHA
tSKA tKSA
Output
data
Input dataInput data
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 6 PACKAGE DRAWINGS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 405
Mar 31, 2014
CHAPTER 6 PACKAGE DRAWINGS
R5F10FLCANA, R5F10FLDANA, R5F10FLEANA, R5F10FLCDNA, R5F10FLDDNA, R5F10FLEDNA
S
y
e
Lp
SxbAB
M
A
D
E
48 32
33
16 17
1
64
A
S
B
A
S
D2
E2
49
64-PIN PLASTIC WQFN (9 x 9)
EXPOSED DIE PAD
2012 Renesas Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved.
RENESAS Code P reviou s Code M A SS (TYP.) [g]
P-HWQFN64-9x9-0.50 PWQN0064KD-A P64K8-50-6BA-1
(UNIT: mm)
ITEM
ITEM
EXPOSED
DIE PAD
VARIATIONS AMIN NOM MAX MIN NOM MAX
7.45 7.50 7.55 7.45 7.50 7.55
D2 E2
DIMENSIONS
0.21
D 9.00±0.05
E 9.00±0.05
A 0.75±0.05
Lp 0.40±0.10
b+0.05
–0.07
0.25
x0.50
y0.50
e0.50
c
DETAIL OF A PART
JEITA Package Code
RL78/G1E CHAPTER 6 PACKAGE DRAWINGS
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 406
Mar 31, 2014
R5F10FMCAFB, R5F10FMDAFB, R5F10FMEAFB, R5F10FMCDFB, R5F10F MDDFB, R5F10FMEDFB
S
y
e
Sxb
M
L
c
Lp
HD
HE
ZD
ZE
L1
A1
A2
A
D
E
A3
S
0.145 +0.055
0.045
(UNIT:mm)
ITEM DIMENSIONS
D
E
HD
HE
A
A1
A2
A3
12.00±0.20
12.00±0.20
14.00±0.20
14.00±0.20
1.60 MAX.
0.10±0.05
1.40±0.05
0.25
c
e
x
y
ZD
ZE
0.50
0.08
0.08
1.25
1.25
L
Lp
L1
0.50
0.60±0.15
1.00±0.20
3°+5°
3°
NOTE
Each lead centerline is located within 0.08 mm of
its true position at maximum material condition.
detail of lead end
80-PIN PLAST I C LQFP (FINE PITCH) (12 × 1 2)
0.22±0.05
b
20
40
1
80 21
41
6160
2012 Renesas Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved.
c
JEITA Package Code RENESAS Code Previous Code MASS (TYP.) [g]
P-LFQFP80-12x12-0.50 PLQP0080KE-B P80GK-50-GAK-2 0.53
RL78/G1E APPENDIX A CHARACTERISTICS CURVE (TA = 25°C, TYP.) (REFERENCE VALUE)
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 407
Mar 31, 2014
APPENDIX A CHARACTERISTICS CURVE (TA = 25°C, TYP.) (REFERENCE VALUE)
Configurable amplifier
G vs. f (Inverting amplifier) G vs. f (Non-inverting amplifier)
G vs. f (Differential amplifier) G vs. f (Instrumentation amplifier)
Voltage gain G (dB)Voltage gain G (dB)
Voltage gain G (dB)Voltage gain G (dB)
Frequency f (Hz)
Frequency f (Hz) Frequency f (Hz)
Frequency f (Hz)
100 1 k 10 k 100 k 1 M 10 M
10
20
30
40
50
100 1 k 10 k 100 k 1 M 10 M
10
20
30
40
50
100 1 k 10 k 100 k 1 M 10 M
10
20
30
40
50
20
40
60
100 1 k 10 k 100 k 1 M 10 M
50
30
10
AVDD = 5 V
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
AVDD = 5 V
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0 AVDD = 5 V
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
AVDD = 5 V
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
AVDD = 5 V
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
AVDD = 5 V
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
AVDD = 5 V
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
AVDD = 5 V
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
RL78/G1E APPENDIX A CHARACTERISTICS CURVE (TA = 25°C, TYP.) (REFERENCE VALUE)
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 408
Mar 31, 2014
0 80 160 240 320
2.3
2.5
2.7
0
1
2
3
4
2.3
2.5
2.7
0
1
2
3
4
020406080
Time t ( s)
Output response (Inverting amplifier) Output response (Inverting amplifier)
Output response (Non-inverting amplifier) Output response (Non-inverting amplifier)
Time t ( s)
Time t ( s) Time t ( s)
020406080
2.3
2.5
0
1
Output voltage VO (V)
Input voltage VI (V)
Output voltage VO (V)
Input voltage VI (V)
Output voltage VO (V)
Input voltage VI (V) Output voltage VO (V)
Input voltage VI (V)
2
3
4
2.7
2.3
2.5
2.7
0
1
2
3
4
0 80 160 240 320
AV
DD
= 5 V,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
AV
DD
= 5 V,
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
AV
DD
= 5 V,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0 AV
DD
= 5 V,
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
RL78/G1E APPENDIX A CHARACTERISTICS CURVE (TA = 25°C, TYP.) (REFERENCE VALUE)
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 409
Mar 31, 2014
2.3
2.7
0
4
2
2.5
0 20 40 60 80
2.3
2.7
0
4
2
2.5
0 80 160 240
0 80 160 240 320
2.3
2.5
2.7
0
1
2
3
4
2.3
2.5
2.7
0
1
2
3
4
0 20 40 60 80
AV
DD
= 5 V,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
AV
DD
= 5 V,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
AV
DD
= 5 V,
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
AV
DD
= 5 V,
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
Output voltage Vo (V)Input voltage V
I
(V)
Output voltage Vo (V)Input voltage V
I
(V)
Output voltage Vo (V)Input voltage V
I
(V)
Output voltage Vo (V)Input voltage V
I
(V)
Output response (Differential amplifier) Output response (Differential amplifier)
Output response (Instrumentation amplifier) Output response (Instrumentation amplifier)
Time t ( s) Time t ( s)
Time t ( s) Time t ( s)
RL78/G1E APPENDIX A CHARACTERISTICS CURVE (TA = 25°C, TYP.) (REFERENCE VALUE)
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 410
Mar 31, 2014
CMRR (Instrumentation amplifier) CMRR (Instrumentation amplifier)
100 10 k 100 k 1 M
Frequency f (Hz) Frequency f (Hz)
Frequency f (Hz) Frequency f (Hz)
CMRR (Differential amplifier)
0
-20
-40
-60
-80
-100
CMRR (dB)CMRR (dB)
CMRR (dB)CMRR (dB)
CMRR (Differential amplifier)
100 10 k 100 k 1 M
0
-20
-40
-60
-80
-100
100 10 k 100 k 1 M
0
-20
-40
-60
-80
-100
-120 10 M 100 10 k 100 k 1 M
0
-20
-40
-60
-80
-100
-120 10 M
AV
DD
= 5 V,
GCn = 11 H 40 dB,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
AV
DD
= 5 V,
GCn = 11 H 40 dB,
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
AV
DD
= 5 V,
GC3 = 11 H 54 dB,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
AV
DD
= 5 V,
GC3 = 11 H 54 dB,
CC1, CC0 = 1, 1
1 k 1 k
1 k 1 k
RL78/G1E APPENDIX A CHARACTERISTICS CURVE (TA = 25°C, TYP.) (REFERENCE VALUE)
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 411
Mar 31, 2014
1000
Frequency f (Hz) Frequency f (Hz)
Frequency f (Hz) Frequency f (Hz)
10 100 1 k 10 k 100 k 1 M
100
10
300
30
1000
10 100 1 k 10 k
1 k 10 k
100 k 1 M
100
10
300
30
1000
10 100 1 k 10 k 100 k 1 M
100
10
300
30
1000
10 100 100 k 1 M
100
10
300
30
En vs. f (Inverting amplifier) En vs. f (Non-inverting amplifier)
En vs. f (Differential amplifier) En vs. f (Instrumentation amplifier)
AV
DD
= 5 V,
GCn = 11 H 40 dB,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
AV
DD
= 5 V,
GCn = 11 H 40 dB,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
AV
DD
= 5 V,
GCn = 11 H 40 dB,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
AV
DD
= 5 V,
GC3 = 11 H 54 dB,
CC1, CC0 = 0, 0
RL78/G1E APPENDIX A CHARACTERISTICS CURVE (TA = 25°C, TYP.) (REFERENCE VALUE)
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 412
Mar 31, 2014
Low-pass filter and high-pass filter
1 10 100 10 k 100 k
0
10
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
1 10 100 10 k
0
10
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
100 k
-60 -60
AV
DD
= 5 V,
f
CLK_LPF
= 2 kHz AV
DD
= 5 V,
f
CLK_LPF
=
200 kHz
AV
DD
= 5 V,
f
CLK_HPF
= 2 kHz AV
DD
= 5 V,
f
CLK_HPF
= 200 kHz
Voltage gain G (dB)
Voltage gain G (dB)
Frequency f (Hz) Frequency f (Hz)
G vs. fG vs. f
1 k 1 k
Temperature sensor
-50 -25 250 50 75 100 125
2.2
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.0
Output voltage VTEMP_OUT (V)
Temperature TA (°C)
VTEMP_OUT vs. TA
AV
DD
= 5 V
RL78/G1E APPENDIX A CHARACTERISTICS CURVE (TA = 25°C, TYP.) (REFERENCE VALUE)
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 413
Mar 31, 2014
Variable output voltage regulator
Output voltage vs. Load current
5.0 10.0 15.0
1.970
0.0
1.980
1.990
2.000
2.010
2.020
Output voltage vs. Load current
5.0 10.0 15.0
3.270
0.0
3.280
3.290
3.300
3.310
3.320
VOUT (V)VOUT (V)
IOUT (mA)
IOUT (mA)
AV
DD
=5V,
LDOC = 00H (2.0 V)
AV
DD
=5V,
LDOC = 0DH (3.3 V)
RL78/G1E APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 414
Mar 31, 2014
APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY
B. 1 Major Revisions in This Edition (1/4)
Page Description Classification
R01UH0353EJ0100 R01UH0353EJ0200
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
p.1 Modification of 1. 1 Features (c)
p.4 Deletion of Note for m 1. 2 List of Part Numbers (c)
p.5-14 Modification of SCK00, SCK10, SCK20, SCK21 in 1. 3 Pin Configuration (Top View), in 1. 4 Pin
Identification and 1. 5 Block Diagram
(a)
p.15-17 Modification of 1. 6 Outline of Functions (c)
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
p.18-21 Modific ation of the alternative function and Remark in 2. 1 Pin Functions in Microcont ro ller Block
(1) (2)
(c)
p.23, 24 Modification of the table structure, Caution and Remark in 2. 1. 1. 1 64-pin products (c)
p.25, 26 Modification of the table structure, Caution and Remark in 2. 1. 1. 2 80-pin products (c)
p.28 Modificat i on of the function name and Remark in 2. 1. 2. 1 Functions available for each product (c)
p.30, 31 Modification of the function name, Caution and Remark in 2. 1. 2. 2 Description of each function (c)
p.32 Modification of the description in 2. 2 Pin Functions in Analog Block (c)
p.32 Modification of the table structure in 2. 2. 1 64-pin products (c)
p.33 Modification of the table structure in 2. 2. 2 80-pin products (c)
p.34, 35 Modification of Table 2-3. Connections of Unused Pins (c)
p.36-46 Modification of 2. 4 Block Diagram of Pins (c)
p.50 Modification of 2. 5. 2 Port 1 (P10 to P15) (a)
p.54 Modification of 2. 5. 6 Port 7 (P70 to P73) (a)
CHAPTER 3 MICROCONTROLLER BLOCK
p.77 Change of the register name of OSMC to “Subsystem clock supply mode control register” i n Table 3-3. (c)
p.83 Change of the register name of OSMC to “Subsystem clock supply mode control register” i n Table 3-4. (c)
p.90 Modification of the descriptions in 3. 4. 2. 1 Port 0 (c)
p.90 Modification of the descriptions in 3. 4. 2. 2 Port 1 (c)
p.91 Modification of the descriptions in 3. 4. 2. 5 Port 4 (c)
p.91 Modification of the descriptions in 3. 4. 2. 6 Port 5 (c)
p.91 Modification of the descriptions in 3. 4. 2. 8 Port 7 (c)
p.93, 94 Addition of 3. 4. 3 Registers controlling port function (c)
p.93, 94 Modification of Caution and Remark in 3. 4. 3 Registers controlling port function (c)
p.95 Modification of 3. 4. 3. 1 Port mode register (PM xx) (c)
p.96 Modification of 3. 4. 3. 2 Port register (Pxx) (c)
p.97 Modification of 3. 4. 3. 3 Pull-up resistor option register (PUxx) (c)
Remark “Classification” in the above table classifies revisions as follows.
(a): Error correction, (b): Addition/change of specifications, (c): Addition/change of description or note,
(d): Addition/change of package, part number, or management division, (e): Addition/change of related
documents
RL78/G1E APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 415
Mar 31, 2014
(2/4)
Page Description Classification
p.97 Modification of 3. 4. 3. 4 Port input mode register (PIM xx) (c)
p.98 Modification of 3. 4. 3. 5 Port output mode register (POM xx) (c)
p.98 Modification of 3. 4. 3. 6 Port mode control register (PM Cxx) (c)
p.101 Addition of Remark in 3. 4. 3. 8 Peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR) (c)
p.102 Addition of 3. 4. 4. 4 Handling different potential (1.8 V,2.5 V or 3 V) by using EVDD VDD (c)
p.103, 104 Modification of 3. 4. 4. 5 Handling different potential (1.8 V,2.5 V or 3 V) by using I/O buffers (c)
p.105 Modification of 3. 4. 5 Register settings when using alternate function (c)
p.106, 107 Modification of 3. 5. 1 Functions of clock generator (c)
p.108 Modification of Table 3-6. Configuration of Clock Generator (c)
p.109 Modification of Figure 3-1. Block Diagram of Clock Generator (c)
p.111 Modification of 3. 5. 3. 1 Clock operation mode control register (CMC) (c)
p.116 Modification of 3. 5. 3. 7 Subsystem clock supply mode control register (OSMC) (c)
p.118-121 Modification of 3. 5. 7 Resonator and oscillator constants (c)
p.126 Modification of 3. 6. 1. 2 <1> One-shot pulse output (c)
p.134 Modification of 3. 6. 3. 1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) (c)
p.135-139 Modification of 3. 6. 3. 3 Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) (c)
p.144 Modification of 3. 6. 3. 15 Registers controlling port functions of pins to be used for timer I/O (c)
p.147 Modification of 3. 8. 2 Configuration of 12-bit interval timer (a)
p.148 Modification of 3. 8. 3. 2 Subsystem clock supply mode control register (OSMC) (c)
p.153 Modification of 3. 9. 3. 2 Registers controlling port functions of pins used for clock or buzzer
output
(c)
p.155, 156 Modification of 3. 11. 1 Function of A/D converter (c)
p.157 Modification of Figure 3-8. Block Diagram of A/D converter (c)
p.160 Modification of 3. 11. 3. 1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) (c)
p.161 Modification of 3. 11. 3. 3 A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1) (c)
p.167 Modification of 3. 11. 3. 11 Registers controlling port function of analog input pins (c)
p.173 Modification of Table 3-12. Configuration of Serial Array Unit (c)
p.175 Modification of Figure 3-9. Block Diagram of Serial Array Unit 0 (a)
p.176 Modification of Figure 3-10. Block Diagram of Serial Arr ay Unit 1 (c)
p.177 Modification of 3. 12. 2. 1 Shift register (c)
p.177, 178 Modification of 3. 12. 2. 2 Lower 8/9 bits of the serial data register mn (SDRmn) (c)
p.179 Modification of 3. 12. 3. 1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) (c)
p.180, 181 Modification of 3. 12. 3. 3 Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) (c)
p.182-184 Modification of 3. 12. 3. 4 Serial communicatio n operation setting register mn (SCRmn) (c)
p.188 Modification of 3. 12. 3. 17 Registers controlling port functions of serial input/output pins (c)
p.194-196 Modification of Table 3-13. Interrupt Source List (c)
p.200, 202 Modification of Table 3-14. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources (a)
Remark “Classification” in the above table classifies revisions as follows.
(a): Error correction, (b): Addition/change of specifications, (c): Addition/change of description or note,
(d): Addition/change of package, part number, or management division, (e): Addition/change of related
documents
RL78/G1E APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 416
Mar 31, 2014
(3/4)
Page Description Classification
p.215 Modification of Table 3-17. Configuration of Key Interrupt (c)
p.216 Modification of Figure 3-14. Block Diagram of Key Interrupt (c)
p.217 Modif i cation Addition of 3. 17. 3. 2 Key return mode registers 0 (KRM0) (c)
p.223, 224 Modification of 3. 21. 1 Functions of voltage detector (c)
p.224 Modification of Figure 3-15. Block Diagram of Voltage Detector (c)
p.226, 227 Modification of Format of User Option Byte (000C1H/010C1H) (1/2) (2/ 2) (c)
p.229 Modification of 3. 22. 1 Overview of safety functions (c)
p.233, 234 Modification of 3. 24. 1. 1 User option byte (000C0H to 000C2H/010C0H to 010C2H) (c)
p.235-237 Modification of 3. 24. 2 Format of user option byte (c)
p.239 Modification of 3. 25. 1 Serial Programming Using Flash Memory Programmer (c)
p.240 Modification of Table 3-18. Wiring Between RL78/G1E and Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer (c)
p.241 Modification of 3. 25. 2 Serial programming using external device (that Incorporates UART) (c)
p.241 Modification of 3. 25. 4 Serial programmi ng method (c)
p.241 Modification of 3. 25. 5 Processing time for each command when PG-FP5 Is in use (Reference
value)
(c)
p.241 Modification of 3. 25. 6 Self-programming (c)
p.241 Modification of 3. 25. 7 Security Settings (c)
p.241 Modification of 3. 25. 8 Data flash (c)
p.242 Modification of Figure 3-16. Connection Exam ple of E1 On-chip Debugging Emulator and
RL78/G1E
(c)
CHAPTER 4 ANALOG BLOCK
p.256 Addition of Remark to 4. 1. 3 (5) Gain control register 1 (GC1) (c)
p.259 Addition of Remark to 4. 1. 3 (6) Gain control register 2 (GC2) (c)
p.262 Addition of Remark to 4. 1. 3 (7) Gain control register 3 (GC3) (c)
p.266 Addition of Remark to 4. 1. 3 (8) AMP operation mode control register (AOMC) (c)
p.282 Modification of 4. 2. 1 Overview of gain adjustment amplifier features (c)
p.284, 285 Modification of 4. 2. 3 Registers controlling the gain adjustment amplifier (c)
p.288 Modification of 4. 3. 1 Overview of D/A converter features (c)
p.289 Modification of 4. 3. 3 Registers controlling the D/A converters (c)
p.289 Modification of 4. 3. 3 (1) DAC reference voltage control register (DACRC) (c)
p.293 Modification of 4. 4. 1 Overview of low-pass filter features (c)
p.295, 296 Modification of 4. 4. 3 Registers controlling the low-pass filter (c)
p.298 Modification of 4. 5. 1 Overview of low-pass filter features (c)
p.300 Modification of 4. 5. 3 Registers controlling the high-pass filter (c)
p.307 Addition of Remark to 4. 7. 3 (1) LDO control register (LDOC) (c)
p.308 Addition of Remark to 4. 7. 3 (2) Pow er control register 2 (PC2) (c)
p.314 Modification of Note in Table 4-11. SPI Control Registers (c)
Remark “Classification” in the above table classifies revisions as follows.
(a): Error correction, (b): Addition/change of specifications, (c): Addition/change of description or note,
(d): Addition/change of package, part number, or management division, (e): Addition/change of related
documents
RL78/G1E APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 417
Mar 31, 2014
(4/4)
Page Description Classification
p.315 Modification of Caution in 4. 10. 1 Overview of analog reset feature (c)
p.316 Modification of Note in Table 4-13. S tatuses of SPI Control Registers after Analog Reset Is
Acknowledged
(c)
p.317 Modification of Table 4-14. Pin Statuses after Analog Reset (c)
p.318 Modification of 4. 10. 2 Registers controlling the analog reset (c)
CHAPTER 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
p.323 Modification of 5. 1. 3 Absolute maximum ratings (common to microcontroller block and analog
block)
(c)
p.324 Modification of 5. 2. 1. 1 X1 oscillator characteristics (c)
p.325 Modification of 5. 2. 1. 2 On-chip oscillator characteristics (c)
p.335, 336 Modification of 5. 2. 2. 2 Supply current characteristics (c)
p.337 Modification of 5. 2. 3 AC characteristics (a)
p.338-340 Modificati on of two figures about Minimum Instructi on Execution Time during Main System Clock
Operation and AC Timi n g Test Poi nt s
(c)
p.342 Addition of AC Timing Tes t Points to 5. 2. 4 Peripheral functions characteristics (c)
p.342 Modification of 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (1) (c)
p.344 Modification of 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (2) (c)
p.345 Modification of 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (3) (c)
p.347, 348 Modification of 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (4) (c)
p.350, 351 Modification of 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (5) (c)
p.353, 355 Modification of 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (6) (c)
p.358, 359 Modification of 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (7) (c)
p.360, 362 Modification of 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (8) (c)
p.365, 366 Modification of 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (9) (c)
p.369, 370 Modification of 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (10) (c)
p.372-377 Modification of 5. 2. 5. 1 A/D converter characteristics (c)
p.379 Correction of the Caution in 5. 2. 5. 4 LVD circuit characteristics (a)
p.381 Modification of 5. 2. 6 Data memory STOP mode low suppl y voltage data retention characteristics (c)
p.382 Addition of 5. 2. 8 Dedicated flash memory programmer communication (UART) (c)
p.383 Modification of 5. 2. 9 Timing specs for switching flash memory programming modes (c)
p.384 Change of t he title to 5. 3. 1 “Operating conditions of analog block” (c)
p.392, 395,
396
Modificat i on of 5. 3. 3. 1 Configurable amplifier characteristics (c)
p.399 Modification of 5. 3. 3. 3 D/A converter characteristics (c)
p.400 Modification of 5. 3. 3. 4 Low-pass filter characteristics (c)
p.401 Modification of 5. 3. 3. 5 High-pass filter characteristics (c)
p.403 Modification of 5. 3. 3. 9 SPI characteristics (c)
Remark “Classification” in the above table classifies revisions as follows.
(a): Error correction, (b): Addition/change of specifications, (c): Addition/change of description or note,
(d): Addition/change of package, part number, or management division, (e): Addition/change of related
documents
RL78/G1E APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 418
Mar 31, 2014
B. 2 Revision History of Preceding Editions
Here is the revision history of the preceding editions. Chapter indicates the chapter of each edition.
(1/6)
Edition Description Chapter
Rev.1.00 The struct ure of CHAPTERS and Sessions are drastically changed. W hole pages
Modification of 1. 1 Features CHAPTER 1
OUTLINE
Addition of Packagi ng, m odification of Part Numbers and addition of Cautions in 1. 2 List of
Part Numbers
Modificat i on of Note 7. for 64-pin products in 1. 3 Pin Configuration
Modificat i on of Note 6. for 80-pin products in 1. 3 Pin Configuration
Additi on of Items and Notes in 1. 6 Outline of Functions
Error correct i on of t h e descrip tions i n 1. 6 Outline of Functions
Modificat i on of the tables for Comparison of port functions with RL78/G1A in 2. 1 Pin
Functions in Microcontroller Block
CHAPTER 2
PIN FUNCTIONS
Error correct i on of t h e descrip tions i n 2. 1. 1 Port functions
Addition of the descri ptions in 2. 1. 2 Functions other than port Functions
Error correct i on of t h e descrip tions i n 2. 2 Pin Functions in Analog Block
Addition of Notes about the pin of ARESET in 2. 3 Recommended Connection of Unused
Pins
Addition of the descriptions f or the pin of RESET and the pin of ARESET in 2. 5 Instruction
of Pin Functions
Addition of the items listed on the tables in 3. 2 Comparison of Each Function with
RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
CHAPTER 3
MICROCONTROLLER
BLOCK
Error correct i on of t he descri pti ons on t he tabl es i n 3. 2 Comparison of Each Function
with RL78/G1A (64-pin products)
Modificat i on of the tables for List of Differences in Special Function Registers (SFRs) in
3. 3. 2. 4 Special function registers (SFRs)
Modificat i on of the tables for List of Differences in Expanded Special Function Registers
(2nd SFRs) in 3. 3. 2. 5 Expanded special function registers (2nd SFRs)
Addition of the descri ptions f or each port in 3. 4. 2 Port configuration
Error correct i on of t he descri pti ons f o r each port in 3. 4. 2 Port configuration
Addition of registers listed in 3. 4. 3 Registers controlling port functions
Modification of the frequency for oscillation about the function of high-speed on-chip
oscillator and addition of the table about the frequency for oscillation in 3. 5. 1 Functions of
clock generator
Addition of the regist ers l isted i n 3. 5. 3 Registers controlling clock generator
Error correct i on of t he descri pti ons about a crystal resonator in 3. 5. 7 Resonator and
oscillator constants
Addition of “Port mode control register” to Table 3-8.
Modificat i on of the figures f or Block Diagram on Figure 3-4. and Figure 3-5. in 3. 6. 2
Configuration of timer array unit
Addition of the regist ers l isted i n 3. 6. 3 Registers controlling timer array unit
Addition of the regist ers l isted i n 3. 8. 3 Registers controlling 12-bit interval timer
RL78/G1E APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 419
Mar 31, 2014
(2/6)
Edition Description Chapter
Rev.1.00 Addit i on of the regist ers l isted i n 3. 9. 3 Registers controlling clock output/buzzer output
controller
CHAPTER 3
MICROCONTROLLER
BLOCK
Addition of the regist ers l isted i n 3. 11. 3 Registers used in A/D converters
Addition and Modificat i on of Cautions in 3. 11. 3. 7 Analog input channel specification
register (ADS)
Addition of the regist ers l isted i n 3. 12. 3 Registers controlling serial arra y unit
Error correct i on of t he number of maskabl e i nterrupt s (i nternal) in 3. 16 Interrupt Functions
Addition of the regist ers l isted i n 3. 16. 3 Registers controlling interrupt functions
Error correct i on of t he number of key interrupt i nput channels for 64-pin products in 3. 17
Key Interrupt Function
Addition of the regist ers l isted i n 3. 17. 3 Registers controlling key interrupt
Addition of Caution in 3. 17. 3. 2 Key return mode registers 0 (KRM0)
Error correct i on of t h e descrip tions i n 3. 21. Voltage Detector
Addition of the regist ers l isted i n 3. 21. 3 Registers controlling voltage detector
Error correct i on of t he descri ptions about user option byte (000C1H/010C1H) in 3. 21. 3
Registers controlling voltage detector
Addition of the regist ers l isted i n 3. 22. 3 Operation of safety functions
Error correct i on of t he descri ptions about user option byte (000C1H/010C1H) in 3. 24. 2
Format of user option byte
Addition of 3. 25 Flash Memory
Addition of 3. 26. 1 Connecting E1 on-chip debugging emulator to RL78/G1E
Addition of the descri ptions about the referenc e vol tage in 4. 1. 1 Overview of configurable
amplifier features
CHAPTER 4
ANALOG BLOCK
Modificat i on of the regist ers list ed in 4. 1. 3 Registers controlling the configurable
amplifiers
Addition of the descri ptions about the referenc e vol tage in 4. 2. 1 Overview of gain
adjustment amplifier features
Modificat i on of the regist ers list ed in 4. 2. 3 Registers controlling the gain adjustment
amplifier
Modificat i on of the equation for calculati on of analog output volt age in 4. 3. 1 Overview of
D/A converter features
Addition of the descri ptions about the referenc e vol tage in 4. 4. 1 Overview of low-pass
filter features
Modificat i on of the regist ers list ed in 4. 4. 3 Registers controlling the low-pass filter
Addition of the descri ptions about the referenc e vol tage in 4. 5. 1 Overview of high-pass
filter features
Modificat i on of the regist ers list ed in 4. 5. 3 Registers controlling the high-pass filter
Modificat ion of the description in 4. 8. 3 Registers controlling the reference voltage
generator
Modificat i on of Caution in 4. 9. 1 Overview of SPI features
Addition of Note to Table 4-11.
RL78/G1E APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 420
Mar 31, 2014
(3/6)
Edition Description Chapter
Rev.1.00 Addition and Modification of the descriptions in 4. 10. 1 Overview of analog reset feature CHAPTER 4
ANALOG BLOCK
Modification of the description and Note on Table 4-13.
Modification of the description and Note, and addition of Caution in 4. 10. 2 (1) Reset control
register (RC)
Erase the description of “(t arget)” CHAPTER 5
ELECTRICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Modificat i on of the descript i on and additi on of Remark 3 in 5. 1. 1 Absolute Maximum
Ratings
Addition of “5. 1. 3 Absolute maximum ratings (common to microcontroller block and
analog block)
Modificat i on of the descript i on and Note in 5. 2. 1. 1 X1 oscillator characteristics
Modificat i on of Note 3 in 5. 2. 2. 1 Pin characteristics
Addition of the specif ications for P70 to P73 in terms of output current/voltage high and
output current/ vol t age low in 5. 2. 2. 1 Pin characteristics
Modificat i on of the descript i on and Notes in 5. 2. 2. 2 Supply current characteristics
Change of the specific ation of the typical value f or IDD3 (T A=+50°C) in 5. 2. 2. 2 Supply
current characteristics
Addition of operation current flowing to l ow-speed on-c hi p oscillat or (fIL) in 5. 2. 2. 2 Supply
current characteristics
Addition of the descri ptions and modific ation of Remark in 5. 2. 3 AC characteristics
Modification of the description in 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (1)
Modification of the description in 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (2)
Modification of the description in 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (3)
Modification of the description in 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (4)
Modification of the description in 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (5)
Modification of the description in 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (6)
Modification of the description in 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (7)
Modification of the description in 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (8)
Modification of the description in 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (9)
Modification of the description in 5. 2. 4. 1 Serial array unit (10)
Addition of “Internal referenc e vol tage” and “Tem perature sensor output voltage” to the input
channel in 5. 2. 5. 1 A/D converter characteri sti cs
Change of the symbol for the internal reference voltage i n 5. 2. 5. 2 Temperature sensor,
internal reference voltage output characteristics
Addition of Note in 5. 2. 5. 3 POR circuit characteristics
Error correct i on of t he descri pti on in 5. 2. 5. 4 LVD circuit characteristics
Change of the specific ation for t he slope in 5. 2. 5. 5 Supply voltage rise slope
characteristics
Change of the specific ation for t he data ret ention suppl y vol tage in 5. 2. 6 Da ta memory
STOP mode low supply voltage data retention characteristics
Addition of Notes in 5. 2. 7 Flash memory programming characteristics
RL78/G1E APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 421
Mar 31, 2014
(4/6)
Edition Description Chapter
Rev.1.00 Modification of the description in 5. 2. 8 Timing specs for switching flash memory
programming modes
CHAPTER 5
ELECTRICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Addition of the specification depending on the products in 5. 3. 3. 2 Gain adjustment
amplifier characteristics
Addition of the specification for “CLK_SYNCH input voltage” in 5. 3. 3. 2 Gain adjustment
amplifier characteristics (2) 80-pin products
Error correct i on of t he descri ption and addition of the specification for “CLK_SYNCH input
voltage” in 5. 3. 3. 4 Low-pass filter characteristics
Error correct i on of t he descri ption and addition of the specification for “CLK_SYNCH input
voltage” in 5. 3. 3. 5 High-pass filter characteristics
Rev.0.04 Change of the name for CS from “Slave Select” to “Chip Select” Whole pages
Deletion of the word “interface” from the name of SPI
Error correct i on of t he fi gures i n 1. 4 Pin Configuration (Top View) CHAPTER 1
OUTLINE
Error correct i on of t he descri ption (delet i on of “S CLA 0”, “S CLA1”) in 1. 4. 3 Pin
identifi cation (Microcontroller Block)
Error correct i on of t he fi gures i n 1. 5 Block Diagram
Error correct i on of t he functi on names and modification of the description for the function in
2. 2 Pin Functions in Analog Block
CHAPTER 2
PIN FUNCTIONS
Error correct i on of t he descri ption for t he pin of ANI30 (D/A converter -> A/D converter) in 2.
3. 4 P40 to P42 (port 4)
Modification of the description in 2. 3. 43 I.C
Additi on of “Remarks” on the t abl es in 3. 1 Differences in Functions between RL78/G1E
and RL78/G1A
CHAPTER 3
MICROCONTROLLER
FUNCTION
Modificat i on of the descript i on on the tables (deletion of the same regis t ers as RL78/ G1A) in
3. 2 Differences in (Expanded) Special -Function Registers between RL78/G1E and
RL78/G1A
Modificat i on of the descript i on and change of the sequence flow of the setti ng procedure (2)
in 3. 3. 3 Connecting to an external device with different potential (1.8 V, 2.5 V, 3 V)
Addition of 3. 4. 4 Resonator and Oscillator Constants
Error correct i on of t he descri ption on Table 3-14.
Addition of 3. 13 Safety Functions
Modificat i on of the gain setting of non-inverting ampl i f i er in 5. 1 Overv iew of C onfig urable
Amplifier Features and in 5. 3 Registers Controlling the Configurable Amplifiers
CHAPTER 5
CONFIGURA B LE
AMPLIFIERS
Modification of the description in 8. 1 Overview of Low-Pass Filter Features CHAPTER 8
LOW-PASS FILTER
Modification of the description in 9. 1 Overview of High-Pass Filter Features CH APTER 8
HIGH-PASS FILTER
Addition of Note in 11. 3 Registers Controlling the Variable Output Voltage Regulator CHAPTER 11
VARIABLE OUTPUT
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
RL78/G1E APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 422
Mar 31, 2014
(5/6)
Edition Description Chapter
Rev.0.04 Change of the specification for the typical value of Im124 in 15. 3. 2 Suppl y current
characteristics
CHAPTER 15
ELECTRICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(TARGET)
Addition of the table which describes the operation state of the circuit in 15. 3. 2 Supply
current characteristics
Error correction of the description and change of the specification in 15. 3. 3 Electrical
specifications of each block
Modificat i on of the descript i on for the current consumpt i on and addition of the Notes in 15.
3. 3 Electrical specifications of each block (3) D/A converter
Addition of the definition for “CLK_LPF” in 15. 3. 3 Electrical specifications of each block
(4) Low-pass filter
Addition of the definition for “CLK_HPF” in 15. 3. 3 Electrical specifications of each block
(5) High-pass filter
Error correct i on of t he descripti on and additi on of Note for the dropout voltage in 15. 3. 3
Electrical specifications of each block (7) Variable output voltage regulator
Error correct i on of t he descri pti on in 15. 3. 3 Electrical specifications of each block (9)
SPI
Rev.0.03 Change of Block Diagram in 1. 5. 2 RL78/G1E (80-pin) CHAPTER 1 O UTLI N E
Change of Table 3-12. Analog Input Channels of A/D Convert er CHAPTER 15
ELECTRICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(TARGET)
Change of ratings in 15. 1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Change of 15. 2. 1 (1) X1 oscillator characteristics
Change of conditions and ratings in 15. 2. 2 (2) Supply current characteristics
Addition of SNOOZE operating current to 15. 2. 2 (3) Supply current characteristics of
peripheral functions
Addition of diagrams (AC Timing Test Points to RESET Input Timing) to 15. 2. 3 AC
characteristics
Detection of Remarks 4 in Simplified I2C connection diagram (during communicat i on
between devices with t he different voltages)
Additi on of Divis i on of A/ D Converter Charac teristics in 15. 2. 5. 1 A/D converter
characteristics
Change of ratings in 15. 2. 5. 2 Temperature sensor characteristics
Change of ratings in 15. 2. 5. 3 POR circuit characteristics
Change of conditions and ratings in 15. 3. 2 Supply current characteristics
Change of conditions in 15. 3. 3 (4) Variable output voltage regulator
Change of conditions in 15. 3. 3 (9) SPI interface
Rev.0.02 Change of condi t i ons and ratings in 15. 2. 2 (2) Supply current characteristics CHAPTER 15
ELECTRICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(TARGET)
Change of ratings in 15. 2. 4. 1 (7) Communication between devices with different
voltages
Change of ratings in 15. 2. 5. (1) A/D converter characteristics
RL78/G1E APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY
R01UH0353EJ0200 Rev.2.00 423
Mar 31, 2014
(6/6)
Edition Description Chapter
Rev.0.02 Addition of new conditions (Retained for 20 years) to 15. 2. 10 Flash memory
programming characteristics
CHAPTER 15
ELECTRICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(TARGET)
Change of condition and ratings in 15. 3. 2 Supply Current characteristics
Change of conditions and ratings and addition of settling time in 15. 3. 3 (1) Configurable
amplifier block characteristics
Change of conditions and ratings in 15. 3. 3 (2) Gain Adjustment amplifier
Change of conditions and ratings in 15. 3. 3 (3) D/A converter
Change of conditions and ratings in 15. 3. 3 (4) Low-pass filter
Change of conditions and ratings in 15. 3. 3 (5) Temperature sensor
Change of conditions and ratings in 15. 3. 3 (7) Variable output voltage regulator
Change of conditions and ratings in 15. 3. 3 (9) SPI interface
RL78/G1E User’s Manual: Hardware
Publication Date: Rev.2. 00 Mar. 31, 2014
Published by: Renesas Electronics Corporation
http://www.renesas.com
12F., 234 Teheran-ro, Gangnam-Gu, Seoul, 135-080, Korea
Tel: +82-2-558-3737, Fax: +82-2-558-5141
Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No. 18, Jln Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Tel: +60-3-7955-9390, Fax: +60-3-7955-9510
80 Bendemeer Road, Unit #06-02 Hyflux Innovation Centre Singapore 339949
Tel: +65-6213-0200, Fax: +65-6213-0300
13F, No. 363, Fu Shing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: +886-2-8175-9600, Fax: +886 2-8175-9670
Unit 1601-1613, 16/F., Tower 2, Grand Century Place, 193 Prince Edward Road West, Mongkok, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: +852-2886-9318, Fax: +852 2886-9022/9044
Unit 301, Tower A, Central Towers, 555 LanGao Rd., Putuo District, Shanghai, China
Tel: +86-21-2226-0888, Fax: +86-21-2226-0999
7th Floor, Quantum Plaza, No.27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District, Beijing 100083, P.R.China
Tel: +86-10-8235-1155, Fax: +86-10-8235-7679
Arcadiastrasse 10, 40472 D
Tel: +49-211-65030, Fax: +49-211-6503-1327
üsseldorf, Germany
Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K
Tel: +44-1628-651-700, Fax: +44-1628-651-804
Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/" for the latest and detailed information.
Renesas Electronics Europe Limited
Renesas Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.
Renesas Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH
Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd.
Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited
Renesas Electronics Korea Co., Ltd.
Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn.Bhd.
SALES OFFICES
© 2014 Renesas Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved.
Colophon 2.0
4590 Patrick Henry Drive, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A.
Tel: +1-408-919-2500, Fax: +1-408-988-0279
California Eastern Laboratories, Inc.
RL78/G1E
R01UH0353EJ0200